{"1": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3460", "width": "2072", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0001.jp2"}, "2": {"fulltext": "Book ,JQ 8, *7", "height": "3316", "width": "1939", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0002.jp2"}, "3": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3316", "width": "1939", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0003.jp2"}, "4": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3316", "width": "1939", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0004.jp2"}, "5": {"fulltext": "1*\\nTHE\\nPRINCIPLES\\nOF\\nGREEK GRAMMAR;\\nCOMPRISING THE SUBSTANCE OF THE MOST APPROVED\\nGREEK GRAMMARS EXTANT.\\nFOE THE\\nUSB OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES.\\nBT REV. PETER BULLIONS, D. D.,\\nlate pbofessob of languages in the albany academy authob op tl\\nof geammaes, geeek, latin, and english, on the same\\nplan; a gbeek beader, etc. etc.\\nTHXBTY-SIXTH EDITION, EEVI8ED AND IMPEOVED.\\nNEW YORK:\\nPRATT, OAKLEY COMPANY,\\nNO. 4 CORTLANDT STREET.\\n1858.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0005.jp2"}, "6": {"fulltext": "#r\\\\\\n,r\\nEntebbe\u00c2\u00bb, according to Act of Congress, in the year one thousand cignt hundred and\\nfifty-three, by Petek Bullions, in the Clerk s office of the District Court\\nof the United States for the Northern District of New- York.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0006.jp2"}, "7": {"fulltext": "PREFACE.\\nThis work lias now been so long before the public-, and is so\\nwell known, that a detailed account of it is unnecessary. It is\\nsufficient to say, that the object intended to be accomplished was,\\nto provide a comprehensive manual of Greek Grammar, adapted\\nto the use of younger as well as of more advanced students in\\nour schools and colleges.\\nTime and experience have only strengthened the conviction,\\nlong entertained, that no system of Grammar will answer a good\\npurpose, for those who pursue this study at an early age, which\\ndoes not present the leading facts and principles in such a way\\nas to be easihj committed to memory, and so to be always ready\\nfor immediate application when necessary. This principle has\\nbeen steadily kept in view in preparing the following work, as\\nwell as the others belonging to this series. The leading and fun-\\ndamental principles have been reduced to definitions and rules,\\nbrief, and easy to be committed to memory, and are rendered\\ncomprehensive by being printed in large type while, at the\\nsame time, copious illustrations of these principles, and of the ex-\\nceptions and varieties of usage under them, with every thing im-\\nportant to aid the advanced student, have been inserted in their\\nplace in smaller type, in the form of Observations and Notes,\\nall of which are numbered for the sake of easy reference.\\nWhen the leading parts of Grammar are first actually com-\\nmitted to memory, and then constantly applied in the inflection\\nof words, and in analyzing their forms, they soon become so\\nthoroughly understood and fixed in the memory as hardly ever\\nto be effaced, and to be always ready afterwards to account for\\nevery form which words, in their numerous changes, assume, and\\nto solve every difficulty caused by these changes almost without\\nan effort of thought. A student, though young, if thus exercised\\nbut for one year or two, has an immense advantage, in the future\\nprosecution of his studies, over those who have not laid the foun-\\ndation of their success a thorough course of drilling.\\nIn the preface to the first edition, a fall statement was given\\nof the principal sources from which the materials here collected\\nwere drawn, and which need not here be reoeated. Suffice it to", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0007.jp2"}, "8": {"fulltext": "IV PREFACE.\\nsay, the author has not hesitated to avail himself of every assist-\\nance within his reach, and to gather from every quarter, espe-\\ncially from the ample stores of German Philologists, whatever\\nappeared suited to his design. The labor of condensing and\\narranging, and, to borrow a term from the printers vocabulary,\\njustifying the several parts with due regard to harmony and pro-\\nportion, into one compact whole, has been very great.\\nI would beg leave, in this place, to call the attention of stu-\\ndents and of teachers, who have not yet examined the subject, to\\nthe method of analyzing and forming the tenses of the verb\\nwhich is here exhibited. No part of Greek Grammar has hither-\\nto proved so puzzling and harassing to the pupil as this. For\\nwant of understanding the few simple principles, on which the\\nnumerous changes in the form of the verb depend, they appear\\nto him intricate, arbitrary, and incomprehensible, to such a de-\\ngree as to render his prospect of fully mastering them almost\\nhopeless. That this is owing, in a great measure, to the method\\nof forming the different tenses by deriving one tense from\\nanother to which it has some real or fancied resemblance, ap-\\npears to me beyond a doubt. As there is no foundation in truth\\nfor this mode of formation, so almost every writer, following\\nimagination as his guide, has proposed a different theory upon\\nthe subject. One, for example, forms the perfect passive from its\\nown future. Another, with equal ingenuity, forms the future\\nfrom its own perfect, through the medium of the first aorist pas-\\nsive Another supposes he has simplified the whole matter by\\nderiving every tense in the passive voice from its corresponding\\ntense in the active voice, by making the simple and natural\\nchange of into into into\\n-cpd into -(pa into into and\\ninto sometimes into Another still, in order to arrive,\\nfor example, at the first aorist passive, starts with the present\\nactive, and, by a succession of stages, arrives at the end of his\\njourney, thus,\\nand when he gets there, he finds he has missed\\nhis way after all, for the first aorist of the verb is not\\nbut and to bring him thither, another rule has to be\\ninvented nearly as dark as the road he has already travelled\\nviz., Verbs which change of the future into of the rjerfect\\nactive, and into a of the perfect passive, take again in the first\\naorist as, What can be more perplex-\\ning and arbitrary than such a process It is fortunate for the\\nrising generation that such a system is beginning to pass away,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0008.jp2"}, "9": {"fulltext": "PREFACE. V\\nand to Professor Theirseh, of Germany, must we regard ourselves\\nas chiefly indebted for the deliverance. Throwing aside the\\ncomplicated systems of rules and exceptions which such theories\\nhad rendered necessary, he directs to the more simple and philo-\\nsophical method of observing and stating the fact, that the root\\nor stem runs unchanged, or but slightly so, through the whole\\nverb and that one part differs from another in form, only in the\\npart prefixed and added to the stem, and that in all verbs these\\nparts are nearly the same. Instead, therefore, of forming one,\\ntense from another by a tedious and complicated process, even-\\ntense is formed at once immediately from its root by simply an-\\nnexing the proper tense-ending, and prefixing the augment in the\\ntenses that require it. Thus, for the sake of comparison, instead\\nof the laborious and clumsy process above in order to form the\\n1 aor. passive of all that is necessary is to annex the\\naorist tense-ending to the root prefixing the aug-\\nment, and it is done, you have at once and so it is\\nwith every other tense.\\nThe whole system of forming the tenses from the root, accord-\\ning to this method, is given in a brief space 93) and all its\\nmodifications, as applied to the different classes of mute, pure,\\nand liquid verbs, occupy only about three pages. By forming\\nthe tenses in this way, the Greek verb will be found a simple,\\nregular, and beautiful structure, as all that belongs to the lan-\\nguage is. And I hesitate not again to say, after many years\\nfurther experience, and after repeated examinations of other the-\\nories, that in my opinion this method, for beauty, simplicity, and\\nphilosophical accuracy, greatly surpasses every other system of\\nanalysis; and that a more minute, familiar, and certain know-\\nledge of the Greek verb can be obtained, with much more ease,\\nand in a shorter time, by studying it in this way than in any\\nother.\\nREVISED EDITION.\\nNew plates for this work having become necessary, the oppor-\\ntunity thus offered has been embraced, to correct such errors and\\ninaccuracies as had been observed, to make such additions and\\nimprovements as were deemed important, to add to the value and\\ncompleteness of the work, and to render it still more worthy of\\nthe public favor. In a few instances, the mode of expression has\\nbeen slightly changed, partly to render it more accurate, and\\npartly to make the Series of Grammars still more uniform. For", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0009.jp2"}, "10": {"fulltext": "VI PREFACE.\\nthis reason, also, a few changes have been made in the arrange-\\nment of the matter but none of these are of such a nature or\\nextent as to alter the character of the book, or prevent its being\\nused in the same class with the former editions. These changes\\nare chiefly the following The general rules for the accents have\\nbeen added to 5-1, and the special rules for each declension,\\nand for verbs, have been transferred from 209 to their respec-\\ntive declensions, c, in order to be studied in their place and\\nthe rules for contractions, in the first and second declensions,\\nhave been transferred to these declensions respectively so that\\nall that belongs to each declension will be found in its proper\\nplace under that declension. The analysis of the terminations\\nof verbs, formerly in the Appendix, has been added to 91 and\\nthe table of contract verbs, also in the Appendix, has been placed\\nafter the Paradigm of the Verb, pp. 136, 137. The sections on\\nNumerals have been placed before the sections on the Compari-\\nson of Adjectives, in accordance with the arrangement in the\\nEnglish and the Latin Grammar. And lastly, the section on\\nthe Analysis of Sentences has been enlarged, and transferred from\\nthe Appendix to its place immediately after the Syntax. By\\nthese changes of arrangement, the several articles affected by\\nthem have been rendered more compact and complete and the\\nmatter belonging to them, being brought together, is less scat-\\ntered than before. As a consequence of this, however, the pages\\nin this edition do not correspond to those in former editions and\\nalso the section numbers from 18 to \u00c2\u00a741 of the former edition,\\nand from 51 to 59, have been changed, while the matter in\\neach section remains the same as before. In order to obviate any\\ndifficulty from this cause in the way of reference, a list of these\\nsections, indicating the change of number, is given on p. xii.\\nThus have the Grammars belonging to this series, viz., the\\nAnalytical and Practical Grammar of the English Language, the\\nPrinciples of Latin Grammar, and the Principles of Greek Gram-\\nmar, been thoroughly revised, and, it is hoped, greatly improved\\ngreater similarity and uniformity have been effected both in ex-\\npression and arrangement, the references from one work to\\nanother, for explanation and comparison, have been greatly in-\\ncreased in number, and in all, a running series of numbers, from\\nbeginning to end, for the convenience of reference, has been in-\\ntroduced. No labor or expense has been spared to render this\\nwhole series of elementary books unique, practical, accurate, and\\ncomprehensive. Each work, though connected with the others\\nas a series, is complete in itself, and being equally remote from", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0010.jp2"}, "11": {"fulltext": "PREFACE. Vll\\na meagre skeleton, or outline, on\u00e2\u0080\u00a2 the one hand, and a diffuse, ex-\\ntended treatise on the other, is convenient in size, pleasing to the\\neve, and carefully adapted to the purposes of instruction.\\nThe author takes this opportunity of acknowledging grate-\\nfully the favor with which his works have been received by\\nteachers and others, and begs leave to assure them, that while no\\nchange will hereafter be made in those now completed, no effort\\nwill be wanting to render those he may yet publish, worthy of\\ntheir notice.\\nNew- York, July, 1853.\\nHINTS RESPECTING- THE METHOD OF STUDYING THIS\\nGRAMMAR.\\nThose who have had experience in teaching the Greek language, will\\nneed no instructions from rue how to study this, or any other Grammar\\nwhich they may think fit to use; but still a few hints as to the way in\\nwhich it is intended to be used may not be useless to the young teacher,\\nor to the student who may be under the necessity of prosecuting his\\nstudies without a teacher.\\nIt is by no means intended that the new beginner should study, and\\nmuch less commit to memory, every thing in the book. It is presumed\\nthat he comes to the study of Greek with some knowledge of the Eng-\\nlish and Latin Grammars, and he will therefore throughout meet with\\nmuch with which he is already acquainted, and which will require no\\nnew labour. In general, definitions and rules printed in large type, to-\\ngether with the paradigms of nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, are\\nabout all that should be attended to at first, but these should be com-\\nmitted very accurately to memory, and repeated so often in daily re-\\nvisals, as to become easy and familiar. If this is not done, the student s\\nprogress will be slow and embarrassed at every step, which otherwise\\nwould be rapid, easy, and pleasant. By youth of ordinary capacity,\\nthis will generally be effected in the course of six or seven weeks. It\\nis then time to begin to read easy sentences, simply with a view to fur-\\nnish a praxis on the rules and paradigms previously committed. In this\\nexercise, every word should be declined, and every rule belonging to its\\ninflection should be repeated, till it can be done not only correctly and\\neasily, but almost without an effort. Two or three lines a day will be\\nsufficient at first increasing the quantity no faster than the pupil is\\nable thoroughly to analyze every word. Simultaneously with this, as a\\npart of each recitation, the part of the Grammar already committed\\nshould be reviewed repeatedly, first, in shorter, and then in longer\\nportions, till the pupil is able to run over the whole in a recitation of\\nfifteen or twenty minutes. All this may be effected in the space of\\nthree or four months. Longer lessons will then be proper, and along\\nwith this, the study of the Grammar, taking up the more important\\nparts of what was omitted before, not to commit to memory, but to\\nstudy them so as to become familiar with them, and be able to refer to\\nthem at once when they may be needed. By going over the Gram-", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0011.jp2"}, "12": {"fulltext": "7111 PREFACE.\\nmar two or three times, in this manner, in the course of a year, every\\npart will become connected in the mind with the rules to which these\\nparts* belong, so as to be readily recalled by them.\\nThere are two or three points to which it is necessary for the pupil\\nto pay special attention. First, The Rules of Euphony, 6. To the eu\u00c2\u00bb\\nphony of their language the Greeks paid the greatest attention. In or-\\nder to avoid the harsh sound which would be the result of certain con-\\nsonants coming together, they often exchanged a consonant in certain\\nsituations for another of more pleasing sound sometimes they changed\\ntheir order, sometimes dropped one of them, or inserted another. To\\nthis is owing, in part, the apparent irregularity in the flection of nouns\\nand verbs, which has led to form so many perplexing rules for cases and\\ntenses. The rules of euphony extend, not to the flection of nouns only,\\nbut to the whole structure of the language to the composition and*\\nderivation of words, and even to the collocation of them in a sen-\\ntence. Those principles are few, thoroughly systematized, and very\\neasy to be comprehended. This part, and, as fundamental to it, the\\nfourth section, should be thoroughly mastered before proceeding to the\\nthird declension, where these rules will be needed.\\nAnother thing requiring special attention, and of almost equal im-\\nportance, is, the rules for contraction. These should be studied in their\\nplace after each declension, or they may be omitted till the first re-\\nvisal. A perfect readiness in the rules of contraction renders a para-\\ndigm of contract verbs entirely unnecessary. Still, as some may wish\\nto have such a paradigm, it is furnished in 100.\\nThe last thing to which I would invite special attention, is the mode\\nof teaching the Greek verb, which, on account of its numerous changes,\\nand these effected differently in different verbs by the rules of euphony,\\naccording to the consonants of which it consists, or which concur in the\\ncourse of inflection, has been regarded as so intricate and difficult. First\\nof all, it is necessary to ascertain, in every verb, the boot, or stem, which,\\nin certain cases, undergoes changes peculiar to itself. These, however,\\nare few, and under a very few short and plain rules, 82 85. On\\nthese the pupil should be drilled till he can, with perfect readiness and\\ncertainty, tell the root of any regular verb as soon as the verb is named\\nand also its second and third forms, when they differ from the first.\\nThis may be the work of one or two days. To the root is prefixed the\\naugment in certain tenses, the rules for which will be found in 88,\\nand require no special notice. The next step is to commit the tables of\\nterminations, 92, very accurately to memory, beginning at the top of\\neach column and proceeding down the page this will be much more\\neasily accomplished than to commit the paradigm of the verb, and will\\nanswer a better purpose. All that then remains is to learn the method\\nof forming each tense by annexing the tense-endings, 93, to the pro-\\nper root, according to the rules for mute, pure, and liquid verbs in\\n94, 96, 97. This is an important exercise, and should be persevered\\nin, till the utmost accuracy, ease, and readiness is attained.\\nThe syntax of the Greek language is a highly important part of the\\nsubject, and should be diligently and carefully studied but this maybe\\npostponed to the second year, as the rules of syntax common to the\\nLatin and Greek will be sufficient for the earlier stages. The subject of\\nanalysis and translation, at the end of Syntax, deserves special attention,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0012.jp2"}, "13": {"fulltext": "INDEX\\nFAGS\\nAccents 5\\nfirst declension 21\\nsecond declension 2j6\\nthirl declension 29\\nverbs 97\\nAccusative of 3d decl. 34\\nconstruction of 250\\ngoverned by an in-\\ntransitive verb 252\\nAdjectives, of 52\\nof the 1st and 2d\\ndecl 53\\nof the 1st and 3d\\ndecl. _. 55\\nof two terminations 59\\nirregular 61\\ncomparison of 67, 68\\nby 69\\ncomparison of irre\\ngular 70\\ndefective 70\\ndialects of .71\\nconcord of, with a\\nsubstantive 206\\nother words used as 206\\nused adverbially 268\\nobs. on the con\\ncord of\\npronouns, construe\\ntion and use of\\nwords related, con\\nstruction of\\nAdverbs, signification of\\nformation and\\nvation of\\ncomparison of\\nconstruction of\\nAdverbial particles (insepara\\nble)\\nAlphabet\\nAnacolutha\\nAnalysis\\nderi\\n206\\n210\\n221\\n186\\n188\\n189\\n267\\n190\\n1\\n284\\n294\\nP 6B\\nApostrophe 8\\nApposition 205\\nArticle 51\\ndialects of 52\\nconstruction and use of 214\\nas a demonstrative pro-\\nnoun 52, 76\\nas a relative and per-\\nsonal pronoun 52, 78, 118\\nAugment, of 106\\nrules for 107\\nplace of, in compound\\nwords 109\\nobservations on 109\\nAuxiliary verbs 95\\nCsesural pause 312\\nCase, of 19\\nCharacteristic of the verb, of 99\\nCircumstances, construction of 259\\nof cause or origin 260\\nof limitation .261\\nof cause, manner,\\nand instrument 263\\nof place 264\\nof time 265\\nof measure 265\\nof price 266\\nof exclamation 266\\nComparative deg., construc-\\n4 tion and use of 209\\nComparison of adjectives 67,68\\ngeneral rule for 68\\nin -io)v and 69\\nirregular. 70\\ndefective 70\\ndialects of 71\\ngovernment of 235\\nConjunctions, of 196\\nconstruction of 292\\nsignif. and use of 196\\nConsonants, of 4\\nV", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0013.jp2"}, "14": {"fulltext": "INDEX.\\nPAGE\\nContractions, of 24\\nof the 1st decl. 25\\nof the 2d decl. 28\\nof the 3d decl. 41\\ngeneral rules for 41\\nexercises on 42\\nspecial rules for 43\\nexamples of 44-47\\nDative plural, 3d decl. of 36\\nconstruction of 241\\nafter substantives 241\\ngoverned by adjectives 242\\nby verbals in and\\n243\\nby verbs 244\\nby impersonal verbs 248\\nDeclension, general rules for 20\\nfirst 21\\nsecond 25\\ndo. Attic form of 27\\nthird 29\\ngen. of 31\\ndo. of adj. 33\\naccusative of 34\\nvocative of 35\\ndative plural of 36\\ndialects of 38\\ngendera of 39\\nDeponent verbs 167\\nDialects of the 1st decl. 23\\nof the 2d 27\\nof the 3d 38\\nof the article 52\\nof comparison 71\\nof the pronoun 81\\nof the verb 144\\nof 162\\nDiseresis 9\\nDiastole 9\\nDigamma 8\\nDiphthongs 2\\nEnclitics 6\\nEtymology 15\\nEuphony, rules of 10\\nFigures affecting syllables 9\\nFinal letters of the active voice 111\\nFinal letters of the mid. and\\npas*, voices .111\\nof verbs in .150\\nPAGR\\nGender, of 18\\nGenders of the 3d decl. 39\\nGenitive of do 31\\nof adjectives of do. 33\\nobs. on construction\\nof 228\\ngoverned by substan-\\ntives 229\\nby adj. in the\\nneut. gender 231\\nby adjectives 232\\nby comp. degree 235\\nby verbs .236\\nGovernment, of 227\\nImperative mood, syntax of 276\\nImpersonal verbs 168\\nconstruction of 248\\nIndicative, construction of 274\\nInfinitive, construction of 280\\nas a verbal noun .281\\nwithout a subject 281\\nwith a subject .283\\nused absolutely 285\\nMetre, of 307\\nIambic 309\\nTrochaic 309\\nAnapaestic 309\\nDactylic 310\\nChoriambic .310\\nAntispastic .311\\nIonic a majore .311\\nIonic a minore .312\\nPaaonic 312\\nMetres compound, of .313\\ntables of 314\\nMood vowels, of Ill\\nMoods, subjunctive and opta-\\ntive, construction of .276\\nMutes 4\\nNew present, formation of\\n170\\nNegatives, of\\n269\\ndouble\\n270\\nNom. case, construction of\\n223\\nconcord of\\n225\\nNouns, of\\n16\\naccidents of\\n17\\nperson of\\n17\\ngender of\\n18\\nnumber of\\n18", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0014.jp2"}, "15": {"fulltext": "INDEX.\\nXI\\nNouns, case of\\ndeclension of\\nirregular, of\\ndefective, of\\nof peculiar signific\\ntion\\nNumber, of\\nNumbers, cardinal\\nordinal\\nnotation of\\ntable of\\nNumerals, classes of\\nPAGE\\n19\\n19\\n48\\n50\\n50\\n18\\n63\\n64\\n65\\n66\\n62\\nOrthography\\nParadigm of the active voice 130\\nof the middle .132\\nof the passive .134\\nof contract verbs 136\\nof verbs in .154\\nParticiples, of 96\\ndeclension of 5*7\\nthe construction of 286\\nfor the infinitive 288\\nwith c. 290\\nwith c. 290\\nin the case absolute 291\\nParticles, conjunctive and ad-\\nverbial 190, 196\\nsignification of .197\\nParts of speech 16\\nindeclinable, of the 15\\nPassive voice, construction of\\ncases with 25*7\\nPrepositions, of 191\\nalphabetical list of 191\\nconstruction of .272\\nin compo-\\nsition 274\\nPronouns, personal 72\\npossessive 74\\nconstruction of 213\\nin apposition 205\\ndefinite 74\\nconstruction of 210\\nreflexive 75\\nreciprocal 76\\ndemonstrative 76\\nconstruction of 210\\nrelative 77\\nconcord of .218\\nattraction of 220\\nPAGH\\nPronouns, relat, other words\\nused as .219\\nin the sense of\\nother words 220\\ninterrogative 78\\nconstruction of 213\\nindefinite 79\\nconstruction of 212\\ncorrelative 80\\ndialects of 81\\nProsody 299\\nPunctuation 14\\nRoot of nouns and adj. 13\\nof the verb, of 99\\nof finding and changing 99\\nsecond of the .102\\nthird 103\\nverbs wanting 2d and 3d 104\\nof the tenses .105\\nSentences, simple and com-\\nplex 203, 294\\nSpiritus, of the 7\\nSuperlative degree, construc-\\ntion and use of 209\\nSyllables\\nSyntax 203\\nparts of 204\\ngeneral principles of 204\\nof the verb 274\\nTable of vowel sounds 3\\nTense-root 105\\nTense-signs 105\\nTense-endings 105\\ntable of 117\\nTenses, of 90\\nobs. on the use of 93\\nof mute and pure verbs,\\nformation of .117\\nexamples of .119\\nof liquid verbs, forma-\\ntion of 125\\nformation, examples of 126\\nof verbs in of .149\\nformation of. 150\\nof verbs formed from\\nthe primitive 159, 160\\nterminations of .111\\ntable of .114\\nof verbs in .149", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0015.jp2"}, "16": {"fulltext": "Xll\\nINDEX.\\nVerbs, of 82\\ndifferent kinds of .84\\ninflection of .85\\nauxiliary .95\\nconjugation of .98\\nanalysis of .99\\nroot of 99\\ncharacteristic of 99\\naugment of 106\\ntermination of .111\\nmute, special rules for 118\\npure, do. do. .122\\nliquid, do. do. 125\\ncontract, of 128\\nparadigm of .136\\ndialects of 144\\nof the 2d conjugation 147\\nVerbs in tenses of 150, 160\\nroot of 149\\nfinal letters 149\\ncombination of 150\\nparadigm of .154\\nobs. on 158\\nirreg. and defective 160, 169\\ninflection of .161\\n\u00ce\u00a1\u00ce\u009b6\u00ce\u0092\\nVerbs, alphabetical list of .172\\ndeponent 167\\nimpersonal 168\\nof peculiar signification 168\\nconcord of 224\\nrules and obs. 225\\ngoverning the genitive 236\\ndative 244\\naccus. 250\\nace. gen. 253\\nace. dat. 254\\ntwo accus. 255\\nsyntax of 274\\nVoice, of 85\\nactive, table of 130\\nobs. on 138\\nnuddle, of 86\\ntenses of 87\\ntable of 132\\npassive, table of .134\\nmiddle and passive, 2d\\nconj., obs. on 158\\nVowels, of 2\\npronunciation of 3\\nWords 15\\nThe following is a list of the Sections whose numbers have\\nbeen altered in the present edition.. The first column contains\\nthe number of the sections in former editions the second gives\\nthe number of the same sections in this edition. All the other\\nsections are the same as in former editions.\\n18 is\\nnow 20\\n30 is now\\n\u00c2\u00a733\\n51 is now\\n\u00c2\u00a754\\n19\\n21\\n31\\n39\\n52\\n55\\n20\\n23\\n32\\n40\\n53\\n56\\n21\\n24\\n33\\n41\\n54\\n57\\n22\\n25\\n34\\n18\\n55\\n58\\n23\\n26\\n35\\n19\\n56\\n59\\n24\\n27\\n36\\n22\\n57\\n51\\n25\\n28\\n37\\n34\\n58\\n52\\n26\\n29\\n38\\n35\\n59\\n53\\n27\\n30\\n39\\n36\\n60\\n60\\n28\\n31\\n40\\n37\\n100\\n99\\n29\\n32\\n41\\n38\\n218\\n100", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0016.jp2"}, "17": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0017.jp2"}, "18": {"fulltext": "M\u00c2\u00a9ATOIRIH\u00c2\u00a9 (IDjR\\nAmMmviLimmw\u00c2\u00ae\\nvL eunt Greefc.MS.S. ScEditims.\\nIw,\\n7?-\\nQcvu,\\n7y\\naj,\\nHa)\\nty,\\nMOyTOs,\\ncry),\\naXX\\nX8 pcu)\\\\co(X?V\\nrf mo,\\nCUV,\\np%.\\n/US?/),\\n(7ZJ,\\nCbttO*\\npS,\\ncf f,\\na,irv rtvX 8,\\n/s-e v,\\nsi\\nrfX,\\nOirCI^/ CtsVTrCp,\\npJyo,\\nydp,\\nfa*\\n[\u00ce\u009b8\u00ce\u00a4\u00ce\u00bf\u00cf\u0085\\nJ/3.\\nXctsL\u00e2\u0080\u00a2,\\ntfv, ysv,\\n{aJmj,\\n*G-Cb 0$ t\\nr^ rf,\\nf\\nJ,\\nTj Vl\\nJ4,\\nrfs,\\n4\\\\ t\\noS,\\nTO,\\n,6\u00ce\u008a^,\\nto\\nty? tfyr^S ccC,\\niok,\\nr?fr\u00c2\u00a3 Tor,\\nh fy.\\nTTTC/y\\nr ors,\\nrto l?^\\nrfciG tx.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0Too,\\nc-V, \u00c2\u00a3j j f\\n\u00c2\u00a9V, r^rf,\\n*f*\\ne\\\\ U\\nS,\\n^y t\\n-Too,\\nVI\\nOJ,\\nJW,\\ny\\n0UU,UOl\\\\ \u00c2\u00a3.-7CO,\\n60,\\nX\\nOOfs,\\nft.\\n:7\u00ce\u00a4\u00ce\u00b8\\ney\\ngo,\\npCC,\\n6 ic, 6\\nC.\\n(fcvV", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0018.jp2"}, "19": {"fulltext": "GREEK GRAMMAR.\\nPART I.\\nORTHOGRAPHY.\\n1. Oethogeaphy treats of letters, and the mode\\nof combining them into syllables and words.\\n2. A letter is a mark or character used to represent an ele-\\nmentary sound of the human voice. The Greek alphabet con-\\nsists of twenty-four letters, namely\\nFORM.\\nA a\\nfinal\\n7\\nThe letter before or is sounded like ng in sing\\nthus, ciy pronounced ang-elos, ang-kon.\\nNAME.\\n1\\nPOWER.\\nAlpha\\nBeta\\na\\nb\\nin\\nin\\nfather\\nbee\\nGamma\\nDelta\\n9\\nd\\nin\\nin\\n9\u00c2\u00b0\\ndid\\nEpalon\\nZeta zz\\ne\\nin\\nin\\nmet\\nNebuchadnezzar\\nEta\\nTheta\\nth\\nin\\nin\\nthey\\nthick\\nIota\\nKappa\\nLambda\\ni\\nI\\nin\\nor\\nin\\npin\\nhard, kin, care\\nlay, eel\\nMu\\nm\\nin\\nmadam\\nNu\\nn\\nin\\nnun\\nXi\\nX\\nin\\nfox\\nOmikrori\\nin\\ntyro, not\\nPi\\nRho\\nr\\nin\\nin\\npea\\nroio\\nSigma\\ns\\nin\\nsun, us\\nTau\\nt\\nin\\ntea, not\\nUpsilon\\nPhi\\nChi\\nPsi\\nOmega\\nu\\nph\\nch\\nps\\nin\\nin\\nin\\nin\\nin\\nbrute\\nphilo\\nbuch (German)\\nlips\\nno, tone", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0019.jp2"}, "20": {"fulltext": "2 VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 1, 2.\\nThe letters in the Greek alphabet are either Vowels or Con-\\nsonants.\\n3.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 1. VOWELS.\\n1. A vowel is a letter which represents a simple inarticulate\\nsound, and, in a word or syllable, may be sounded alone. The\\nvowels are seven viz.,\\nTwo short, s, o.\\nTwo long,\\nThree doubtful, a, v.\\n2. A, iy v, are called doubtful, because they are sometimes\\nshort, and sometimes long. Thus,\\na in is always short.\\na in is always long.\\na in may be either long or short.\\n3. There are but five distinct vowel sounds in the Greek lan-\\nguage, viz., i, o, v. The and are used to express the\\nlengthened sound of s and o. The vowel sounds then may be\\nthus expressed\\nShort, 8, v.\\nLong, I, v.\\n4.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 2. DIPHTHONGS.\\n1. The union of two vowels in one sound is called a diph-\\nthong. Diphthongs are of two kinds, proper and improper.\\nNote 1. The first vowel of a diphthong in Greek, is called the pre-\\npositive vowel and the second, the subjunctive vowel.\\n2. A Proper Diphthong is one in which both the vowels are\\nsounded. In Greek, the proper diphthongs are six; and are\\nformed from with t or subjoined thus,\\nFrom a are formed ai and av.\\nFrom s are formed st and sv.\\nFrom are formed and ov.\\n3. An Improper Diphthong is one in which only one of the\\nvowels is sounded. The improper diphthongs in Greek are also\\nsix viz., commonly written a, in which the first\\nvowel only is sounded and in which the last vowel\\nchiefly is sounded, slightly modified, however, by an imperfect\\nsound of the first. These three might very properly be classed\\nas proper diphthongs.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0020.jp2"}, "21": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a73.\\nPllONUNCIATION.\\nXote 2. The iota in from its position under the preposi-\\ntive vowel, is called iota subscript. But when this vowel is a capital,\\nthe t, is written after it; as, \u00c2\u00ab(5\u00ce\u00b7;\\n4. A vowel, preceded by another vowel, with which it does\\nnot form a diphthong, is said to be pure. Thus, a is pure in\\nand is pure in c.\\n55\\n\u00c2\u00a73. THE PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS AND DIPH-\\nTHONGS.\\n5 The ancient pronunciation of the Greek vowels and diphthongs\\ncannot now be determined with certainty in all cases. The knowledge\\nwe have of it is derived chiefly from Greek words that appear in Latin,\\nand Latin words that appear in Greek from imitation of natural\\nsounds, as the bleating of the sheep, or the barking of the dog; from\\na play upon words, and other hints of a similar character.\\n6 If uniformity in the pronunciation of the Greek, is to be aimed\\nat and it is certainly desirable that it should the Erasmian method,\\namong all others now in use, seems entitled to preference as a standard,\\nnot only on account of its simplicity and perspicuity, but also as having\\nthe authority of the ancients, so far as this can be ascertained, decid-\\nedly in its favor. It is, moreover, the pronunciation that generally\\nprevails in Europe, and has been adopted in some of the most distin-\\nguished schools in America. The whole system is exhibited in the fol\\nlowing\\n1. Table of Vowel and Diphthongal Sounds.\\nShort\\nlike a\\nin Jehovah\\nas\\nLong\\na,\\nlike a\\nin far\\nas\\nShort\\ne,\\nlike e\\nin met\\nas\\nLong\\ny\\nlike ey\\nin they\\nas\\nas\\nShort\\nh\\nlike i\\nin tin\\nLong\\nh\\nlike i\\nin machine\\nas\\nShort\\no,\\nlike\\nin tyro, not\\nas\\nLong\\nlike\\nin go, tone\\nas\\nShort\\nVy\\nlike u\\nin brute\\nas\\nLong\\nv,\\nlike u\\nin tune\\nas\\nai,\\nlike ay\\nin aye\\nas zvipai\\nav,\\nlike ou\\nin our, thou\\nas\\n\u00e2\u0082\u00ac1,\\nlike i\\nin ice\\nas\\nlike eu\\nin feud\\nas\\n01,\\nlike oi\\nin oil\\nas\\nlike ou\\nin ragout\\nas\\nlike ew\\nin few\\nas\\nlike ow\\nin how\\nas\\nVI,\\nlike ui\\nin quick, or\\nlike tbe English w", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0021.jp2"}, "22": {"fulltext": "4 CONSONANTS. \u00c2\u00a74\\n8.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 4. CONSONANTS.\\n1. A consonant is a letter which represents an articulate\\nsound, and, in a word or syllable, is never sounded alone, but\\nalways in connection with a vowel or diphthong.\\nConsonants are divided into mutes, semi-vowels, and double\\nconsonants.\\n2. The mutes are nine, and are divided into three classes, ac-\\ncording to their strength viz.\\nSmooth,\\nMiddle,\\nAspirate,\\n3. By strength is meant the force of voice, or of breathing re-\\nquisite in pronouncing, which is different in each of the classes\\nspecified, the smooth mutes requiring the least the aspirates,\\nthe greatest and the middle, a degree of force intermediate be-\\ntween the other two.\\n4. Each smooth mute has its own middle and its own aspi-\\nrate and these three are called mutes of the same sound, or of\\nthe same order, because they are pronounced by the same organ\\nthus,\\n77-mutes, or labials,\\ni\u00c2\u00a3-mutes, or palatals,\\nT-mutes, or dentals, d,\\nObs. In mutes of the same sound, one is frequently changed\\nfor another.\\n5. The semi-vowels are five, Of these\\nare called liquids, because they readily unite with, or floio into,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2the sound of other consonants.\\n6. The double consonants are three, They are formed\\nfrom the three orders of mutes with thus,\\n7t, ps.\\n7 w ^h S makes V equivalent to x.\\na, z.\\n7. In the declension of nouns and verbs, when a sr-mute, or a\\n-mute, would be followed by the double consonant or is\\nsubstituted for the two thus, instead of or must\\nbe written fcc. But a r-mute, coming before\\nmust be rejected thus, for must be written g\\n44-8.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0022.jp2"}, "23": {"fulltext": "5. SYLLABLES. 5\\n8. In like manner a double consonant may be resolved into\\nthe mute from -which it is formed, and g thus,\\nmay be resolved into izg, fig, or cpg.\\ninto xg, jg, or\\ninto dg, or g.\\nThis is done when, in the declension of nouns and verbs, i\\nbecomes necessary to separate the from the mute with which i\\nis combined thus, by dropping the becomes\\nbecomes and so of other combinations.\\n5. SYLLABLES.\\n9. A syllable is a distinct sound forming the whole of a\\nword, or so much of it as can be sounded at once.\\nEvery word has as many syllables as it has distinct vowel\\nsounds.\\nA word of one syllable is called a Monosyllable.\\nA word of two syllables is called a Dissyllable.\\nA word of three syllables is called a Trissyllable.\\nA word of many syllables is called a Polysyllable.\\n10. In a word of many syllables, the last is called the final\\nsyllable the one next the last is called the penult, and the sylla-\\nble preceding that, is called the antepenult.\\nTo syllables belong certain marks and characters these are\\n1. ACCENTS.\\n11. The accents in Greek are three; viz., the\\nacute the grave and the circumflex\\n12 Accents are supposed to have been used to indicate the tone oV\\nthe accented syllable the acute being used to mark an elevation c\\ntone, the grave a depression, and the circumflex, the union of both.\\nGENERAL RULES.\\n13. In diphthongs the accent stands always on the subjunctive\\nvowel as, but on the prepositive of the diph-\\nthongs a, as,\\n14. The acute accent may stand on any one of the three last\\nsyllables of a word but on the antepenult, only when the final\\nsyllable is short.\\n15. The grave is understood on all syllables not accented with\\nan acute or circumflex. The grave accent is used on the final", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0023.jp2"}, "24": {"fulltext": "6 SYLLABLES.\\nsyllable of a word when followed by another word with which it\\nstands in connection as, but when the word stands\\nalone, or not connected with words following it, the acute is used\\nas,\\n16. The circumflex can stand only on a long syllable, and\\nthat must be one of the two last and it can stand on the penult,\\nonly when the final syllable is short.\\n1*7. An accented penult, if long, and followed by a short sylla-\\nble, must have the circumflex but if the final syllable be long,\\nthe accent on the penult must be acute as,\\n18 Note. The diphthongs and final, syllables long only by\\nposition, and the Attic instead of are considered short in accen-\\ntuation but the optative terminations ot and ai, and in the adverb\\nare long.\\n19 In words declined by cases, except participles, the accentua-\\ntion of the nominative can be ascertained only by consulting a good\\nlexicon. That being ascertained, the accentuation of the oblique cases\\nmay be found by the rules of accent under each declension. These\\nrules apply generally to adjectives and participles of the same decle\u00c2\u00bb\\nENCLITICS.\\n20. Certain words of one or two syllables, when used in dis-\\ncourse, throw back their accent on the preceding word, if in con-\\nnection with it, and stand themselves without an accent. Such\\nwords are called enclitics.\\n21. The enclitics commonly in use are the following viz.,\\n1. The present indicative of the verbs and in all the\\nnumbers and persons except the second person singular. 2.\\nThe indefinite in all its cases and numbers. 3. The pro-\\nnouns viv, and most\\nof those beginning with 4. The adverbs\\nnot interrogative, and, 5. The particles,\\nor or and insep-\\narable, as in\\n22. When a word with an acute accent on the antepenult, or\\na circumflex on the penult, is followed by an enclitic, it takes an\\nacute on the final syllable, as the accent of the enclitic as,\\n23. But if the preceding word have an acute accent on the\\npenult, the enclitic of one syllable loses its accent, while the en-\\nclitic of two syllables retains it as,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0024.jp2"}, "25": {"fulltext": "5. SYLLABLES. 7\\n24. When the preceding word has any accent on the final\\nsyllable, the enclitic following, whether of one or two syllables,\\nloses its accent as,\\nc.\\n25. When several enclitics occur in succession, the first\\nhaving lost, or thrown back its accent on the preceding word,\\nthe second throws its accent always as an acute on the first, and\\nthe third on the second, c, till the last only is without an ac-\\ncent as,\\n26. The enclitic retains its accent when it stands alone, or at\\nthe beginning of a clause or sentence when the final vowel of\\nthe preceding word has been cut off by apostrophe or when the\\nenclitic word is emphatic.\\nACCENTS IN CONTRACTIONS.\\n27. In a concourse of vowels, if two syllables are converted\\ninto one, it is called a contraction.\\n28. If the first concurrent vowel has the acute accent, it is\\nchanged into a circumflex on the contracted syllable as,\\n29. If the first concurrent vowel has not the acute accent,\\nthe contracted syllable has not the circumflex as,\\n2. SPIEITUS OR BREATHINGS.\\n30. The Spiritus, or breathings, are two the spiritus asper,\\nor rough breathing, marked and the spiritus lenis, or soft\\nbreathing, marked\\n31. The spiritus asper has the force of the Latin H; thus,\\nis pronounced Hama.\\nNote. Anciently was the mark for the aspirate, in Greek, as it is\\nin Latin thus, was written hekaton.\\n32. The spiritus lenis only indicates that the spiritus asper\\nis not to be used. These marks are used as follows\\n1st. A vowel or diphthong, beginning a word, has always a\\nspiritus. In the diphthong, it is placed over, the second vowel\\nas, but over the first in the diphthongs a,\\n2d. Initial has always the spiritus asper as, pronounced\\nhupo.\\n3d. Initial has always the spiritus asper as, pro-\\nnounced rhetor not initial, if single, has no spiritus if double", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0025.jp2"}, "26": {"fulltext": "8 SYLLABLES.\\nthe first has the spiritus lenis, and the second has the spiritus\\nasper as, pronounced poro pronounced porrko.\\n3. THE MOLIG DIGAMMA.\\n33. The iEolic dialect, the most ancient form of the Greek\\nlanguage, had no spiritus asper and it is seldom used in the\\nIonic. The want of it, in the former, was compensated, in all\\nwords beginning with a vowel, by a species of aspirate, now\\ncalled the ^eolic digamma.\\n34. This was originally a full and strong consonant having\\nthe sound of the Latin F or V. It was called digamma, because\\nits form (J 1 was that of a double f. It is thought to have been\\nused by the ancients before words beginning with a vowel, and\\nbetween two vowels, which, bf its disuse at a later period, came\\ntogether without forming a diphthong thus, ohog, oig,\\nand the like, were written or pronounced as\\nif written, fig, ofig, c,\\nfrom which the Latin vinum, ver, vis, ovis, aevum, avernus, ovum,\\nfcc, were evidently derived before the digamma disappeared.\\nBetween two vowels, it was at length softened down, and even\\nwith the ^Eolians passed into v. Thus we have for\\nthe common ?)eog. This accounts for the form of some\\nwords in the Attic and common dialects, in which the digamma,\\nsoftened into v, still remains, especially where followed by a con-\\nsonant. Thus the ancient passed into and lastly into\\nwhich still retains in the future the softened form\\nof the ancient So Attic has in the future\\nIn like manner vaeg, the plural of vavg, still retains in\\nthe dative the softened form of the ancient vafoi.\\n35. 4. The Apostrophe is written over the place of a short\\nvowel which has been cut off from the end of a word as,\\nfor This is done when the following word begins\\nwith a vowel, and in compounds, when the first part ends, and\\nthe last begins, with a vowel; 43-3, 1st. Sometimes the diph-\\nthongs are elided by the poets as, for\\nand sometimes, after a long syllable, the initial vowel is cut\\noff from the following word as, for\\n36. Exc. Instead of the apostrophe, or cutting off the final\\nvowel, the concurring vowels are sometimes contracted as,\\nfor for\\n37 Note. The union, or contraction of such words, is indicated by\\nthe spiritus being placed over the vowel, at the place of junction, as in\\nthe preceding examples.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0026.jp2"}, "27": {"fulltext": "6. SYLLABLES. 9\\n38. 5. The Diastole is a comma inserted between the parts\\nof a compound word, to distinguish it from another -word consist-\\ning of the same letters as, and this, to distinguish it from\\nthen what, to distinguish it frorn on, because. Some-\\ntimes they are wiitten apart, without the comma thus,\\n39. 6. The Dioeresis is placed over a vowel, to show\\nhat it does not form a diphthong with the vowel which pre-\\ncedes it as, a sheep, mild, pronounced o-is, pra-us.\\n40. 7. The figures affecting syllables are as follows\\n1st. Prosthesis is the prefixing of one or more letters to the\\nbeginning of a word; as, for for\\n2d. Paragoge is the adding of one or more letters to the end\\nof a word as, for for\\n3d. Epenthesis is the insertion of one or more letters in the\\nbody of a word as, for for\\n4th. Syncope, is the taking away of one or more letters from\\nthe body of a word as, for for\\n5th. Aphceresis is the cutting off of one or more letters from\\nthe beginning of a word as, for\\nfor\\n6th. Apocope is the cutting off of one or more letters from\\nthe end of a word as, for for\\n7th. Tmesis is a separating of the parts, in a compound word,\\nby an intervening term as, for\\n8th. Metathesis is the transposition of letters and syllables\\nas, for for\\nfor\\n41. Obs. The Ionians, by a species of Metathesis, change the\\nbreathing in a word as, for for\\n6. EUPHONY.\\n42. In combining letters into words, the Greeks paid the\\nstrictest attention to Euphony, or agreeableness of sound. This\\nprinciple, indeed, pervades the whole structure of the language.\\nFi-om a regard to this, they carefully avoided every concurrence", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0027.jp2"}, "28": {"fulltext": "10 EUPHONY. 6.\\nof consonants not easily pronounced together. The means by\\nwhich this is effected may be summed up in the following\\n43. KULES OF EUPHONY.\\n(It is of great importance for the student to be very familiar with\\nthe following rules, and expert in applying them, before he enters on\\nthe 3d declension, as they are then required in almost every step. To\\naid him in this, a table of exercises is subjoined, in which he should\\npractise, till he can correct the orthography, and give the rule with the\\ngreatest ease and readiness.)\\n1. Words ending in 6 c, and verbs of the third\\nperson in and i y add to the termination before\\na vowel, or before a pause as,\\nfor also the word\\n(twenty), and the adverbs\\nand w. This was called by grammarians\\nbecause, by preventing the hiatus between two\\nvowels, it, as it were, drew the second vowel to the first. Among\\nthe poets, it is sometimes added to these terminations before a\\nconsonant, when it is necessary to render a final syllable long\\nand sometimes, by the Attic prose writers, to give energy to the\\ntone.\\nSometimes is added, on the same principle thus, be-\\ncomes Also the particle ov is changed into before a\\nvowel, and into before an aspirated vowel.\\n2. When two mutes of a different sound come\\ntogether, they must be of the same strength; i. e.\\nthey must be both smooth, or both middle, or both\\naspirate as,\\nIf, by derivation or declension, two mutes of different strength\\nwould come together, the former must take the class of the latter\\nthus, the terminations with the being\\nomitted, form and of two mutes\\nalready combined, one cannot be changed without a correspond-\\ning change in the other. Thus in and if the be\\nchanged into the must be changed into and the into\\nas,\\n3. A smooth mute in the end of a word is\\nchanged into its own aspirate before an aspirated\\nvowel. This is done,\u00e2\u0080\u0094", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0028.jp2"}, "29": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a76. EUPHONY. 11\\n1st In the composition of words thus, from In (for sVrt) and\\ncomes So from by apostrophe,\\nand comes from and\\nc.\\n2d. When words stand together in a sentence; thus,\\n1 fcc, for\\n3d. When words are united by contraction thus,\\nunited become c.\\nObs. 1. The middle mute is never changed before an aspi-\\nlated vowel as, 1 and and only before a, and\\n\u00c2\u00ab/v in forming the perfect and the pluperfect active, 218, Obs. 2.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u0094The in in is never aspirated.\\n4. When two successive syllables would begin\\nwith an aspirate, the first is changed into its own\\nsmooth and the spiritus asper, into the spiritus\\nlenis thus,\\nnot Gen. not so\\nfrom the root the verb is not from \u00cf\u00879\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00cf\u0081\u00ce\u00b5\u00cf\u0086,\\nnot from not (See below, 06s.\\n3.) In like manner from the root of (R. 2.), is de-\\nrived fcc.\\nExceptions. To this rule there are five excep-\\ntions; viz.,\\nExc. 1. Compound words generally as,\\n.Exc. 2. or before as,\\nExc. 3. When one of the aspirates is joined with another\\nconsonant as, But the rule\\nholds when follows the first aspirate, as above in not\\nExc. 4. If the second aspirate has been occasioned by a spiri-\\ntus asper following it as, 6 for by apo-\\nccpe for for and so of others.\\nExc. 5. When the second aspirate belongs to the adverbial\\nterminations or as,\\nObs. 2. Of three aspirates beginning successive syllables, it is\\nusual to change only the first as, for\\nIn some cases, however, the second also is changed as,\\nfor\\nObs. 3. When the first of two aspirates is the spiritus asper,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0029.jp2"}, "30": {"fulltext": "12 EUPHONY. 6\\nit is changed only before thus, o ev, c, preserve\\nthe spiritus asger before the aspirates and but must be\\nchanged into\\nObs. 4. When the second aspirate is lost by inflection or\\notherwise, the first is resumed; thus, fut.\\nand the derivatives\\nttxog, c.\\nObs. 5. The second of two aspirates is seldom changed. It\\nis always done, however, in imperatives in i as,\\nqn for\\nObs. 6. A mute may be doubled, but if tibe an aspirate, the\\nfirst is changed into its own smooth as, not\\nnot not not\\n5. Initial is doubled when a snort vowel is\\nprefixed; as,\\nfrom a and\\nfrom 57\u00ce\u00b4\u00ce\u00be and\\n44. 1. THE MUTES BEFORE\\n6. A nr-nmte before d, unites with it and forms\\nas, written\\n7. A minute before 6, unites with it and forms\\nas, written\\nExc. But never changes before as\\n8. A r-mute before a, is rejected thus,\\nwritten\\n45. II. THE MUTES BEFORE\\n9. A -mute before is changed into thus,\\nwritten\\nExc. But after a liquid, a -mute before is rejected as,\\nfor for\\n10. A #-mute before is changed into thus,\\nwritten\\nHence before remains unchanged as,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0030.jp2"}, "31": {"fulltext": "EUPHONY. t 13\\n11. A r-mute before is changed into thus,\\nwritten\\nObs. To these rules, there are some exceptions in substan-\\ntive forms, as, not not\\n46. III. CHANGES OF THE LETTER N.\\n12. N, before a -mute, or is changed into\\nthus,\\nwritten\\n13. iV, before a ar-mute, or g, is changed into\\nthus,\\nwritten\\n14. before a r-inute, remains unaltered as,\\n15. before another liquid, is changed into\\nthe same thus,\\nwritten\\n16. before 6 or is usually rejected thus,\\nwritten\\nObs. 8. TV is retained before only in a few words as,\\nBefore followed by a vowel, in\\nis changed into thus, for\\nretains before\\n4*7. IV. OF THE LETTER\\n17. In the inflection of the passive voice, when\\na would stand between two consonants, it is re-\\njected; thus,\\nwithout\\nby rule 2,\\nAnd so from t from\\nor\\n2", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0031.jp2"}, "32": {"fulltext": "14\\nPUNCTUATION.\\nObs. 9. But when the first consonant is a -mute, it is re-\\njected, and remains (Rule 8), thus\\nbecome\\n18. When both and a mute together, are\\ncast out before a, s preceding it is changed into\\no into ov, and a doubtful vowel is lengthened\\nbut and remain unchanged thus,\\nbecomes\\nbecomes\\nObs. 10. In some instances, and perhaps always in the nomi-\\nnative, this alteration takes place when only has been rejected\\nthus, from come\\n19. WJien two consonants meet, which are not\\neasily pronounced together, the pronunciation is\\nsometimes relieved by transposing them, or by in-\\nserting a third consonant between them thus,\\nby metathesis (40-8th)\\nby syncope by inserting (40 -3d)\\n48. Table of words to be corrected according\\nto the foregoing rules\\n(Let the pupil always give the rule for the correction.)\\n49. The marks punctuation in Greek are, the\\ncomma Q the colon and semi-colon the pe-\\nriod and mark of interrogation\\nov\\nvoacpi\\nuacpzo\\nPUNCTUATION.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0032.jp2"}, "33": {"fulltext": "8. WORDS. 15\\nPAET II.\\nETYMOLOGY.\\n50. Etymology treats of the different sorts of\\nwords, their various modifications, and their deri-\\nvations.\\n8. WORDS.\\n51. Words are certain articulate sounds used\\nby common consent as signs of our ideas.\\n1. In respect of Formation, words are either\\nPrimitive or Derivative Simple or Compound.\\nA Primitive word is one that comes from no other as,\\nA Denvative word is one that is derived from another word\\nas, from\\nA Simple, word is one that is not combined with any other\\nword as,\\nA Compound word is one that is made up of two or more\\nsimple words as, from and\\n2. In respect of Form, words are either De-\\nclinable or Indeclinable.\\nA Declinable word is one which undergoes certain changes of\\nform or termination, to express the different relations of gender,\\nnumber, case, person, fcc, in grammar, usually termed Acci-\\ndents.\\nObs. 1. In every declinable word, there are at least two parts,\\nthe root or stem, and the termination. The root remains un-\\nchanged, except by euphony, in all the different forms which the\\nword assumes. The termination is added to the root, and is\\nvaried, to produce these different forms.\\nObs. 2. The variation of nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and par-\\nticiples, is called Declension; that of verbs, Conjugation or Inflec-\\ntion.\\nAn Indeclinable word is one that undergoes no change of ter-\\nmination.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0033.jp2"}, "34": {"fulltext": "16 PARTS OF SPEECH. THE NOUN. 9, 10.\\n3. In respect of Signification and Use words\\nare divided into different classes, called Parts of\\nSpeech.\\nj 9. PARTS OF SPEECH.\\n52. The Parts of Speech in the Greek lan-\\nguage are eight viz.,\\n1. Noun or Substantive, Article, Adjective,\\nPronoun, Verb, declined.\\n2. Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, unde-\\nclined.\\nNote. Any part of speech used simply as a word, and spoken of, 13\\nregarded as a noun thus, is a dissyllable is an adverb i. e.\\nthe word ly i, the word written in Greek Thus\\nused it is indeclinable.\\nObs. 1. The participle, regarded by some as a distinct part of\\nepeech, properly belongs to, and forms a part of, the verb.\\nObs. 2. In Greek, the interjections are considered, by most\\nGrammarians, as adverbs.\\n10. THE NOUN.\\n53. A Noun is the name of any person, place,\\nor thing.\\nNouns are of two kinds, Proper and Common.\\n1. A Proper Noun is the name applied to an\\nindividual only as, Homer,\\nAthens.\\nAmong these may be included,\\n1st. Patronymics, or those which express one s parentage, or\\nfamily as, the son of Priam.\\n2d. Gentile, or Patrial, which denote one s country as,\\nan Athenian.\\n2. A Common Noun is a name applied to all\\nthings of the same sort as, a man\\na house a booh.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0034.jp2"}, "35": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a711. ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN. 17\\n54. Under this class may be ranged,\\n1st. Collective nouns, or nouns of multitude, which signify\\nmany in the singular number as, people.\\n2d. Abstract nouns, or the names of qualities; as,\\ngoodness.\\n3d. Diminutives, or nouns which express a diminution in the\\nsignification of the nouns from which they are formed as, nai-\\na little boy from\\n4th. Amplificative nouns, or those which denote an increase\\nin the signification of the nouns from which they are formed\\nas, a person who has a large head from\\nNote. A proper noun is the name of an individual only, and is used\\nto distinguish that individual from all others of the same class. A\\ncommon noun is the name of a class of objects, and is equally applicable\\nto all the individuals contained in that class.\\n11. ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN.\\n55. To Greek nouns belong Person, Gender,\\nNumber, and Case.\\n1. PERSON.\\n56. Person, in grammar, is the distinction of\\nnouns as used in discourse, to denote the speaker,\\nthe person or thing addressed, or the person or\\nthing spoken of. Hence,\\n57. There are three persons, called the First,\\nSecond, and Third.\\nA noun is in the first person, when it denotes the speaker or\\nwriter as, I Paul have written it.\\nA noun is in the second person, when it denotes the person or\\nthing addressed as, Paul, thou art beside thy-\\nself.\\nA noun is in the third person, when it denotes the person or\\nthing spoken of; as, Paul said.\\nNote. Person has nothing to do either with the form of a noun, or\\nwith its meaning but simply with the manner in which it is used.\\nHence, the same noun may at one time be in the first person; at\\nanother, in the second and at another, in the third, as in the preced-\\ning examples.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0035.jp2"}, "36": {"fulltext": "18 ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN. \u00c2\u00a711.\\n2. GENDER.\\n58. Gender means the distinction of nouns\\nwith regard to sex. There are three genders,\\nMasculine, Feminine, and Neuter.\\nOf. some nouns, the gender is determined by their signified\\ntion of others, by their termination.\\nThe Masculine gender belongs to all nouns which denote the\\nmale sex.\\nThe Feminine gender belongs to all nouns which denote the\\nfemale sex.\\nThe Neuter gender belongs to all nouns which are neither\\nmasculine nor feminine. Also to any term used simply as a\\nword as, 52, Note.\\nNouns which denote both males and females are said to be\\nof the Common gender, i. e. they are both masculine and femi-\\nnine.\\nThe gender of nouns not determined by their signification, is\\nusually to be ascertained by their termination, as will be noticed\\nunder each declension.\\nObs. 1. In Greek lexicons and grammars, the gender is indi-\\ncated by the article viz., 6 indicates the masculine, the femi-\\nnine, and to, the neuter as, the man the wo-\\nman the animal.\\n3. NUMBER.\\n59. Number is that property of a noun by\\nwhich it expresses one or more than one.\\nGreek nouns have three numbers, the Singular,\\nDual, and Plural. The Singular denotes one;\\nthe Plural more than one.\\nThe Dual denotes two, and is most commonly used in speak-\\ning of those things which are produced, or are usually spoken of,\\nin pairs.\\nObs. 2. In the oldest state of the Greek language, the dual is\\nnot used. It is not found in the JEolic dialect in the New\\nTestament in the Septuagint, nor in the Fathers. It is most\\ncommon in the Attic dialect, in which, however, the plural is\\noften used instead of it.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0036.jp2"}, "37": {"fulltext": "12. DECLENSION. 19\\n4. CASE.\\n60. Case is the state or condition of a noun\\nwith respect to the other words in a sentence.\\n61. Greek nouns have five cases; viz., the\\nNominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and\\nVocative.\\n1st. The Nominative case, for the most part, denotes the\\nname of an object simply, or as that of which something is\\naffirmed.\\n2d. The Genitive connects with the name of an object, the\\nidea of separation, origin, possession.\\n3d. The Dative represents the thing named as that to which\\nsomething is added, or to or for which something is said or done.\\n4th. The Accusative represents the thing named, as affected\\nor acted upon by something else, and also, as the object to which\\nsomething tends or relates.\\n5th. The Vocative is used when persons or things are ad-\\ndressed.\\nObs. 3. There is no Ablative case in Greek, as in Latin. Its\\nplace is supplied by the genitive and dative.\\nObs. 4. All the cases except the nominative, are called ob-\\nlique cases.\\n12. DECLENSION.\\n62. Declension is the mode of changing the\\nterminations of nouns, adjectives, c.\\n63. Words declined by cases, consist of two parts, the Boot\\nand the Termination.\\n64. The Root is that part which remains unchanged by in-\\nflection, except as required by the rules of euphony. It consists\\nof all that precedes the termination in the genitive singular thus\\nGen. -tjg, Roots,\\n65. The Termination is that part which, by its changes,\\nindicates the different cases and numbers.\\nQQ. Nouns, and also adjectives, pronouns, and participles,\\nare declined by annexing the terminations, or case-endings, to\\nthe root. Except the accusative in v, of the third declension,\\n102.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0037.jp2"}, "38": {"fulltext": "20\\nDECLENSION OF NOtJNS.\\n\u00c2\u00a713\\n67. In Greek, there are three declensions, cor-\\nresponding to the first, second, and third, in Latin.\\nThey are distinguished as follows\\nThe first declension has the genitive in or from feminine\\nnominatives or in ov from masculine nominatives in or\\nThe second has the genitive in ov, from or ov.\\nThe third has the genitive in whatever be the nominative.\\nThe difference between these declensions will be seen at one\\nview in the following\\n68. Table of Terminations.\\nFirst Declension.\\nSecond.\\nThird.\\nNom.\\nneut. ov,\\nGen.\\nov,\\nov,\\nov,\\nDat. a, rj,\\nVl\\nV,\\nAce.\\nav,\\nov,\\na, Exc. as 102, 69-2\\nVoc.\\na,\\nneut. ov.\\nDual.\\nlike nom. Exc. as 104\\nV. a,\\ns\\nG. D. aiv.\\nPlural.\\nOIV,\\nNom. ai,\\nneut. a,\\nneut. a,\\nGen.\\nDat.\\n(SI,\\nAce.\\nneut.\\nneut. a,\\nVoc.\\nneut. a.\\n01,\\n13. DECLENSION OF NOUNS.\\n69. GENERAL EULES.\\n1. The vocative for the most part in the singu-\\nlar, and always in the plural, is like the nomina-\\ntive.\\n2. Nouns of the neuter gender have the nomi-\\nnative, accusative, and vocative alike; and these\\ncases in the plural end always in a.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0038.jp2"}, "39": {"fulltext": "14. FIRST DECLENSION. 21\\n3. The dative singular ends always in i y either\\nannexed or written under.\\n4. The nominative, accusative, and vocative\\ndual are alike so also the genitive and dative.\\n14. FIRST DECLENSION.\\n70. The First Declension has four termina-\\ntions of the nominative singular; two feminine,\\na and two masculine, Of these, the\\nprincipal termination is\\nACCENTS.\\n71. Words in the first declension are accented\\naccording to the following\\n72. SPECIAL EULES.\\n1. The genitive plural, for the most part, has\\nthe circumflex on the final syllable.\\nExc. The exceptions are the feminine of adjectives and parti-\\nciples in not accented on the last syllable and the words\\nand which have\\n2. In the other cases, so far as the general rules\\npermit, the accent always remains on the same\\nsyllable as in the nominative.\\n3. When the accent in the nominative singular\\nis on the termination, all genitives and datives\\nhave the circumflex on the final syllable.\\nQUANTITY.\\n73. Nouns in a with the genitive in have a short, except\\nin the nominative dual and accusative plural, which are always\\nlong. Xouns which have the genitive in have a long. To\\nthis there are a few exceptions.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0039.jp2"}, "40": {"fulltext": "22\\nFIRST DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a715,16\\n74. Paradigm of Nouns in honour.\\nSing.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV. rtjtt-^.\\nDual.\\nN. A. V.\\nG. D.\\nPlural.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.\\n75.\\n15. SPECIAL RULES FOR FEMININE NOUNS.\\n1. Nouns in have the accusative singular in\\nav.\\n2. Nouns in a pure (4-4), and retain a in\\nall the cases of the singular.\\nObs. To these may be added a few words ending in a,\\nand a, circumflex, contracted for and a very few in and\\nSuch words have cc always long as, Gen.\\nfec.\\n76. EXAMPLES.\\n1.\\n3.\\nfriendship. a day.\\nG. G.\\nD. D.\\nV. V.\\nNote. In the dual and plural, all nouns of this declension are de-\\nclined like\\nMbW mwse.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.\\n77.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a716. SPECIAL RULES FOR MASCULINE NOUNS.\\n1. Nouns in and have the genitive in\\nand lose in the vocative.\\nOta. 1. Some nouns in have the genitive in ov or a; as,\\ngen. or a parricide\\nSome have only as, gen. Thomas.\\n2. Nouns in z have ee in the vocative those\\nin have either or a] as,\\nvoc voc. or", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0040.jp2"}, "41": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a717.\\nFIRST DECLENSION.\\n23\\nObs. 2. Nouns denoting a people or natior as, a\\nPersian compounds in derivatives froi\\nand also and have the\\nvocative in a.\\n3. In the other cases, masculine nouns are de-\\nclined like the feminine, to which their termina-\\ntions correspond.\\n78. EXAMPLES.\\n1.\\nSingular.\\n2. 3.\\n4.\\nAtrides.\\nCitizen.\\nYouth.\\nPythagoras.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.\\n-n,\\nThe dual and plural of masculine nouns are the same as the\\ndual and plural of\\nObs. Since the termination belongs also to the third de-\\nclension, it may be observed, that to the first pertain the nouns\\nin or as, the names of na-\\ntions as, nouns in derived from verbs as,\\nfrom compounds from I buy\\nI measure I rub, wear, train I sell and from\\nwords of this declension e. g. from\\nfrom\\n17. DIALECTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION.\\n79. Besides the regular terminations exhibited in the para-\\ndigms, many words are found in different cases declined accord-\\ning to some of the peculiar dialects. In the tables of termina-\\ntions, A. denotes Attic, I. Ionic, D. Done, M. JEolic but the\\ndistinctions are not strictly observed in every instance, the same\\npeculiarities sometimes occurring in two. and sometimes in three\\ndialects. The following words are exhiuited as examples, but it\\nis not to be inferred that each part of them will actually be found\\nin the Greek authors.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0041.jp2"}, "42": {"fulltext": "24\\nFIRST DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a718.\\nSingular.\\nNom.\\nD. cc,\\nI.\\nV\\nj D. He.\\nGen.\\nDat.\\nD.\\nD.\\nD.\\nD.\\nD.\\nD\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\\nAce.\\nD.\\nL iyr.\\nVoc.\\n-i D.\\nI.\\nj\\nNorn.\\nGer\\nD.\\nL.\\nPlural.\\nDat.\\nAce.\\nj I. eaff.\\nVoc.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0at.\\n-afc, I. rjg,\\nD.\\nThus, a wise person\\nof elides of uEneas\\nor in Thebes pernicious\\ngolden. For the genitive and dative in or\\nsee 8 31.\\n\u00c2\u00a718. CONTRACTIONS.\\n80. In a concourse of vowels, if two syllables\\nare converted into one, it is called a Contraction.\\nOf contractions there are two kinds\\n1. A contraction without a change of vowels is\\ncalled Synoeresis as, by syndesis,\\n2. A contraction with a change of vowels is\\ncalled Crasis as, toe, 9\\nObs. If the first of the concurrent vowels has an acute accent,\\nit is changed into a circumflex on the contracted syllable. If\\nthe first concurrent vowel has not an accent, the contracted sylla\\nble has not the circumflex, 28, 29.\\n3. In the rules for contractions generally, let it be remembered\\nthat\\nthe two short vowels,\\nhave their own long vowels,\\nand their own diphthongs,\\nNote. A eontraction is often made, but not always.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0042.jp2"}, "43": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a719,20.\\nSECOND DECLENSION.\\n25\\n19. CONTRACTIONS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION.\\n81. In the first declension, no contraction takes place unless\\nthe first of the concurrent vowels is o, or a short, and the nomi-\\nnative contracted is then declined regularly.\\nKTJLES.\\n1. Ea not after is changed into as,\\nearth, G. D. fec. like\\ngolden, G. D. c.\\nMercury, G. D. G.\\n2. In and other concurrent vowels, strike\\nout the first as,\\npurple, G. D. c.\\nsimple, G. o.\\nMinerva, G. D. fec, *l 5.\\nObs.\\nApelles, G. D. c.\\n82. EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE.\\nthe moon,\\na sophist,\\na dove.\\n^Eneas.\\na bridge,\\nfrenzy.\\na harper.\\nAnax-\\nagoras.\\nthe tongue.\\nthe forum.\\nan artist.\\npleasure.\\nan angle.\\nforce.\\na\\navia,\\na wrestler.\\nNote. The learner should decline some of the words in this table ac-\\ncording to the different dialects and, in like manner, in the second and\\nthird declensions, according to their dialects.\\npeace,\\nwisdom,\\nblack,\\nmiserable,\\njustice,\\ncounsel,\\na sword,\\nhigh-\\nminded.\\n\u00c2\u00a720. SECOND DECLENSION.\\n83. The second declension has two termina-\\ntions of the nominative singular og and ov ov\\nis always neuter, og never.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0043.jp2"}, "44": {"fulltext": "26\\nSECOND DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a720.\\nACCENTS.\\n84. Words in the second declension are ac-\\ncented according to the following\\nSPECIAL RULES.\\n1. As far as the general rules permit (13, c.)\\nthe accent remains on the same syllable in the ob-\\nlique cases, as in the nominative. To this rule the\\ngenitive plural is not an exception, as in the first\\ndeclension.\\nExc. 1. The Attic forms in and are accented as in the\\ncommon form i. e. the final long syllable permits the accent to\\nremain on the antepenult. See 88,\\n2. When the accent, in the nominative singular,\\nis on the final syllable, all genitives and datives\\nhave the circumflex on the final syllable.\\nExc. 2. Except the genitive singular of nouns in as,\\ngen.\\n85. EXAMPLES.\\nParadigm\\nof\\nthe Masculine and Feminine JSiouns in og\\\\\\nb the speech.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\n1ST.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.\\nA. V.\\nG. D.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.\\nIn the same manner also are declined nouns in ov, observing\\nthe second general rule (69-2) thus,\\n2. Paradigm of Neuter Nouns in a measure,\\nSingular.\\nG.\\nD. -op,\\nV.\\nDual.\\nV.\\nQ.\\nPlural.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0044.jp2"}, "45": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a721.\\nSECOND DECLENSION.\\n86.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a721. DIALECTS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.\\nSingular.\\nNorn. Gen. Ace. Voc.\\nGen.\\nA.\\nI. D.\\nPlural.\\nNom. Dat. Ace. Voc.\\nII. D. D.\\n87. Neuter nouns in the Attic dialect have the same termi-\\nnations with nouns in og except that is substituted for\\nThus it will appear that the Attic form, in which is changed\\ninto ov into and into is the principal variation in\\nthis declension. Let it be observed, however, that a long, and\\nbefore og, are changed into before as, Attic a\\nshort remains unchanged; as, or it is contracted\\nwith the into as, For the genitive and\\ndative in or qiiv, see 31.\\n88. EXAMPLES OF THE\\nATTIC DECLENSION\\nOF NOUNS IN\\nSingular.\\nfor\\nfor y\u00c2\u00abo\u00c2\u00a3. for\\na hare.\\ntemple.\\na building.\\nG.\\nD.\\nor\\nor\\nV. or\\nor\\nV.\\nG. D.\\nPlural.\\nV.\\nG.\\nD.\\nObs. The Attics did not decline all nouns in in this man\\nner, but only a very few. The same forms occur also in the Ionic", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0045.jp2"}, "46": {"fulltext": "23\\nSECOND DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a722.\\nand Doric writers. After this form, the Attics often declined\\nnouns which otherwise belong to the third declension as,\\nAce. for from G. Ace. for\\nra f from\\n22. CONTRACTIONS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.\\n89. In the second declension contractions are\\nseldom used, and never, unless the first of the con-\\ncurrent vowels is short.\\nRULES.\\nEule I. Two short vowels concurring are\\nchanged into\\nExcept in the vocative singular, never contracted.\\nKule II. A short vowel before a diphthong,\\nor before a vowel not short, is rejected.\\n90. EXAMPLES.\\n6 voog, contracted the mind.\\nSingular.\\nDual. Plural.\\nN.\\nRule 1 vovg\\nV.\\n2\\nvol\\nG.\\n2\\n2\\nG. 2\\nD.\\n2\\nG. D.\\nD. 2\\nA.\\n1\\n2\\n2\\nV.\\n1\\nV. 2\\nvol\\ncontracted the hone.\\nSingular.\\nDual. Plural.\\nN.\\nN. A. V. _\\nG.\\nG.\\nD.\\nG D\\nD.\\nA.\\nV.\\nV.\\nDecline and contract in the same manner, navigation\\na stream down a nephew.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0046.jp2"}, "47": {"fulltext": "23.\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n29\\n91. WORDS FOR PRACTICE.\\na messenger,\\nan eagle.\\na combat,\\na prize,\\na vine,\\nsilver.\\nsilver,\\nwork,\\nan apple,\\nthe south wind,\\na house,\\na child.\\na rose\\niron,\\nan army,\\na burden,\\ncopper,\\ngold.\\n23. THIRD DECLENSION.\\n92. The third declension has seven termina-\\ntions of the nominative singular, a, t,\\nit has all genders, and increases the noun by\\none syllable in the oblique cases.\\nNote. Nouns in and \\\\p are considered as ending in (8-6).\\n93. The root, seldom unchanged in the nomi-\\nnative, is always found in the genitive singular by\\nomitting og (64).\\nThe oblique cases, for the most part, are formed\\nby adding the terminations (68) to the root.\\nACCENTS.\\n94. Words in the third declension are accent-\\ned according to the following\\nSPECIAL RULES.\\n1. The accent, in the oblique cases, remains on\\nthe accented syllable of the nominative, as far as\\nthe general rules permit, 13 17.\\nExc. 1. But and in the vocative,\\nthrow the accent back on the penult; as, fcc. See\\n104, Exc.\\nExc. 2. When the genitive singular ends in instead of\\n(98-4), there is no change of accent, and the genitive plural is\\naccented as the genitive singular as,\\n2. Words of one syllable in the nominative sin-\\ngular, accent the final syllable of the genitive and", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0047.jp2"}, "48": {"fulltext": "80\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a723.\\ndative in all numbers and in these, the final sylla-\\nble long has the circumflex. So also\\nand syncopated substantives in 99-4:\\nExc. 3. Except a torch a slave a jackal\\nthe head the ear a child; a\\nmoth a Trojan a burning light which in\\nthe genitive plural, and in the genitive and dative dual, have the\\nacute accent on the first syllable.\\nExcept also participles of one syllable as, c.\\nand the dual and plural of viz.\\n3. The vocative of nouns in ccvg, evg,\\nand has the circumflex on the final syllable;\\nas, c.\\n95. Nouns in the third declension are declined\\nas follows\\n1. Paradigm of Masculine and Feminine Nouns 6 the\\nwild beast.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nN. d\\n1\\nG. \u00ce\u00b7\u00cf\u0081-6\u00cf\u0082,\\nN. A. V.\\nG.\\nD.\\nD.\\nG. D.\\nA. tjQ-ug,\\nV.\\nV.\\nNeuter nouns are declined in the same manner,\\nobserving the 2d general rule, 69-2.\\n2. Paradigm of Neuter Nouns a tribunal.\\nDual.\\nSingular.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.\\nV.\\nG. D.\\nPlural.\\nG.\\nD. 44-8.\\nV.\\nNote. In the declension of nouns which take roc, or in the\\ngenitive, the Rule 44-8 must be particularly attended to in the dative\\npluraL", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0048.jp2"}, "49": {"fulltext": "24, 25. THIRD DECLENSION. 31\\n24. FORMING THE GENITIVE.\\n96. GENERAL RULES.\\n1. If the noun does\\nto the nominative\\nnot end in\\nas,\\nadd or\\na poean,\\nhoney,\\na moth,\\n6 fire,\\n6 Xenophon,\\nthe body,\\nG.\\nRoot\\n2. If the noun ends in q y reject q, and add\\nTog, Sog, or og as,\\nN. 6 a hero, reject G. Root\\nb a caldron,\\na torch,\\na bird, 6\u00cf\u0081\u00ce\u00bd\u00ce\u00b9\\na ruler,\\nstorm,\\nWhether or is to be added, can be learned\\nonly by practice and consulting the dictionary.\\n97. Exception. But if the noun ends in og y\\ninsert before it. All these are neuter as,\\na wall, G. Root\\napart,\\na mountain,\\n25. THE PENULT.\\n98. If the final syllable of the nominative con-\\ntain a long vowel or diphthong, it is commonly\\nshortened in the root by the following\\nRULES.\\n1. A diphthong casts away its subjunctive vow-\\nel; as,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0049.jp2"}, "50": {"fulltext": "82\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a725.\\n6 the king, G.\\n6 the ox,\\n?j the ship, Doric,\\n2. A long vowel is changed into its own short\\nas.\\nRoot\\n6\\n6\\nthe shepherd,\\nLatona,\\nthe rule,\\nthe dragon,\\nhaving struck,\\nG.\\nRoot,\\n3. l and whether long or short, are changed\\ninto as,\\nthe power, G. Root,\\nthe flock,\\nTHE GENITIVE IN C0\u00c2\u00a3.\\n4. Nouns in eg and when they change c and\\nv into and likewise nouns in take the Attic\\ninstead of og in the genitive as,\\nthe shepherd, G. Root,\\nthe city,\\nthe elbow,\\n99. OBSERVATIONS.\\n1. Neuters in and have the genitive in as, G.\\nThe Ionic and Doric writers retain in the oblique\\ncases of nouns in and as, G. But\\neven in these, the dative is usually contracted into as,\\nAlso nouns in sometimes have the Attic instead\\nof in the genitive and dative dual.\\n2. All Greek words ending in which take in the genitive,\\nappear to have originally ended in and the at length was\\ndropped for the sake of euphony; 46-16. But to maintain the\\nformer quantity of the nominative, the doubtful vowel was made\\nlong, and the short vowels were changed into their own diph-\\nthongs thus, the original terminations\\nwere changed into\\nBut the oblique cases, regularly formed from the original nomi-\\nnative, remain unchanged as in the following examples", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0050.jp2"}, "51": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a726. THIRD DECLENSION. 33\\nNom. originally. Gen. Root.\\n3. Instead of rejecting before in the nominative, sometimes\\nthe was dropped and the retained; and hence the double\\nforms of the nominative which sometimes occur: as, or\\nor\\n4. Certain nouns in having in the genitive, are con-\\ntracted by syncope in the genitive and dative singular, and in the\\ndative plural (106-R. 2), and throw the accent in the genitive\\nand dative singular on the final syllable (94-2) as,\\na father,\\na mother,\\nSo also, a man, (4*7-19.)\\nNote. The nouns thus contracted are a father a mo-\\nther a daughter; the belly Ceres; and\\na man. This last rejects in all the cases and numbers except\\nthe vocative singular.\\n\u00c2\u00a726. THE GENITIVE OF ADJECTIVES.\\n100. Adjectives of the third declension form the genitive by\\nthe same rules as substantives but some form it from the mas-\\nculine, and others from the neuter gender; and the genitive\\nformed from either gender, is also the genitive of the other. The\\ngender from which the genitive is formed may be ascertained by\\nthe following\\nSPECIAL RULES.\\n1. Adjectives in eg and ovg, form the genitive\\nfrom the nominative masculine as,\\nl Gen. of both, Root,\\nU.Slnovg, j u fi(W\\nSS.\\n2. Adjectives not in eg or ovg, form the genitive\\nfrom the nominative neuter as,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0051.jp2"}, "52": {"fulltext": "81 THIRD DECLENSION. \u00c2\u00a727.\\nMasc. Neut. Gen. of both. Root.\\ntender,\\ntrue,\\nblack,\\ngraceful,\\nObs. 1 This rule applies universally to participles of the third\\ndeclension, and these have their genitive always in as,\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\\nN. Masc. Neut. Gen. of both. Root.\\nFor the declension of adjectives and participles, see 46, 47\\n27. THE ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR.\\n101. The Accusative singular of masculine acd\\nfeminine nouns commonly ends in a. But,\\n102. SPECIAL RULES.\\nRule 1. The genitive in pure, from\\navg, and ovg, changes of the nominative into\\nthus,\\nNora. Gen.\\na serpent,\\na bunch of grapes,\\na ship, Doric,\\nan ox,\\nLikewise and have as,\\nNom. Gen. Ace. Root.\\na stone,\\nfavour,\\nExc. But Jupiter, has and the name\\nof one of the Graces, has and the skin, has\\nseldom\\nRule 2. Words in and compounds of\\nafoot, have aorv; as,\\nAce.\\nRoot.\\nvavv,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0052.jp2"}, "53": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a728. THIRD DECLENSION 35\\nNom. Gen. Ace. Root.\\nor\\n-dogj or\\nRule 3. Words in ig and vg not accented on\\nthe last syllable, with the genitive in og not pure,\\nhave a or v; as,\\nNom. Gen. Ace. Root.\\nor\\nor\\nSo also, or\\nObs. Such words, in prose, have almost always v, seldom a;\\nbut in poetry, commonly a, seldom v.\\n28. THE VOCATIVE SINGULAR.\\n103. The vocative singular is for the most part\\nlike the nominative. But,\\n104. SPECIAL RULES.\\nRule 1. A short vowel in the genitive, from a\\nlong vowel of the nominative, remains short in the\\nvocative; as,\\nNom. Gen. Voc. Root\\na mother, -og,\\nHector,\\nExc. But nouns accented on the last syllable, have the voca-\\ntive long as, Gen. Voc. except\\nand which have the vocative and\\nwith the accent thrown back.\\nand with the long vowel in the\\ngenitive, have the final vowel short in the vocative, and the ac-\\ncent thrown back thus,\\nRule 2. Nouns in eg, vg, and tvg, reject g in the\\nvocative; as,\\nV. V.\\nLikewise, and Voc", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0053.jp2"}, "54": {"fulltext": "36 THIRD DECLENSION. \u00c2\u00a729.\\nRule 3. Feminines in and make the voca-\\ntive in ol as,\\nV. V.\\nRule 4. Nouns in (99-2), nave tlie\\nvocative in av those in have the voca-\\ntive in as,\\nNom. Gen. Voc. Root.\\nAjax, Alav,\\nSimois,\\nNote. In proper names, however, the poets often reject v; as, Ala\\nfor\\nObs. has in the vocative and in addressing\\nthe deity, has ava otherwise\\nRule 5. In adjectives, the vocative masculine\\nis like the nominative neuter as,\\nMasc. Neut. V. Masc.\\nalso\\nNote. This rule does not apply to participles. These follow the gen-\\neral rule; as, N. V.\\n29. THE DATIVE PLURAL.\\n105. The dative plural is formed by adding\\nto the root. Besides the changes required by the\\nrules of Euphony (44-8), other changes are to be\\nnoticed under the following\\n106. special rules.\\nRule 1. Nouns in and insert\\nbefore ^jnthe dative plural; as,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0054.jp2"}, "55": {"fulltext": "29.\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n37\\nthe king, G. D. PI.\\nvav the ship, Doric.\\nthe cow,\\nExc. But a foot, has\\nRule 2. Nouns in after a syncope,\\nhave aoi (99-4) as,\\nG. by syncope,\\nSo\\nExc. But G. has sometimes\\n107. Examples of the preceding Rules,\\nIn the following examples, note the difference between them and\\nthe example 95-1, and give the rule for the difference.\\nSingular.\\npasturer.\\ncow.\\na divinity.\\nlion.\\nshepherd\\nN.\\nG.\\nD.\\nA.\\nV.\\nDual.\\nN.A.V.\\nG.D.\\nPlural.\\nN.\\nG.\\nD.\\nA.\\nV.\\nSingular.\\ni\\ncity.\\nsow.\\nswift.\\nstrife.\\nfather.\\nN.\\nG.\\nD.\\nA.\\nV.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0055.jp2"}, "56": {"fulltext": "88\\nTHIED DECLENSION.\\n30.\\nDual.\\n.A.V.\\nG.D.\\nPlural.\\nN.\\nG.\\nCV-COV\\nD.\\nA.\\nV.\\n30. DIALECTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.\\n108. From the variety of terminations in nouns of this de-\\nclension, it is impossible to exhibit them in one concise table.\\nBut the general principles are The nominative and vocative At-\\ntic are alike, The Attic genitive is in instead of and\\nThe Ionic has in the penult, through the oblique eases,\\ninstead of and a and with the poets makes or instead\\nof in the dative plural.\\nSingular.\\nNona.\\nGen.\\nD.\\njx.\\nDat.\\n-u.\\nAce.\\n-IV.\\nJ\\nPlural.\\nNom. and Yoc.\\n-hq. or\\nL\\nGen.\\nDat.\\nj\\n-aval,\\nj\\nVoc\\nfvq.\\nAce.\\nrj\\nThus, Gen. of a lip, Dor. Voc. Masc.\\nAttic as, unfortunate old\\nman Dat. pi. Ion. to hands Accus. La~\\ntona, Ion. Gen. of a city, Attic Voc.\\nmodesty Attic", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0056.jp2"}, "57": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a731, 32. THIRD DECLENSION. 39\\n31. THE PARAGOGIC or\\n109. Sometimes, and particularly in Epic poetry, the sylla-\\nble or annexed to the word, is used for the genitive or da-\\ntive, both singular and plural. It is annexed, in the\\nFirst declension, by changing a into e. g.\\nor\\nSecond declension, by changing og or ov into e.g.\\nThird declension, by changing og, genitive sog, into as,\\n110. A few deviations from this mode of annexing the oc-\\ncur. This form of the genitive and dative appears to have had\\noriginally an adverbial signification like the endings\\nTo render it more definite, the preposition was often prefixed, as,\\nnear the ship, or ships and lastly, it was used\\nfor a case without a preposition, in the same manner as the or-\\ndinary forms of the genitive and dative thus,\\nthe breadth of the fan, confiding in valour.\\n111. The termination appears to be an appendage of a\\nsimilar nature, but is found only in the genitive; as,\\nfrom heaven. So for for c.\\n32. GENDERS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.\\n112. The Genders of substantives of the third declension,\\nso far as determined by the termination, are as follows\\n113. RULES.\\n1. Nouns in and w are al-\\nways masculine as,\\nGen.\\n2. Nouns in and\\nverbals in are always feminine as,\\nsvg\\nag\\na clasp\\na statue\\nvv\\n6\\n6\\na paian\\na harbour", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0057.jp2"}, "58": {"fulltext": "40\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a733.\\na torch\\nGen\\nwickedness\\na ship\\nparsimony\\nverbal\\nnature\\n3. Nouns\\nin\\nog, and are\\nalways neuter.\\na\\nm\\na tribunal\\nGen.\\nhoney\\na flock\\n7\u00ce\u00a4\u00cf\u0089\u00ce\u00ad\u00ce\u00bf\u00cf\u0082\\nflesh\\na wall\\na sword\\nObs. 1. Nouns of other terminations are so varied in gender,\\nthat no general rule can be given respecting them.\\nObs. 2. Dialect frequently varies the gender in all the declen-\\nsions. Thus, is masculine in Attic, otherwise feminine\\nand so of others.\\n114.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 33. WORDS FOR PRACTICE ON THE PRECED-\\nING RULES, FROM 20-27.\\nDecline the words in the following list accent them give the rule\\nfor the genitive and the accent, and for the other cases when they vary\\nfrom the example dtjQ.\\nb\\n1\u00c2\u00b0)\\nthe old man.\\nthe nightingale.\\n6\\nthe elbow.\\nthe air (104-1).\\nTO\\nthe hope.\\nTO\\nthe strife.\\n8\\nthe helmet.\\nthe luave.\\nthe month.\\nthe flower.\\nthe race.\\nthe ray.\\nthe poor man.\\nthe mountain.\\nthe mule.\\nthe flame.\\n\u00cf\u0087\u00ce\u00ae\u00ce\u00bd_\\nthe goose.\\nthe action.\\nn\\nthe cough.\\nthe flesh.\\nthe snow.\\nthe thong.\\nthe pine.\\nthe seer.\\nthe goat.\\nthe havm.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0058.jp2"}, "59": {"fulltext": "34, 35. THIRD DECLENSION. 41\\n34. CONTRACTIONS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.\\n115. In the oblique cases in the third declen-\\nsion, there is no contraction, unless the first of the\\nconcurrent vowels is either short, or a doubtful\\ntaken as short.\\nIn verbs and in some other contractions, the first of the con-\\ncurrent vowels is sometimes long.\\n35. GENERAL RULES.\\n116. The following Rules are universal, being applicable, not\\nonly to contractions of the third declension, but also to those of\\nverbs, and of all cases in which concurrent vowels admit of con-\\ntraction, except such as fall under the rules for contractions in the\\n1st and 2d declensions, 81 and 89. Concurrent vowels are con-\\ntracted as follows\\n1. A short vowel with the same, is contracted\\ninto its own diphthong as, into oo into\\nExc. 1. In the third declension, of the dual is contracted\\ninto\\nII. A short vowel with the other short, is con-\\ntracted into ov as, os or into ov.\\nIII. A short vowel with is contracted into\\nits own long vowel as, sec into oa into\\nExc. 2. But pure into a.\\nIV. A short vowel with is contracted by Sy-\\nnceresis as, into into\\nV. before a long vowel or a diphthong, is re-\\njected.\\nExc. 3. But in verbs, is contracted into y.\\nVI. 1. with a long vowel, is contracted into\\nas, into into\\n2. with a diphthong, the prepositive vowel\\nbeing rejected, is contracted by Synceresis as, ooi\\ninto c.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0059.jp2"}, "60": {"fulltext": "42 THIKD DECLENSION. \u00c2\u00a736.\\nExc, 4. But and being rejected, are contracted by\\nCrasis into ovg and ovv.\\nVII. 1. with o, or is contracted into\\naSj oro or into\\n2. A with a vowel, not or #_, is contracted into\\na as, into c.\\n065. 1. A before a diphthong is contracted with the preposi-\\ntive vowel only, the subjunctive being rejected.\\nObs. 2. In contraction by crasis, is never rejected, but is writ-\\nten under: except in and 119, Exc. 3.\\nObs. 3. Neuters in pure and reject in the oblique\\ncases, and then contract the concurrent vowels.\\nVIII. If the former of two vowels is t or v, or\\na long vowel, the latter is rejected; as, contract-\\ned\\nNote. and safe, when a contraction occurs, are contracted\\nby the foregoing rules; thus, VII. 1. VII. 1.\\nVII. 2.; VII. 1.; III.\\n\u00c2\u00a736. EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING RULES FOR\\nCONTRACTIONS.\\n117. The following list comprises all the concurrent vowels\\nthat usually admit of contraction. Contract them and give the\\nrules.\\n23 34\\n24 35\\n25 36 oy\\n26 37\\n27 38\\n28 39\\n29 40\\n30 41 rare\\n31 42\\n32 03/ 43\\n33\\n1\\n12\\n2 \u00c2\u00abe\\n13\\n3\\n14\\n4\\n15 pure\\n5 Ci\u00e2\u0082\u00ac\\n16\\n6\\n17\\n7\\n18\\n8\\n19\\n9\\n20 cat\\n10\\n21\\n11 ay\\n22", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0060.jp2"}, "61": {"fulltext": "THIRD DECLENSION.\\n43\\nWORDS FOR TRACTICE.\\n1 1 8. In the following words, contract the concurrent rowels, give\\nthe rule for eacJ\\ncontraction,\\nthe accent where\\nrequired after\\ncontraction, and\\ngive\\nthe reason for the change.\\n(exc. 2)\\nqt/.Ho\\nqi\\n8\u00ce\u00b7\u00ce\u00bb\u00cf\u008c\u00ce\u00b7\u00cf\u0084\u00ce\u00b5\\nOCfll\\n116.\\n9\u00ce\u00b45.3\\nqilt oi\\n\u00c2\u00a737.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.\\n119. In the inflection of declinable words, the vowels\\nthat concur are the final vowel of the root, and the first vowel or\\ndiphthong of the termination. In the examples of contracts that\\nfollow, as well as in the table of contract verbs (258), the hyphen\\ndoes not separate the termination from the root, but that part\\nof the root not affected by contraction, from the rest of the word.\\nBy this means the concurrent vowels are brought together, and\\nthe change made by contraction, is rendered more obvious.\\n120. Concurrent vowels are not always con-\\ntracted in the third declension, but only as direct-\\ned by the following\\nSPECIAL .RULES.\\n1. The accusative plural assumes the contrac-\\ntion of the nominative thus,\\nocc Q", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0061.jp2"}, "62": {"fulltext": "u\\nTHIRD DECLENSION,\\n87\\nExc. But pure is contracted into (116, Exc. 2); as,\\n2. The genitive in aog, from og, or in\\noog, not from and also neuters in ag pure and\\ncontract the concurrent vowels in all cases.\\n121. Example of the Genitive in socfrom\\ntlie trireme.\\nSingular\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nV.\\nG.\\nG.\\nD.\\nG. D.\\nD.\\nV.\\n122. Example of the Genitive\\nin -Om\\nthe wall.\\nSingular\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nV.\\nG.\\nG.\\nD.\\nG. D.\\nD.\\nV.\\nV.\\n123.\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0Thei\\nrenitive in n\\nthe echo.\\not from\\nSingular\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\n1ST.\\nG.\\nG.\\nG. D.\\nD.\\nV. r\\nV.\\n124. Obs. 1. Nouns in and have the singular only, of\\nthe third declension. The dual and plural are of the second, 136\\n-2 (4). Hence the contraction takes place only in the singular,\\nas in the above example. The accusative in 6a contracted\\nfrom the nominative in has the circumflex according to rule\\n(80 Obs.) as, contr. The same contraction from\\nthe nominative in has the acute; as in the example 123.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0062.jp2"}, "63": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a737\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n45\\n125. Examples of Neuters in pure and (116, Obs. 3.)\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0a\\nthe horn.\\nSingular.\\nN. A. V.\\nG.\\n-a\\n-wv\\nthe flesh.\\nSingular.\\nA. V.\\nG. jr.\\nD. -a D.\\nDual.\\nV.\\nG. D.\\nPlural.\\nV. -a in\\nG. G.\\n126. 3. The genitive in tog or not from\\neg, og) and also the genitive in tog, contract only\\nthe dative singular and the nominative, accusative,\\nand vocative plural. Those in tv g contract also\\nthe nominative dual.\\n127. Examples of the Genitive not from or\\n6 the king.\\nD.\\nDual.\\nN.A.V.\\nG. D.\\nPlural.\\nN. A. V.\\nG.\\nD.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\ns.\\nV.\\n(98-4)\\nG.\\nD.\\nG.O.\\nD.\\nA.\\n-t a\\nV.\\nV.\\nExc. But nouns in after a vowel, contract also the genitive\\nand accusative singular, and the genitive plural thus,\\nthe measure.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nV.\\nG.\\nG.\\nP.\\nG. D.\\nD.\\n-a\\n(116, exc. 2)\\nV.\\n\u00c2\u00ab2b\\nV.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0063.jp2"}, "64": {"fulltext": "46\\nTHIRD DECLENSION.\\n\u00c2\u00a737.\\nIn this way has genitive Ace.\\nand in the accusative plural, has contracted for\\nand so of others.\\nthe city.\\nSingular. Dual. N\\nV.\\nG.\\nD. G. D.\\nV.\\nThe Ionics always decline words in genitive as,\\nlike but they make the dative in\\n128. Example of the Genitive in cog.\\n6, the calf.\\nPlural.\\nN.\\nG.\\nD.\\nA.\\nV.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nf V.\\nG.\\nG.\\nG. D.\\nD. -ici\\nV.\\nV.\\nNote. The words declined in this way, besides are the\\nwood-worm b, the tiger 6 the husband wrath\\nthe keel; and the uncontracted a sheep; some proper\\nnames; as, and adjectives in tg, which have in the genitive\\nOther nouns in not inserting a consonant are declined like\\n129. Exc. Adjectives in neuter v, have the common geni-\\ntive and do not contract in the plural. 152.\\n130. 4. Nouns in vg yog, and ovg oog, contract\\nonly the nominative, accusative, and vocative plu-\\nral; as,\\nthe fish.\\nDual.\\nN. A. V.\\nG. D.\\nSingular.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.\\nSo 6 the ox,\\nG.\\nPlural.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.\\nV. Plural, contr.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0064.jp2"}, "65": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a737. THIRD DECLENSION. 47\\n131. 5. Comparatives in reject in the ac-\\ncusative singular, and in the nominative, accusative,\\nand vocative plural, and then contract the concur-\\nrent vowels as,\\nbetter.\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\nM. F. M. F. M. F.\\nG.\\nD.\\n-oa,\\nV.\\nV.\\nG. D.\\nG.\\nV.\\nV. Plural, Neuter,\\n132. The nominative contracted, is then de-\\nclined regularly; as,\\nspring, by contraction G. D. c.\\na stone, G. fec.\\n133. Obs. 2. When vowels concur in the oblique cases after\\nthe contraction of the nominative, they are moreover contracted\\nin the usual way thus, Hercules, is contracted into\\nand then declined and contracted as follows\\nG. contr.\\nD.\\nV.\\n134. 7. In adjectives, the masculine ana femi-\\nnine, in the oblique cases, assume the contraction\\nof the neuter thus,\\nmade of honey.\\nNom.\\ncontr.\\nGen.\\nhonoured.\\nNom.\\ncontr.\\nGen. c", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0065.jp2"}, "66": {"fulltext": "43\\nTHIKD DECLENSION.\\n38, 39\\n135.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a738. WORDS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION TO\\nBE DECLINED AND CONTRACTED.\\nB. The following method of practising on these exercises will\\ndirect the student in his preparation. E. g. Form the genitive\\ngive the rule decline; what cases contract the concurrent vowels?\\ngive the rule decline and contract, giving the rule for each contraction.\\nThis exercise should be continued till the student is perfectly ready and\\nat ease in the whole process.)\\npious,\\nbetter.\\na spike of corn,\\nmore excellent.\\na shepherd,\\nparsimony,\\nold age.\\nAchilles.\\nexcellent,\\ntrue.\\na mouse,\\na part,\\nmore.\\na painter.\\nPericles,\\na fish.\\nmore.\\na city.\\nthe morning,\\ndeep.\\nbetter,\\npersuasion,\\nsweet,\\na husband.\\ncustom,\\na horn.\\nmodesty.\\na limit,\\na wall,\\nan oak.\\na murderer,\\nimpudent.\\na mountain,\\ndiction,\\nold.\\nindigent.\\nDiodes,\\na word,\\na runner.\\n136.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a739. IRREGULAR NOUNS.\\n1. Some nouns have one gender in the singular, and another\\nin the plural as,\\n(1.) the chariot-seat; 6 the lever; 6\\nTartarus; 6 the neck; 6 d the\\ndecree the back 6 the oar 6 the\\nyoke, are neuter in the plural; as, c. The three\\nlast have also neuter forms in the singular, as, c, but\\nwith a variation of meaning.\\n(2.) the bond 6 the lamp 6 the\\ncircle; 6 the thigh; 6 corn; the sta-\\ntion have both a masculine and neuter form m the plural as,\\nand c.\\n(3.) the way, has at and\\n(4.) To the stadium, has and\\n(5.) a woman; a way a city a\\nhand, feminines, have and\\nin the nominative and accusative dual.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0066.jp2"}, "67": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a739. THIRD DECLENSION. 49\\n2. Some have more than one declension thus,\\n(1.) Some are of the 1st and 2d, as, and\\na crown some, of the 1st and 3d, as, -ov and\\nMoses. 2d and 3d, as, -ov, and to\\n-ov, and a witness.\\n(2.) Some have more than one declension, in the oblique\\ncases, from one form of the nominative thus, gen. -ov\\n1st, and 3d, Thales -ov 1st, and and\\n3d, Mars b and darkness a chariot\\nmercy pickle an eye have -ov the 2d, and\\nthe 3d is used mostly in the dual, c. 3d, and\\nG. and D. plural 2d.\\n(3.) Some have the forms of different declensions, in certain\\ncases, though not regularly declined through all the cases thus,\\n1st and 3d in the ace. sing. ace. and De-\\nmosthenes Socrates, ace. and\\nfortitude, gen. (1st), dat. (3d) a battle, dat.\\nvrj and (1st and 3d) a slave, 2d, dat. pi. av-\\n3d, Horn. b, laughter, G. ace\\nand after the Attic form of the 2d declension (88).\\n(4.) Feminine nouns in and of the third declension,\\nhave generally the form of the second as if from in the dual\\nand plural, when their meaning is such as to admit of their being\\nused in these numbers.\\n3. Some, from one form of the nominative, have different\\nforms in the oblique cases, in the same declension thus,\\na tiger, has and Justice, has and\\nCharon, has and a knee, and\\na spear, have and and\\nooo the skin, have two forms of the nominative, as well as of\\nthe oblique cases, both of the 3d.\\n4. Some appear to form the oblique cases from obsolete nomi-\\nnatives as, a liver a day food\\na well fat a head ointment\\na bait a benefit fatness water\\ndirt the knee a spear, have the genitive in\\nas if from nominatives in thus,\\nan ear, milk, a woman,\\nvoc. gen. ov, dat. ov ace. voc. ov.\\n5. Some are indeclinable, i. e. have no change of termination\\nin the different cases such as,\\n(1.) Names of letters; as, c. (2.) The\\ncardinal numbers from to (3.) Poetic nouns whieb", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0067.jp2"}, "68": {"fulltext": "50 THIRD DECLENSION. 40, 41.\\nhave lost the last syllable by apocope as, for (4.)\\nForeign names which are not susceptible of Greek inflexions a\\nb c.\\n137.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a740. DEFECTIVE NOUNS.\\n1. Some nouns have no plural; as, fire;\\noil earth; shame; salt.\\n2. Some have no singular; as, victuals;\\nAthens; dreams and the names of festivals; as,\\nPanathenma.\\n3. Some occur in one case only, and are called monoptotes;\\nas, friend, gods the advan-\\ntage.\\n4. Some have only two cases (diptotes) as, nom. ace.\\na lion; nom. voc. Jupiter the vision; nom.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0and ace.\\n5. Some have only three (triptotes) as, nom. a wit-\\nness, ace. dat. plur.\\n6. The Poets sometimes by apocope (40-6th) cut off the final\\nletter or syllable from a word as, for a head.\\nSuch words are then indeclinable (136-5).\\n41. NOUNS OF PECULIAR SIGNIFICATION.\\n138. Some nouns have peculiar significations, according to\\ntheir terminations as,\\n1. Masculine Patronymics, (53-1, 1st) commonly in or\\nas, Peleus, Pelides, or the son of Pele-\\nus Saturn, or the son of Saturn.\\n2. feminine Patronymics, commonly in and and\\nas, and from Latona\\nfrom from from\\nc.\\n3. Gentile Nouns, (53-1, 2d) commonly in or\\nmasculine and or feminine as, Sparta,\\na Spartan; Samaria, a\\nwoman of Samaria. But many of these are declined as regular\\nadjectives.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0068.jp2"}, "69": {"fulltext": "42.\\nTHE ARTICLE.\\nSI\\n4. Diminutives, (53-2, 3d) commonly in or 1\u00ce\u00bf\u00cf\u0082\\nas, a father, a little father (a term of endear-\\nment) a boy or girl, a little boy or girl,\\na young daughter love, a little lover.\\n5. Atnpli fixatives, (53-2, 4th) commonly in or as,\\na house, a large building bold,\\na bully.\\n6. Verbal JVouns. From the first root of the verb (209-4),\\nare formed three nouns of different terminations and signification,\\nindicating respectively the thing done, the doing, and the doer\\nas follows,\\nVerb.\\n1 Root.\\nTer.\\nDerivative.\\na poem\\nthe art of poetry\\na poet\\nah 44-7\\na deed\\naction or doing\\nor\\n-2 a doer\\n\u00c2\u00a742. THE ARTICLE.\\n139. The article is an adjective word of three\\ngenders, and irregular in the nominative singular.\\nIn the oblique cases, the masculine and the neuter\\ngender are of the second declension the feminine\\nis of the first. It wants the vocative, and is thus\\ndeclined\\nSingular\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nN.\\nn\\nr\\nG.\\nG.\\nD.\\nG.\\nD.\\nA.\\n140.-\\n-OBSERVATIO:\\nS S.\\n1. The Greeks spoke definitely, by placing the article before\\nthe substantive indefinitely, by omitting it or prefixing the pro-\\nnoun as, 6 the man a man or\\nany man.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0069.jp2"}, "70": {"fulltext": "52\\nTHE ADJECTIVE.\\n\u00c2\u00a743,44.\\n2. In grammar and lexicography, the article is used techni-\\ncally to distinguish the gender of nouns (58, Obs. 1).\\n3. The enclitic annexed to the article through all its cases,\\ngives it the force of the pronoun this as, this,\\nhe, she, it Gen. c. In Homer and the\\nother old Epic writers, the article itself is, with few exceptions,\\nused in this sense.\\n4. The article to, is sometimes used as a relative. (See\\n186-2.)\\n141. Note. The article being commonly placed before a\\nnoun, is by some grammarians called the prepositive article, to distin-\\nguish it from the relative pronoun which, from being generally\\nplaced after the noun to which it refers, they call the postpositive arti-\\ncle.\\n142.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 43. DIALECTS OF THE ARTICLE.\\nSingular.\\nM. and N.\\nFern.\\nN. 6\\nD.\\nG. A. I. P. toio\\nD.\\nD.\\nD.\\nD.\\nD.\\nPlural.\\nand\\nFem.\\nD. neut.\\nat D.\\nG.\\nD.\\nJEi.\\nD. D.\\nD.\\nand\\nD.\\n44*. THE ADJECTIVE.\\n-An adjective is a word used to qualify a\\nas, a good\\nman\\n143.\\nsubstantive\\none day.\\nA noun is qualified by an adjective, when the object named\\nis thereby described, limited, or distinguished from other things\\nof the same name.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0070.jp2"}, "71": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a745.\\nFIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.\\n53\\n1. The accidents of the adjective are gender, number, and\\ncase and in most adjectives also comparison.\\n2. Adjectives in Greek, as well as Latin, indicate the gender,\\nnumber, and case, by the termination as, masc,\\nfern., neuter, c.\\n3. Participles have the form and declension of adjectives, while\\nin time and signification, they belong to the verb.\\n4. Some adjectives denote each gender by a different termina-\\ntion in the nominative, and consequently have three terminations.\\nSome have one form common to the masculine and feminine, and\\nare adjectives of two terminations and some are adjectives of\\none termination, which is common to the masculine and feminine\\nsuch want the neuter.\\n5. In adjectives of three terminations, the feminine is always\\nof the first declension. In all adjectives, the masculine is always\\nof the second or third; and the declension of the neuter, is always\\nthe same with that of the masculine.\\n45. REGULAR ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND\\nSECOND DECLENSIONS.\\n144. 1. Adjectives of the first and second de-\\nclensions nave the masculine always in the\\nfeminine always in or and the neuter always\\nin or; thus,\\nbeautiful.\\nDual.\\nN. A V.\\nG. D.\\nSingular.\\nG.\\nD. -rj\\nV. -s\\nPlural.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.\\nThus decline good bad; friendly\\nsoft; white; manifest; tender,\\npleasant.\\n145. 2. But pure, and have a in the\\nfeminine as,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0071.jp2"}, "72": {"fulltext": "54\\nFIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.\\n45.\\nSingular.\\nSingular.\\n-a\\nG.\\nG.\\nD.\\n-co -a\\nA.\\nV.\\n-a\\nV.\\nThe dual and plural terminations are the same as in\\nBut the rules for the accents in the masculine and neuter (84),\\nand in the feminine (12), must be carefully observed.\\n146. Exc. The terminations and sometimes espe-\\ncially in adjectives denoting matter and colour, retain as,\\nthe eighth, pernicious, gold-\\nen, purple, Except where stands\\nbefore the vowel.; as, frequent, silver,\\n147. 3. The Attics often decline adjectives in\\nog, especially derivatives and compounds, by the\\ncommon gender, without the feminine termina-\\ntion thus,\\nimmortal.\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\nV.\\nG.\\nG.\\nD.\\nG. D.\\nD.\\nV.\\nV.\\nAdjectives of the common gender are often expressed thus\\nc.\\nIn the same manner decline\\nM. F.\\nfrom and\\nfrom\\nfrom\\nfrom and\\nNote. Though this form of declension is most used by the Attic\\nwriters, it is not confined to them. Instances of it occur in Homer.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0072.jp2"}, "73": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a746.\\nFIRST AND THIRD DECLENSION S.\\n55\\n46. ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND THIRD\\nDECLENSIONS.\\n148. The masculine and neuter of all adjec-\\ntives not ending in og, are of the third declension.\\nThe regular terminations of these are\\nM. F. N.\\n1.\\n2.\\n3.\\nAdjectives, so far as they are of the third declension, are ac-\\ncented the same as nouns, according to the rules, 94.\\n149. 1. Example of an Adjective in\\nblack.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\n150. 2. Example of an Adjective in\\ncomely.\\nSingular.\\n100-2.\\n-w\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.\\nV.\\nG. D.\\nG.\\nD.\\n46-16.\\nG.\\nD.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0073.jp2"}, "74": {"fulltext": "56\\nFIKST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS.\\n\u00c2\u00a746.\\nV.\\nG. D.\\n1ST. V.\\nG.\\nD.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\n47-18.\\n151. 06s. According to Buttmann, adjectives in (but not\\nparticiples) have and not in the dative plural. Prof. An-\\nthon adopts the same termination. When so used it must be re-\\ngarded as an exception to the general rule, 6, 18.\\n152. 3. Example of an Adjective in sea,\\nsweet.\\nSingular.\\nG.\\nD.\\ncontr.\\ncontr.\\nor\\n102-2.\\nV.\\nDual.\\nV.\\nG.\\nD.\\nPlural.\\nV.\\ncontr.\\nnot contr.\\nG.\\nD.\\ncontr\\nnot contr.\\nAfter the same manner decline\\n1.\\n3.\\n2.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0074.jp2"}, "75": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a747.\\nDECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES.\\n57\\n\u00c2\u00a747. DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES.\\n153.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Participles are declined like adjectives of three termi-\\nnations those of the middle and passive in are inflected\\nthroughout like 144. Of others, the feminine always fol-\\nlows the terminations of the first declension, and the masculine\\nand neuter, those of the third, the genitive being always formed\\nas directed, 100, Obs. 1. The terminations of these are as fol-\\nlows\\nM.\\nF.\\nF.\\n1.\\nGen.\\nc.\\n2.\\nc.\\n3.\\nc.\\n4.\\nfec.\\n5.\\nfcc.\\n6.\\nc.\\n1.\\nc.\\nOf these the 2d, 3d, and 4th are declined as examples thus,\\n154. 1. having struck. (2 Aor. Act.)\\nSingular.\\nN.\\nG.\\nD.\\nA.\\nV.\\nDual.\\nA.\\nV.\\nG.\\nD.\\nPlural.\\nN.\\nG.\\nD.\\n4\\nA.\\nV.\\nIn this manner are declined all participles which have before\\ntog in the genitive also the adjectives and When\\nthe accent of the nominative is on the penult, it remains there,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0075.jp2"}, "76": {"fulltext": "58 ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. \u00c2\u00a747.\\n2. having struck. (1 Aor. Act.)\\nSingular.\\nN.\\nrvxpag\\nzvxpav\\nG.\\nD.\\nA.\\nrvxpav\\ny.\\nDual.\\nzvxpav\\nN. A. V.\\ntvipavr-s\\nG. D.\\nPlural.\\nN.\\nrvxpavr\\nG.\\nD.\\nA.\\nV.\\nIn like manner decline the adjective all.\\n155. 3. having struck. (Perf. Act.)\\nSingular.\\nV.\\nG.\\nD.\\nDual.\\nG.\\nD.\\nPlural.\\nV.\\nG.\\nD.\\n44-8\\n156. The participle in after a Syncope (267), has the\\nnominative and vocative G. (fee.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0076.jp2"}, "77": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a748. ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 59\\n\u00c2\u00a748. ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS.\\n15 7. Many adjectives of the third declension have but one\\nform tor the masculine and feminine, and are therefore said to be\\ndeclined according to the common gender. They are declined\\nthroughout like nouns of the third declension, of the same termi-\\nnation. The regular terminations of these are vg,\\nand (viz. compounds of and they form the neuter ac-\\ncording to the following\\n158. EULES.\\n1. Adjectives of the common gender in\\nform the neuter by changing the long vowel\\ninto its own short one thus,\\nM. and F. N.\\nprudent, G.\\nmale, G. -og\\ntrue, G. -og\\nSo also some in as,\\nG.\\nNote. But tender, usually has the feminine\\nneuter\\n2. Adjectives of the common gender in ig and\\nform the neuter by rejecting g as,\\nM. and F. N.\\nG. -zog\\nG. -og\\n3. Compounds of a foot, have the neuter\\nin others in have the neuter in ov as,\\nM. and F. N.\\nG. -og, 100-1.\\n-ovrog.\\nNote. It is probable that was originally whence\\ncontracted and that the declension was after-\\nwards changed from the 2d to the 3d, as was done also in and\\nfrom the ancient and", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0077.jp2"}, "78": {"fulltext": "60\\nIRREGULAR ADJECTIVES.\\n\u00c2\u00a748.\\n159. Examples of adj\\ngender.\\n1. prudent.\\nSingular.\\n-ov\\nG.\\nD.\\n-ova -ov\\nV. -ov -ov\\nDual.\\nA. V.\\n-ovs\\nG. D.\\nPlural.\\n-ova\\nG.\\nD.\\n-ova\\nV. -ova\\n3. acceptable.\\nSingular.\\nG.\\nD.\\nj or\\nV.\\nDual.\\nV.\\nG. D.\\nPlural.\\nG. -it\\nD.\\nV:\\nectives of the common\\n2. true.\\nSingular.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.\\nDual.\\nV.\\nG. D.\\nPlural.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.\\n4. tearless.\\nSingular.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.\\nDual.\\nV.\\nPlural.\\nG.\\nD.\\nV.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0078.jp2"}, "79": {"fulltext": "49. ADJECTIVES TO BE DECLINED. 61\\nNote. Iu these examples, and are declined without\\ncontracting. The pupil may contract the concurrent vowels (120-2, and\\nISO), and inake the necessary changes in the accents.\\n49. IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES.\\n160. Every adjective not ending in some of\\nthe regular terminations already mentioned, is ir-\\nregular, wants the neuter gender, and is de-\\nclined like a noun of the third declension thus,\\nN. 6,\\nG. c.\\nObs. 1. The poets sometimes use the genitive and dative of\\nsuch adjectives in the neuter. Sometimes the neuter is supplied\\nby a derivative form in ov thus, is used as the neu-\\nter of as the neuter of c.\\nExc. 1. and (by syncope are declined with\\nthree genders, like participles (154-1) thus,\\nG. c.\\nExc. 2. great and many, are irregular in the\\nnominative and accusative singular. The other cases are regu-\\nlarly formed from the ancient nominatives and\\nof the second declension thus,\\nSingular. Singular.\\nM. F. N. M. F. N.\\nG.\\nD.\\nDual. Dual.\\nV. c\\nthrough the dual and plural, as in 144.\\nNote. Homer and other poets infleet regularly, Gen.\\nDat. c. It was afterwards changed, in those cases in which it\\nwould not be distinguished from the same cases of a oity.\\n4", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0079.jp2"}, "80": {"fulltext": "62\\nNUMERALS.\\n\u00c2\u00a750,51.\\nObs. 2. Some substantives in and inflected in the first\\ndeclension, are called by grammarians, adjectives; as,\\nan insolent man a wounded man but they are\\nreally independent of any other substantives in construction. The\\nsame observation may be applied to several other words, called\\nadjectives of one termination.\\n50. ADJECTIVES TO BE DECLINED.\\nbad.\\nsonorous.\\n-av, miserable.\\nformidable.\\nheavy.\\ngood.\\ntender,\\npious.\\n6,\\nlong-handed.\\nswift.\\nbetter.\\nmore beauti-\\nhonoured.\\nful.\\nunjust.\\nfriendly.\\nah worthy.\\nmindful.\\npatriotic.\\nunconquered\\nmany-footed.\\nan exile.\\nhappy.\\nsweet.\\ndeep.\\neasy.\\ngreater.\\nwise.\\n\u00c2\u00a751. NUMERALS.\\n161. Numeral adjectives are those which sig-\\nnify number. In Greek they are divided into\\ntwo classes, Cardinal and Ordinal.\\n1. The Cardinal express numbers simply, or\\nhow many as, one, two, three, c.\\n2. The Ordinal denote which one of a number;\\nas, first, second, third, c.\\nDistributives have no separate form in Greek. The meaning\\nof these is expressed by the cardinal numbers, sometimes com-\\npounded with as, c. bini, terni and\\nsometimes preceded by c.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0080.jp2"}, "81": {"fulltext": "51. NUMERALS. 63\\n162. 1. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.\\n1. Elg, one, has the singular number only, and\\nis thus declined\\nG. hog\\nera\\nIn like manner decline tlie two compounds,\\nplur.\\nObs. 1. From one. is formed the adjective either,\\none, other and from are formed\\nneither.\\nObs. 2. is sometimes used for the ordinal as in\\nMatth. 28. 1 Mark 16. 2. This is usuall}- considered a Hebra-\\nism, but it is sometimes used by the Greeks also Herod, iv. 161,\\nThucyd. iv. 115. Also in Latin, Cic. Sen. 5 Uno et octoyesi-\\nmo annoy\\n2. two, is properly dual it is alike in all\\ngenders, and is defective in the plural thus,\\nDual. Plural.\\nG. Attic G.\\nD. D.\\nObs. 3. two, is indeclinable i. e. it is the same in all\\ngenders and numbers both, is declined like in the\\ndual.\\n3. three, and jtooaqtz, four, are plural\\nonly, and are thus declined\\nthree. four.\\nG. G.\\nD. D.\\n4. The Cardinal numbers from jive, to\\na hundred, are indeclinable.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0081.jp2"}, "82": {"fulltext": "64\\nGEEEK NOTATION OF NUMBERS.\\n52.\\n5. After the larger numbers are regu-\\nlar plural adjectives of the first and second declen-\\nsions: as.\\nM.\\nF.\\ntwo hundred\\nthree hundred\\na thousand\\ntwo thousand\\nten thousand\\ntwenty thousand\\nObs. 4.\\nIn the compositio\\nof numbers, either the smaller pre-\\ncedes, and the two are joined by or the greater precedes, in\\nwhich case the is generally omitted; thus,\\nor twenty-five or\\ntwenty-fifth. When three numbers are reckoned to-\\ngether, the greatest comes first, and so on in succession, with the\\nconjunction as, a hundred\\nand twenty-seven ships.\\nObs. 5. Instead of the numbers compounded with eight or\\nnine, more frequent use is made of the circumlocution (or\\no. thus, twenty ships\\nwanting one, i. e. nineteen ships twenty\\nyears wanting two, i. e. eighteen years.\\n163. \u00c2\u00a752. II. OEDINAL NTJMBEES.\\nThe ordinal numbers are formed from the cardinal. All un-\\nder twenty, except second, seventh, and eighth, end in from\\ntwenty upwards, all end in and, in their inflection, are re-\\ngular adjectives of the first and second declensions thus,\\nfirst\\nfirst of the two)\\nsecond\\nc. third\\nObs. 1. In order to express half, or fractional numbers in\\nmoney, measures, and weights, the Greeks used words compound-\\ned of half, and the name of the weight, c.\\nhaving the adjective termination ov, aiov, append-\\ned to it, and placed before the ordinal number, of which the half", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0082.jp2"}, "83": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a753. GREEK NOTATION OF NUMBERS. 65\\nis taken as, 2| talents i. e. the first a talent,\\nthe second a talent, the third a half talent, and so of others. In\\nlike manner the Latin sestertius, 2\u00c2\u00a3 asses by syncope from semis-\\niertiu\u00c2\u00bb; the first an as, the second an as, the third a half as (ter-\\nti/is semis).\\nFrom this must be distinguished the use of the same com-\\npounds iu the plural, preceded by the cardinal number which, in\\nthat case, mean simply so many half talents; thus,\\nnot 2\u00c2\u00a3 talents, but three half talents, or one and a half.\\nObs. 2. From the ordinal numbers are formed numerals in\\nexpressing on what day as, on the second\\nday on the third day, c.\\n\u00c2\u00a753. THE GREEK NOTATION OF NUMBERS.\\n164. The Greeks used the letters of the alphabet in three\\ndifferent ways, to denote numbers.\\n1. To express a small series of numbers, each letter was reck-\\noned according to its order in the alphabet; as, 1, 2, 5,\\n24. In this manner the books of Homer s Iliad and Odys-\\nsey are distinguished. The technical syllable HNT will\\nassist the memory in using this kind of notation for if the alpha-\\nbet be divided into four equal parts, will be the first letter of\\nthe second part, that is 1 v, of the third, or 1 3 and of the\\nfourth, or 19.\\n2. The capital letters were used, in denoting larger series of\\nnumbers, thus; 1, 1, for 5, A for dt xa, 10, for\\n100, X for 1000, and for 10,000.\\nlarge round any of these characters, except I, denoted five\\ntimes as much as that character represented as, \\\\j\\\\ 50 \\\\m\\\\\\nfor 50,000.\\n3. To express the 9 units, the 9 tens, and the 9 hundreds, the\\nGreeks divided the alphabet into three parts but, as there are\\nonly 24 letters, they used c called for 6; \u00c2\u00a3j, called\\nfor 90 and Gt), called for 900. In using this\\nkind of notation, the memory will be assisted by the technical\\nsyllable AlP\\\\ that is, denotes 1 10 and P, 100. It\\nis to be observed, also, that all the numbers under 1000, are de-\\nnoted by letters with a small mark like an accent, over them\\nand that a similar mark placed under any letter, denotes that it\\nrepresents so many thousands.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0083.jp2"}, "84": {"fulltext": "6Q\\nGREEK NOTATION OF NUMBERS.\\n\u00c2\u00a753.\\n165. TABLE OF NUMERALS.\\nCardinal.\\nOrdinal\\n1\\na\\n2\\n3\\nV\\n4\\n5\\n6\\n7\\n\u00ce\u00b5/?(5\u00ce\u00bf\u00ce\u00bc\u00ce\u00bf\u00cf\u0082\\n8\\nV\\n9\\n10\\n11\\n12\\n13\\n14\\n15\\n16\\n17\\n18\\n6\\n19\\n20\\n21\\n30\\n40\\n50\\n60\\nr\\n70\\n80\\n90\\n5\\n100\\n200\\n300\\n400\\n500\\n600\\n700\\n800\\n900\\n1,000\\n2,000\\n3,000\\n4,000\\n5,000\\n6,000\\n7,000\\nc,\\n8,000\\noy\\n9,000\\n10,000\\ni t\\n20,000\\n50,000\\n100,000\\nQ,\\nThust\\nhe num\\n)er 1853 is a t", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0084.jp2"}, "85": {"fulltext": "54 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 67\\nOTHER CLASSES OF NUMERALS.\\n166. From the cardinal numbers are formed\\n1st. The Numeral adverbs; as, twice, from\\nthrice, from and from the others, by adding the termina-\\ntion or as, four\\ntimes, six times, a hundred times.\\n2d. Multiple numbers in contracted as,\\ntwo-fold; three-fold four-fold.\\n3d. Proportionals in as, three times as\\nmuch four times as much.\\n4th. Substantives in which express the name of the\\nseveral numbers as, Gen. the number one, unity\\nthe number two; the number ten the num-\\nber twenty the number thirty, c.\\nXote. The substantive numerals are commonly employed to express\\nthe higher numbers; thus, $ir.a 100,000; a\\nmillion. Sometimes the smaller numbers, added to the larger, are\\nlikewise expressed by substantives thus, 517,610,\\ny.cti ti\\n5th. The Distributives, answering to the question, in how\\nmany parts are formed in as,\\nin two parts, in three parts, fec, and connected with\\nthese are such adverbs as, trebly, in three places, c.\\n005. other parts of speech are compounded with nu-\\nmerals, the first four assume the following forms, viz. one\\ntwo three four as,\\none-homed, two-horned, three-footed, four-\\nfooted.\\n54. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.\\n167. Adjectives have three degrees of compari-\\nson, the Positive, Comparative, and Superlative.\\n168. The Positive expresses a quality simply the Compara-\\ntive asserts it in a higher or lower degree in one object than in\\nanother, or, than in several taken together and the Superlative,\\nin the highest or lowest degree compared with several taken sep-\\narately thus, gold is heavier than silver; it is the most pre-\\ncious of metals. Hence, those adjectives only can be compared\\nwhose signification admits the distinction of more or less.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0085.jp2"}, "86": {"fulltext": "COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.\\n\u00c2\u00a75o.\\nThe superlative in Greek, as in Latin and English, often ex-\\npresses only a very high degree of the quality, without implying\\ncomparison, and may be called the superlative of eminence.\\n55. GENERAL RULE.\\n169. The comparative degree is formed by\\nadding to the positive and the superlative,\\nby adding thus,\\nPositive.\\nSuperlative.\\nComparative.\\n170. SPECIAL RULES.\\n1. Adjectives in teg reject as,\\n2. Adjectives in og reject g and also, after a\\nshort syllable, change into thus,\\nog after a short syllable\\nObs. The change of into is made, to prevent the concur-\\nrence of four short syllables. Hence o, after a doubtful vowel\\nconsidered long, remains unchanged but if considered short, the\\nis changed into thus, has and has\\nbecause and are considered long but has\\nand c, because the and a are\\nconsidered short.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0086.jp2"}, "87": {"fulltext": "56. COMPARISON BY AND 69\\n3. Adjectives in and add to the neu-\\ner gender; as,\\nc.\\nfcc.\\nfcc.\\n4. Adjectives in and add to the nomina-\\ntive plural masculine as,\\nP. c.\\nc.\\nExc. But makes c, and\\n\u00c2\u00a756. COMPARISON BY AND\\n171. Some adjectives are compared by\\nand lurog viz.,\\n1. Some in derived from substantives.\\nThese form the comparative and superlative, not\\nfrom the adjective, but from the substantive\\nthus,\\ninimical, from enmity,\\ncompassionate, compassion,\\nbase, baseness,\\nlong, length,\\nAlso beautiful, has as if from\\nbeauty.\\n2. Some in are compared both ways as,\\ndeep,\\nand\\nIn like manner compare slow; swift;\\nthick; sweet quick; c.\\n3. easy, has or, with c\\nsubscribed,\\nNote. Some of these, and of others compared in this way, are occa-\\nsionally found compared by nooq and also has a com-\\nparative Att. The comparatives in o)v are declined\\nlike 159-1.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0087.jp2"}, "88": {"fulltext": "70 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 57, 58.\\n172.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 57. IRREGULAR COMPARISON.\\nThe following adjectives are irregular in their\\ncomparison; viz.,\\nfrom Mars\\nfrom I wish\\ngood J *Q s f *\u00e2\u0084\u00a2v from brave\\nfrom for I wish\\nfrom I bear\\n-j\\nbad\\ngreat\\nmany\\nsmall\\nlittle or or\\n\u00c2\u00a758. DEFECTIVE COMPARISON.\\n173. Some adjectives in the comparative and superlative de-\\ngrees, have no positive, but are formed from\\n1. nouns; as,\\na king\\ngain\\nGod\\na thief\\nglory\\na dog\\na striker\\na drinker\\ncold, rigor\\na thief\\n2. pronoun as,\\nself\\n3. participle; as,\\nstrong", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0088.jp2"}, "89": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a759.\\nDIALECTS OF COMPARISON.\\n71\\n4. adverbs; as,\\nup\\nimmediately\\nout\\ndown\\nin\\nback\\nbeyond\\nfar\\nearly\\nhighly\\n5. prepositions as,\\nwhence\\nwhence\\n1*74. Some comparatives and superlatives are again com-\\npared as,\\nbefore\\nover\\nbetter\\nless\\neasier\\nmore beautiful\\nworst\\nmost glorious\\nleast\\nfirst\\nW. .IWI I\\nworse\\nand\\n175. Some words ending in of the first declension, are\\ncompared; thus (see 160, Obs. 2),\\nan insolent man\\nan avaricious man\\n!7G. \u00c2\u00a759. DIALECTS OF COMPARISON.\\n1. The Attics compare many adjectives in and by\\nand as,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0089.jp2"}, "90": {"fulltext": "72\\nTHE PRONOUN.\\n60.\\nloquacious\\nfriendly\\nby Syncope,\\ndiligent\\nnot envying\\nold\\nan old man\\nrapacious\\navaricious\\nfalse\\nand\\n2. Dialects of particular comparatives and superlatives, are,\\nfor I. and D. better; P. I.\\ndat. ace. nom. plur. D.\\ngreater; with others which may be learned by practice\\nin reading.\\n\u00c2\u00a760. THE PRONOUN.\\n177. A Pronoun is a word used instead of a\\nnoun.\\n178. Pronouns may be divided into Personal,\\nPossessive, Definite, Reflexive, Reciprocal, De-\\nmonstrative, Relative, Interrogative, and Indefinite.\\nOf these the Personal only are substantives the\\nrest are adjectives.\\nI. PERSONAL PRONOUNS.\\n179. The Substantive or Personal Pronouns\\nare I, of the first person av, thou, of the sec-\\nond and ov, of himself, of herself, of itself, of the\\nthird (56) they have the same accidents as nouns\\n(55) are of all genders and, in construction,\\ntake the gender and number of the noun for\\nwhich they stand. They are thus declined", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0090.jp2"}, "91": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a760.\\nTHE PRONOUN.\\nI.\\nSingular.\\nXT\\nG. or\\nD. or\\nor\\nOVy tkOU.\\nSingular.\\nN. V. cri\\nG.\\nD.\\nFirst Person, M. or F.\\nDual. Plural.\\nG.\\nD.\\nSecond Person, M. or F.\\nor\\nG. D. jOoiV or\\nDual.\\nN. A. V. or\\nG. D. or\\nPlural.\\nG.\\nD.\\nve\\nv, of himself of herself of itself Third Person\\nM., F., or\\nDual. Plural.\\nNeut.\\nG.\\nD.\\nNeut.\\nSingular,\\nG. ov\\nD.ei\\nA. I\\nG. D.\\nI\\n180. OBSERVATIONS\\n-l-l\\n1. The monosyllable forms are always enclitic,\\n21-23, and have their accent thrown back on the preceding word.\\nThey are never governed by a preposition.\\n2. In the dual, the forms and are sometimes written\\nand\\n3. The third personal pronoun, like sui in Latin, wants the\\nnominative singular, and is commonly used by the Attic prose\\nwriters in a reflexive sense; i. e. it refers to the svbject of the pro-\\nposition in which it stands or of the foregoing, if the second be\\nsufficiently connected with it. Thus used, it is translated of him-\\nself, of herself of itself c. In Homer and Herodotus, and the\\nAttic poets, it is more frequently used as the pronoun of the third\\nperson, for the nominative of which they use the relative og as,\\nhe said. This pronoun, however, is but little in use, the\\ndefinite 182, and the reflexive 183, being used in-\\nstead of it. The nominative (not now in use) appears to have\\nbeen anciently from which was derived the Latin is. A neu-\\nter form of the nominative and accusative plural, occurs in\\nHerodotus.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0091.jp2"}, "92": {"fulltext": "74 POSSESSIVE AND DEFINITE PRONOUNS.* 61, 62.\\n61. II. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.\\n181. The Possessive Pronouns denote pos-\\nsession, and are derived from the substantive pro-\\nnouns.\\n1. In signification, they correspond to the genitive of their\\nrimitives, for which they may be considered as a substitute\\nhus, the brother of me, and my\\nbrother, are synonymous expressions.\\n2. Inform, they are regular adjectives of the first and second\\ndeclensions, and are declined like 144. They are derived\\nas follows\\nFrom\\ncomes\\nmy\\nw\\nay\\nthy\\nhis\\nour,\\nyour,\\nour\\nyour\\ntheir\\nDoric\\nyour, i. e. of you two\\nObs. To this class also belong one of our country\\none of your country. But of what coun-\\ntry more properly belongs to the interrogative, and\\none of another country, to the indefinite pronouns.\\n62. III. THE DEFINITE PRONOUN.\\n182. The Definite Pronoun is used to\\ngive a closer or more definite signification of a per-\\nson or thing.\\nThis pronoun has three different significations.\\n1. In the nominative it adds the force of the English self to\\nthe word to which it belongs as, I myself; cv\\nthou thyself; he himself: so also, in the oblique\\ncases, when it begins a clause as, I have seen the\\nperson himself.\\n2. In the oblique cases, after another word in the same clause,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0092.jp2"}, "93": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a763.\\nREFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.\\n75\\nit is used for the third personal pronoun, and signifies him, her,\\nit, them as, thou hast not seen him.\\n3. With the article before it, it signifies the same as, b av-\\nthe same man.\\nObs. In the last sense when the article ends with a vowel, it\\noften combines with the pronoun, forming one word thus,\\nfor for for c.\\nWhen thus combined, the neuter ends in ov as well as o. The\\ncombined and must be carefully distinguished from\\nand parts of 185. The former has the Spiri-\\ntus lenis over the v, the latter has not.\\n4. The definite pronoun is thus declined.\\nSingular.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nN.\\nG.\\nN. A.\\nG.\\n-a\\nI).\\nA.\\nG. D.\\nD.\\n-a\\nIn the same manner are declined\\ni\\nV\\nJ\\nanother\\nwho, which\\nthat\\n63. IV. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.\\n183. Reflexive Pronouns are such as relate\\nto the subject of the proposition in which they\\nstand.\\n1. The Reflexive pronouns are formed from the accusative\\nsingular of the personal pronouns, with the oblique cases of\\nThey are of myself; of thyself of\\nhimself and are thus declined.\\nSingular.\\nG.\\nD. -rj\\nPlural.\\nG.\\nD.\\n2. In the same manner are declined and\\nwithout the neuter gender, but, in the singular number only. In", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0093.jp2"}, "94": {"fulltext": "76 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 64, 65.\\nthe dual and plural, ttie parts of the compound are used sepa-\\nrately; as, of ourselves.\\n3. Homer never uses the compound form even in the singu-\\nlar but, fcc.\\n4. The contracted forms and c, are often\\nused for and\\n5. Sometimes in the singular, and often in the plural,\\nis used by the Attics in the first and second, as well as in the\\nthird person. They are all sometimes used as reciprocals, 184\\nand, in some grammars, they are so denominated.\\n6. In these compounds, instead of the Ionics have and\\nretain before it thus, c, for c.\\n64. V. RECIPROCAL PRONOUN.\\n184. The Reciprocal Pronoun indicates a mu-\\ntual relation between different persons, expressed\\nin English by the phrase one another.\\nThis pronoun is formed from wants the singular, and\\nis thus declined\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nG.\\n-oiv\\nG.\\nD.\\nD.\\nA.\\nrhe\\nDual is seldom used.\\nA.\\n65. VI. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.\\n185. The Demonstrative Pronouns are such\\nas point out with precision a person or thing al-\\nready known. They are,\\nVL ,jj. I this, the latter, the one.\\nj\\nthat, the former, the other.\\n1. this, is simply the article 6, rendered\\nemphatic by the enclitic annexed through all its cases, 140-3.\\nis declined like 182-4.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0094.jp2"}, "95": {"fulltext": "6\u00ce\u00b2.\\nRELATIVE PRONOUN.\\n77\\nlike the article, takes the initial t in\\nthe oblique cases,\\nand is thus declined\\nSingular.\\nN.\\nV.\\nG.\\nD.\\nA.\\nDual.\\nN. A.\\nV.\\nG.\\nD.\\nPlural.\\nN.\\nV.\\nG.\\nD.\\nA.\\nObs. The correlatives and\\nhave either or in the nominative and accusative singular\\nneuter; thus,\\nor\\nG. c.\\n2. Among the Attics, the demonstratives were rendered em-\\nphatic by adding to the termination as,\\nc. But when the final vowel is a, or o, or it is dropped,\\nand put in its place thus, with the emphatic\\nare written When or follows the de-\\nmonstrative, the is placed after it, e. g. with becomes\\nThis suffix always draws the accent to itself. A sim-\\nilar emphasis is expressed in Latin by annexing the syllables met,\\nte, pte, ce; as, egomet, tute, meapte, hicce (Lat. Gr. 118-4; 121,\\nObs. 4 123-3). The added by the Attic and Ionian writers to\\nthe Dative Plural, however, is not emphatic but merely euphonic.\\n3. The emphatic is annexed also to the compounds of\\nand a few of the correlatives such as\\nc, making c.\\n\u00c2\u00a766. VH. RELATIVE PRONOUN.\\n186. The Relative Pronoun is one that re-\\nlates to, and connects its clause with, a noun or\\npronoun going before it, called the antecedent.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0095.jp2"}, "96": {"fulltext": "78\\nINTERROGATIVE PRONOUN.\\n\u00c2\u00a767.\\n1. The relative ?j, b, who, which, that, is declined like av~\\n(182-4). It is rendered emphatic by adding the enclitic\\nsyllable as, 403-20.\\n2. The Ionic and Doric writers, and the Attic tragedians, in-\\nstead of use the article b, as a relative.\\n3. Instead of the compound pronoun is used as a\\nrelative after nag, or any word in the singular expressing an\\nindefinite number and after the same words in the plural\\nas, nag every one who all who.\\n\u00c2\u00a767. VIII. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN.\\n187. The Interrogative Pronoun is used in\\nasking a question as, Who did it\\n1. The interrogative who? which? what? has the\\nacute accent on the first syllable, and is thus declined\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\nN. rig,\\nG.\\nD.\\nG.\\nG. D.\\nIn the same manner decline and\\nObs. Instead of the genitive and dative we often\\nfind a secondary form,\\n2. The interrogative has its responsive which is thus\\nused who did it I know\\nnot who did it. The responsive is declined as follows, and,\\nas will be perceived, disregards the usual rules of accentuation\\nSingular.\\nN.\\ntr\\nG.\\nD,\\nA.\\nDual.\\nN. A.\\nG.D.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0096.jp2"}, "97": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a763.\\nINDEFINITE PRONOUNS.\\nG.\\nD.\\nPlural.\\n3. Instead of Homer uses declined like as\\nabove, and instead of the genitive and dative we\\nfind the secondary forms and Obs. above).\\n4. There appears to have been, among the ancient Greeks, an-\\nother interrogative pronoun, and its responsive\\nwhich have become obsolete, except in two cases, now\\nused adverbially viz. where in what way and hence\\nthe responsives and From these are formed the inter-\\nrogative -a, -ov, which of the two and its responsive\\n-a, -ov, which of the two with several other adverbs\\nand adjectives still in use each interrogative having always its\\nown responsive, the one being the correlative of the other as,\\nINTERROGATIVES.\\nAdj. of what kind\\nof what number\\nof what age\\nwhich of the two\\nAdv. how\\nof what age is he ow I know\\nnot of what age. In the same manner the responsives are used\\nwithout an interrogation preceding as,\\nRESPONSIVES.\\nof what kind.\\nof what number,\\nof what age.\\nwhich of the two.\\nhow, c. thus,\\nhe forgets of what kind he was\\nof what country\\nTo these also may be added\\n\u00c2\u00a768. IX. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.\\n188. The Indefinite Pronouns are such as de-\\nnote persons or things indefinitely. They are,\\nsome one.\\nsome one, such a one.\\nanother.\\nother, a different one, another.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0097.jp2"}, "98": {"fulltext": "80 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 69\\nTo which may be added the following negatives viz.,\\nr no one.\\nI\\nJ\\n1. The indefinite has the grave accent on the last syllable,\\nto distinguish it from tig interrogative, which has the acute ac-\\ncent on the first the former is enclitic (21), the latter is not.\\n2. The indefinite some one, of all genders, and always\\nwith the article prefixed, is declined like a noun of the third de-\\nion\\nthus,\\nSingular.\\n1ST.\\nG.\\nD.\\nA.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nG.\\nG.D.\\nD.\\nis sometimes indeclinable as, G. D.\\nis declined like 182-4 like\\n145.\\nObs. 1. All words used interrogatively are also used indefi-\\nnitely, but generally with the accent changed thus,\\nINTERROGATIVES. INDEFINITES.\\nhow great how many of a certain size or num-\\nber,\\nof what kind of a certain hind, such,\\nhow old how large of a certain size or age.\\n189.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a769. CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.\\n1. Besides the interrogatives and responsives (187-4), the\\nGreek language has likewise special correlative pronouns, each\\npair of which has a mutual relation. The latter of the two is\\nexpressed in English by as.\\n(Lat. tantus, quantus), so great, as.\\n(Lat. talis, qualis), such, as.\\nof the same age, as of the same size, as.\\n2. When the correlation is more expressly designated, express-\\ning just as great as, exactly as great as, the former pronoun", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0098.jp2"}, "99": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a770.\\nDIALECTS OF THE PRONOUN.\\n81\\nhas or attached to it, and the\\nlatter has on (from prefixed as,\\nS\\nj\\n190. \u00ce\u00a50. DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS.\\n9 I.\\nIonic.\\nDoric.\\nJEolic.\\nPoetic.\\nG.\\nD.\\necu\\nP.\\nG.\\nD.\\nThou.\\nS.\\nG.\\nD.\\nKAV.\\nP.\\nV. iV^ f?\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\\nG.\\nof Himself, c.\\n8.\\nG.\\nto,\\nD.\\nA ^*w.\\nD.\\nP.\\nG.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0099.jp2"}, "100": {"fulltext": "82 THE VERB. \u00c2\u00a771.\\nObs. and are used for the accusative in all genders\\nand numbers so also is among the poets, i. e. for\\n-6, and\\nObs. 2. The adjective pronouns are inflected in the different\\ndialects according to the models of the first and second declen-\\nsions. Other peculiarities may be learned by practice as, for\\n-a, -ov, our D. for D.\\nfor D. for D.\\nfor for D.\\nfor and two?, for and ?w,\\nfor I. rfcW for 7to t, for rwa, A.\\nc6Z r\u00c2\u00ab, D. for thy, D. for\\nI. \u00c2\u00a30\u00c2\u00a3, e/J, fiw, Ais, c. this form occurs only in the singu-\\nlar number.\\n\u00c2\u00a771. THE VERB.\\n191. A Verb is a word used to express the\\nact, being, or state of its subject.\\n1. Verbs are of two kinds, Transitive and In-\\ntransitive*\\n2. A Transitive verb expresses an act done by\\none person or thing to another. In Greek, it has\\nthree forms, Active, Middle, and Passive, 195.\\nThese two classes comprehend all the verbs in any language.\\nAccording to this division, Transitive verbs include those only which\\ndenote transitive action i. e. action done by one person or thing to\\nanother, or which passes over, as the word signifies, from the actor to\\nan object acted upon as, Csesar conquered Gaul, or Gaul was con-\\nquered by Caesar. Intransitive verbs, on the other hand, include all\\nthose which have nothing transitive in their meaning nothing passing\\nover from one person or thing to another, and consequently no relation\\nto any thing beyond their subject which they represent in a certain\\nstate or condition, and nothing more. Instead of the terms active and\\nneuter formerly used to denote these two classes of verbs, the terms\\nTransitive and Intransitive are here preferred, as being more expressive\\nand appropriate, and -in order to relieve the term active from the\\nambiguity created by using it, both as the designation of a class of\\nverbs, and also, as the ;ame of a particular form of the verb called the\\nactive voice. To the latter of these only, it is now applied in this work.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0100.jp2"}, "101": {"fulltext": "71. THE VERB. 83\\n3. An Intransitive verb expresses being, or a\\nstate of being, or action confined to the actor. It\\nis commonly without the passive form. 195, Ohs. 2.\\n192. OBSERVATIONS.\\n1. The use of the yerb, in simple propositions, is, to affirm.\\nThat of which it affirms is called its subject, which, if a noun or\\npronoun, is in the nominative but when the verb is in the infi-\\nnitive, its subject is in the accusative.\\n2. The verbs that express being simply, in Greek, are three,\\nand signifying in general to be. The state\\nof being expressed by intransitive verbs, may be a state of rest\\nas, I sleep or of motion as, vavg the ship sails\\nor of action as, I run.\\n3. Transitive and Intransitive verbs may always be distin-\\nguished thus a transitive verb always requires an object to com-\\nplete the sense as, I love thee the intransitive verb\\ndoes not, but the sense is complete without such an object as,\\nI sit I run.\\n4. Many verbs considered intransitive in Greek, are translated\\nby verbs considered transitive in English as, I please\\nI obey I disobey I hinder\\nI trouble c. In strict language, however, these and\\nsimilar verbs denote rather a state than an act, and may be ren-\\ndered by the verb to be and an adjective word as, I am pleasing,\\nobedient, disobedient, fec.\\n5. Many verbs are used, sometimes in a transitive, and some-\\ntimes in an intransitive sense as, tr. destroy, intr. I\\nsink, or decay tr. stir up intr. rush. This change\\nfrom a transitive to an intransitive sense, however, is generally\\nindicated by a change from the active to the middle form of tli\u00e2\u0082\u00ac\\nverb as, active tr. sheio mid. shew my-\\nself, i. e. intr. I appear. (See 195, Note.)\\n6. Verbs usually intransitive become transitive, when a word\\nof similar signification with the verb itself is introduced as its ob-\\nject as, let us run the race.\\n1. When a writer wishes to direct the attention, not so ranch to\\nparticular act, as to the employment or state of a person or thing, the\\nobject of the act, not being important, is omitted and the verb, though\\ntransitive, assumes the character of an intransitive. Thus, when we\\neay, The boy reads, nothing more is indicated than the present state\\nor employment of the subject boy, and the verb has obviously an", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0101.jp2"}, "102": {"fulltext": "84 DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERBS. 72.\\nintransitive sense still an object is implied. But when we say, The\\nboy reads Homer, the attention is directed to the object Homer, as\\nwell as to the act, and the verb has its proper transitive sense.\\n72. DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERBS.\\n193. Though the division of vesrbs into Transitive and In-\\ntransitive, comprehends all the verbs in any language, yet, from\\nsomething peculiar in their form or signification, they are charac-\\nterized by different names expressive of this peculiarity. The\\nmost common of these are the following, viz. Regular, Irregu-\\nlar, Deponent, Defective, Redundant, Impersonal, Desiderative,\\nFrequentative, and Inceptive.\\n1. Regular Verbs are those in which all the\\nparts are formed from the Root or stem, accord-\\ning to certain rules. 93-97, and 106, 107.\\n2. Irregular, or Anomalous Verbs, differ in\\nsome of their parts from the regular forms. \u00c2\u00a7\u00c2\u00a7112\\n116, 117.\\n3. Deponent Verbs under a middle and pas-\\nsive form, have either an active or middle signifi-\\ncation. 113.\\n4. Defective Verbs are those in which some\\nof the parts are wanting.\\n5. Redundant Verbs have more than one\\nform of the same part.\\n6. Impersonal Verbs are used only in the\\nthird person singular. 114.\\n7. Desideratives denote desire, or intention\\nof doing. 115, 1.\\n8. Frequent atives express repeated action.\\nUS, 2.\\n9. Inceptives mark the beginning or continued\\nincrease of an action. 115, 3.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0102.jp2"}, "103": {"fulltext": "73 74. INFLECTION OF VEKBS.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 VOICE. 85\\n73. INFLECTION OF REGULAR VERBS.\\n194. To the inflection of verbs belong Voices,\\nMoods, Tenses, Numbers, and Persons.\\n1. The Voices in Greek are three, Active, Mid-\\ndle, and Passive,\\n2. The Moods are five the Indicative, Subjunc-\\ntive, Optative, Imperative, and Infinitive.\\n3. The Tenses, or distinctions of time in Greek,\\nare seven, the Present, the Imperfect, the Future,\\nthe Aorist, the Perfect, the Pluperfect, and, in the\\npassive voice, the Paulo-post-future, or Future-\\nperfect.\\n4. The Numbeks are three;- Singular, Dual,\\nand Plural.\\n5. The Persons are three First, Second, and\\nThird.\\n6. The Conjugations, or forms of inflection,\\nare two viz., the First, of verbs in and the\\nSecond, of verbs in\\nObs. Some verbs appear in both forms as, and\\nui, I show. Some verbs are partly of the first conjugation, and\\npartly of the second thus, I go, of the first 2d Aorist.\\nI went, from of the second; I know; 2d\\nAor. I knew, from of the second. Such verbs as\\nthese, however, though regular in each form, are generally reckon-\\ned among the irregular verbs.\\n74. VOICE.\\n195. Voice is a particular forir of the verb\\nwhich shows the relation of the subject, or thing\\nspoken of, to the action expressed by the verb.\\nThe transitive verb, in Greek, has three voices\\nActive. Middle, and Passive.\\n5", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0103.jp2"}, "104": {"fulltext": "S6 voice. 74.\\nObs. 1. In all voices the act expressed by the transitive verb is\\nthe same, and in all, except sometimes the middle, is equally tran-\\nsitive; but in each, the act is differently related to the subject of\\nthe verb, as follows\\n1. The Active Voice represents the subject of\\nthe verb as acting on some object as, ae,\\nI strike you.\\n2. The Middle Voice represents the subject of\\nthe verb as acting on itself, or in some way for it-\\nself as, I strike myself j\\nhurt my foot j I\\nbought me a horse.\\n3. The Passive Voice represents the subject of\\nthe verb as acted upon as, I am\\nst/ruck the foot his foot my\\nfoot was hurt.\\nObs. 2. Intransitive verbs, from their nature, do not admit a\\ndistinction of voice. They are generally in the form of the ac-\\ntive voice, frequently in that of the middle or passive but, what-\\never be their form, their signification is always the same; as,\\nor I die.\\nObs. 3. The Middle voice, in Greek, is so called, because it\\nhas a middle signification between the active and the passive, im-\\nplying neither action nor passion simply, but a union, in some\\ndegree, of both. Middle verbs may be divided into Five Classes,\\nas follows\\n1st. In middle verbs of the first class, the action of the verb is\\nreflected immediately back upon the agent and hence verbs of\\nthis class are exactly equivalent to the active voice joined with the\\naccusative of the reflexive pronoun; as, I wash another;\\nI wash myself; the same as\\n2d. In middle verbs of the second class, the agent is also the\\nremote object of the verb, or he with respect to whom the act\\ntakes place so that middle verbs of this class are equivalent to\\nthe active voice with tne dative of the reflexive pronoun\\nas, to take up (any thing), sc. for another,\\nin order to transfer it to another to take up, sc. in\\norder to keep it for one s self, to transfer it to one s self. Hence\\nverbs of this class carry with them the idea of a thing s being\\ndone for one s self.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0104.jp2"}, "105": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a774. voice. 87\\n3d. Middle verbs of the third class express an action performed\\nat the command of, or with regard to, the subject, and is expressed\\nin English by to cause. In other words, this class may be said to\\nsignify, to cause any thing to be done as, I write\\nI cause to be written I cause the name, as of an accused\\nperson, to be taken down in writing by the magistmte before whom\\nthe process is carried, or simply, I accuse.\\n4th. The fourth class of middle verbs, includes those which\\ndenote a reciprocal or mutual action as, to make\\nlibations along with another, to make mutual libations, i. e. to\\nmake a league to dissolve along with another, to\\ndissolve by mutual agreement. To this class belong verbs signi-\\nfying to contract, to quarrel, to contend, c.\\n5th. The fifth class comprehends middle verbs of the first\\nclass, when followed by an accusative, or some other case in\\nother words, it embraces all those middle verbs which denote an\\naction reflected back on the agent himself, and which are, at the\\nsame time, followed by an accusative, or other case, which that\\naction farther regards as, to recall any thing to\\none s own recollection.\\nXote. From, the reflected nature of this voice, many verbs, which\\nare transitive in the active voice, may be rendered by an intransitive\\nverb in the middle voice as, I send (viz. another)\\nI send myself i. e. I go I provoke another I provoke\\nmyself, i. e. lam angry nti io, I persuade another; I per-\\nsuade myself, i. e. I yield, or obey. In many instances, however, the re-\\nlation to self is not so clearly distingnishable. This is particularly the\\ncase with the later writers, as Plutarch, Herodian, c. In the writings\\nof the ancients, Herodotus, Xenophon, and others, the distinction between\\nthe active and the middle voice is much more strictly observed.\\nObs. 4. The future middle has often an active, and sometimes,\\nespecially among the poets, a passive sense.\\nObs. 5. The present, the imperfect, the perfect, the pluperfect,\\nand the future-perfect middle, are the same as in the passive, or,\\nmore strictly, they are the passive fonns in a middle sense. When\\nthe middle aorists are unusual or wanting, their place is supplied\\nby the passive aorists in a middle sense. Sometimes, when the\\nmiddle aorist is used in the ordinary sense, the passive also is used\\nas a middle, but in a peculiar sense as, middle to\\narray pne^s self passive to travel.\\nObs. 6. The 2 Perfect, and 2 Pluperfect Active (called by the\\nancient grammarians the perfect and pluperfect middle) are of rare\\noccurrence, and, when used, are completely of an active significa-\\ntion. In a few instances, it is true, they incline to an intransitive", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0105.jp2"}, "106": {"fulltext": "88 moods. 7\u00ce\u00b4\\nand reflexive sense as, I have persuaded myself, i. e.\\n1 am confident. But still it is certain that, in all cases in which\\na verb can have a middle sense, that sense is expressed, in these\\ntenses, only by the perfect and pluperfect passive in their middle\\nsense.\\n15. MOODS.\\n196. Mood is the mode or manner of express-\\ning the signification of the verb.\\n1.97. The moods, in Greek, are five, namely\\nthe Indicative, Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative,\\nand Infinitive.\\n1. The Indicative Mood asserts the action or\\nstate expressed by the verb simply as a fact as,\\nHove lie writes.\\nObs. 1. The indicative, in Greek, being used in dependent, as\\nwell as in independent clauses, resembles the English indicative,\\nand is often used where the subjunctive would be used in Latin\\nas, tig do you know who he is Latin, An sets\\nqui sit\\n2. The Subjunctive and Optative Moods re-\\npresent the action or state expressed by the verb,\\nnot as a fact, but only as a conception of the mind\\nstill contingent and dependent: that is, they do\\nnot represent a thing as what does, or did, or cer-\\ntainly will exist, but as what may, or can, or\\nmight exist.\\nThe Subjunctive represents this contingency\\nand dependence as present; the Optative, as\\npast\\nObs. 2. The subjunctive and optative moods involve a com-\\nplex idea including 1st and chiefly, the general idea of liberty\\nor power, expressed by the English words, may, can, might, c,\\nfrom which the secondary ideas of contingency and futurity are\\nderived; and 2d, the modification of this idea by the meaning of", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0106.jp2"}, "107": {"fulltext": "75. moods. 89\\nthe verb common to all the moods thus, He may, or can, ex-\\npressed in Greek by the subjunctive form, represents the person\\nhe in possession of the general attribute of liberty or power. Com-\\nbine with this the meaning of the verb, and then we have the\\ngeneral attribute expressed by the subjunctive form, restricted to\\nthe particular action or state expressed by the verb as, he may\\nwrite he can walk he may be loved.\\nObs. 3. The future indicative is often used in a subjunctive,\\nand also in an imperative sense and hence, in the futures, there\\nis neither subjunctive nor imperative mood. See Syntax, 699-5\\nand 705.\\nObs. 4. The contingency of an action conceived of as past, is\\nnot absolute, but relative to the knowledge of the speaker; thus,\\nin the expression, he may have written, the act, if done,\\nis past, but of the fact, the speaker is uncertain.\\n3. The Imperative Mood commands, exhorts,\\nentreats, or permits as, write thou;\\nlet him go.\\nObs. 5. In the past tenses the Imperative expresses urgency\\nof command, expedition, or completion of action as,\\nhave clone. In the perfect, moreover, the idea of permanent and\\ncompleted action is implied as, let him have been\\ncast, i. e. let him be cast speedily, and effectually, and continue so\\nlet the door be shut, and kept so.\\nRem. The future indicative, the subjunctive, and the infinitive,\\nare sometimes used imperatively. See Syntax of these moods.\\n4. The Infinitive Mood expresses the meaning\\nof the verb in a general manner, without any dis-\\ntinction of person or number; as, to\\nwrite; to have written\\nto he written.\\nObs. 6. Besides the common use of the infinitive, as in Latin,\\nit is completely a verbal noun, of the neuter gender, 714.\\nObs. 7. Hence the Greek infinitive supplies the place of those\\nverbal nouns called gerunds and supines, in Latin, 7 17, 718.\\nObs. 8. The infinitive, with a subject, is usually translated as\\nthe indicative, 175.\\nObs. 9. The imperfect and pluperfect exist only in the indica-\\ntive.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0107.jp2"}, "108": {"fulltext": "90 THE TENSES. 76\\n76. THE TENSES.\\n198. Tenses are certain forms of the Verb\\nwhich, serve to point out the distinctions of time.\\nThe Tenses in Greek are seven, the Present,\\nthe Imperfect, the Future, the Aorist, the Per-\\nfect, the Pluperfect, and, in the Passive, the Fu-\\nture-perfect or Paulo-postfuture.\\nRem. In some verbs, the perfect and pluperfect active, the aorists in\\nall the voices, and the future in the passive voice, have two different\\nforms, usually distinguished as first and second, but of the same signifi-\\ncation. The second future has no existence in the active and middle\\nvoices that which was so called by the ancient grammarians, is only\\nan Attic form of the first\u00c2\u00a7101, 4 (1).\\nI. The Present tense expresses what is going\\non at the present time as, I write, I am\\nwriting.\\nObs. 1. The present tense is used, to express general truths\\nas, animals run. In historical narration it is used\\nwith great effect for a preterite tense.\\nII. The Imperfect tense represents an action or\\nevent as passing, and still unfinished, at a certain\\npast time as, I was writing (when he\\ncame).\\nBern. This tense corresponds in meaning and use to the past\\nprogressive in English, and the imperfect in Latin.\\nObs. 2. From its expressing the continuance of an action, this\\ntense is frequently used to express what was customary, or con-\\ntinued from time to time; as,\\nthe groom kept rubbing and cur-\\nrying the horse every day.\\nObs. 3. For the same reason it is used instead of the aorist\\nto express a past action, without reference to any specified time.\\nWhen the action is continued, and not momentary, and when\\nactions of both kinds are mingled in a narration, the continued\\naction is often expressed by the imperfect, and the momentary by\\nthe aorist; as, He ran forth\\n(the aorist,) and continued barking at them (the imperfect).\\novv", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0108.jp2"}, "109": {"fulltext": "THE TENSES. 91\\neW\u00c2\u00abi# ot\\ntin The barbarians received (aorist) the peltastce,\\nand fought (import.) with them. Bat when the heavy-armed\\nsoldiers were near, they turned (aorist), and tlie peltastce imme-\\ndiately pursued them (iniperf.).\\nObs. 4. When the action represented by the imperfect as be-\\ngun and continuing in past time, does not succeed, or fails to be\\ncompleted, it expresses only the beginning of an action, or the\\nattempt to accomplish it; as, zovg\\nitvai, Clearchus attempted to force the soldiers\\nto go.\\nIII. Tlie Future tense expresses what will take\\nplace in future time as, I shall or will\\nwrite.\\nBern. The future tense corresponds to the simple future in\\nLatin and English and, in the passive voice, has two forms called\\nthe first and second.\\nObs. 5. Other varieties of future time are expressed by means\\nof auxiliary verbs. See 199-1.\\nIV. The Aoeist represents an action or event\\nsimply as past; as, I to rote.\\nRem. This tense, in all the voices, has two forms, caEed the\\nfirst and second. It corresponds in meaning to the past tense in\\nEnglish, and the perfect indefinite in Latin. When the time to\\nwhich the imperfect and pluperfect refer, is manifest from the\\ncontext, the aorist is often used instead of them.\\nObs. 6. From the indefinite nature of this tense, it is used by\\nthe Greeks to express what is usually or always true and is ren-\\ndered by the English expressions, usually to be wont J to\\nuse as,\\nshort time commonly dissolves the confederacies of the wicked.\\nSocrates was wont\\nto teach his disciples without any charge. In this signification,\\nhowever, it diners from the imperfect Obs. 2), inasmuch as the\\naorist denotes what is always customary; the imperfect, what\\nwas customary during a specified period of time.\\nObs. As the aorist does not, like the imperfect, express con-\\ntinuance, it is often used to express momentary action, and that\\nin the same construction in which the imperfect is used to ex-\\npress continued action [Obs. 3).", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0109.jp2"}, "110": {"fulltext": "92 THE TENSES. 76.\\n-Though inthe paradigm of the verb the full form of both the\\nfirst and second aorist is usually given, it must be observed that when\\nthe first aorist is in use, the second is usually -wanting, and vice versa.\\nIn a very few words only, are both forms to be found, and even in these,\\nthe two forms for the most part belong to different dialects, ages, or\\nstyles.\\nV. The Peefect tense represents an action or\\nevent as completed at the present time, or in a\\nperiod of time of which the present forms a part\\nas, I have written.\\nRem. In some verbs, this tense, in the active voice, has two\\nforms called the Perfect and Second-perfect. It corresponds in\\nmeaning and use to the present-perfect in English, and the per-\\nfect definite in Latin.\\nObs. 8. This tense implies that at or in the present time, the\\nact expressed by the verb is completed, but does not indicate at\\nwhat point or period of time prior to the present it was completed.\\nThus, /have written the letter, does not\\nsay when the letter was written, but only that it is now written.\\nHence it is, that this tense connects the action, either in its com-\\npletion, or, in its continuance as a completed act, with the present\\ntime thus, in Greek, means not only, I have been\\nmarried (without saying when the event took place), but that the\\nmarried state still continues, i. e. am married. Hence the per-\\nfect is generally used to denote a lasting or permanent state or an\\naction finished in itself, and therefore often occurs in Greek,\\nwhere, in English, we use the present; as, thou\\nprotectest (i. e. thou hast protected and still continuest to protect).\\nThe continued force of the perfect accompanies it through all the\\nmoods; as, they gave directions\\nfor the door to be shut, and to be kept so 6\\nLet this robber be cast into\\nthe Pyriphlegethon, and continue there.\\nObs. 9. In several verbs, the perfect tense is always used to\\ndenote only the finished action, whose effect is permanent, and\\ntherefore, in English, is translated by the present of some other\\nverb, which expresses the consequence of the action expressed by\\nthe Greek verb. Thus, I name, perfect passive\\nI have been named, and continue to be so, but commonly\\nrendered, am named, or my name is. So also, from\\nI acquire for myself, I possess (i. e. I have acquired,\\nand the acquisition continues mine) I call to my re-\\ncollection I remember.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0110.jp2"}, "111": {"fulltext": "77. THE TENSES. 93\\nVI. The Pluperfect represents an action as\\ncompleted at or before a certain past, time; as,\\nIliad written (some time ago).\\nRem. This tense, like the perfect, in the active voice, has two\\nforms called the Pluperfect and Second-pluperfect. In both, its\\nmeaning is the same, and corresponds to the pluperfect in Latin\\nand English.\\nObs. 10. The pluperfect bears the same relation to the per-\\nfect, that the imperfect does to the present and hence whenever\\nthe perfect is rendered by the present (Obs. 9), the pluperfect\\nwill of course be rendered as the imperfect as, I fear\\nid I feared.\\nVII. The Future-Perfect, or Paulo-post-Future, as it is\\nsometimes called by grammarians, is, both in form and significa-\\ntion, compounded of the perfect and future, and denotes,\\n1. The continuance of an action, or state, in itself, or conse-\\nquences as, The city will con-\\ntinue to be completely organized He shall con-\\ntinue enrolled. In thus expressing continuance, it agrees in sig-\\nnification with the perfect, and hence,\\n2. It is the natural future of those perfects which have ac-\\nquired a separate meaning of the nature of the present Obs. 9)\\nas, he has been, and continues left, i. e. he remains\\nPaulo-post-F. he will remain; I have\\nacquired and continue to retain, i. e. possess Paulo-post-future\\nI shall possess.\\n3. It is frequently used to intimate that a thing will be done\\nspeedily as, speak and it shall be done\\nimmediately.\\n199.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a777. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE\\nTENSES.\\n1. Time is naturally divided into the Present, Past, and Fu-\\nture; and in each of these divisions an action may be represented\\neither as incomplete and continuing, or as completed at the time\\nspoken of; thus,\\n5*", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0111.jp2"}, "112": {"fulltext": "94 THE TENSES. \u00c2\u00a777\\nj Action continuing as, I write or am writing.\\nAction completed as, I have written.\\nj Action continuing; as, I was writing.\\nAction completed as, I had written.\\nAction continuing as, I shall write.\\nFuture. 1 Action completed as, I shall\\nhave written.\\nOf these six divisions of time, it will be observed, that all ex-\\ncept the last are expressed by distinct forms or tenses of the verb\\nand this last is also expressed by a distinct *form in the passive\\nvoice, called the Paulo-post-future. It may also be noticed that\\nin each of these three divisions of time, by means of an auxiliary\\nverb and the infinitive, an action may be represented as on the\\npoint of beginning thus,\\nPresent, I am about to write.\\nPast. I was about to write.\\nFuture, I shall be about to write.\\n2. Besides these, the Greek has the advantage of a separate\\ntense under the division of past time, to intimate simply that the\\naction is past without reference to any particular point of time at\\nwhich it took place, and hence is denominated the Aorist, i. e. inde-\\nfinite. This tense is rendered into English by the past tense, and\\ninto Latin, by the imperfect and perfect tenses in an indefinite\\nsense.\\n3. The tenses, divided as above into three classes, in respect\\nof time, are farther, with regard to their termination and use,\\ndivided into two classes or series, which may be denominated the\\nChief or Primary, and Secondary tenses thus,\\nChief or Primary. Secondary.\\nPresent. Imperfect.\\nPerfect. Pluperfect.\\nFuture. 1 Aorist.\\nFuture-perfect, or P. P. Fut. 2 Aorist.\\nThe chief tenses are employed in the direct address, to express\\nactions as present or future. The secondary are used in the reci-\\ntal of these actions as past and hence are sometimes denomi-\\nnated the Historical Tenses.\\n4. In the English expression of the moods and tenses, c, great\\nprecision cannot be expected. Their signification often varies accord-\\ning to the conjunctions and particles with which they are joined, and\\nhence, a corresponding variety of translation becomes necessary. In\\nconsequence, also, of the number of independent forms being greater in", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0112.jp2"}, "113": {"fulltext": "g 78. AUXILIARY VERBS. 95\\nthe Gre^fc verb than in the English, it is necessary to express certain\\nand moods, in the former, by a circumlocution in the latter and\\nsometimes, in order to give the precise idea of the Greek tense, a to-\\ntally different construction must be adopted in the English sentence by\\nwhich it is translated; thus, having no imperative in the past tense\\nin English, the lull force of the imperative forms, in the past tenses in\\nGreek, must either be lost in the translation, or preserved at the\\nexpense, often, of a clumsy circumlocution. (197, Obs. 5.) In like\\nmanner, if Ave were required to give a strict translation to an aorist\\nparticiple, according to the idiom of our language, we must use, not a\\nparticiple, but a tense of the verb thus, is\\ncommonly rendered, having done this, he departed; when, in fact, it\\nehould be, when he did this, he departed. The ordinary rendering of the\\nmoods and tenses is the same in Greek as in Latin. This, as well as\\npeculiarities of usage, is fully illustrated, \u00c2\u00a7\u00c2\u00a775, 76.\\n\u00c2\u00a778. AUXILIARY VERBS.\\n200 Although the Greek language is richer than any other in\\nindependent forms, nevertheless a circumlocution is frequently made\\nuse of, by means of the auxiliary verbs\\nfcc, in connection with a participle or infinitive, partly to supply defi-\\ncient, or to avoid inharmonious forms partly to strengthen the signi-\\nfication; and partly to express, with more minuteness and precision,\\nthe time and manner of action or state expressed by the verb thus,\\n1. The subjunctive and optative in the perfect passive, are generally\\nformed with and the perfect participle the independent forms\\nbeing rarely used. The same construction is sometimes used in the\\nactive voice.\\n2. To express a purpose of doing, or the proximity of an event,\\nand with the infinitive, are used as,\\nwhatever you are about to say.\\n3. Continuance, or a permanent state, combined with the various\\ncircumstances of commencement, simple existence, priority, energy, or\\naccident, is expressed by\\nwith a participle as, there was a man\\nsent.\\n4. The completion of an event is expressed by with past par-\\nticiple. AYith such a participle, in the past tense, is equivalent to\\nthe pluperfect, but is much more emphatical; as,\\nhe was after driving the informers from the city.\\nIn like manner, in the future, with a past participle, expresses\\nthe future-perfect in the indicative the subjunctive and optative of\\nwhich is supplied from the aorists and perfect as,\\nit shall have been done, or it shall be done quickly.\\n5. Anticipated performance is expressed by or\\nwith a participle as, they\\nconspire to do something to avoid suffering.\\n6. Secrecy, so as to escape not only the knowledge of others, but\\neven a person s own consciousness, is expressed by with a", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0113.jp2"}, "114": {"fulltext": "96 PARTICIPLES. 79.\\nparticiple as, some persons enter-\\ntallied angels unawares.\\n1. A variety of other circumstances are expressed by joining appro-\\npriate adjectives and participles, with as, he\\nsacrificed openly.\\n8. Strong and earnest desire is expressed by the imperfect or second\\naorist of agreeing with its subject, and commonly followed by\\nthe infinitive therparticle is sometimes joined with it, and some-\\ntimes not as, I wish that I had not conquered.\\nWould to God I had stayed.\\n9. Imperious duty or necessity is expressed by verbal adjectives in\\n(202), either agreeing with their substantives, or, what is more\\nusual, having their agents in the dative, and governing their objects as\\nthe verbs do from which they are derived as,\\nthe good man alone must be honoured.\\n10. In some cases, there appears to be a pleonasm in the use of cer-\\ntain auxiliaries, where there is really none for by analyzing the\\nexpressions, we shall find every word having its own distinct force\\nthus, mow dvav is incorrectly translated, forgetting will-\\ningly. The full force of the words may be expressed in English thus\\nwilling to be after forgetting according to the ancient Celtic idiom.\\n(See No. 4 also Construction of the Participle, 1V7-IV.)\\n\u00c2\u00a779. PARTICIPLES.\\n201. Participles are parts of the verb, and,\\nwithout affirmation, express its meaning considered\\nas a quality or condition of an object as,\\nhe came seeing.\\nstanding below he praised him.\\nParticiples are varied like adjectives, by gender, number, and\\ncase, to agree with substantives in these accidents. If the idea\\nof time be separated from the participle, it becomes an adjective.\\nEvery tense in Greek, except the imperfect and pluperfect, has\\nits participle, a circumstance which gives the language a decid-\\ned advantage over the Latin, which has no present participle pas-\\nsive, nor past participle active.\\n80. VERBAL OR PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES IN\\nAND\\n202. The Greeks have verbal adjectives, which, both in signi-\\nrication and use, resemble participles. They are formed by adding\\nthe syllables and to the first root of the verb thus,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0114.jp2"}, "115": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a780. PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES. 97\\nRoot. Verbal Adj.\\nI say said,\\nI write written,\\nlove to be loved.\\nThose derived from liquid verbs add and to the sec-\\nond root as,\\nI extend, 2d R. to be extended.\\nNote. In those derived from pure verbs, the vowel preceding the ter-\\nmination is sometimes lengthened, sometimes not thus, from the\\nadjective is but from aioeo),\\nObs. 1. The verbal adjectives in have commonly a pas-\\nsive signification, and either correspond to the Latin perfect par-\\nticiple passive as, f actus, made aggestus\\nflexus or, they convey the idea of ability and capacity,\\nexpressed by the Latin adjectives in His thus, visibilis,\\nvisible; audible, c. Frequently, however, they have\\nan active signification as, concealing blam-\\ning, fec.\\nObs. 2. Those in correspond to the Latin future partici-\\nple in dus, and convey the idea of duty, necessity, or obligation\\nas, amandus, who ought to be loved bibendus,\\nwhich ought to be drunk.\\nObs. 3. The verbal in the neuter (among the Attics\\nmore commonly in the plural), corresponds to the Latin ge-\\nrund thus, (Attic bibendum est\\nbellandum est.\\nNote. For the construction of these adjectives, see Syntax, 147,\\nRules L and EL\\n203. ACCENTS OF THE VERB.\\nIn verbs, the accent is placed as far from the\\nend of the word as the quantity of the final sylla-\\nble will permit (22 24).\\n204. EXCEPTIONS AND VARIETIES.\\n1. Monosyllables, if long, are circumflected as,\\nfor\\n2. A long syllable after the characteristic, unless followed by a\\nlong syllable, is circumflected\\n1st. In the active, and the middle voice in the future of liquid\\nverbs as, c, be-\\ncause contracted for c.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0115.jp2"}, "116": {"fulltext": "98 CONJUGATION. \u00c2\u00a781.\\n2d. In the passive voice, in the subjunctive of the aorists and\\nin the subjunctive present of verbs in as,\\n~ys V c.\\n3. The third person of the optative in and ai has the acute\\naccent on the penult; as, except in the futures,\\nNo. 2\u00e2\u0080\u0094 1st.\\n4. The imperatives, 8, have the accent\\non the final syllable but the imperative, 2 aor. middle, 2d person\\nsingular, circumflects the final syllable as, except\\n5. The infinitive of the 2 aorist active circumflects the final\\nsyllable as,\\nThe infinitive of the 1st aorist active, 2d aorist middle, both\\naorists passive, all the perfects, and the infinitives of the active\\nvoice in the 2d conjugation, have the circumflex on the long pe-\\nnult, and the acute on the short.\\n6. The participles of the 2d aorist active, of the present active\\nof verbs in and all ending in or have the acute accent\\non the final syllable as,\\nThe participles of the perfect passive, have the acute accent on\\nthe penult as,\\n*1. and have the acute accent on the final syllable\\nin the indicative (except the 2d sing.) thus, c.\\n81. CONJUGATION.\\n205. The Conjugation of a verb is the regular\\ncombination and arrangement of its several voices,\\nmoods, tenses, numbers, and persons, according to\\na certain order.\\n206. Of regular verbs, in Greek, there are two\\nconjugations viz., the first, of verbs in and the\\nsecond, of verbs in\\n20 Verbs of the first conjugation, in the ac-\\ntive voice, end in and in the middle and pas-\\nsive, in", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0116.jp2"}, "117": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a782. THE BOOT. 99\\nANALYSIS OF VERBS IN 07.\\n208. Verbs of the first conjugation consist of\\nthe following parts viz.,\\n1. The root or stem, which is unchanged, except\\nas modified by the rules of euphony and,\\n2. Those parts which, by their changes, distin-\\nguish the voices, moods, tenses, numbers, and per-\\nsons. These parts are the tense-sign, the augment,\\nand the terminations.\\n82. 1. THE ROOT.\\n209. 1. The is that part of the verb\\nwhich remains unchanged throughout, except as\\nrequired by the rules of euphony, and serves as\\nthe basis of all the other parts.\\n2. The final letter of the root marks the char-\\nacter of the verb, and is therefore called the char-\\nacteristic it is either a vowel, or a mute, or a\\nliquid.\\nWhen the characteristic is a vowel the verb is\\ncalled pure when a mute, the verb is called\\nmute; and when a liquid, the verb is called\\nliquid.\\n3. In regular verbs, the characteristic is the\\nletter next the termination in the present indica-\\ntive as, in in s, in\\nExc. But if of two consonants the last is or\\na liquid, the first is the characteristic; as, in\\nand in\\nFINDING THE BOOT.\\n4. Rule. Strike off from the present indicative\\nall that follows the characteristic what remains\\nL", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0117.jp2"}, "118": {"fulltext": "100 the root. 82\\nis the root thus,\\nroots\\nOBSERVATIONS.\\n210. 055. 1. The letter is frequently added to the root be-\\nfore the termination in the present and imperfect, apparently to\\nstrengthen the sound, as in The characteristic, if a mid-\\ndle or aspirate mute, coming before this r, is of course changed\\ninto its own smooth (43-2) thus, before becomes\\nand the verb, Hence, in order to find the root, the char-\\nacteristic changed by euphony must be restored as in the follow-\\ning words\\nCharac.\\nRoot.\\nby euphony for\\n11\\nu\\nu\\nU\\nU\\nAlso and have their roots and \\\\pvy.\\nNote. The preceding list contains all the words to which this obser-\\nvation is applicable.\\nSECONDARY FORMS.\\n211. Obs. 2. Many verbs have a Secondary form in the pre-\\nsent and imperfect, which has come into general use, while the\\noriginal form or theme, has become obsolete, 116. The root\\nof the theme nevertheless remains the proper root of the verb\\nin the other tenses, and will be found in the future by striking off\\ncoo. If the letter next preceding be a consonant, it is the charac-\\nteristic of the verb. If it be a long vowel, either that or its cor-\\nresponding short vowel is the characteristic. But if it be a short\\nor doubtful vowel, the characteristic is either that vowel itself, or\\na -mute, which has been rejected before for the sake of sound,\\n44-8. This observation applies in the following cases viz.,\\n1st. Verbs in or are secondary forms, derived\\nfrom primary, whose characteristic is a -mute (commonly y)", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0118.jp2"}, "119": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a782.\\nTHE ROOT.\\n101\\nwhen the future ends in or a -mute (commonly when\\nthe future ends in The characteristic being substituted for\\nor gives the supposed primary form. Thus,\\nSecondary form.\\nFuture. Char. Primary form.\\nRoot.\\nExc. The following are the verbs of this class which have not or\\nfor their characteristic viz., and\\nwhich have their roots respectively\\nhx, making the primary forms and\\n2d. Most verbs in are secondary forms from pure verbs\\nin 116, I and II). The primary forms will appear by drop-\\nping thus, primary form Root,\\n3d. Many verbs, irregular in the present and imperfect, are\\nsecondary forms from obsolete verbs which furnish the roots for\\nthe other tenses. See \u00c2\u00a7\u00c2\u00a7116 and 11 7. In nearly all such verbs,\\nthe first root will be found by taking or from the future\\nas found in the Lexicons thus,\\nSecondary form.\\nRem. In reducing secondary into primary forms in this manner, the\\nvowel before and in the future, made long by 96, R. 1, must\\nbe shortened; and the -mute, rejected by 94, R. 2, must be restored,\\nto give the proper form of the root as, and above. In\\nall mute verbs, the proper characteristics concealed by combining with\\nc. will always be seen in the 2 aorist, or 2 perfect. Thus in\\nthe 2 aor. is showing the characteristic to be and 1 root,\\nconsequently, Hence\\nTO FIND THE ROOT IN SECONDARY FORMS.\\n212. Kule. From the future indicative active\\nor middle as found in the Lexicons, strike off\\nor what remains is the root, either in its\\nsimple form, or modified by the rules of euphony\\nthus,\\nFuture.\\n1 Root.\\nPrimary form", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0119.jp2"}, "120": {"fulltext": "102\\nTHE SECOND ROOT.\\n\u00c2\u00a78S.\\nondary form.\\nFuture.\\nRoot.\\nelide\\nleaves\\n44-7\\n44-7\\n44-8\\n44-8\\n44-6\\n44-8\\n44-8\\n213. 3. Many verbs change the form of the root in the se-\\ncond tense\u00c2\u00bb, i. e. in the second future passive, and second aorist\\nand in the second perfect, and second pluperfect active. These\\nforms, for the sake of distinction, are called the second and the\\nthird root the root the present being the first root.\\n83. THE SECOND ROOT.\\n214. The second root is always formed from\\nthe first, according to the following\\nRULES.\\n1. A long vowel in the first root is changed in-\\nto a in the second thus,\\nVerb. 1st R. 2d R.\\n2. In diphthongs, a is retained and is reject-\\ned; as,\\nVerb. IstR. 2d R. Verb. 1st R. 2d R.\\nExc. But liquid dissyllables change tc into ccj\\npolysyllables into as,\\nVerb. 1st R. 2d R.\\nDiss.\\nPolysyl.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0120.jp2"}, "121": {"fulltext": "8-i. THE THIRD ROOT. 103\\n3. In dissyllables not pure, before or after a\\nliquid, is changed into a as,\\nVerb. IstR. 2d R. Verb. 1st R. 2d R.\\nExc. But remains unchanged after in\\n4. Pure verbs in and reject the a and s\\n(216, Exc. 1) as,\\nVerb. 1st R. 2d R.\\n84. THE THIRD ROOT.\\n215. The third root is always formed from the\\nsecond, according to the following\\nRULES.\\n1. of the second root, is changed into in\\nthe third as,\\nVerb. IstR. 2d R. 3d R.\\n2. a, of the second root, from or in the\\nfirst, is changed into in the third as,\\nVerb. IstR. 2d R. 3d R.\\n3. of the second root, from of the first, is\\nchanged into ot as,\\nVerb. IstR. 2d R. 3d R.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0121.jp2"}, "122": {"fulltext": "GOLTt\\ncpav\\n104 THE THIRD ROOT. \u00c2\u00a785.\\n4. a, of the second root, from or ac of the\\nfirst, is changed into in the third as,\\nVerb. IstR. 2d R. 3d R.\\nlikewise\\n\u00c2\u00a785. VERBS WHICH WANT THE SECOND AND THIRD\\nROOTS.\\n216. Many verbs want the second tenses, and consequently\\nthe second and third roots. (198, Obs. *7, B.) These are as\\nfollows\\nRule 1. Pure verbs want the second root.\\nExc. 1. The following primitives are excepted\\nand a few others.\\nhas the third root but no second.\\nExc. 2. A few dissyllables in and have the second and\\nthe third root the same as the first.\\nNote 1. Several of these are reckoned with anomalous verbs, 117\\nSome verbs derive their second and third roots from obsolete presents\\nsuch as, aloeo) and many verbs in and for which see the\\nsame section.\\nRule 2. Derivatives in\\nwant the second root.\\nNote 2. Primitives, in these terminations, usually have the second\\nroot.\\nObs.\u00c2\u00bbl. Several verbs which have no second root, and conse-\\nquently no second aorist in the first conjugation, derive the sec-\\nond aorist active and middle from forms in the second conjuga-\\ntion thus, 2 a. from 2 a. from\\n2 a. from FNQMI, derived from\\nObs. 2. Many verbs not included under the above rules never\\nuse the second tenses others have them only in the passive\\nvoice others again are used in these tenses only by certain writ-", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0122.jp2"}, "123": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a786. THE TENSE-KOOT. 105\\ners. In such a variety of usage, it is proper to assume that all\\nverbs not included in the above classes form the second and third\\nroots according to the rules in 83, 84.\\n86. THE TENSE-ROOT.\\n217. The Tense-Koot is that part which re-\\nmains unchanged in all parts of the same tense. It\\nconsists of all that precedes the termination, ex-\\ncept the augment.\\nObs. 1. In some of the tenses, certain letters are inserted be-\\ntween the verb-root and terminations. These are called signs of\\nthe tenses to which they belong, because they serve to distinguish\\nthese tenses from others.\\nThe Tense-Signs added to the verb-root, form the tense-root\\nin these tenses and, prefixed to the terminations, they form the\\ntense-endings, 232-2. Hence, in the tenses which have no sign,\\nthe verb-root alone is the tense-root, and the termination alone is\\nthe tense-ending as, i Obs. 4.)\\n218. The tense-signs, together with the tenses to which they\\nbelong, are exhibited in the following\\nTABLE OF TENSE-SIGNS.\\n1. In mute and pure verbs, the tense-signs are as follows\\nAct.\\nFuture, -c-\\n1 Aorist, -o\\n2 Future,\\nPerf. and Pluperf., or\\n2. In liquid verbs, the tense-signs are as follows\\nFuture, -s-\\n1 Aorist,\\n2 Future,\\nPerf. and Pluperf.,\\nObs. 2. If the characteristic be a ^-mute or a -mute, the\\nsign of the perfect and pluperfect active is the spiritus asper\\nwhich, combining with the mute before it (43-3), changes or\\ninto or into But when the characteristic is or\\nthe spiritus aspe: disappears.\\nMid.\\nPass.\\nas follows\\n-8-", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0123.jp2"}, "124": {"fulltext": "106\\nTHE AUGMENT.\\n\u00c2\u00a787\\nObs. 3. If the characteristic is a vowel, or a r-mute, or a li\\nquid, the sign of the perfect and pluperfect active is\\nObs. 4. In all the tenses, except those in the preceding table,\\ni. e. in the second aorist through all the voices, the second per-\\nfect and second pluperfect active, and the perfect and pluperfect\\npassive, and also, in liquid verbs, the first aorist active and raid-\\ndie, the tense-root and the verb-root are always the same. So\\nalso in the present and imperfect in all voices.\\nExc. But irregular verbs, and those which fall under the Ex-\\nceptions and Observations, 82, have the tense-root in the present\\nand imperfect different from the verb-root; though, like other\\nverbs, it consists of all that precedes the termination in the present\\nindicative. Thus, for example, in the tense-root in the\\npresent and imperfect is while the verb-root is In\\nthe tense-root of the present and imperfect is\\nwhile the verb-root is and so of others.\\n219. WORDS FOR PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING- RULES.\\n[In the following list\\nthe kind of verbs form\\ngive the rule for each.]\\nI strike,\\nI say.\\n1 rejoice,\\nI sow.\\nI nourish,\\nI lead,\\nI cry aloud,\\nI cast,\\nI persuade,\\nI praise.\\nI change.\\nI plow,\\nI see.\\nof verbs, tell the characteristic, the root, and\\nthe second and the third root (if in use), and\\nI leave,\\nI eat.\\nI fold,\\nI owe.\\nI seize.\\nI do.\\nI say.\\nI show,\\nI plunder,\\nI awake.\\nI sacrifice.\\nI call,\\nI shave.\\nI fear.\\nI learn,\\nI turn,\\nI pollute,\\nI send,\\nI assign.\\nI remain,\\nI make,\\nI send.\\nI divide.\\nI try.\\nI sprinkle,\\nI burn.\\n220.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 87. THE AUGMENT.\\n1. The augment is a prefix joined to the root in.\\nthe preterite tenses.\\n2. There are two kinds of augments, the temporal and sylla-\\nbic.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0124.jp2"}, "125": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a788. THE AUGMENT. 107\\n3. The temporal augment is used when the root begins with\\na vowel or diphthong, and lengthens the initial vowel.\\n4. The syllabic augment is used when the verb begins with a\\nconsonant, and prefixes a syllable to the root.\\nAUGMENTED TENSES.\\n5. The imperfect and aorists nave the augment\\nin the indicative only. The perfect, pluperfect,\\nand paulo-post-future, retain it through all the\\nmoods.\\n6. The present and future have no augment.\\n221.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a788. RULES FOR THE AUGMENT.\\n1. If the verb begins with a consonant, the aug-\\nment is prefixed as,\\n43-5.\\n2. The perfect reduplicates the initial consonant\\nbefore as, perfect\\nExc. 1. The aspirate reduplicates its own\\nsmooth as, perf.\\nperf. 43-4.\\nExc. 2. Verbs beginning with or a\\nbefore or after a consonant, do not reduplicate\\nthus,\\nda\\nObs. 1. Sometimes also verbs beginning with and do\\nnot reduplicate as,\\nAnd sometimes, though rarely, those beginning with", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0125.jp2"}, "126": {"fulltext": "108 THE AUGMENT. \u00c2\u00a788.\\n3. When the perfect reduplicates the initial\\nconsonant, the pluperfect receives a new augment\\nas,\\nOtherwise not as,\\n4. If the verb begins with or with av,\\nat, oc, the initial vowel is changed into its own\\nlong, and c of the diphthong is subscribed as,\\n1. is often changed into its own diph-\\nthong; as,\\nI have\\nThe verbs winch change into are the following:\\n(this verb retains the augment through all the moods),\\nand 20.\\nJExc. 2. If the verb begins with the .is un-\\nchanged and the augmented\\nSo also some 2d pluperf. active viz., from the 2d perf.\\npluperf.\\nExc. 3. I blow I hear I am unused\\nI loathe retain the initial vowel unchanged as also\\nsome verbs derived from and as,\\nI smell of wine, and also the 2d perfect active when the\\nroot begins with as, plup.\\n5. If the initial vowel is not or at,\\not, it is not augmented but. c and short are\\nmade long as.\\nc\\nV\\nV\\nSee Exceptions, 224-4, 5.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0126.jp2"}, "127": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a789,90. THE AUGMENT. 109\\n222.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 89. AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS.\\n1. When the verb is compounded with a pre-\\nposition, the augment comes between the preposi-\\ntion and the verb as,\\nObs. 1. The prepositions drop their final vowel before the aug-\\nment e as,\\nBut,\\nObs. 2. before remains unchanged usually com-\\nbines with it by contraction; thus, becomes\\n116, II.\\nObs. 3. When v, in the prepositions and is changed\\ninto another consonant, by the rules of euphony, 46-15, it is re-\\ncovered when separated from that consonant, by the augment\\nthus,\\n2. Verbs compounded with or take the augment after\\nthe particle, when the simple verb begins with or with\\nav, at, as,\\n3. But if the simple verb begin with any other vowel or con-\\nsonant, is augmented, and remains unchanged as,\\n4. Other compounds generally take the augment at the be-\\nginning.\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n223. The exceptions from these rules are but few, and will be\\nbest learned by practice. Some writers augment certain com-\\npound verbs in the beginning, and others in the middle while\\nother verbs are sometimes augmented in both as, 1\\nunderstand, I erect,\\nI sleep, or I disturb,\\n224.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a790. OBSERVATIONS ON THE AUGMENT.\\n1. In the early Greek poets, the use of the augment is very\\nfluctuating, the same word sometimes occurring with the aug-\\nment and sometimes without it as, and he car-\\n6", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0127.jp2"}, "128": {"fulltext": "110 THE AUGMENT. \u00c2\u00a790.\\nried out and he took and ay he brought\\nand he had received.\\nObs. 1. From the antiquity of the Ionic, this has been usually-\\nconsidered a peculiarity of that dialect but it occurs frequently\\nin the Attic writers, particularly in choruses as, for\\nhe was driven for it had been for\\nI have spent.\\n2. In Homer and Hesiod, aorists often receive the reduplica-\\ntion, which remains through all the moods thus, for\\nI shall have laboured for to have\\nreceived.\\n3. In all dialects, verbs beginning with and frequently\\ntake \u00c2\u00abt or as the augment of the perf. as, for 1\\nhave taken for it has been decreed.\\n4. The Attics often change the simple augment into and\\naugment the initial vowels of verbs beginning with si and as,\\nfor I was able; for I assimi-\\nlated for I prayed for I knew.\\n5. In verbs beginning with or with av, at, the At-\\ntics sometimes prefix instead of the usual augment i. e. they\\nuse the syllabic instead of the temporal augment; as, for\\nfor Sometimes they use both as,\\nJ see,\\nATTIC REDUPLICATION.\\n6. When the verb begins with or o, followed by a con-\\nsonant, the first two letters are sometimes repeated before the or-\\ndinary augment. This is called the Attic Reduplication thus,\\nI assemble Attice,\\nI vomit\\nI smell\\nI dig\\nObs. 2. Tfye pluperfect sometimes takes anew augment on the\\ninitial vowel of the reduplication thus,\\nObs. 3. This form of the verb frequently changes a long vowel\\nor diphthong into a short or doubtful vowel in the third syllable;\\nthus, for and for from\\nfor from\\n7. Mule. The simple augment is confined to the indicative\\nmood the reduplication remains in all the moods.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0128.jp2"}, "129": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a791.\\nTERMINATIONS.\\nIll\\n225.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 91. III. THE TERMINATIONS.\\n1. The terminations are parts of the verb added immediately\\nto the tense-root, and which, by their changes, serve to distinguish\\nthe voices, moods, numbers, and persons. These are different in\\nthe two conjugations.\\n2. The terminations in the first conjugation consist of two\\nparts the mood-vowel, and final letters.\\nThe mood-vowel distinguishes the mood and connects the final\\nletters with the tense-root. The final letters distinguish the voices,\\nnumbers, and persons.\\n3. The mood-vowel is the first letter of the termination, and in\\nthe indicative, is always short or doubtful except in the 1st and\\n2d pluperfect, which has always in the subjunctive, it is al-\\nways long in the optative, always a diphthong.\\n4. The final letters are of two classes, Primary and Second-\\nary the former are used in the indicative mood in the primary\\ntenses, and the latter, in the secondary (199-3). Also, the pri-\\nmary final letters are always used in the subjunctive mood, and\\nthe secondary in the optative.\\n226. TABLE OF FINAL LETTERS.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nPrimary.\\nSecondary.\\n1. 2.\\n3.\\n1. 2.\\n3.\\nSing.\\nig\\nSing,\\nDual.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nVT61\\nPlural,\\nv y\\nMIDDLE AND PASSIVE.\\nPrimary.\\nSecondary.\\n1. 2.\\n3.\\n1. 2.\\n3.\\nSing.\\nSing,\\nDual.\\nDual,\\nPlural.\\nPlural,\\n5. The mood- vowels and final letters combined form the ter-\\nmination in the indicative, subjunctive, and optative moods through\\nthe whole verb, except in the perfect and pluperfect, middle and\\npassive, which, having no mood-vowels, annex the final letters im\\nmediately to the root.\\nThe following table shows the mood-vowels and final letters,\\nboth separate and combined.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0129.jp2"}, "130": {"fulltext": "112 TERMINATIONS.\\n227. ACTIVE VOICE.\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nPrimary.\\nPresent and Future.\\nMood-vowels and final letters separate. The same combined.\\nSing, o-o\\nDual.\\nPlural,\\nSing, a-\\nDual.\\nPlural,\\n\u00c2\u00a791.\\n-tov\\nFirst and Second Perfect.\\nSecondary.\\nImperfect and Second Aorist.\\nSing, o-v\\nDual.\\nPlural,\\nSing, a-\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nFirst Aorist.\\nSing.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nFirst and Second Pluperfect.\\nSUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.\\nAll the Tenses.\\nVS\\nV\\nOPTATIVE MOOD.\\nAll the Tenses except the First Aorist.\\nSing.\\nDual.\\nPlural,\\nSing,\\nDual.\\nPlural,\\nThe First Aorist Optative has ai instead of ov for its mood-vowels.\\n6. In this table the indicative mood-vowel o, and the subjunc-\\ntive combining with the final letter -o makes and with\\nthey make and 6, Rules 8, 1\u00ce\u00b2, and 18.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0130.jp2"}, "131": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a791.\\nTERMINATIONS.\\n113\\n228. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nPrimary.\\nPresent and Futures.\\nMood-vowels and final letters separate\\nSing,\\nDual,\\nPlural,\\nSecondary.\\nImperfect and Second Aorist Middle.\\nThe same combined.\\ns(\u00c2\u00bb)\\nSing.\\nDual.\\nPlural,\\nSing.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nSing.\\nDual.\\nPlural,\\nFirst Aorist Middle.\\nSUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.\\nAll the Tenses.\\n\u00ce\u00bf\u00cf\u0085(1)\\ncovtat\\nOPTATIVE MOOD.\\nPresent and Futures, also 2d Aorist Middle.\\nSing, (7)\\nDual,\\nPlural,\\nThe First Aorist Optative has instead of ot, for its mood-vowels.\\n7. In the second person singular, in combining, elides a,\\nleaving and then contracts the concurrent vowels into y (116,\\nExc. 3). So also becomes and then rj (116, K. viii).\\nSo becomes contracted ov (116, R. ii) becomes ao,\\ncontracted (116, vii. 1) and eliding becomes\\nwithout contraction.\\n8. In the passive voice, the perfect and pluperfect have no\\nmood-vowels, but annex the final letters (which in this case are\\nthe terminations) immediately to the root, 270-10. Also, the\\nfirst and second aorists, in the indicative, as a termination prefix\\nand, in the optative, to the secondary final letters of the\\nactive voice, as will be seen in the table, 231.\\n9. The final letters and mood-vowels of the imperative, infini-\\ntive, and participles, will be seen combined in the following tables.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0131.jp2"}, "132": {"fulltext": "114\\nTABLES OF TERMINATIONS.\\n92.\\n92. TABLES OF TERMINATIONS.\\n229. I. ACTIVE VOICE.\\nINDICATIVE.\\nPrimary Tenses.\\nPres. and Fut.\\n1st and 2d Perfect.\\ns.\\nD.\\nP.\\n-OfJLSV\\nSecondary Tenses.\\nImp erf.\\nand 2d Aor.\\n1st and 2d Pluperfect.\\n1st Aor.\\ns.\\n-OV\\n-eg\\nD.\\nP.\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\ns.\\nD.\\nP.\\nThe same as first\\ncolumn.\\nOPTATIVE.\\nThe same as first\\ncolumn.\\ns.\\nD.\\nP.\\nThe same as first\\ncolumn.\\nIMPERATIVE.\\ns.\\nD.\\nThe same as first\\nP.\\ncolumn.\\nor\\nINFINITIVE.\\nor\\n-tvai\\nPARTICIPLES.\\nN.\\nG.\\nG.\\nObs. In this table, the terminations in the first column belong to the\\npresent, imperfect indicative, future, and 2d aorist all those in the\\n2d, to the first and second perfect and pluperfect and all those in the\\n3d, to the 1st aorist.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0132.jp2"}, "133": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a792.\\nTABLES OF TERMINATIONS.\\n115\\n230. II. MIDDLE VOICE.\\nINDICATIVE.\\nPrimary Tenses.\\nMIDDLE AND PASSIVE.\\nPres. and Fut\\n8.\\nD.\\nSecondary Tenses.\\nImperfect and 2d Aorist.\\n1st Aorist.\\ns.\\nD.\\nP.\\n-ov\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\ns.\\nD.\\nP.\\nThe same as first column.\\nOPTATIVE.\\nS.\\n-atcr^fi\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nS.\\nD.\\nINFINITIVE.\\nPARTICIPLES.\\nG.\\nObs. In this table of the middle voice, the terminations of the\\nperfect and pluperfect are omitted, being the same throughout\\nas those of the perfect and pluperfect passive on the next page.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0133.jp2"}, "134": {"fulltext": "116\\nTABLES OF TERMINATIONS.\\n\u00c2\u00a792.\\n,231\\nIII. PASSIVE VOICE.\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nPrimary Tenses.\\nPASSIVE\\nAND MIDDLE.\\nPerfect.\\nS.\\nD.\\nP.\\nSecondary Tenses.\\nPluperfect.\\n1st and 2d Aorists.\\nS.\\nD.\\nP.\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nS.\\nh\\ni\\n1\\nOPTATIVE.\\nS.\\nD.\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nS.\\nD.\\nINFINITIVE.\\nPARTICIPLES.\\nF.\\nF.\\nG.\\nFor the terminations of the present, imperfect, 1st, 2d, and 3d\\nfutures of the passive voice, see the terminations in the first column\\nof the table on the preceding page.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0134.jp2"}, "135": {"fulltext": "93. FORMATION OF TENSES. 7\\n232.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a793. FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN MUTE\\nAND PURE VERBS.\\n1. Each tense consists of its proper root, and\\ntense-ending, together with the augment prefixed\\nin the augmented tenses.\\nObs. 1. The 2 future passive and 2 aorist add the tense-end-\\nings to the second root, the 2 perfect and 2 pluperfect active, te\\nthe third root, and all others to the first.\\nExc. and in the perfect and pluper\\nfeet passive, have the second root. and in the 2\\nperfect active, have sometimes the first, instead of the third root.\\nand in the perfect and plu-\\nperfect active, change of the first root into o.\\n2. The tense-endings consist of the tense-signs (218) and ter-\\nminations united and when there is no tense-sign, the termina-\\ntion alone is also the tense- ending, as exhibited in the following\\ntable.\\nTABLE OF TENSE-ENDINGS.\\nTense. Active. Middle. Passive.\\n1 Future, (liq. (liq.\\n2 Future,\\n1 Aorist, (liq. (liq.\\n2 Aorist, -ov\\nPerfect, or- -a, 235, R.l.\\nPluperf. or\\n2 Perfect, -a\\n2 Pluperf.\\nFut.-Perf. or Paulo-post-future\\n233. GENERAL RULES.\\nRule 1. The imperfect is formed from the pre-\\nsent by prefixing the augment and changing\\ninto ov, and into 6 as,\\nRule 2. All tenses except the present and im-\\nperfect, add the tense-endings to the proper root\\n(232, Obs. 1), and prefix the augment in the pre-\\nterite tenses, as follows\\n6*", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0135.jp2"}, "136": {"fulltext": "\u00ce\u00a4-\u00ce\u008a8 FORMATION OF TENSES. 94\\n234. SPECIAL RULES FOR EACH TENSE.\\n1. Active Voice.\\nFuture. Add to the 1st root.\\n1 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add to the 1st root.\\n2 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -ov to the 2d root.\\nPerfect. Augment, reduplicate, and add or -a to the 1st root,\\n235, R. 1.\\nPluperf. Augment, reduplicate, repeat the augment, and add\\nor to the 1st root.\\n2 Perf. Augment, reduplicate, and add -a to the 3d root.\\n2 Pluperf. Augment, reduplicate, repeat the augment, and add\\n-sir to the 3d root.\\n2. Middle Voice.\\nFuture. Add to the 1st root.\\n1 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add to the 1st root.\\n2 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add to the 2d root.\\nThe Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future-perfect, are the same as in\\nthe Passive Voice.\\n3. Passive Voice.\\n1 Future. Add to the 1st root.\\n2 Future. Add to the 2d root.\\n1 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add to the 1st root.\\n2 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add to the 2d root.\\nPerfect. Augment, reduplicate, and add to the 1st root.\\nPluperf. Augment, reduplicate, repeat the augment, and add\\nto the 1st root.\\nFut. Perf. Augment, reduplicate, and add to the 1st root.\\n235.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 94. SPECIAL RULES FOR MUTES.\\nRule 1. When the characteristic is a mute or\\na #-mute, the perfect active is formed by adding\\n--a, and the pluperfect by adding -sip; all\\nothers add -xttv (218, Obs. 2, 3) thus,\\nRoot perf. combined\\npluperf.\\nRoot perf.\\npluperf.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0136.jp2"}, "137": {"fulltext": "g95.\\nFORMATION OF TENSES.\\n119\\nEule 2. tlie characteristic is a r-mute,\\nit is rejected before a consonant in the active and\\nthe middle voice, and changed into a in the pas-\\nsive; thus,\\nActive, Root Fut. perf.\\nMiddle, Fut. 1 Aor.\\nPassive, 1 fut. 1 Aor. perf.\\nExc. The -mute is rejected in the passive also, when it comes\\nbefore (44-8) as, for or after a liquid\\nas, 1 future passive perfect\\nAlso, a TT-rnute, after a liquid, is rejected before as,\\nperfect passive\\nObs. and (239-2), have instead\\nof before a consonant in the passive as,\\n(240, R. 2), c. has either or as,\\nor\\n236.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 95. METHOD OF FORMING THE TENSES.\\n1. I honour.\\nThis verb, requiring no insertion or change of letters for the\\nsake of euphony, affords the simplest example for showing the\\nformation of tenses. A second and third root and the\\ntenses formed from them, are here assumed, though they do not\\nexist in the verb, to show the manner in which these tenses are\\nformed.\\nActive.\\nMiddle.\\nPassive.\\nPres.\\nImp.\\nFut.\\n2 Fut.\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\n2 Perf.\\n2 Pluperf.\\nP. P. Fut.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0137.jp2"}, "138": {"fulltext": "120\\nFORMATION OF TENSES.\\n95.\\nThe following examples fall under 235, Rule 1. They are\\nexhibited with the parts divided, and then combined, to show the\\neffect of the rules of euphony, 6, in combining the parts. It\\nwill be a profitable exercise for the pupil to apply these rules for\\nevery change.\\n2. The characteristic a 7r-mute.\\nI leave.\\nRoots, 1. 2. 3.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nParts divided.\\nParts combined.\\nPres.\\nImperil\\nFut.\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\n2 Perf.\\n2 Pluperf.\\ni\\nMIDDLE VOICE.\\nPres.\\nImperf.\\nFut.\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\nP. P. Fut.\\nPASSIVE VOICE.\\nPres.\\nImperf.\\nFut.\\n2 Fut.\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\nP. P. Fut.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0138.jp2"}, "139": {"fulltext": "95.\\nFORMATION OF TENSES.\\n121\\n3.\\nThe characteristic a\\nI fold.\\n#-mute.\\nRoots, 1. 2.\\n3.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nParts divided.\\nParts combined.\\nPres.\\nImperf.\\nFut\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\n2 Perf.\\n2 Pluperf.\\nMIDDLE VOICE.\\nPres.\\nImperf.\\n1-\u00cf\u0080\u00ce\u00bb\u00ce\u00b5\u00ce\u00ba-\u00cf\u008c\u00ce\u00bc\u00cf\u0088\\nFut.\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\nP. P. Fut.\\nPASSIVE VOICE.\\nPres.\\nImperf.\\nFut.\\n2 Fut\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPert\\nPluperf.\\nP. P. Fut.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0139.jp2"}, "140": {"fulltext": "122 FOKMATION OF TENSES. \u00c2\u00a796.\\n4. The characteristic a r-mute.\\nI persuade.\\nThis verb has the first root the second m the third\\nttoi j and its characteristic being a -mute, it comes under 235,\\nRule 2.\\nActive.\\nMiddle.\\nPassive.\\nPres.\\nImp.\\nFut.\\n2 Fut,\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\n2 Perf.\\n2 Pluperf.\\nP. P. Fut.\\n\u00c2\u00a796. SPECIAL RULES FOR PURE VERBS.\\n237. In the rules for the Moods and Tenses of verbs,\\nlet it be remembered, that\\nThe three short vowels, a s\\nhave their own long,\\nand their own diphthongs, at\\n238. Rule 1. Verbs in and change\\nthe short vowel into its own long before a conso-\\nnant; as,\\nRoot fut. perf. g.\\n239. EXCEPTIONS.\\n1. after or retains a) and and\\nafter a vowel as,\\nLikewise dissyllables in which do not pass into as,\\nBut those which pass into have except", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0140.jp2"}, "141": {"fulltext": "96. FORMATION OF TENSES. 123\\nThe following also retain a; viz.\\nand lias a or\\n2. Ten in retain viz.\\nLikewise those which form new presents in and\\nas, and from from retain\\nSixteen in have or 77 viz.\\nbesides a few others\\nseldom used as,\\nSir in have viz. I flow 1\\nrun; and I swim but I speak I place\\nand I spin, have\\n3. In primitive verbs, retains such as,\\nLikewise those which form others in and\\nhave but those which pass into have except\\nwhich has in the 1 fnt. and 1 aor. passive as,\\n4. The anomalous verbs and change ai into av as,\\nfut.\\n5. and (Tor retain before only\\nas, c.\\n240. Rule 2. Pure verbs which have or a\\ndoubtful vowel, or a diphthong before a conso-\\nnant, in the active and the middle voice, insert e\\nbefore a consonant in the passive as,\\nPerf. Act. 1 Fut. Pass. 1 Aor. Pass. Perf. Pass.\\nSo also verbs in and\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n241. To this rule there are many exceptions as,\\n1. Five which have before a consonant do not insert s viz.\\n2. Eight which have a viz. xo-", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0141.jp2"}, "142": {"fulltext": "124\\nLIQUID VEEBS.\\n97.\\n3. One which, has t viz.\\n4. Eleven which have viz.\\n5. Seven which have viz.\\nAlso many verbs\\nin derived from nouns as,\\n6. One which has ov viz. as, fec.\\n7. Fourteen verbs sometimes insert before a consonant in the\\npassive voice, and sometimes not; viz.\\n242. Kule 3. Verbs in forming verbs in\\ninsert a before a consonant in the passive voice\\nas, c.\\nExcept from and from which\\nhave c.\\nFOKMINO THE TENSES OF PUKE VEEBS.\\n243. The following example shows the method of forming\\nthe tenses in pure verbs. With few exceptions, having no second\\nroot (216), they have no 2d future, or 2d aorist; and in the ac-\\ntive voice, no 2d perfect, or 2d pluperfect.\\nPres.\\nImperf.\\nFut.\\n1 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\nP. P. Fut.\\nActive.\\nMiddle.\\ni\\nPassive.\\ni\\n97. LIQUID VERBS.\\n244. Liquid verbs differ from mute and pure\\nverbs in forming some of the tenses, as will ap-\\npear by the following", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0142.jp2"}, "143": {"fulltext": "97 LIQUID VERBS. 125\\nSPECIAL RULES.\\n1. The future active and middle shortens the\\nroot, if it contains a diphthong, by rejecting the\\nlast of the two vowels; and instead of and\\nadds aco and contracted and\\nas,\\nVerb. R. Fut. Act. Fut. Mid.\\ncontr. contr.\\n2. The first aorist active and middle lengthens\\nthe short root of the future by changing into\\nu, and lengthening the doubtful vowels and in-\\nstead of 6a and adds a and as,\\nVerb. Fut. 1 Aor. Act 1 Aor. Mid\\nRem. The Attics often change a into as,\\n3. The perfect and pluperfect active, and all the\\nthe passive voice, except the present and imper-\\nfect, add the tense-endings to the second root as.\\nVerb. 2. R. Perf. Act. 1 Fut. Pass. 1 Aor. P. Perf. P.\\nExc. Verbs in form the perfect and pluper-\\nfect active and the 1 future, 1 aorist, perfect, and\\npluperfect passive, from the first root by interpos-\\ning before the tense-endings as,\\nVerb. 1 E. Perf. Act. 1 Fut. Pass. 1 Aor. Pass.\\nc\\nSo also, and", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0143.jp2"}, "144": {"fulltext": "126\\nTENSES OF LIQUID VEKBS.\\n\u00c2\u00a797.\\nNote. The tenses which interpose are, probably formed regularly\\nfrom obsolete forms in thus, NEMEJl, c.\\nbut while these tenses, formed in this way, have remained, the others\\nhave given place to the liquid forms now in us*e. See 250.\\n4. Dissyllables in reject before\\na consonant as,\\nrav-, c.\\nBut and sometimes retain sometimes not.\\n245. Obs. Verbs in and commonly drop before\\nthe termination beginning with and insert in its stead as,\\nperf. pass, They are in-\\nflected thus\\nSingular,\\nDual, (54-1 7)\\nPlural, -ds\\nNote. Liquid verbs want the paulo-post-future tense.\\nFORMING THE TENSES OF LIQUID VEEBS.\\n246. The following examples show the method of forming the\\ntenses of liquid verbs, according to the preceding rules.\\n247. I send.\\n1 R. 2 R. 3 R.\\nActive.\\nPres.\\nImperf.\\nPut.\\n2 Fut.\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\n2 Perf.\\n2 Pluperf.\\nMiddle.\\nPassive.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0144.jp2"}, "145": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7^7.\\nTENSES OF LIQUID VERBS.\\n127\\nPres.\\nJmperf.\\nFut.\\n2 Fut.\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\n2 Perf.\\n2 Pluperf.\\nPres.\\nImperf\\nFut.\\n2 Fut.\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\n2 Pell*.\\n2 Pluperf\\n248.-\\n1 R. grtf/i\u00e2\u0080\u00a2.\\nActive.\\nI show.\\n2 R. 3 R\\nMiddle.\\nPassive.\\n249.-\\n1 R.\\nActive.\\nI stretch.\\n2 R. 3 R.\\nMiddle. Passive.\\n250. 1 distribute (244, Note).\\n1 R. 2 R. 3 R.\\nPres.\\nImperf.\\nFut.\\n2 Fut.\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nPluperf.\\n2 Pen.\\n2 Pluperf.\\nActive.\\nMiddle. Passive.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0145.jp2"}, "146": {"fulltext": "128 CONTRACTED VERBS. \u00c2\u00a798.\\n\u00c2\u00a798. CONTRACTED VERBS.\\n251. Verbs in and contract the concurrent\\nvowels in the present and imperfect in all the voices, according\\nto the general rules of contraction, 116. See paradigm, 100.\\nAll the concurrences of vowels to be found in these verbs, are\\nthe following viz.\\n1. Verbs in 8.\\ncontr.\\n2. Verbs in 8.\\ncontr. -ij,\\n3. Verbs in 8,\\ncontr.\\nObs. 1. Of the above concurrent vowels (No. 2), dissyllables\\nin contract only and thus, fcc, are\\nusually contracted c, but\\nc, are never contracted. Exc. to bind, commonly con-\\ntracts all.\\nObs. 2. Four verbs in contract into and into\\nThese are and thus,\\nIndie, c. Inf.\\ncontr. C.\\nAnd so of the others.\\n252. DORIC AND IONIC FORMS.\\nObs. 3. The Dorics, who in other cases use a for in verbs\\nmake use of without subscript, instead of all contractions of\\nand as, for for Also,\\nwas usually contracted by them into as, for\\nThe Ionic dialect often converts a, in verbs in into as,\\nfor for\\n253. HOMERIC FORM.\\nObs. 4. The Epic writers, on account of the metre, often insert\\nthe kindred long or short vowel before the contracted vowel as,\\ncontr. Poet, contr. Poet,\\nParticiple fern, contr. Poet, fcc.\\nThis, from the frequency of its occurrence in Homer, is some-\\ntimes called the Homeric form.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0146.jp2"}, "147": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a798. EXPLANATION OF TABLE. 129\\nNote. By a little attention to practice, and applying the rules\\n(116) to the preceding contractions, a paradigm of contract verbs is\\nunnecessary still a table of contract verbs is inserted in its place, 258,\\n\u00c2\u00a7100.\\n254.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 EXPLANATION OF THE FOLLOWING TABLE.\\n1. The tense-root in the subjunctive (being the same as in the indica-\\ntive, but without the augment), is to be prefixed to the terminations\\nin the optative, imperative, infinitive, and participles.\\n2. Whenever the accent falls on the termination, it is marked in\\nthe following table in its proper place. When it does not fall on the\\ntermination, its place will be the third syllable from the end of the\\nword, if the last syllable be short, or the diphthong at, which is con-\\nsidered short. But if the last syllable be long, the accent will be on\\nthe syllable next the last as, c.\\n3. In the perfect and pluperfect passive, the characteristic in all\\nthe moods is put with the termination, to show the changes it undergoes\\nby the laws of euphony, when combined with the initial consonant of\\nthe termination. In combining the root in these moods with the termi-\\nnation, Rules 2, and 6, and 17 of 6, must be observed. See also 101,\\n10. But if the tables of terminations, 92, and the method of forming\\nthe tenses, 93, are perfectly committed to memory, and rendered fa-\\nmiliar to the pupil by thorough drilling, it will hardly ever be neces-\\nsary to take him into this table at all.\\n4. The numbers 1, 2, 3, c, to be found in the following table, refer\\nto the same numbers, 101.\\nB. By inspection of the table, it will be seen that the termina-\\ntions of the subjunctive mood are the same in all the tenses, and those\\nof the optative and imperative are nearly the same in alL except in the\\n1 aorist. Attention to this will greatly lessen the labour of committing\\nthe verb to memory.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0147.jp2"}, "148": {"fulltext": "130\\nTABLE OF THE VEKB\\n99.\\n255.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a799. I. TABLE OF THE ACTIVE VOICE.\\nINDICATIVE.\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nTense-root. Terminations\\nT-root.\\nTerminations.\\n1.\\n2.\\n3.\\n1. 2.\\n3.\\nPres.\\nS.\\n-eis,\\n-et,\\n-??s,\\nD.\\nP.\\n-\u00e2\u0082\u00acTOV,\\n-eTov,\\n-7JTOV,\\n-ere,\\n-\u00c2\u00bb}\u00ce\u00a46,\\n-Wffi.\\nImp.\\nS.\\nD.\\ne -ov,\\n-es,\\n-\u00e2\u0082\u00acTOV,\\n-4\u00cf\u0084\u00ce\u00b7\u00ce\u00bd,\\nP.\\n-\u00e2\u0082\u00acTe,\\n-ov.\\nFut.\\nS.\\n-eis,\\nD.\\n-erou,\\n-CTOV,\\nWanting.\\nP.\\n-\u00e2\u0082\u00acTe,\\n1 Aor.\\nS.\\ne\\n-OS,\\n-6, 4\\n-77s,\\nD.\\nP.\\n-are,\\n2 Aor.\\nS.\\nI-TU7T\\n-es,\\n4\\n-co, -7?s,\\nV\\nD.\\n-eTov,\\nP.\\n-ere,\\n-ov.\\nPerf.\\nS.\\n\u00cf\u00844-\u00cf\u0084\u00cf\u0085\u00cf\u0088\\n-as,\\n-6,\\n-7?s,\\nV\\nJL\\nP.\\n-are,\\nPlup.\\nS.\\nD.\\ni-re -etv,\\n-eis,\\n-eiTov,\\n-\u00e2\u0082\u00acLT7)V,\\nP.\\n-et/xev,\\n-ene,\\n-eiffav.\\n2 Perf. S.\\nT6-TU7T -a,\\n-as,\\n-e,\\nre\\n-77S,\\nD.\\nP.\\n-\u00ce\u00b1\u00cf\u00846,\\n2 Plup\\nS.\\nD.\\ni-Tc -\u00e2\u0082\u00acIV,\\n-eis,\\n-enov,\\nP.\\n-et/xej/,\\n-etre,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0148.jp2"}, "149": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a799.\\nIN THE ACTIVE VOICE.\\n131\\nTABLE OF THE ACTIVE VOICE, CONTINUED.\\nOPTATIVE.\\nTerminations.\\n1. 2. 3.\\n-ois, 1\\n-oiuev, -one, -oiev-\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nTerminations.\\n2. 3.\\n-e,\\n-ere,\\nIKF.\\nTerm.\\n-eiv, z\\nPARTICIPLES.\\nTerminations.\\nF.\\nG. -ovtos, -\u00ce\u00bf\u00cf\u008d\u00cf\u0083\u00ce\u00b75, -ovtos,\\nD.\\n-ois,\\n-oiTe, -otev-\\nWanting.\\n-CIV-\\nG. -ovtos, -\u00ce\u00bf\u00ce\u00b0\u00cf\u0083\u00ce\u00b75, -ovtos,\\nD.\\n-ais, -ai,\\n-aiev.\\n-are,\\n-as,\\nG. -avTos, -\u00ce\u00ac\u00cf\u0083\u00ce\u00b75, -avTos,\\nD.\\n-ois,\\n-one, -oiev-\\n-e,\\n-\u00e2\u0082\u00acTe,\\nG. -Ovtos, -\u00ce\u00bf\u00cf\u008d\u00cf\u0083\u00ce\u00b75, -ovtos,\\nD. .C.\\n-ais, 6\\n-oiev.\\n-e,\\n-ere,\\n-as, -6s,\\nG. -otos, -vias, -6tos,\\nD. -via, Sec\\n-ois,\\n-oits, -oiev.\\n-6\u00ce\u00a4\u00e2\u0082\u00ac,\\n-as, -via, -os,\\nG. -otos, -vias, -Otos,\\nD. -via,\\nV", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0149.jp2"}, "150": {"fulltext": "132\\nTABLE OF THE VEEB\\n\u00c2\u00a799\\n256. II. TABLE OF THE IV\\nINDICATIVE.\\nTense-root. Terminations.\\n1. 2. 3.\\nPres. S. 8 -ere\u00c2\u00bb,\\nD. -6\u00ce\u00bc -eff ov, -efffrov,\\nP. -eofte, -ovrai.\\nIIDDLE VOICE.\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nT-root. Terminations.\\n1. 2. 3.\\n8\\nImp. S.\\nD.\\nP.\\ni 8\\n-4\u00cf\u0083\\n-ea e,\\nFut. S.\\nD.\\nP.\\n8 -ctcu,\\n-6\u00ce\u00bc -evdov,\\n-ea\\nWanting.\\n1 Aor. S.\\nD.\\nP.\\ni 8\\n8\\n2Aor.S.\\nD.\\nP.\\ni 8\\n-ea ov, -4\u00cf\u0083\\n8\\nPerf. S.\\nD.\\nP.\\n\u00cf\u00844-\u00cf\u0084\u00cf\u0085 10\\n-\u00ce\u00bc\u00ce\u00bc4\u00ce\u00bd\u00ce\u00bf\u00ce\u0090\u00e2\u0082\u00ac\u00ce\u0090\u00cf\u0083\u00ce\u00af.\\n10(5)\\nys, 0, 11\\n-\u00ce\u00bc\u00ce\u00bc4\u00ce\u00bd\u00cf\u0089\\n-\u00ce\u00bc\u00ce\u00bc4\u00ce\u00bd\u00ce\u00bf\u00ce\u00b9 2 2\\nPlup. S. i-re\\nD.\\n10(5)\\nP.P.F.S.\\nD.\\n-eo e,\\n\u00ce\u00a46-\u00ce\u00a41\\nWanting.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0150.jp2"}, "151": {"fulltext": "99.\\nIN THE MIDDLE VOICE.\\n133\\nTABLE OF THE MIDDLE VOICE, CONTINUED.\\nOPTATIVE.\\nTerminations.\\n1. 2. 3.\\n8\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nTerminations.\\n2. 3.\\n8\\n-4\u00cf\u0083\\nIXF.\\nTerm\\nPARTICIPLES.\\nTerminations.\\nF.\\nG.\\nD.\\n8\\nWanting.\\nG. -\u00ce\u00bf\u00ce\u00bc4\u00ce\u00bd\u00ce\u00bf\u00cf\u0085\\n-cuo, 8\\nG. -\u00ce\u00b1\u00ce\u00bc4\u00ce\u00bd\u00ce\u00bf\u00cf\u0085,\\n8\\nG.-OjUeVov.\\nD. -\u00ce\u00bf\u00ce\u00bc4\u00ce\u00bd\u00cf\u0088,\\neiVjs,\\n-(pSrov,\\n-cp e,\\n~\u00ce\u009d.-\u00ce\u00bc\u00ce\u00bc4\u00ce\u00bd\u00ce\u00bf\u00cf\u0082,-\u00ce\u00b7,\\nG.\\n8\\nWanting.\\nG.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0151.jp2"}, "152": {"fulltext": "TABLE OF THE VERB\\n99\\n257. III. TABLE OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.\\nINDICATIVE.\\nTense-root. Terminations.\\n1. 2. 3.\\nPres. S. 8 -erai,\\nD.\\nP. -ovrui.\\nSUBJUNCTIVE.\\nT-root. Terminations.\\n1. 2. 3.\\n-rj, 8\\nImp. S. 8 -ero,\\nD. -\u00cf\u008c\u00ce\u00bc6 \u00ce\u00bf\u00ce\u00bd,-4\u00cf\u0083\\nP.\\n1 Fut. 8 8\\nD.\\nWanting.\\n2 Fut. S. -rjP\\nD.\\nWanting.\\n1 Aor. S. 4-\u00cf\u0084\u00cf\u008d\u00cf\u0086\\nD.\\n-rjs, -i},\\n2 Aor. S. -77S, -77,\\nD. -TjTov,\\nP.\\n-jjs,\\nPerf. S. 10\\nD.\\n-\u00ce\u00bc\u00ce\u00bc4\u00ce\u00bd\u00ce\u00bf\u00ce\u0090\u00e2\u0082\u00ac\u00ce\u00aa\u00cf\u0083\u00ce\u00af.\\n10(5)\\n\u00cf\u0084\u00ce\u00be-\u00cf\u0084\u00cf\u0085-\u00ce\u00bc\u00ce\u00bc\u00ce\u00af\u00ce\u00bd\u00ce\u00bf5 2 fs, 9, 11\\n-\u00ce\u00bc\u00ce\u00bc4\u00ce\u00bd\u00cf\u0089 ^toz\\nPlup. -7\u00cf\u0084\u00cf\u0084\u00ce\u00bf,\\nD.\\n10(5)\\nP.P.F- S. 8\\nD.\\nWanting", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0152.jp2"}, "153": {"fulltext": "99.\\nIX THE PASSIVE VOICE.\\n135\\nTABLE OF THE PASSIVE VOICE, CONTINUED.\\nOPTATIVE.\\nTerminations.\\n1. 2. 3.\\n-otcr ov,\\nIMPERATIVE.\\nTerminations.\\n2. 3.\\n-6\u00cf\u0083\u00ce\u00b8\u00ce\u00b1\\n\u00ce\u00bf\u00ce\u00bd,-4\u00cf\u0083\u00ce\u00af\\n-4\u00cf\u0083\\nJJNF.\\nTerm,\\nPARTICIPLES.\\nTerminations.\\nF.\\n\u00ce\u00af\u00ce\u00bc6\u00ce\u00af\u00ce\u008c\u00cf\u008a,\\nG.\\nD.\\nWanting.\\nN.-oVevos,\\nG.-o/xeVou,\\nD.-o/xeVo\\n-77, -ov,\\n-77s,\\n-V,\\nWanting.\\nN.-ojueiOS,\\nG.-o^ueVou,\\nD.\\n-ov,\\n-77s,\\n-eiys, -en?,\\n-eir/re,\\nIf.-efe,\\nG.-eVros,\\nD.-evTi,\\n-e?o~a, -eV,\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0eiarj,\\n-et rjre,\\nN.-ef\u00c2\u00bb,\\nG.-eWos,\\nD.-eVrt,\\n-iv,\\ne iaris,-evTos,\\neia~n, -evrt.\\nefyv, en/s, eftj, 11\\nG.\\n-77, -ov,\\n-77s, -ou,\\nWanting.\\nG.-o/zeVoy,\\nD.-o^eV^,\\n-ov,\\n-77s, -oy,\\n-p, -p.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0153.jp2"}, "154": {"fulltext": "136\\nCONTEACT VERBS.\\n\u00c2\u00a7100.\\n258..\u00e2\u0080\u0094 100. CONTRACT VERBS.-\\n\u00e2\u0080\u0094Active.\\nPresent.\\ns.\\n00)\\nOft\\nD.\\nInd.\\nOfTOf\\nP.\\nOO^f^\\nOfTf\\nS.\\nD.\\ninrfi\\n?3\\nSubj.\\n-onov\\n-onov\\nP.\\n-one\\nawo~o\\n-\u00ce\u009f)0~0\\nS.\\n001\\nD.\\nOpt.\\n-onov\\nto\\nJt\\\\\\n\u00c2\u00abotci\\n-ObfV\\nS.\\nImp.\\ni\\nJf.\\nInf.\\nM.\\n6\u00cf\u0089\u00ce\u00bd\\nPart.\\nh\\\\\\nN.\\nImperf.\\nS.\\nt\\nD.\\nInd.\\ntov", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0154.jp2"}, "155": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7100.\\nCONTRACT VERBS.\\n137\\nCONTRACT VERBS.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Middle and Passive.\\ncu\\n-or/tea\\n\u00c2\u00b0ifl\\nV\\nV\\n\u00c2\u00b0\u00ce\u008a1\\nCtfTCtl\\nrat\\notrat,\\naouf cu\\naovTcti\\n-OVVTCU\\n-w\u00c2\u00bbca\\n?a\\nfa\\n3\\n\u00c2\u00b071\\n-area\\n-oretxl\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\\n00 VTCU\\n-olurv\\n-too\\nOOLO\\n-0\\n8\\ntov\\nOOV", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0155.jp2"}, "156": {"fulltext": "138 OBSEKVATIONS ON 101.\\n101. OBSERVATIONS ON THE THREE VOICES.\\n259. The following observations are designed to point out\\nmore particularly, certain changes in the terminations of these\\nparts which frequently occur, and which, without explanation,\\nmight perplex and retard the student in his progress. Further\\ninformation respecting these and other changes will be found in\\nthe table of dialects which follows. See 274.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\n260. OPTATIVE.\\n1. In the optative mood, instead of the usual terminations\\nc. the Attic dialect has the following\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\nThis form is also used by Ionic and Doric writers.\\nIn the optative of the 1 aor. active, instead of the common\\ntermination -aig, -ai, c. the ^Eolic has as follows:\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\nsia,\\nThe Attics, as well as the Ionians and Dorians, use this form\\nin the 2d and 3d persons singular, and in the 3d person plural.\\n261 IMPERATIVE.\\n2. In the 3d person plural of the imperative, in Attic writers,\\nthe termination is more common than thus, in\\nthe present, for For other varieties, see\\nTable of Dialects, 2*74. This form is also met with in Doric\\nwriters.\\n262 INFINITIVE.\\n3. The infinitive, in the ancient dialects, ended in It\\nwas changed, in the Ionic, into and afterwards, the being\\nrejected, was contracted by the Attics into\\n263. IMPERFECT AND AORISTS.\\n4. The ^Eolians and Dorians use a peculiar form of the im-\\nperfect, and first and second aorists, which is made by adding the\\nsyllable to the usual form of the 2d person singular, and then\\ninflecting them like the imperfect thus, instead of", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0156.jp2"}, "157": {"fulltext": "101. THE THREE VOICES. 139\\nc it makes c. in the 1 aor.\\noi and in the 2d aor. fcc. Hence\\nthe same tenses in the middle voice, and the imperfect, in the\\npassive, make 3d plural\\nObs. 1. But before the endings c. in con-\\ntracted verbs, diphthongs reject the subjunctive vowel, and in\\nverbs in the long vowels are changed into their own short ones\\nas, 2 sing, c.\\nObs. 2 This form is used only in the indicative mood it usu-\\nally rejects the augment, and is scarcely to be found, except iit\\nthe singular number and 3d person plural. It is used only to ex-\\npress repeated action.\\n264. FUTURE, ACTIVE AND MIDDLE.\\nThe Future in the dialects has the following varieties\\n(1.) The Attics often reject from con-\\ntracting the remaining vowels when that can be done as,\\nill drive, reject contracted so iXcmgj\\ncontracted c. In like manner we have for\\nI will call; for I will pity and in the middle\\nvoice, for\\n(2.) Attic Futures in are inflected like contract verbs in\\n(251, or 258), thus, c.\\n(3.) is sometimes elided from the future active and middle\\nof pure verbs, especially among the poets, even when is pre-\\nceded by a long vowel or diphthong as, present future\\nor\\n(4.) For the Doric termination is as, for\\nVerbs in have the future Ionic in uncontract-\\ned (see 273-1); as, for for\\n(6.) Verbs in in Homer, commonly insert as,\\nfor I will excite sometimes also verbs in as,\\nfrom from\\nThe Attic and Ionic termination, particularly of liquid\\nverbs, is often as, for I will cast;\\nfor I will rejoice.\\nIn mutes, is used for I will strike.\\n265. PERFECT INDICATIVE.\\n5. a. Some verbs suffer a syncope in the perfect; thus,\\nI call\\nIn like manner\\nfec.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0157.jp2"}, "158": {"fulltext": "140 OBSERVATIONS ON \u00c2\u00a7101.\\nb. Some perfects in from verbs in strike out before\\na, and (except in the participles) change into a thus,\\nfrom\\nfrom c.\\nc. Of the vowels thus brought together, the latter is sometimes\\nrejected as,\\nby syncope\\nby syncope\\nIn other verbs, the Attics sometimes change into thus,\\nI turn\\nd. A similar change has taken place in the Ionic-Doric\\nfrom analogous to\\nThus also is found for\\n266. PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE, C.\\n6. The subjunctive and optative of the perfect are sometimes\\nmade by a periphrasis of the perfect participle and the verb\\nI am thus, subjunctive\\noptative And sometimes the indicative\\nas, I shall have struck.\\n267. PERFECT PARTICIPLE.\\n*7. The participles sometimes change into a, and sometimes\\nnot.\\nIn either case, by a syncope of the former vowel, and\\nare changed into which remains also in the neuter and the\\nfeminine, which otherwise ends in via, becomes and, in the\\noblique cases of the masculine and neuter, is retained thus,\\nUncontracted.\\nContracted.\\nG.\\nor,\\na. The Ionics and Attics insert before thus,\\nG. But in the poets, the ordinary termina-\\ntions frequently remain after the contraction; as,\\nG. c.\\nb. The perfects in which these changes most frequently occur\\nare and in these the regular", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0158.jp2"}, "159": {"fulltext": "101. THE THREE VOICES. 141\\nform is more common in the singular, and the contracted form,\\nin the dual and plural.\\nMIDDLE AN T D PASSIVE.\\n268. 2d person singular.\\n8. The 2d person singular of the present indicative originally\\nended in Id the Ionic dialect, the being rejected, it be-\\ncame ecu, by diaeresis and was afterwards contracted into\\n(116, R. III.) sometimes by the Attics into and in the same\\nmanner, in other moods and tenses. In the subjunctive be-\\ncame and then tj. In the imperative, the indicative imperfect,\\nand 2 Aorist, became contracted ov and in the 1 aorist\\nmiddle became ao, contracted In like manner, the 2d\\nperson singular of the optative, became oio, aud, being inca-\\npable of further chauge by contraction, remains in this form.\\n269 imperative, 3d person plural.\\n9. In the 3d person plural of the imperative, the Ionic, Doric,\\nand especially the Attic writers, use the termination instead\\nof thus, for See Table of Dia-\\nlects, 274.\\n270. perfect and pluperfect passive.\\n10. The terminations of the perfect and pluperfect passive,\\ncannot be correctly represented in any paradigm of a mute verb,\\nbecause the termination, combining with the final mute of the\\nroot, undergoes various changes, according to the laws of eu-\\nphony 6), which causes an apparent, but not a real variety in\\nthe terminations of these tenses. For the terminations alone, see\\n231.\\n(1.) The terminations preceded by a fir-mute, as in the para-\\ndigm, according to the laws which regulate the combination of\\nconsonants, combine with it as there exhibited viz.\\nS. 45-9 44-6\\n43-2, 47-17\\n(2.) Preceded by a -mute, they combine as follows:\\nS. 44-7 43-2\\nD. 43-2, 47-17\\n(3.) -mute before a consonant in the passive voice, is\\n1*", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0159.jp2"}, "160": {"fulltext": "142 OBSERVATIONS ON 101.\\nchanged into and combines with the terminations of the per-\\nfect and pluperfect without change, except where the termination\\nbegins with in which case the r-mute before it is rejected\\n(47, 17. Obs. 9) thus, for example in the perfect indica-\\ntive passive is inflected as follows\\nS. 46\u00e2\u0080\u009411 44-8\\nD. 44-8\\n(4.) Liquid verbs whose characteristic is or in the perfect\\npassive, add the terminations to the root without change, except\\nthat those beginning with drop the (47-17). Those whose\\ncharacteristic is insert before the terminations 97, 3, Exc).\\nOf those whose characteristic is dissyllables in\\nreject (244-4), and then annex the terminations without change.\\nBut when is retained it is changed sometimes into more\\ncommonly into before the terminations beginning with and\\nis rejected before those beginning with cd: Before the other ter-\\nminations it remains unchanged thus, in the perfect indi-\\ncative passive is inflected as follows\\nS. or\\nNote. Before the terminations beginning with sometimes re-\\nmains, and is rejected as, -a fec. for\\nfcc.\\n(5.) In all mute and liquid verbs, except some dissyllables in\\n(244-4), as the terminations in the third per-\\nson plural of the perfect, and of the pluperfect, cannot coa-\\nlesce with the root, the circumlocution of the perfect participle\\nwith and are substituted thus, for\\nfor But in pure verbs,\\nthis circumlocution is unnecessary, as the terminations and\\nreadily unite with the characteristic vowel of the root preced-\\ning as, from from To\\nthese are to be added those liquid verbs which drop before the\\nterminations of the perfect as, from\\nfrom c. (244-4).\\n271. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF PERFECT PASSIVE.\\n11. The subjunctive and optative being distinguished from the\\nindicative only by the mood-vowels, and there being no mood-\\nvowels in the termination of the perfect passive, it is necessary,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0160.jp2"}, "161": {"fulltext": "101. THE THREE VOICES. 143\\nfor the sake of distinction, to adopt the circumlocution of the\\nperfect participle with the subjunctive and optative of as in\\nthe table of terminations 231, or in the paradigm of the verb 25*7.\\nBut if the termination in the perfect and pluperfect passive is\\npreceded by a vowel, the circumlocution in the subjunctive and\\noptative moods, as exhibited in the paradigm, becomes unneces-\\nsary and these moods are formed as in observations 3 and 4,\\nfollowing.\\nObs. 3. In the Subjunctive, the vowel preceding the termina-\\ntion is dropped, and the terminations of the present subjunctive\\nannexed thus, perfect subjunctive -y,\\nc; perfect subjunctive -tj,\\nExc. But verbs in frequently retain as a mood-vowel,\\nthrough all the numbers and persons as,\\nc.\\nObs. 4. The Optative adds the terminations (viz. from\\nto the characteristic of the tense, with interposed after a,\\nand subscribed with or thus,\\nc.\\nc.\\nc.\\nc.\\nIn a few instances, the subjunctive is made in the\\noptative, and the retained throughout thus, has the\\nsubjunctive and the optative\\nc.\\nNote. Both in the subjunctive and optative, however, these forms\\nare but seldom used, the circumlocution being generally preferred.\\n272. IONIC AND DORIC FORMS.\\n12. In the Ionic and Doric dialects, before and -to, in\\nterminations of these tenses in the 3d person plural, is changed\\ninto a, so that becomes and thus,\\nbecomes c.\\nObs. 5. A 77-mute or a -mute before and for\\nand is changed into its own aspirate as,\\nfor fec.\\nObs. 6. As the circumlocution is used to avoid\\nthe cacophony of the regular termination, (10. (5)\\nabove), this being removed by the change of into a, the circum-\\nlocution in the indicative, of all such verbs, becomes unnecessary.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0161.jp2"}, "162": {"fulltext": "144 DIALECTS OF VEKBS IN AND 102.\\nThus, is changed into\\ninto c.\\nObs. 7. If a (changed from a -mute, 235, R. 2,) precedes the\\ntermination, it is changed into or before and thus,\\nperfect passive 3d person plural Ionic\\nperfect passive 3d person plu-\\nral for\\nObs. 8. In pure verbs, or before is usually changed\\ninto before the Ionic and thus, and\\nare usually changed into and In like manner,\\na before and is changed into to avoid the duplication\\nof the a thus, from becomes\\nObs. 9. In like manner, before the termination seldom\\nbefore in the indicative and optative of the other tenses, but\\nnever in the subjunctive, is changed into a thus, for\\nwe have for c. So also in verbs\\nin as, for for In these\\nforms, a and before i are usually changed into as,\\nfor c.\\n273.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7102. DIALECTS OF VERBS IN and\\n1. A principal difficulty in learning Greek, arises from the va-\\nriety of terminations in verbs, according to the different dialects.\\nThese can hardly be reduced to any general principles but a\\npretty clear idea of them may be formed from the following table.\\nIt must be observed, however, that many of the same terminations\\noccur in all the dialects, although that one only is mentioned in\\nwhich they are most usual. Besides the final syllables, of which\\nthis table chiefly consists, the Ionians used to insert a vowel be-\\nfore the last syllable, which the poets often changed into a diph-\\nthong; as, Subj. 2 aor. active or passive P. r\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\\nSo -ag,\\nBut as this does not aifect the inflection of the final syll\\nble, it is not noticed in the table. 98, Obs. 4.\\n2. These moods and tenses of the middle and the passr\\nvoice, which agree in termination with the active, and are\\nhere specified, are subject to similar changes, in the different di:\\nlects, with those having the same terminations in the active voice,\\nThe same is true respecting the terminations of verbs in so", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0162.jp2"}, "163": {"fulltext": "102. DIALECTS OF VERBS IN AND 145\\nthat this table is general, applying to the terminations here spe-\\ncified, whether they belong to verbs in or The dual is\\nomitted in the table, as it but seldom occurs. For other changes\\nby dialect, see 101 throughout.\\nTable exhibiting the most usual Dialects of the terminations\\nof Greek Verbs.\\n274.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 I. ACTIVE VOICE.\\nFINITE MOODS.\\nSINGULAR.\\n1 Pers. and (if from\\nas, for for\\nD. as, for\\nas, for\\nas, for\\nas, for and so\\non through all the persons.\\n2 Pers. D. as, for\\n/ff, as, for\\ncontr. for\\n-at?, as, for -at?\\n-a?, A. D. as, for\\n3 Pers. 8 f^ as fo \u00e2\u0082\u00aci\\nplup. -77, as, for\\nas, for -at.\\n-q, as, for -77.\\n-a, -a, D. -jj, -J as, 6\u00cf\u0081-\u00ce\u00b7 for\\nD. as, for\\nPLURAL.\\n1 Pers. D. as, for tvxp-ov-\\nor for for\\nfor\\nas, for\\n2 Pers. as, for\\n3 Pers. D. -m as, for\\nfor for\\nfor for -owrt;\\nor -jym for OV^-awr* for", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0163.jp2"}, "164": {"fulltext": "146 DIALECTS OF VEKBS IN AND \u00c2\u00a7102.\\n3 Pers. B. into as, for\\nas, for\\nfor\\nD. as, for\\nfor -ot\\nas, for\\nP. -w, -or, -aw as,\\nfor 5-\u00ce\u00bf^ for\\nfor\\n-fierce as, for\\nas, for\\nJE. -\u00c2\u00abtew as, for -ats^.\\n1. 2. 3. 3. 3.\\ninto\\n1. 2. 3.\\nas,\\nfor -at for\\nfor\\ncontr.\\ncontr.\\nV JJ. 1. -\u00c2\u00a3w as, tor -aw.\\nINFINITIVE.\\nA. D.\\nas, for -ety for -\u00c2\u00abw\\nand for -spch.\\nD. as, for -c\u00c2\u00ab.\\nD. as,\\nfor (\u00c2\u00a798. Obs. 2.)\\nD. -\u00c2\u00abw, -aw, JE.\\nas, for -ow.\\nPARTICIPLES.\\nD. as, for\\nD. as, for *ff,\\nas, for\\n-cw-wt,\u00e2\u0080\u00a2, f 101.\\nas, G. for\\n-oros", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0164.jp2"}, "165": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7103.\\nSECOND CONJUGATION\\nUl\\nII. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE\\nFINITE MOODS.\\nSINGULAR.\\n1 Pers. -Ofiaif f. D. as, for\\nD. as, for\\nD. as, for\\n2 Pers. -r d A. I. indie, subj. -jyat as,\\nfor -5, c.\\n-ov, I. D. as, for -ot/.\\nI. -ao as, for\\n1 Pers. -c#a, D. as, for\\n3 Pers. I. -area or as, for\\nfor -vzat for -J7*\u00c2\u00ab-\\n\u00c2\u00abW, (\u00c2\u00a7101. 12.)\\n-rro, or as, for\\nfor\\nfor (\u00c2\u00a7101. 12.)\\nJUL as, for\\nfor\\nI. D. as, for\\n-i^CM,\\nINFINITIVE.\\nD. as, for\\nPARTICIPLES.\\nD. as, for\\n\u00c2\u00a7103. SECOND CONJUGATION.\\n2 5. Verbs of the second conjugation end in\\nand are formed from pure verbs of the first,\\nas follows\\n1. is changed into and the short vowel", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0165.jp2"}, "166": {"fulltext": "li.8 SECOND CONJUGATION. 103.\\nbefore it is clianged into its own long, or tlie\\ndoubtful vowel lengthened thus,\\nFrom is formed I extinguish\\nI know\\nI say\\nI hear\\n2. Regular verbs in reduplicate the\\ninitial consonant with in the present and imper-\\nfect; thus,\\nFrom is formed I bind\\nI place\\nI give\\nBut makes I fill, 47-19\\n3. Verbs beginning with a vowel, prefix\\nwhich is called the improper reduplication thus,\\nFrom is formed I go\\nI send\\nObs. 1. Also verbs beginning with at or prefix with the\\naspirate; thus,\\nFrom is formed\\n4. The reduplication is not used in verbs in\\nnor in those whose radical primitive has more\\nthan two syllables thus,\\nFrom comes I hear\\nI know\\nI assert\\nLikewise some other verbs as.\\nI say, c. (No. 1.)\\nObs. 2. Some verbs which begin with a vowel repeat the first\\nsyllable, after the manner of the Attic reduplication (224-6)\\nthus, and and\\nObs. 3. Some pure verbs add vvv to the root before and\\nsome mute and liquid verbs add vv in order to pass into as,\\nR.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0166.jp2"}, "167": {"fulltext": "104, 105. THE TERMINATION. 149\\n5. Verbs in have only three tenses of that\\nform viz. the JPr sent, the Imperfect, and the 2\\nAorist The other tenses are taken from the\\nprimitive in and are of the first conjugation,\\n296. Verbs in want the second aorist, and\\nalso the subjunctive and optative. When those\\nmoods are needed, they are borrowed from forms\\nof the first conjugation in\\nObs. 4. Several verbs form only the 2d aorist according to this\\nconjugation, 216, Obs. 1; in such cases, verbs in have the\\n2d aorist in w as,\\nfrom Root 2d aor.\\nyvo\\nObs. 5. Many verbs of this conjugation are deponent, having\\nonly the passive form, while their signification is active such are\\nI can I lie I seek I think.\\n276.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7104. THE ROOT AND AUGMENT.\\n1. The Root of verbs in has but one form, and is the same\\nwith the first root of the verb from which it is derived thus,\\nfrom R. from. R. c.\\n2. In Verbs that reduplicate (275-2), the reduplication is pre-\\nfixed to the root in the present and imperfect only.\\n3. The imperfect and 2d aorist are augmented in the same\\nmanner as in verbs of the first conjugation.\\n211.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 105. THE TERMINATION, OR FINAL LETTERS.\\n1. In the first conjugation, the terminations consist of two\\nparts, the mood-vowels, and final letters, 225-2. In the second,\\nthe mood-vowels are wanting, and their place supplied by the\\nlast letter of the root, which sufficiently distinguishes the moods\\nby the changes which it undergoes in combining with the final\\nletters.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0167.jp2"}, "168": {"fulltext": "150\\nFOKMATION OF MOODS AND\\ntens:\\nES.\\n\u00c2\u00a7106.\\n2. The Final letters in all verbs belonging to this conjugation,\\nare the same. They are divided into two classes, Primary and\\nSecondary. The primary belong to the present indicative only\\nthe secondary to the indicative of the imperfect and 2 aorist, and\\nto the optative in all the tenses. They are joined immediately\\nto the root, and, so far as they can be separated from it, are as\\nfollows\\n278. I. ACTIVE VOICE.\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nDual.\\nPlur.\\nPrimary Tenses.\\nSecondary Tenses.\\n-re\\nSing.\\nDual.\\nPlur.\\nImperative.\\nInfinitive.\\nParticiples.\\nG.\\n279. II. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\nSecondary Tenses.\\nPrimary Tenses.\\nSing,\\nDual,\\nPlur.\\nImperative.\\nSing.\\nDual.\\nPlur.\\nInfinitive.\\nParticiples.\\n106. FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES IN THE\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\n280. In the present and imperfect, through\\nall the moods, prefix the reduplication, in verbs\\nthat reduplicate, and then", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0168.jp2"}, "169": {"fulltext": "106. FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES\u00c2\u00bb 151\\n1. For the Indicative.\\n281. Rule. Change the short vowel of the root\\ninto its own long (237) in the singular of the\\npresent and imperfect, and in all the numbers of\\nthe 2 aorist, and then add the final letters, 277-2\\nthus,\\nPEESENT. IMPERFECT. 2d AORIST.\\nExc. 1. In the 2 aorist, and have the long\\nyowel in the singular only.\\nS.\\nD.\\n2. For the Subjunctive.\\n282. Rule. Change the final vowel of the\\nroot into the subjunctive terminations, fjg, rj,\\nc, 229 thus,\\nR. Subj. Pres. tVr-co, -rjg, -rj; c.\\n2 Aor. -rj; c.\\nObs These terminations, in the subjunctive, combine with the reg-\\nular subjunctive terminations (229) the final vowel of the root, forming\\na sort of mixed vowel or diphthong, and consequently they always\\nhave the circumflex accent, as here.\\nExc. 2. But verbs in retain through all the persons and\\nnumbers; as,\\nfrom R. Subj. Pres. c.\\n2 Aor. c,\\n3. For the Optative.\\n283. Rule. Change the final vowel of the\\nroot into its own diphthong, and add the second-\\nary final letters with prefixed thus,\\nPres. c. c.\\n2 Aor. c. c. Q.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0169.jp2"}, "170": {"fulltext": "152 FOEMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. \u00c2\u00a7107.\\n4. For the Imperative.\\n284. Kule. In the present tense, add the final\\nletters to the root but in the 2 aorist, change the\\nshort vowel into its own long thus,\\nPresent,\\n2 Aorist,\\nEpc. 3. In the 2 aorist, mid retain the\\nshort vowel, and add instead of i in the 2d person singular as,\\nc. c. So also\\nand in the present, have\\n5. For the Infinitive.\\n285. Rule. In the present tense, add the final\\nletters to the root, and in the 2 aorist, change the\\nshort vowel into its own long thus,\\nPresent, 2 aor.\\nExc. 4. In the 2 aorist, and change the short\\nvowel of the root into and changes it into as,\\nFor the Participles.\\n286. Rule. Add the final letters to the root,\\nand then combine by the rules of euphony, 6,\\n18 thus.\\ncombined\\n\u00c2\u00a7107. FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES IN THE\\nMIDDLE AND THE PASSIVE VOICE.\\n287. Prefix the reduplication in the present\\nand imperfect in verbs that reduplicate (275-2), as\\nin the active voice and then, in all the tenses,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0170.jp2"}, "171": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7107. FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. 153\\n1. For the Indicative, Imperative, Infinitive, and\\nParticiples.\\n288. Kule. Annex the final letters (2 9) to\\nthe root as,\\nIndicative, c. Imp. arc.\\nImperative, c.\\nInfinitive,\\nParticiples,\\n2. For the Subjunctive.\\n289. Kule. Change the last letter of the root\\ninto the subjunctive terminations, f h\\nAc, 230, and 282, Obs. as,\\nR. Subj. Pres. -ij, c.\\n2 Aor. -rj, c.\\nExc. Verbs in retain through all the numbers and per-\\nsons, as in the active voice, 282, Exc. 2 as,\\nR. Subj. Pres. c.\\n2 Aor. c.\\n3. For the Optative.\\n290. Rule. Change the last letter of the root\\ninto its own diphthong, and add the secondary\\nfinal letters as,\\nR. Opt. Pres. c.\\n2 Aor. c.\\nObs. is usually rejected in the 2d person singular mak-\\ning\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\n-to, e. c, 295-8.\\n291. As the root of verbs in ends in or\\nthese vowels, combining with the final letters, cause the appear-\\nance of four different forms of termination, and for this reason\\nfour paradigms have usually been given, though there is in fact\\nonly one. The following tables will show, that, in whate\\\\ r er vowel\\nthe root ends, still there is but one form of inflection.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0171.jp2"}, "172": {"fulltext": "154\\nPARADIGM OF VERBS IN ui.\\n108.\\nSingular.\\n108. PARADIGM OF VERBS IN MI.*\\n292. ACTIVE VOICE.\\nPRESENT TENSE.\\nIndicative Mood, 281.\\nDual. Plural.\\n3\\n4 (_.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0W\\n1\\nSubjunctive, 282.\\nOptative, 283.\\nImperative, 284.\\n1\\n5\\nInfinitive, 285.\\nIMPERFECT TENSE, 294-6 (2).\\nIndicative, 281.\\nParticiples, 286.\\nVV\\n7\\nThe other moods in the imperfect are wanting.\\nNote. The numbers 1, 2, 3, fcc, refer to the same numbers in 109\\nFor the accents, see 254-2.\\nf 43, Obs. 5", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0172.jp2"}, "173": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7108.\\nPARADIGM OF VERBS IN\\n155\\nPARADIGM OF VERBS IN ML\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nSECOND AORIST.\\nIndicative Mood, 281.\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\n-g\\n7\\nSubjunctive, 282.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0is -5\\nOptative, 283.\\nImperative, 284.\\n3\\nInfinitive,\\n285.\\nParticiples, 286.\\nNote 1. The numbers 1, 2. 3, cfec, refer to the same numbers in\\n\u00c2\u00a7109.\\nNote 2. For the accents in these tables, as in the tables of the first\\nconjugation, see 254-2*.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0173.jp2"}, "174": {"fulltext": "156\\nPARADIGM OF VERBS IN\\n\u00c2\u00a7108.\\nPAEADIGM OF VERBS IN ML\\n293. MIDDLE VOICE.\\nPRESENT TENSE.\\nIndicative Mood, 288.\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\nlata\\ndido l\u00e2\u0080\u00a2^\\n-a ov -a ov\\nSubjunctive, 289.\\nlat\\ntid* v 7\u00ce\u00af\u00ce\u00a4\u00ce\u00b1\u00ce\u00af\\ndid\\nc.\\nOptative, 290.\\nf 8 -to\\nImperative, 288.\\nlata\\n9 -aft\\nInfinitive, 288.\\nicta\\ndido\\nd\u00ce\u00b5\u00ce\u00af\u00ce\u00bavv\\n-aftai\\nlata\\ntifti\\nParticiples, 288.\\nd\u00ce\u00b5\u00ce\u00b9\u00ce\u00bav\u00cf\u0085\\nIMPERFECT TENSE.\\nIndicative, 288.\\niata\\n-ads -vto\\nid\u00ce\u00b5\u00ce\u00b9\u00ce\u00bavv\\nThe other moods of the imperfect are wanting.\\nNote. The numbers 8, 9, refer to the same numbers in 109.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0174.jp2"}, "175": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7108.\\nPARADIGM OF VERBS IN [U.\\n157\\nPARADIGM OF VERBS IN MI.\\nMIDDLE VOICE.\\nSECOND AORIST.\\nIndicative Mood, 288.\\nSingular. Dual. Plural.\\nV -to\\n~rj\\nSubjunctive, 289.\\nc.\\nc.\\n9\\nj\\n9\\nOptative, 290.\\nImperative, 288.\\nInfinitive, 288.\\nParticiples, 288.\\nThe present and imperfect passive are like the present\\nand imperfect meddle. The second aorist passive is want-\\ning.\\nNote. For the other tenses of verbs in see 110, 111, and for\\nthe dialects, 102.\\n8", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0175.jp2"}, "176": {"fulltext": "158 OBSERVATIONS ON VERBS IN \u00c2\u00a7109.\\ng 109. OBSERVATIONS ON VERBS IN\\n294. ACTIVE VOICE.\\n1. The final letters of the 3d person plural are properly\\nand these, combining with the preceding vowel according to the\\nrules of euphony (4\u00ce\u00ab-18), become\\n2. In the optative, is often dropped before the final letters\\nof the plural, making\\n-aire,\\ninstead of\\nG.\\n0. has sometimes for in the imperative\\na.nd in compounds, is commonly used for thus,\\nfor for c.\\n4. So also and have sometimes\\nfor but these are properly con-\\ntracted forms of the primitive verb with the reduplication, used\\nin the Ionic and Doric dialects thus, imperative\\ncontracted\\n5. As in verbs in (261), so also in those in is used\\nfor in the imperative 3d person plural.\\n6. The primitive in with the reduplication, is sometimes\\nused instead of the form in in the present and imperfect thus,\\n(1.) Present.\\ncontr.^ for G.\\nc.\\nthrough all the moods.\\n(2.) Imperfect.\\ncontr. -ovv, for c.\\n7. The terminations fcc, in the 3d person plu-\\nral, are frequently shortened by syncope as, for\\nfor for\\n295. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.\\n8. In the 2d person singular of the imperfect indicative, mid-\\ndle, and passive, is often rejected, and the concurring vowels\\ncontracted thus, for for fcc. So in\\nthe present indicative, sometimes for Also in the", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0176.jp2"}, "177": {"fulltext": "110. TENSES FORMED FROM THE PRIMITIVE. 159\\n2d person singular of the optative, is rejected, but the vowels,\\nbeing incapable of contraction, remain unchanged.\\n9. The same contraction takes place in the imperative but\\nin the 2d aorist is contracted into ov only in compounds\\nas, etc.\\n110. TENSES FORMED FROM THE PRIMITIVE.\\n296. Verbs in have only three tenses of that form; viz.\\nthe present, imperfect, and 2d aorist. All the other tenses are\\nformed from the first root of the primitive, as in the first conjuga-\\ntion (232-2), and are inflected as the same tenses in verbs in\\nas,\\nfrom has fat. xh c.\\nfrom has fut. c.\\nfrom has fut. 1 aor. c.\\n297. EXCEPTIONS.\\n1. Future. Some verbs occasionally retain the reduplication\\nas, from and verbs from derivatives in and\\nform the future from their primitives thus, from\\nhas the future from\\n2. First Aorist. and have and\\ninstead of and in the 1st aorist indicative as, 1 aor.\\nc. In these verbs, the\\nother moods of this tense are wanting.\\n3. Perfect and Pluperfect Active. Verbs in from ea com-\\nmonly have before of the perfect those from have or\\na as, from perf. from perf.\\nor In these tenses, aspirates the augment,\\nand, except in the singular of the indicative, has a syncopated\\nform which resembles the present thus, first person plural\\nby syncope, c. infinitive by syncope\\nparticiple, as 267.\\nObs. The perfect active of has a present signification\\nthus, I stand, pluperfect I stood. In the pre-\\nsent, imperfect, future, 1 aorist, active, it signifies to place, to\\ncause to stand. In the passive throughout, to be placed. The 2\\naorist middle is not in use.\\n4. Passive voice. The short vowel of the root remains short\\nbefore a consonant in the passive voice; as, future passive", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0177.jp2"}, "178": {"fulltext": "160 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. \u00c2\u00a7111,112.\\n1 aorist perfect c. But before\\nin the perfect active returns before in the perfect passive\\nas, perfect active future passive (43-4), per-\\nfect passive\\n5. Tenses wanting. Verbs in want the second and third\\nroots, and consequently the tenses derived from them viz. the\\nsecond future passive, the 2d perfect and 2d pluperfect active,\\nand the 2d aorist passive.\\n298.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7111. TABLE EXHIBITING ALL THE TENSES OF\\nVERBS IN MX\\nACTIVE.\\nMIDDLE.\\nPASSIVE.\\nPresent.\\nImperf.\\nFut.\\n1 Aor.\\n2 Aor.\\nPerf.\\nor\\nPluperf.\\nor\\nFut. perf.\\n299. Verbs in\\nto be conjugated.\\nfrom\\nI send\\nfrom\\nI fill\\n/extinguish\\nhence\\nI destroy\\nI join\\nI conquer\\nI bind\\nI say\\nI fly\\nI hear\\nI help\\nI strengthen\\nI swear\\n\u00c2\u00a7112. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS IN MI.\\n300. The irregular and defective verbs in are usually\\nreckoned nine viz. I am; and I go I send\\nI clothe myself I did set /sit; I lie\\ndown I say and I know. The parts in use are aa\\nfollows", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0178.jp2"}, "179": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7112.\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\n161\\n301.\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nlam.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nPRESENT TENSE.\\nIndicative.\\nS.\\n\u00c2\u00abt\u00c2\u00a3 or\\nD.\\nP.\\nSubjunctive.\\nS.\\nD.\\n/rw\\nP.\\nOptative.\\nS.\\njf\\n\u00c2\u00abt^\\nD.\\nP. \u00c2\u00abr^fefiy\\nImperative.\\nInfinitive.\\nParticiples.\\nS.\\nifffZGJ\\nD. fjToy\\nX7Gof\\nF.\\nP.\\nF.\\nIMPERFECT TENSE.\\nIndicative.\\nS. ?/y\\n1\\nor\\nD.\\nP.\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0y\\nMIDDLE VOICE.\\nIMPERFECT.\\nIndicative.\\nS. ^jyy\\nD.\\nP.\\nFUTURE TENSE.\\nIndie, Opt.\\nInf. Part, io\\nregular.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0179.jp2"}, "180": {"fulltext": "162\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\n\u00c2\u00a7112.\\n302.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 THE CHIEF DIALECTS OF\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nPRESENT.\\n1.\\nSing, D.\\nJ\u00c2\u00a3u.\\nPlur.\\nP.\\nSing\\nPlur.\\nSing urjv,\\nPlur.\\nSing\\nPlur.\\nIndicative.\\n2. 3.\\nor L P. D.\\ntcrt, D. JK\\nSubjunctive.\\n5\\nOptative.\\nI.\\nImperative.\\n5\\nt\\\\, 1. -rj,\\n_\\nInfinitive.\\nD. JE\\nJE.\\nParticiple.\\nFern, D.l N~eut. oV, L\\nt\\nSmg\\nDu.\\nPlur. D. P.\\nIMPERFECT.\\nIndicative.\\nP.\\njE.\\nor D.\\nJr.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0180.jp2"}, "181": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7112.\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\n163\\nMIDDLE VOICE.\\nPlur\\nIMPERFECT.\\nIndicative.\\nfuture.\\nIndicative.\\nSing, D.\\nPlur. JE.\\nD.\\nby syncope\\nD.\\nInfin. Particip.\\n303.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 II. ^6\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nPRESENT TENSE.\\nSingular. Dual. Plurai.\\nIndie,\\nSubj.\\nOpt.\\nImper.\\nInfin. Part Gen. c.\\n9\\n1 01\\nor\\nSing, or\\nDual.\\nPlur. or\\nIMPERFECT.\\nIndicative.\\nor\\nmi\\nor 777771-\\nIon. rjiiyai\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\\n#fc{T0J or tj7oi\\nflfiWi Or 7J7\u00c2\u00a3\\nMiddle Voice to hasten.\\nIndicative.\\nPresent, c.\\nImperf.\\nObs. 1. The Attics, and sometimes the Ionians, use the present\\nof in the indicative, infinitive, and participles, in a future\\nsense, will go.\\nObs. 2. The ancient grammarians have another form of tbe\\nimperfect viz. and of\\nthe second aorist, c. but, except the third persons\\nand peculiar to epic writers, no such forms are\\nfound.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0181.jp2"}, "182": {"fulltext": "161 IBREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VEEBS. 112.\\n304.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 III. 1\u00ce\u00b7\u00ce\u00bc\u00ce\u00b5, to .send, from\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nPRESENT.\\nIndie, or\\nSubj. ifj\\nOpt. c.\\nImper. lit\\nInfin. Participles, Gen. c.\\nIMPERFECT.\\nIndie,\\nContr.fow l6t0V mr P\\nFUTURE.\\nTndie.\\n1 AORIST.\\nTndie.\\n2 AORIST.\\nIndie,\\nSubj. fj,\\nOpt.\\nImper.\\nInfin. Participles, Gen. c.\\nPerf. c. Pluperf. c.\\nMIDDLE VOICE.\\nPRESENT.\\nIndie, c.\\nSubj. l.rj c.\\nOpt. c. Imper. or Infin. Part, (fee-\\nIndicative.\\nImperf. c. Fut. c. 1 Aor. o.\\n2 AORIST.\\nIndie, c.\\nSubj. tj\\nOpt. c. rarely c.\\nImper. c. Infin. Part,\\nPerf. Indie, c. Infin.\\nPluperf. Indie, c.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0182.jp2"}, "183": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7112. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 165\\nPASSIVE VOICE.\\nFuture. Indie. 1 Aor. Indie, Part,\\n305. IV. I clothe myself.\\nThis verb comes from to r/o into, to be sent, or, pat into.\\nMiddle, to put one s self into, to clothe one s self and it is the\\nsame in the present middle, and present and perfect passive thus,\\nPRE\u00c2\u00bb. MID.. AND PRES. AND PERF. PASS.\\nIndie. S. and 3d PI. Part,\\nFIRST AORIST.\\nIndie, c. Part,\\nPLUPERFECT.\\nIndie, and and 3d \u00ce\u00a11.\\n306. V. did -set, did place.\\n(from to put), a defective trans, verb, to lay a four*\\ndation to erect (a building), has the following forms, viz.\\nAct. 1 aor. fec. Mid. c.\\nThe diphthong is properly the augmented root which,\\nrer, is retained in all the moods. The future is sel-\\ndom used. The defective parts are supplied from\\n307.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 VI. I sit.\\nis properly a perf. passive, with a present intrans. signi-\\nfication, from the same to put, to place, or to set thus, Perf.\\nhave been placed or set, and remain so i. e. sit. It wants the\\nsubjunctive and optative except in the compound which\\nhas arc. and is more common than\\nPRESENT.\\nIn lie.\\nImper. tj\\nInf. Part,\\nIMPERFECT.\\nIndie, -rro\\nObs. 3. For the Ionians use and the Poets\\nand for in like manner tata and So also for\\nand the Ionic forms are and 272.\\n8*", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0183.jp2"}, "184": {"fulltext": "166\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\n\u00c2\u00a7112.\\n308. VII. I lie doivn.\\nThis verb may be regularly derived from for by pros-\\nthesis of becomes in the 2 conjugation, and in the\\nmiddle, by contraction, It has the Ionic forms,\\nand for and 272.\\nPRESENT.\\nDual.\\nPlural.\\nSingular.\\nIndie,\\nImp.\\nInf.\\nPart,\\nIMPERFECT.\\nIndie,\\nFUTURE.\\nIndie, c. regular.\\n309.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 VIII. I say.\\nexcept in the 2d person singular of the present in-\\ndicative active, is like It appears to have had an ancient\\nform ijfu t whence, probably, we have the forms of the imperfect,\\nys, frequently used in familiar language with 1 and\\nas, 1 said I; 1 og, said he The infini-\\ntive is always used in the sense of the past time as,\\nthat Socrates has said When the present in-\\nfinitive is required, it is supplied by\\n310.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 IX. OlSec 9 Ihnow.\\nACTIVE VOICE.\\nSingular.\\nPRESENT.\\nDual..\\nInd.\\nSubj^co c.\\nOpt. c\\nImp.\\nPlural.\\nInf.\\nPart,\\n07$w;,jrith. the paragogic by syncope Old\\nAttic form", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0184.jp2"}, "185": {"fulltext": "113. DEPONENT VERBS. 167\\nIMPERFECT.\\nSing, Att. fist, Att.\\nDual. rfiuzov\\nPlur. i (or (or\\nFuture more rarely I shall know, experience.\\nVerbal adj. neuter\\nThe aorists and perfect are supplied from\\nObs. 4. is strictly a 2d perfect from I see perfect\\nI have seen, or perceived, i. e. I know. In this sense it is used as\\na present only, and its pluperfect as an imperfect, as above. For\\nthe Ionians have and for the Epic writers\\nhave and\\nMatthiae and the older grammarians derive the above forms, begin-\\nning with t, syncope from an assumed verb of which in the\\nDoric dialect the forme and the part, are ex-\\ntant. On the other Jiand, Buttmann, Kiihner, and others, think these\\nforms all belong to ottfa, or that Xautv, according to the ordinary\\nmethod of derivation, is formed from the Ionic 6, 11), which\\nmanifestly belongs to and not to while are, by\\na similar analogy, from from the same, by dropping the\\nmood-vowel and that the imperative termination, t,, is substituted\\nfor the ordinary termination, as is usually done when the mood-vowel\\nis omitted, as in v.h.qa-/Qt,, c. This is probably the true ori-\\ngin of these forms. (See Bnttmann s Gr. 109, III.) It is certain, how-\\never, that, so far as usage is concerned, the above mixed paradigm of\\nis the only correct one.\\nFor a catalogue of ^regular and defective verbs, see 117.\\n311.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7113. DEPONENT VERBS.\\n1. Deponent verbs are those which under a\\nmiddle or passive form have either an active or a\\nmiddle signification.\\n2. The perfect of deponent verbs has sometimes also a passive\\nsense.\\n3. Some of these verbs have also a passive form of the first\\nfuture and first aorist, always used in a passive sense.\\n4. The Tenses of deponent verbs are the present, imperfect,\\nperfect, pluperfect, and paulo-post-future of the passive form\\nthe future aud first aorist of the middle form; and the first fu~", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0185.jp2"}, "186": {"fulltext": "168\\nIMPERSONAL VERBS.\\n\u00c2\u00a7114,115.\\nture and first aorist in the passive form, and with a passive\\nsense. A few have a second aorist middle. They are usually\\nconjugated by giving the present, future middle, and perfect pas-\\nsive thus,\\n812. SYNOPSIS OF DEPONENT VERBS.\\n1 Indicative.\\nSubjunctive.\\nOptative.\\nImper.\\nInfin. 1 Part.\\nPres.\\nm P;\\nPerf.\\n-a cu\\nPlup.\\nFut. M.\\n(5\u00ce\u00b5\u00c2\u00a3-\u00ce\u00bf,\u00c2\u00ab\u00ce\u00b1\u00c2\u00a3.\\nwanting\\nwanting\\n1 Aor. M.\\n-at/*?/v\\n-aa ou,\\n1 Fut. P.\\nwanting\\nwanting\\n1 Aor. P.\\nP. P. Fut.\\n1\\nwanting\\nwanting\\nNote. In this table, the imperative and infinitive of the perfect\\nand are changed by euphony into and\\nou, 6. 1. 17.\\n\u00c2\u00a7114. IMPERSONAL VERBS.\\n313. Many verbs are occasionally taken impersonally; as,\\nit pleases it suffices it is profitable, c.\\nThe following are those which are chiefly taken impersonally\\n1. it is becoming it was becoming\\nto be becoming that which is becoming pi.\\n2. it concerns and\\n3. it appears; (from (from\\n4. it behoves\\n5. it is necessary and\\ncontracted for Subj.\\n314.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 J 115. DESIDERATIVE, FREQUENTATIVE, AND\\nINCEPTIVE VERBS.\\n1. Desiderative Verbs are those which denote a desire o*\\nintention of doing. They are commonly formed by adding\\nto the first root of the primitive as,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0186.jp2"}, "187": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7116. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 109\\nI laugh 1 R. I desire to laugh,\\nI make war I desire war.\\nAnother form of desideratives is that in or properly from\\nsubstantives as, from death I long for\\ndeath a general I wish to be a general.\\nAlso from verbs, by first forming substantives from them as,\\nto buy I wish to bug.\\nI weep I am disposed to weep.\\n2. Frequentatives are those which signify repeated action.\\nThese commonly end in as, (from to\\nthrow from one place to another, Mid. to throw one s self this way\\nand that, to be restless (from to sigh much\\nand deeply so, from to demand to beg\\nto creep to creep slowly.\\n3. Inceptives are those which express the beginning or con-\\ntinued increase of an action. These commonly end in as,\\nto begin to have a beard to grow to man-\\nhood (the same as and in part transitive as,\\nto intoxicate fr-om I am intoxicated.\\n116. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\n315. In many of the Greek verbs, a variety of forms appears, and\\nalso an apparent irregularity in the formation of different tenses. This\\nis occasioned partly by the adoption of new forms of the present and\\nimperfect tenses, which are used either jointly with their primitives,\\nif they are still in use or in their stead, if they have become obsolete,\\nwhile the other tenses continue as regularly formed from the primitive\\nverb and partly by the use of tenses taken from synonymous verbs of\\na different theme, in the place of those which have become nearly or\\nentirely obsolete and thus, as it were, out of the fragments of two or\\nmore verbs, whose other parts have disappeared, is formed a new whole.\\nThe parts of this whole, being all that remain in use of their respec-\\ntive roots, considered by themselves are really defective verbs. And\\nsome of these, though regularly formed from their own themes, yet not\\nbeing formed from the present to which they are attached, but from\\nsome other verb related to it in form or signification, the whole verb is\\nnot improperly termed anomalous or irregular. This appellation, then,\\nproperly belongs to all those verbs whose present, future, and perfect,\\ndo not follow the common analogy of conjugation. A few examples\\nwill illustrate these remarks thus, dim, to go under, has\\nand all different forms of the present but the tenses of the first\\nroot are regularly formed from the primitive and the second aorist\\n8", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0187.jp2"}, "188": {"fulltext": "170\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\n\u00c2\u00a7116.\\nfrom the form in Again, I suffer, has the future\\nand perfect from the obsolete present, the\\n2d aorist 2 perfect from the obsolete and the\\nfuture middle 6. 18), and 2 perfect active from\\nthe obsolete In this latter example, the only present\\nin use, with its imperfect is a defective verb, having no other\\ntenses from that root in like manner, the other parts from their re-\\nspective themes are so many defective verbs but, taken together, and\\nas attached to a theme from which they are not formed, accord-\\ning to the common analogy of conjugation, they form what is called\\nan anomalous or irregular verb.\\nIn most irregular verbs, the irregularity is caused by the adop-\\ntion of a new present and imperfect, formed by certain changes\\n\u00c2\u00a9n the root of the verb in these tenses, while the other tenses con-\\ntinue to be formed regularly from the primitive root or theme.\\nThus from is formed the new present im-\\nperfect while the future and all the tenses\\nfollowing it, are formed regularly from the root AHB.\\n316. In this way new presents are formed from old roots as\\nfollows\\nI. By the addition of certain letters to the root thus,\\nTheme.\\nHoot.\\nlet. add.\\nNew JPres.\\nFut.\\n1\\nmakes\\n2\\n3\\n4 \u00c2\u00a303\\n5\\n6\\nu\\nOf roots that end with a vowel, some drop it before the\\nadded letters some change into into and others change\\nsoro into thus,\\nTheme.\\nBoot R\\nchanged.\\nlet. add\\nNew Pres.\\nFut.\\n1\\n2\\n3\\n4\\nb\\n6 9.\\n1\\nPrimitive themes, now obsolete, are printed in capitals.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0188.jp2"}, "189": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7116. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 171\\nIII. Of roots that end with a -mute or a r-mute, the final\\nmute is sometimes dropped before the added letters thus,\\n77/\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\\nRoot. R.\\nchanged.\\nlet. add.\\nNew res.\\nFut.\\n1\\n2\\n3\\n4\\nqro\u00c2\u00ab\\n5\\nIV. Some form a new present from the second root changed\\nbefore the added letters by inserting v, which before a ^-mute\\nbecomes thus,\\nTlieine. 2 Root. 2 R. changed let. add. New Prcs. Fut.\\n2 7.\u00ce\u00ae\u00cf\u0087\u00cf\u0081\u00cf\u0089\\nV. By Syncope or contraction as,\\nNew Fres.\\nby syncope Fut.\\n2 Aor.\\nby double syncope Fut.\\nVL Bv Reduplication, viz. of the initial syllable of the ini-\\ntial consonant with and of commonly called the improper\\nreduplication as,\\nTheme.\\nby Red. of initial syllable\\ncons, with\\nby improper Red.\\nVII. By Metathesis or transposition of letters, which, however,\\nrarely occurs as,\\nTheme. Root. New Fres. Fat.\\nby Metathesis\\nVIII. By Aphaeresis, or cutting off the initial letters as,\\nby Aphasresis becomes\\nIX. In several, two or more of these modes of variation com-\\nbine to form the new present thus,\\n1 By VI and becomes tut.\\n2 By VI and becomes fut.\\nNew Fres.\\nFut.\\n47-\\n-19", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0189.jp2"}, "190": {"fulltext": "117.\\n3 By VI and III, becomes fut.\\n4 By VI, becomes and by V, fut.\\n5 By VI, becomes by V, and by VII,\\nfut.\\n6 By becomes by V, by fut.\\nBy VIII, becomes by VII, fut. both and\\n317.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7117. ALPHABETICAL LIST OF IRREGULAR\\nAND DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\nEXPLANATION.\\nIn the following Table, the words in capitals are the roots from which\\ncertain tenses are formed, but which are themselves either entirely ob-\\nsolete, or are merely supposed, in order to derive from them by analo-\\ngy the forms in use.\\nWhen there is but one root, or one form of the root, the numbers\\n1, 2, 3, are omitted, as in s. s. means same signification.\\nThe capital R after a tense indicates that the verb is conjugated re-\\ngularly from the tense after which it is placed.\\nA.\\nto injure (R. act.) pres. pass, 1 a. act. contr. 1\\na. pass, mid. Horn.\\nto admire; a passive form from Th. (R.\\npr. and imp. like au, s. 8. fut.\\nR.\\nAyvvw, to break; from (R. f. fcc, R. 1 a. 2\\na. p. 2 perf. with a passive signification. It\\ncommonly takes the syllabic augment, probably owing to\\nits having anciently had the digamma as the initial letter\\nthus, pres. f 1 a. and then (fee.\\nu4yo), to lead (R. f. aio_ c. R. It has a reduplication in the 2 a.\\nperf. and with the reduplication,\\n(poetic 1 a. al\\nSee\\nepic and poetic lengthened for Regular.\\nSee\\nto blow (fr. ao), R. ct,) retains throughout as, arjvat, pass.\\nexcept the participle the passive form\\nhas an active sense.\\nto take (1 R. 2. ivom EAIl,) f. or fcc\\nR. Attic fut. 2 aor. mid. Alexandrian\\nform for (239-5). Sometimes with an Attic redu-\\nplication in the perfect; as,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0190.jp2"}, "191": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7117. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 173\\nto raise; (R. from \u00ce\u0086\u00ce\u00a1\u00ce\u00991,) f. p. ?-qy.a, 1 a. r)qa, c, R.\\n-avouau, to perceive (1 R. ahOt, 2 f. m. fec\\nR. from 116, II. 2 aor.\\nA/.c./uo), to trouble (1 R. /f and 2 f. e. R. 2 a.\\nwith redup. pree. Mid. perf. pass,\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2/ii(cu, to be afflicted, to grieve.\\ntr. ma e grow (R. a/oatr,) f. ct/.oWw, fcc. R. imp.\\nrov from\\nintr. grow; (R. /tff,) f. \u00c2\u00abfee. R. from SI.\\nto shwt (R. /.fr, from AAEY Sl,) 1 a. 1 a,\\nm. and by elision of for\\nto avert (R. and f. e. from\\n1 aor. m. /iiyv, e. from AAEK Jl. 2 a. poet.\\nby redupl. and syncope for\\ntr. (R. and from AAI Jl) f. c. R.\\n1 a, p. part, p. p. part, Mid,\\nsense, wander, to roam.\\nto take; (R. cUo,) f. fcc. R. from AAO Sl y 2 aor.\\nor jp.wv, from AAJIMI. This verb has a passive\\nsignification in the aorists and perfect active.\\nto be wanting, to sin; (1 R. 2 f. cUi fcc. R.\\n2 a.\\nto leap (R. cU from AAS1,) f. 2 a. R.\\navoid; (R. cUux,) fut. cUv\u00c2\u00a3a c. R. from AAY\\nKJl, s. s. as\\n/.qcivo), to gain (1 R. 2 fut.\\nAc R. from 2 a.\\nto err (1 R. 2 f. c. R. 2 a,\\n^iaorov, from AM JL\\nto miscarry (R. fut. c. R. from\\nand See\\nto miss, to err (1 R. 2 f.\\nifce. R. 2 a.\\nSee\\nSee\\nto read. See\\n14\u00ce\u00b9\u00ce\u00ba\u00cf\u008a\u00ce\u00ac\u00ce\u00bd\u00cf\u0089, please (1 R. \u00ce\u00ac(5\u00ce\u00b5, 2 3 fut. c. R. from\\n\u00ce\u00ac(5\u00ce\u00b5\u00ce\u008c), 2 a. tccoW for 2 perf. 5\u00ce\u00b1, with the syllabic\\naugment, s. s. as\\nAvoiyvim, (am and to open; (R. f.\\np. fcc. R. often with both temporal and syllabic\\naugment as, imp. 2 perf. c.\\nto order (R. and f. fec. R. or,\\nfcc. R. from hence, pres. imperative,\\nfec. by svneope for c as if\\nfrom 2 perf.\\nto take away (from and AYPSl, R. avg,) imperf. R.\\ncontr. 1 aor. m.\\nfrom From this verb, or more probably from\\n^AJIOYPJl, (the obsolete Th. of to dispossess,)\\ncomes 1 aor. inf. anovqat,, part, ct7rouoccc, and\\nused by Homer, Pindar, and Hesiod, in the sense of", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0191.jp2"}, "192": {"fulltext": "174 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 117.\\nto rob; to plunder; to encroach on the limits, or\\nproperty of another\\nSee\\nSee\\nfrom APSl, to fit, or adapt; (R. fut. and\\n101, 4, (6.)), p. c. R. 2 perf. and\\nwith the Attic reduplication from\\nto please (R. fut. c. R. from\\n_\u00e2\u0080\u00a24\u00ce\u00af)|\u00ce\u00bf;, and tr. to increase (R. \u00c2\u00a9tt\u00c2\u00bbif,) fut. c. R. from\\nAYSESl; likewise, c. from AEaESI.\\nMid. intr. increase.\\nto be indignant (R. fut. or c\\nR. from\\nThis verb has four significations in its different parts viz., 1.\\nto blow imp. \u00c2\u00abov, commonly 2. \u00c2\u00aboj, to sleep\\n1 aor. and 3. to satisfy f. 1 aor\\npres. pass, and inf. act. Horn.\\ncontr. for for common form aW.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 4. to in-\\njure see\\nto go (R. fut. p. c. R.\\nfrom A SI 2 aor. from BHMI imperat. in\\ncompounds shortened, as, B. This verb has\\nalso the causative signification, to cause to go the future\\nand 1 aorist active have exclusively this sig-\\nnification.\\nto throw (1 R. and 2 3 in compounds fut.\\n(Poet, c. R. as if from 1L4-\\nAESl hence, by syncope, SI. Hence the synco-\\npated forms for\\nfcc. Epic perf. pass, as if from\\nSI.\\nto carry (R. \u00ce\u00b2\u00ce\u00b1\u00cf\u0083\u00cf\u0084\u00ce\u00b18, pass, 211,) f. 1 a.\\n\u00ce\u00b5/9\u00ce\u00b1\u00cf\u0083\u00cf\u0084\u00ce\u00ac/\u00ce\u00b8\u00e2\u0080\u00a2^\u00ce\u0090\\nto live (R. fut. a. R. from 2 aor.\\nfrom ^tw^t- (all in use).\\nto bud (1 R. 2 f. as if from\\nSI, 2 a.\\nto go (R. as if from MOASl,) 2 a. f. m.\\nperf. (40-3d) for as if from\\n(by metath. 40-8th for whence and\\nto cry out (R. f. e. R. The Ionics contract 0*7\\ninto o), making for 1 a. for\\n1 a. p. inserts\\ntr. to feed (R. f. fcc. R. from\\nto will (1 R. 2 f. c R. from\\nBOYAESl 1 a. p. and with double augment\\nhence also 2 perf.\\nto eat (R. o,) fut. c. R. from\\n2 aor. as if from", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0192.jp2"}, "193": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7117. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 175\\nr.\\nto marry (R. and fut. and\\nf. m. fcc. R. 1 aor. and\\nas if from VAMSl, or TH MJL\\nin Homer, Ae \u00c2\u00a3oo probably ./Eol. for ;_y being put for F,\\nand for A, as in the Dor. for 7/A#-f thus, f\\nwould become and by syncope, Also\\n2 a. m. of by procope and syncope for\\nto rejoice (1 R. 3 f. 2 perf. hav-\\ning the signification of the present.\\nto grow old (R. and y^o,) f. fcc. R. from\\n1 aor. from FH PJl pres. inf.\\nfrom\\nto become (1 R. yfi f, 2 yfr, 3 yov,) fut.\\nAc. R. from rENESl, 2 perf. yejOm. B. Allied to\\nthis verb is\\nto be bom (R. used in the present and imperfect the\\nfirst aor. is used actively, to beget, to bear hence,\\nol parents a mother.\\nto know (R. fut. p. \u00ce\u00b5\u00ce\u00b3\u00ce\u00bd\u00ce\u00bf)\u00cf\u0087\u00ce\u00b1,1\u00ce\u0090\\\\\u00cf\u008a\u00ce\u00af.\\np. p. R. from SI 2 aor\\nfrom sub. j opt. imper.\\ninf. yvfiivab, part,\\nto learn (1 R. 5af, 2 3 fut. fec. R. from AAEsl,\\nby epenth. from whence p. 101, 5), 2 aor.\\np. or act. from from comes and,\\nby reduplication, teac/a.\\nto divide, to feast, to entertain (R. iat-, and f. more\\nfrequently p. fcc. R. from AAZSl.\\nto burn (1 R. 2 3 second perfect regular\\nthrough all its moods.\\nto bite (1 R. 2 fut. $7/\u00c2\u00a3\u00ce\u00bf\u00ce\u00bc\u00ce\u00b1 \u00c2\u00abfee. R. from AHKS1\\n2 aor.\\nto sleep (1 R. 2 fut. fcc. R. from\\n2 aor. poetic\\nto fear (1 R. 2 i\u00c2\u00ab5, 3 5W, also 2 3 it, from AT SI,) fut.\\np. 5eoW.a, or ieoWa, 2 perf. also from\\nSI, 2 aor. 2 perf. (poetice pi.\\nby syncope c. and imper. with a\\npresent sense, to fear the middle with its deriva-\\ntives fec. have an active significa-\\ntion, to frighten.\\nto show (R. f. ifti-o), (fee. R. from AETKS1;\\nIonic AE KSl, hence 5\u00ce\u00b5\u00ce\u00af\u00ce\u00bf fec.\\nto need (R. iff, from AEE OMAT,) fut. cfec. R. In\\nthe active voice it is use*! impersonally as,\\n\u00c2\u00abfee. See Impersonal Verbs, 114", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0193.jp2"}, "194": {"fulltext": "176 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 117.\\nto bind; (R. f. (fee. R. 3 fat. pass, seldom\\nto teach (R. and f. (and\\n(fee. R. 116, IX. 3.\\nto escape (R. fut. (fee. (R. from a regular\\nverb in use) 2 aor. (from APHM1), for which also\\na, (fee. Subj. a, (fee., Opt. Imp.\\nInf. pt. 1ST. This verb is \\\\ised in\\ncomposition only.\\nto think (R. and f. (fee. R. from AO KSl also\\nfut. (fee. R. but less in use than the other forms.\\nI can (R. like f. (fee. R. from\\nAYNAOMA1 1 aor. pass. and\\ntr. enclose, intr. iwio (R. du,) fut. (fee.\\nR. 2 aor. from AYMI.\\nE.\\ntr. wake (1 R. ej/fto, 2 eyfo, 3 R. Mid, intr. awake\\n2 a. by syncope for 2 p. a.\\nreduplication anomalous.\\ni?c5w, and to eat (1 R. Ifo, 2 id 3 also 2 R. from\\nfut. p. pass, for 1 aor.\\npass, from f. m. and 2 perf.\\nda, Attice p. a. (by change of vowel for\\nAttic 2 aor. act. from\\nis rather the present used in the sense of the fu-\\nture.)\\nI wish (R. and fut. and\\nR.\\nI am wont only with Epic writers 2 perf. Ionic\\n3I in the same signification. Plup. I was wont.\\nEIAIl, to see (1 R. 2 3 an old verb, which, in the\\nactive voice, has only the 2 aor. and used as a\\nsubstitute for the aorist of o^ctco, see a verb which\\nhas only the present the imperfect wootor, Ionic\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\\nAttic and the perfect loJoa perf. pass\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\\nthe other parts being made up from\\nand fi ow, as here. In the middle and passive, has\\nthe present the imperfect 1 aor.\\nlike the Latin videri, meaning to be seen, to\\nseem, to appear, to resemble. or the 2 aor.\\nmid. is also used in an active sense, particularly by the\\nAttics, in the imperative as an interjection,\\nsee, lo, behold.\\nOf this verb the 2d perfect strictly have seen,\\nperceived, or comprehended, is never used as a perfect, but\\nonly as a present, meaning know, having the pluperfect\\nas an imperfect knew, and the future m.\\nrarely I shall know, or experience. The other\\nparts, viz. the aorists and perf. are supplied from\\nFor the parts of see 112, IX.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0194.jp2"}, "195": {"fulltext": "117.\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 177\\nEJKJ1, 1 resemble, I Mem (1 R. ha, 2 J7v,_3 oi/.,) is used only in the\\n2 perf. ot/.a, Ionic Attic ii/.a, employed as a present\\nin the sense oi I am like, I seem, I resemble. Inf. tlxivcu,\\npart. 3 Hence the adverb From\\nthis verb comes and to compare.\\nEOm and to roll up, press togethi r, more commonly or tiXit\u00c2\u00bb\\n(R. tu.c, or ft/?,) fut. c. 1 aor. inf. it\\npart, perf. pass, hkucu, 1 aor. inf.\\nor part. all of which have sometimes\\nspiritus asper, and sometimes the spirit as lenis.\\nElui, I am (R. I,) from 2 fut. mid. imperfect iyr. See SOL\\nBut\\n\u00c2\u00a3*,tu, 7 ^o, comes from 7i2;_f. m. fwrouat., p. ftoe, Attice ^tcc, imperf.\\n7/n-j Ion. ycc. See 303.\\nElIISl, or EJ1J1, to say used only in the aorists 1 aor. 2 tlnov,\\n1 aor. mid. The initial ft- is retained through\\nall the moods. Compounds used by the poets are\\nThe other parts are supplied from\\nwhich see.\\nto shut out (R. f. c. R. perf. pass. 3 pi.\\nEpic for 272-12. But f.\\nmeans to shat in.\\nto drive (R. fut. p. fec. R. from also\\nin use. The Attic future is c. for\\nc.\\nand to draw (R. and f. and 1 aor.\\nft/Sa, c. R.\\nto shake, to agitate (R. 2 perf. tjvo a, Att. used\\nchiefly in compounds as, c.\\nto clothe (R. fut. p. pass, and also from\\n\u00c2\u00a3/2 has Attice for\\nand are rare forms of the same word.\\nSee flVroj.\\nto be actively employed (1 R. 2 2 aor. and\\nas if from Mid. to follow, fut. etyo-\\n,\u00c2\u00abat. See t/o) to be found chiefly in compounds.\\nand See See also in ft oyoj.\\nto contend; (R. ioodi,) fut. c. from \u00ce\u0095\u00ce\u00a1\u00ce\u0099\u00ce\u009b\u00ce\u0095\u00ce\u00991, per\\nepenth. from All; hence 3 s. s. fut.\\nc. regular.\\nSee\\n#0 away (R. f. c. R. from EPPE Jl.\\nto make red; (R. and fut. c. (R.\\nfrom EPY E Jl), and also \u00ce\u00b5\u00cf\u0081\u00c2\u00ab5\u00cf\u0083\u00ce\u00b9\u00c2\u00ab, as if from\\nto go (1 R. 2 3 fut. 2 perf.\\n5-\u00ce\u00b1, Attice from whencealso 2\\naor. act. by syncope for For\\nthe Doric writers have rjv ov, In some\\ntenses is more in use than\\nEPIl, by metathesis and by epenth. also by ep.\\nfrom one or other of which the tenses in use are regularly\\nformed; (1 R. and 2. thus, from 1 aor.\\nm. from fut. and 1 aor. p.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0195.jp2"}, "196": {"fulltext": "178 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VEEBS. 117.\\nand c^qid from fut. p. p. pass,\\nfut. 2 a. m. and. probably from\\ncomes the fut.\\n^Ojtictl\u00e2\u0080\u00a2, in the sense of to ask, occurs chiefly as an aorist to\\nsoil, subj. imp. also f.\\nto eat used in the pres. and imp. for See\\nto sleep (R. fut. o. R. from EYJE Jl, augments\\nthe initial vowel, thus, so in compounds,\\ng.\\nto find; (1 R. 2 f. o. R. from Sl,bj\\nepenth. from EY PSl; whence a form of the 1 aor. m.\\nThis verb has before and as,\\n289-5.\\nand I am hated; (R. fut.\\nperf. p. R. from from I;^#oj, poetic,\\nand used only in the present.\\nto have (1 R. and 2 fut. (with the aspirate), or\\np. o. R. from also 2 aor.\\nsubj. opt. imp. inf. This\\nverb has another form of the present and imperf.\\nand in the sense of ZaoZoJ, which has the future\\nq. so also \u00cf\u0083\u00cf\u0087\u00ce\u00ad,9\u00ce\u00bf), In the compounds\\nobserve the following varieties viz. (for which\\nalso in the middle has a double augment in the\\nimperf. and 2 aor. to en-\\nclose, has f. 2 aor. mid. or\\nto wear; fut.\\nto promise, fut. c. R.\\nEyo), to cook (R. fut. c. Reg. from EWE SL\\nESI, to place (R. I,) Defective, 1 a. f f. m. 1 a. m.\\nThe derivatives from this root are, 1. I sit (perf. for\\n30*7 2. to set down (whence and\\nR.); 3. to clothe; and, 4. t^/tt, to send,\\nelxa, R. 304.\\nlive (R. f. m. 2 aor. as if from ZHMI.\\nFor the contractions of this verb, see 251, Obs. 2. To\\nsupply the defective parts of this verb, tenses are bor-\\nrowed from\\nand to join (1 R. 2. f. fefi. R. from\\nZEYTJl, 2 a. p.\\nto gird (R. Co,) f. c. R. from perf. pass.\\nsweeten, to please (R. f. c. R. s. s. as\\nwhich see.\\nto sit ee EJl, and 307.\\nby aphseresis for I say likewise for See\\n309.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0196.jp2"}, "197": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7117. IRREGULAR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 179\\nSee\\nto be amazed; (1 R. 2 8 used only in the 2 aor.\\nand 2 perf. in which the second aspirate\\nis changed instead of the first* contrary to 43-4.\\nto sharpen (R. f. #/yi(. fcc. R, from s. s.\\nto touch; (R. dty,) f. etc. R. from ,97; 2 aor.\\nto die; (1 K. Oraund Our, 2 av,) f. m. p.\\nand by syncope, whence the common forms,\\ntc. (2t35-5, c) from Nil\\ncomes f. m. and 2 aor. a. e avov. From the p.\\na. comes a new present f.\\nParts also occur as if from a form in thus,\\nas if from\\nto leap, or spring (R. from\\nf. m. {ropovueu. Ion. oo\u00c2\u00a3ou(*i,, 2 aor. {U9ooov.\\nI.\\nIJPY NJl, from ttfoi oj, Reg. tr. sei, or place (R Jo and\\niolouv,) f. c. R. 1 aor. p.\\nJtapo), tCwj s ?i; (R. iCa, and tJ,) fut. fec. R. from t\u00c2\u00a3cu/j and\\nc. R. from In like manner ?4-\u00ce\u00af\u00c2\u00a3\u00cf\u0089,\\nc. See EIL\\n7\u00ce\u00b7\u00ce\u00bc\u00ce\u00b9 to go pres. m. uucu. See 308.\\nto send (R. f. t ata, p. fi/.a, 1 aor. from ESI. 304.\\nto come (R. from s. s. R. whence they have\\nf. m. perf. pass, 2 aor.\\nto propitiate (R. Uce,)\u00c2\u00a3 fec. R. from Uaw; whence\\nJAHMI, intr. be propitious, of which some parts occur\\nin Homer.\\nSee\\nto know m. used in the singular number by Doric wri-\\nters only. See eido).\\nSee\\nJC\\nto sit; and R. U,) fut. 1 aor. p.\\nSee 308.\\nto order; (R. f. fec. R. from\\nKiQccvviiu), Mtoavvvuh to mix; (R. fut. c. Reg. from\\nSometimes by syncope for in\\nthe perf. active. So also in the perf. p. and Ion.\\nSometimes it inserts before in 1 f.\\npass., sometimes not. Hence also from which\\ns, s. imper. for\\ntr. Mia e omxious (1 R. 3 f. 2 p.\\nwith a present intransitive sense, oe anxious. Whence\\nthe Homeric future", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0197.jp2"}, "198": {"fulltext": "180 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VEEBS. 117.\\nto make gain (R. and f. and xiq~\\nperf. or -ana.\\nId/avo), to overtake; (1 R. 2 f. fcc. R. from 2\\naor. and from Kl XHMJ,\\nto lend (R. a,) fut. c. R. from\\nto go not used in pres. indie, but in the other moods and imperf.\\nind., and is accented like the 2 aor.\\nto cry aloud (1 R. 2 3 f. c. R.\\nfrom 2 perf. as if from 2 a.\\nvla/ov.\\nto hear (R. Reg. except the imperative pres. as if\\nfrom KA YMI, as well as reg.\\nto satisfy (R. f. KO\u00c2\u00a3eao and fec. R.\\nfrom p. p. reg. sweej?, is a\\ndifferent verb.\\nto cry (R. f. fec. R. except the imperative per-\\nfect 2 a.\\nand to hang (R. f.\\nc. R. from KPEMA JL Attic f. a, fcc. 264,\\n(1). Perf. p. without the augment.\\nto kill (1 R. 2 3 fut. R. 2 aor.\\nand from\\nto roll (R. fut. c. R. from s. s.\\nto kiss; (R. and 3 fut. c. R. also c. R.\\nfrom\\nto receive by lot (1 R. 2 3 f. c. R. from\\nAH XJL 2 aor. perf. 101, 5.\\nto take; (1 R. A?//?, 2 \u00ce\u00bb\u00ce\u00b1/9, 3 f. m. p.\\nfec. R. from AH JJJL Ionic perf. likewise f.\\nc. R. as if from A A MB SI. Also of the same\\nsignification,\\ndep. Ionic and Doric forms for\\nto be hid (1 R. 2 3 c. R. from\\n-oy; in the middle voice,\\nsometimes to forget; f. fec. from the\\nsame.\\nto wash (R. in the Attic dialect generally omits by syn-\\ncope the short vowel after ov thus,\\n-at, fec. for Q.\\nin some of its tenses occurs in Homer.\\nto will found only in the sing, plur. Doric\\nas if from AA Sl, contracted like 251, Obs. 2.\\nM.\\nto learn (1 R. 2 fut. p.\\ng. R. from MA9ESI 2 aor.\\nto fight (1 R. 2 fut and\\nc. R. from MAXEOMAL", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0198.jp2"}, "199": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7117. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 1S1\\nan old form from which arise the three following defective verbs\\nviz.\\n1. Feri fclucta, to strive; with a present signification.\\n2. Pros. m. contr. to desire, to seek.\\n3. Fut. and 1 aor. m. also from, to\\nseek.\\nMt wr* o, to intoxicate (R. f. tfce. from s. s.\\nto care for (1 R. 2 3 from MEAE Jl.\\n2 aor. perf. In the active voice it is used\\nmostly in the third person impersonally,\\n\u00c2\u00a71U,2.\\nto be about to be (R. f. c. R. from\\nto bleat; (1 R. 2 3 f. fcc. R.\\ns. s.) 2 aor. 2 perf. from MH KJl.\\nMtyvvo), to mix (R. wt-y,) f. \u00c2\u00abiiioj, c. R. from \u00c2\u00abtyoj, 2\\naor. from\\nto remember (R. fut. c. R. from\\nto ivipe off; (R. f. fec. from MO PJTJL\\nMv/ CiouciL\u00e2\u0080\u00a2, to bellow; R. Doric forms, 2 a. 2 p. as if\\nfrom MY IUL\\nN.\\nintrans. to dwell (R. va,) f. fcc. R. from vao), trans, to cause\\nto dwell.\\nNitw, to wash (R. vm,) f. c. R. from s. s.\\nto think; reg. is contracted and accented by the Ionics like\\nthus, f. 1 a. fec.\\nto Rmell (R. 5, and f. R. also and p.\\nfec. R. from OZE Jl, 2 perf. with the Attic\\nreduplication with a present sense.\\n/vvoi, to open; (R. f. olico, fcc. R. from See\\nSee 5 and 810.\\nto swell; (R. otdf, f. fec. R. from\\nTh. s. s.\\nand to think (R. otf,) f. (fee. R. from\\nimperf. with the diphthong resolved, is re-\\ntained in some dialects.\\nto go; (R. f. p. R. as if from OIXE O-\\nMAJ\\\\\\nto glide (1 R. 2 f. etc.\\nR. from s. s. 2 aor.\\nto destroy; (1 R. 2 3 f. etc, R. from\\nOAE Sl Att. fut. a. oXrTi, m. 2 aor. p.\\nAttice oAo J.oc. Other forms are\\nto swear (1 R. 6uo, 2 6\u00ce\u00bc, from OMJl,) etc.\\nR. from OMO Sl, commonly with the reduplication in the\\nperfect; f. m. from OMJL\\n9", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0199.jp2"}, "200": {"fulltext": "182 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VEEBS. \u00c2\u00a7117.\\nto wipe off; f. (fee. R. s. s. as,\\nwhich see.\\nto help (R. ova,) f. (fee. R. from ON All. 2 a.\\nto rush (R. f. (fee. R. from s. 8.\\nto excite (R. f. 101. 4. (6.) from OP/2\\nf. from 2 perf. 6 hence a new present,\\ns. s. and also\\nto smell (R. and fut. R.\\nand \u00c2\u00abfee. R. from by epenth.\\nfrom from which hence also\\nand s. s.\\nOY THMI, to hit, to wound; (R. fut.\\nand (fee. R. from infin.\\nHorn, for\\nto owz viz. money, punishment, i. e.\\nguilty (1 R. and 2 f. and\\n(fee. R. from and 2 aor. wqpfAor,\\nused only in the expression of a wish thus, ft^-\\nthat that thou, (fee.\\nto forfeit (1 R. 2 f. p. 2 aor.\\nto strike (R. 7rai. and f. and the remain-\\ning tenses are from the root Trat.\\nto suffer (1 R. seldom 2 7\u00ce\u0093\u00ce\u00b1#, 3 fut. m.\\n6, 18 2 perf. both from \u00ce\u00a0\u00ce\u0095\u00ce\u009d\u00ce\u009811\\n2 aor. also fut. (fee. R. from\\nto taste, to eat (R. 7r\u00c2\u00ab, from All,) 1 aor. p. p.\\nto digest (R. 7Tf?r,) f. (fee. R. from s. s.\\nto expand (R. f. R. from\\nexc. p. p. which is from the syncopated form\\n2\u00cf\u0084\u00cf\u0084\u00ce\u00ac(\u00ce\u0091). Other forms are and s. s.\\nto fly (R. 7\u00ce\u00a4?\u00cf\u0084\u00ce\u00b1,) f. (fee. R.\\nfrom 2 aor. from also p. p. 7Ti-\\nfrom by syncope becomes\\nand so of other tenses.\\nSee\\nto fasten (1 R. 7r?/y, 2 yraj/, 3 f.\\n(fee. R. from \u00ce\u009311 2 perf. 2 a. pass,\\nto approach same signification as from\\nwhich the other tenses are taken.\\nand to fill (R. whence f.\\n(fee. R. from A All When, in composi-\\ntion, comes before the initial in this word, it is omit-\\nted before as, so also in\\nto burn (R. f. (fee. R. from All\\nto drink (R. 7ro and m,) fut. (fee. R. from JJO ll 2 aor.\\nfrom Th. imperat. commonly sometimes\\n3Tts fut. m. probably the present used in the fu-", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0200.jp2"}, "201": {"fulltext": "117. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 183\\nture sense or by elision of for is\\nalso found. From this theme also comes\\nto cause to drink (i\\\\. nv,) f. ttc. R. from\\nto sell (11. from JlPA Ji.) The forms in use are\\nThe future\\nand aorist active are wanting.\\nAttic and poetic to fall (1 R. and 2\\nfrom i. 1 a. from the ancient\\nHE Til and p. from TO J I; 2 aor.\\nf. m. as if from J I.\\nto lead astray (1 R. 2 f. c. R. from\\n2 aor.\\nto strike (1 R. 2 for f. c. R. exc.\\n2 aor. p. compounds regular throughout.\\nto buy of which there is in use only 2 aor. as\\nan aorist to\\nto learn by inquiry (1 R. 7rfi/#, 2 7\u00cf\u0080 c.\\nR. from poetic 2 aor. m. perf. pass.\\nJPICw, to do (1 R, \u00c2\u00a7?y and 3 6oy from 2 UPP,) fut.\\noe Soj and c. R. 2 perf.\\nto flow (R. Qfu and \u00c2\u00a3i\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\u00e2\u0080\u00a2?,) f. and p. c. R.\\nfrom (h 2 aor. pass. iq\u00c2\u00a7v?/v.\\ntr. break (1 R. (j^y, 2 ^ay, 3 $wy, irreg.) f.\\nc R. from (i. e. C PHTJ s. s. 2 perf. \u00c2\u00ab^wya,\\nwith in trans, signification, lam torn hi pieces, 2 a. pass.\\nto strengthen (R. qo,) f. c. R. from PO Il.\\nto extinguish (R. f. fcc. R. from\\nalso p. 2 a. intr. owi from\\nto move, impel reg. except that, like verbs beginning with o,\\nit commonly doubles after the augment, and, in the\\n1 aor., omits the tense-sign thus, 1 aor. mid.\\nperf. pass, 235, Obs.\\nto scatter (R. fut.\\nAttic c. R. from p. p.\\nto dry up (R. and f. R. also p.\\n(bv svneope for 1 aor. 2 aor.\\niov.//^, from \u00ce\u00a3\u00ce\u009a\u00ce\u009b\u00ce\u0097\u00ce\u009c1\\nkc. 251, -s. 2, wipe; (R. and f.\\n(kc. 1 aor. p. from s. s.\\nto make a libation (R. f. c. R. 6, 18.\\nto spread (R. f. fcc. R. from\\nalsc,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0201.jp2"}, "202": {"fulltext": "181 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 117.\\nto spread (R. f. o. R. from\\nby metathesis and syncope from\\nSee\\nto save (R. or f. \u00c2\u00abfee. R. exe. 1 aor. pass,\\ninstead of and from the older form\\nto bear (R. f. c. reg. from the syncopated form\\ns. s. 2 aor. from\\nto cut (1 R. also and T/nyy, 2 /t, 3 fut.\\nreg. also f. and from and 2\\naor. and sometimes\\nintr. olry 2 aor. inf. pass, and as il\\nfrom\\nand a defective 2 aorist used in Homer, raeei traiA,\\nfind.\\nto bear (1 R. 2 3 f. -co, fcc. R. from TE KJl;\\n2 aor. 2 perf.\\nto expiate (R. f. c. R. from t/oj,\\nh onou r.\\nto bore; (R. too,) f. o. R. from\\nto wound (R. too,) f. c. R. from\\nto run (1 R. 0\u00c2\u00a3/ and 2 f. p.\\n244, .5a;c. c. R. from JPAMSl 2 aor. f. m.\\nto consume (R. 1 aor. fec.\\nto be, to obtain (1 R. and 2 f. c.\\nR. from SI 2 aor. fut. m. Tfvfojwu from\\n-Voie. This verb must be carefully distinguished\\nfrom the regular kindred verb to prepare fut.\\nc. R.\\nY.\\nto promise (from and f. fec. R.\\nfrom See*\\npres. m. eai (R. also the future for in the\\nN T. and later writers by the same anomaly as\\nand 2 aor. The rest of the tenses are\\nformed from See\\nSee \u00cf\u0082\u00cf\u00817/\u00ce\u00bc*\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\\nto kill (1 R. 2 2 aor. and by redupl.\\nand syncope for part, accented on the\\npenult, p. p. 3 f. p. Hence\\nfrom 3d root", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0202.jp2"}, "203": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7117. IRREGULAR AXD DEFECTIVE VERBS. 185\\nto bear used in the pres. and imperial R. ol, eye\u00c2\u00bb, and\\n2 fofyx, 8 fro/.) f. (from Oi J2), fec. R.\\nfrom *ENKKJl\\\\ also 1 f. pass, 1 aor. act.\\nftveyxa for from Attice commonly\\nijvti/.a, fec 2 aor. from the same 2 perf.\\nfrom ENE XJL\\nto say (R. f. gpr 2 aor. See 309.\\nto come before, to anticipate (R. q a,) f. or\\nfcc. R. from 2 aor. from\\nto corrupt, to fall (R. g#t,) f. fec. R. from s. s.\\nother forms are and used in\\nthe pres. and imperf.\\nto enclose (R. f. fec. R. from\\n1 Jl, same as s. s.\\nto fee, to put to fight (R. f. fec. R. Other kindred\\nforms are and R. and it has the derivatives\\nand\\nto mix, to knead (R. and f. Ion. old\\nfut. 1 a. p. p. and\\nto beget (R. f. 1 aor. But the perf.\\nand 2 aor. eiqpw, have a passive or intransitive significa-\\ntion, begotten, to be, to become.\\nXasO), to recede, to stand open, to contain (R. fut.\\n\u00c2\u00abfee. R. from XA /fSl (s. s. with KA ZJl, whence\\nor 2 aor. and \u00ce\u00ba\u00ce\u00ad\u00ce\u00ba\u00ce\u00b1(5\u00ce\u00bf\u00ce\u00bd, 2 perf.\\nderivatives and varieties of forms are numerous.\\nXalvo), to gape or yawn (R. /aw,) f. fcc. R.\\nfrom a derivative from XA ll from which also\\nand which see above.\\nXaiqo), to rejoice (1 R. later 2 3 /tjo,) f.\\nc. R. 2 a. p. perf. and\\nto grasp (1 R. 2 3 f. m.\\n\u00c2\u00a76, 18 2 aor. 2 perf.\\nSee\\nto pour out (R. /fv,) f. fec. R. 1 aor. and l/fa (by\\nelision for /f hence imperative fec.\\ninfinitive also f. mid.\\nThis verb has five different forms, with as many different sig-\\nnifications root of all,\\n1. to give an oracular response regular.\\n2. to lend; like\\n3. it is necessary; partly like verbs in (see Impers.\\nVerbs, \u00c2\u00a7114).\\n4. to use; in the contracted tenses takes for a,\\ns 261, Oos. 2.\\n5. it suffices pi. inf. fcc.\\n.X^wrruoj, to colour (R. f. fec. R. p. pass,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0203.jp2"}, "204": {"fulltext": "186 SIGNIFICATION OF ADVEKBS. 118, 119\\nto heap, to dam (R. f. c. R. from\\ns. s. erf. pass,\\nSI.\\nto push (R. and has the syllabic augment through-\\nout thus, imp. f. and regular from\\nboth; 1 f. p.\\n\u00c2\u00a7118. INDECLINABLE WORDS OR PARTICLES.\\n3 1 8. The Indeclinable parts of speech, sometimes denominat-\\ned. Particles, are those which suffer no change of form by inflec-\\ntion. They are the Adverb (which includes the Interjection),\\nthe Preposition, and the Conjunction.\\nTHE ADVERB.\\n319. An Adverb is a word joined to a verb,\\nan adjective, or another adverb, to modify it, or to\\ndenote some circumstance respecting it.\\nAdverbs may be considered in respect of Signification, Deri-\\nvation, and Comparison.\\n\u00c2\u00a7119.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 THE SIGNIFICATION OF ADVERBS.\\n320. In respect of signification, adverbs may be arranged in\\nGreek as they are in Latin and other languages, under the fol-\\nlowing heads\\n1. Adverbs of Place comprehending those which signify,\\n1st. Rest in a place. These generally end in ov,\\nas, in the field.\\n2d. Motion from a place. These generally end in or s\\nas, from the field.\\n3d. Motion to a place. These generally end in as\\nto the field. 324-6.\\n4th. Motion through or by a place. These are generally femi-\\nnine adjectives in the dative singular, having under-\\nstood as, ally, by another way.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0204.jp2"}, "205": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7119.\\nSIGNIFICATION OF ADVERBS.\\nis;\\n2. Adverbs of Time; as, vvv, now; then; some-\\ntimes, Ac.\\n3. Adverbs of Quantity: how much; much;\\noUyov, a little, Ac.\\n4. Adverbs of Quality; these end in sometimes in a and\\n5 (which are properly datives of the first declension) also in\\nti, and\\n5. Adverbs of Manner (viz. of action or condition,) including\\nthose which express exhortation, affirmation, negation, granting,\\nforbidding, interrogation, doubt, fcc.\\n6. Adverbs of Relation or such as express circumstances of\\ncomparison, resemblance, order, assemblage, separation, c.\\n7. Adverbs of Exclamation in other languages usually de-\\nnominated Interjections. (See 321, Obs. 2.)\\n321 OBSERVATIONS.\\n06s. 1. Some adverbs have such an affinity, that, beginning\\nwith a vowel, they are indefinites with interrogatives\\nwith redditives, or responsives, as follows\\nINDEFINITE.\\nwhich way.\\nft om n\\\\ by what means.\\nwhen.\\n6 9f j-, -tv, whence.\\noil, or 6 o, where,\\nhow much.\\nafter what manner.\\n/.u;, how often.\\nINTERROGATIVE.\\nr which way?\\nn (by ichat means\\nwhen?\\nwhence?\\nor, or where?\\nhow much? \\\\ner\\nafter what man-\\nhow often\\nREDDITITE.\\nk or j tl\\niTfl, I 0?\\nby this means.\\nrr vt\\nthen.\\nthence.\\nthere,\\nso much. [ner.\\nafter that inan-\\n/.u;, so often.\\nObs. 2. Under adverbs in Greek are classed those particles of\\nexclamation which express some sudden emotion of the mind, and\\nare, in the grammars of most other languages, denominated In-\\nterjections. The most common of these are the following, which\\nexpress\\nRejoicing as, lov, Condemning as,\\nGrieving as, and Admiring as,\\nLaughing as. a, a. Deriding; as, lov,\\nBewailing as, at, bi Calling as,\\nWishing as. Unjoining silence; as,\\nRejecting; as. Threatening; as, ovai\\nPraising; as, Raging; as,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0205.jp2"}, "206": {"fulltext": "188 FORMATION -OF ADVERBS. \u00c2\u00a7120.\\n\u00c2\u00a7120. THE FORMATION AND DERIVATION OF\\nADVERBS.\\n322. A few adverbs in Greek are primitives; as, vvv, now\\non the ground yesterday.\\nBut the greater part are derivatives, and are of two classes.\\n323. I. The first class of derivatives consists of such words as\\nare not strictly speaking adverbs, but are so denominated from\\nbeing sometimes used in an adverbial sense, either by virtue of\\ntheir signification, or by ellipsis for an adverbial phrase of these\\nthe following are examples\\n1. The accusative of neuter adjectives as,\\nfirst chiefly\\nsharply.\\n2. The oblique cases of nouns and pronouns as,\\nGen. together irom united.\\nnever from no one.\\nDat. around (i. e. in a circle) from a circle.\\nswiftly, with swiftness from swiftness.\\nAce. and (sup. from the beginning\\nfrom the beginning.\\nas, like from manner.\\n3. Verbs are sometimes used as adverbs thus,\\nThe imperative as, nih, c.\\nThe 2d aorist active; as, from\\nThe present optative -of viz.\\nObs. 1. To these may be added\\n1st. Nouns compounded with prepositions as,\\nout of the way.\\n2d. Prepositions united together as, abroad.\\n3d. Prepositions joined with adverbs as, then.\\n324. II. The second class of derivatives consists of such\\nwords as have undergone a change of form, and are used only in\\nan adverbial sense. These are so numerous and varied in form\\nand derivation, that a perfect classification cannot be given. The\\nfollowing, as being the most important, may be noticed viz.\\n1. Adverbs in express a circumstance of quality or man-\\nner, and are for the most part formed from adjectives by chang-\\ning of the nominative or genitive into as, from\\nfrom gen.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0206.jp2"}, "207": {"fulltext": "g 121. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 1S9\\n2. Adverbs in or express a circumstance of manner, and\\ngenerally formed from nouns; as, without bloodshed\\nwith one s own hand.\\n3. Adverbs in and are formed from the verbal adjec-\\ntives in and thus, by name with-\\nout sweating. So also those in (the characteristic of the\\nverb being changed, when necessary, according to the laws of\\nEuphony, 6, 2) thus, from is formed by steps\\n(from from collectively from\\nsecretly, (fee. Sometimes the termination\\nis added as, scattered.\\n4. Adverbs in come from verbs in derived from\\nnouns signifying a nation, parry, or class, and signify after the\\nmanner, language, c. of such nation, c. as, after\\nthe manner of the Greeks after the manner of\\nmen.\\n5. Adverbs in and are for the most part derived\\nfrom nouns, and relate chiefly to external form and character\\nas, in herds resembling grapes.\\nXote. If derived from verbal adjectives, they agree in signification\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2with those in as, openly.\\n6. Adverbs denoting certain relations of place, are formed by\\nthe addition of certain syllables to the words from which they\\nare derived viz. In a place is denoted by the terminations\\nand from a place, by or and to a\\nplace, by and\\n325. Exc. Adverbs of place, derived from prepositions, ex-\\npress the relations of in a place and to a place by the termina-\\ntion thus,\\nIn a place. To a place. From a place.\\nabove, upwards. from above (from\\nbelow, downwards, from below\\n326.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7121. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.\\n1. Adverbs derived from adjectives compared by and\\nare compared by changing og of these terminations into\\nas,\\nfrom\\n2. Adverbs derived from adjectives, compared by and\\n9*", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0207.jp2"}, "208": {"fulltext": "190 INSEPARABLE ADVERBIAL PARTICLES. 122.\\ncommonly take the neuter singular of the comparative,\\nand the neuter plural of the superlative for their comparative and\\nsuperlative thus,\\nfrom\\nNote I, This mode of comparison is also used, though more rarely,\\nfor those derived from adjectives compared by %iqoq and as,\\nNote 2. The accusative neuter of adjectives, both singular and plu-\\nral, is sometimes used adverbially in all the degrees. To the superla-\\ntive degree, the article is frequently prefixed; as, (sup.\\n3. Adverbs in formed from prepositions, are compared by\\nadding and as, So also\\nprepositions in the seuse of adverbs; as,\\nNote. Some other adverbs imitate this mode of comparison; as,\\nyet as often otherwise; thus, comparative\\nand superlative\\n122. INSEPARABLE ADVERBIAL PARTICLES.\\n32*7. Certain particles, never used by themselves, but pre-\\nfixed to words by composition, affect the signification of the\\nwords with which they are compounded, as follows\\n1. The particle a (which becomes av before a vowel) has\\nthree different significations\\n1st. It marks privation (from without) as,\\nwithout water.\\n2d. It denotes increase (from much) as,\\nmuch wooded.\\n3d. It denotes union (from together) as, a\\nconsort.\\n2. and sometimes and\\nincrease the signification as, manifest very\\nmanifest, c.\\n3. and generally express privation or negation; as,\\nan infant, from and I speak but\\nExc. sometimes increases the signification; as,\\nthat flows in a full stream, from and\\n4. expresses difficulty, trouble, or misfortune as,\\nmalevolent I am unhappy.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0208.jp2"}, "209": {"fulltext": "124. prepositions. 191\\nXote. The contrary of is tv (which is also found by itself). It\\nsignifies well or with facility as, benevolent; I am\\nhappy.\\n\u00c2\u00a7123. THE PREPOSITIONS.\\n328. A Preposition is a word which shows\\nthe relation between a noun or pronoun following\\nit, and some other word in the sentence.\\n1. The primary use of prepositions seems to have been, to in-\\ndicate the relation of one thing to another in respect of place.\\nFrom this, by a natural and easy analogy, they are used to ex-\\npress similar relations in respect of time.\\n2. From their primary and more common use, to express\\ncertain relations of place and time, they are also used by analogy\\nand figure, to express various other connections and relations\\namong objects, in all of which, however, the primary and original\\nuse of the word may easily be traced.\\n3. All prepositions ending with a vowel, except\\nand reject the final vowel when compounded with, or stand-\\ning before, a word beginning with a vowel generally re-\\ntains i, but there are many exceptions. It is always rejected be-\\nfore the augment before sometimes combines with it\\nby contraction thus, becomes 222, Obs. 2.\\n4. There are eighteen prepositions, properly so called, in the\\nGreek language of these\\nFour govern the Genitive only, viz. or\\nTwo govern the Dative only, cvv.\\nTwo govern the Accusative only, or and\\nFour govern the Gen. and Ace.\\nSix govern the Gen., Dat., Ace.\\nand\\n329.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 124. ALPHABETICAL LIST OF PREPOSITIONS.\\n1. the Genitive, Dative or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification round, round about, on both sides.\\nWith the Genitive; round, round about at the same time proceed-\\ning or originating from; of or concerning, upon, in addition to, for the\\nsake of, for the love of.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0209.jp2"}, "210": {"fulltext": "192 prepositions. 124.\\nWith the Dative; round, with the idea of rest and continuance of\\nor concerning, among, after or near, upon, for, i. e. in defence of; for, i. e.\\non account of; with.\\nWith the Accusative round, with the idea of tendency or approxi-\\nmation to near, of, concerning, or belonging to. See also 134, 13.\\nIn Composition about, round about.\\n2. the Accusative. In poetry, sometimes the Dative.\\nPrimary Signification; motion upwards, from below to above, op-\\nposed to\\nWith the Accusative; over, up along, through, during, among, withf\\nin in computation, up viz. from a point below.\\nWith the Dative upon, on, in, with the idea of elevation and rest.\\nIn Composition motion upioards, repetition, increase, back again.\\n8. the Genitive.\\nPrimary Meaning in front of, in a state of rest set over against,\\ni. e. by way of exchange, comparison, equivalence, or preference. Hence,\\nWith the Genitive for, i. e. equivalent before, in preference in-\\nstead of against, equal to, for, in consideration of upon.\\nIn Composition; equality, substitution, reciprocity, comparison, op-\\nposition.\\n4. the Genitive.\\nPrimary Signification removal from, viz. from contact with oppo-\\nsite of\\nWith the Genitive ffom, on, after (from the time of), against, by\\nmeans of, with, upon, of i. e. proceeding from on account of for, of\\ni. e. belonging to; e. g. those belonging to, viz. the Council, Ple-\\nbeians, Stoics, c.\\nIn Composition departure, separation, negation, privation, augmen-\\ntation.\\n5. the Genitive or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification through, motion through.\\nWith the Genitive 1. place, through 2. time, through, through-\\nout, during with regard to the space or time passed through, at, in\\nwith numerals, every; as, every five 3. cause, by means of\\nwith, viz. as an instrument.\\nWith the Accusative by, by means of during as the end, occasion,\\nor cause for, on account of e. g. (5V all things were\\nmade by him all things were made for him.\\nIn Composition separation, division, arrangement, passage through,\\nreciprocation, opposition, or competition, perseverance.\\n6. or the Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification to, into motion from without to within the\\nopposite of\\nWith the Accusative; to, into, toward, against, among, before, con-\\ncerning, in respect of, in, till, until, for with numerals, about, up to.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0210.jp2"}, "211": {"fulltext": "124. prepositions. 193\\nIt forms distributives; as, tva, one by one it is used adverbially,\\ntiq once tiq twice.\\nomposition into.\\nNote. When or stands before a genitive, an accusative is un-\\nderstood.\\n1. Ex (before a vowel the Genitive.\\nPrimary Signification; from, out, out of, motion from within to\\nwithout; opposite of\\nWith the Genitive it denotes motion from, causation, change of state,\\nrendered of, i. e. made of; of, viz. the number out of, by, with, accord-\\ning to, since.\\nIn Composition out of, it denotes division or separation, pre-emi-\\nnence, completion or success, intensity.\\n8. the Dative.\\nPrimary Signification; in, with the idea of rest and being con-\\ntained within.\\nWith the Dative within, during, among, before, in the power of by.\\nviz. by means of; in the case of with, into.\\nIn Composition in or among.\\n9. the Genitive, Dative or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification on or upon, with motion or rest\\nWith the Genitive on, upon, at, in, or near during, through, under,\\nin the time of; after, with, by.\\nWith the Dative upon, i. e. close and continuing upon, in the power\\nof, i. e. resting upon; on condition, during, besides, i. e. in addition to;\\nfor, i. e. in order to after, with, against, along, among, at, by, over\\nviz. in authority.\\nWith the Accusative; on or upon, with the idea of tendency or ap-\\nproach towards to, towards, under, so as to be dependent upon in,\\nover, during, against viz. motion towards with hostile intent.\\nIn Composition addition, increase, reciprocity, succession.\\n10. the Genitive or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification direction from above to below, down along\\n(parallel); down to, upon, or at (perpendicular); down through (trans-\\nverse) opposite of\\nWith the Genitive down from, viz. originating or proceeding down\\nfrom, directed down by; along, on, through, downwards; under, upon,\\nat, as a mark; before, respecting, by, viz. in swearing; against, among.\\nWith the Accusative down (not from, but) parallel to, down along,\\nor to through, according to, in respect of; in, on, by, near to, at, op-\\nposite, or before, during. Adverbially, by degrees.\\nIn Composition down, opposition, intensity.\\n11. the Genitive, Dative (with the Poets), or the Accusa-\\ntive.\\nPrimary Signification with, together with, not as a part of, or one\\nwith expressing a connection lees close than", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0211.jp2"}, "212": {"fulltext": "194 prepositions. 124.\\nWith the Genitive with, together with, by means of, viz. as con-\\nnected with and depending upon according to, and, i. e. in conjunction\\nwith, as an agent, or object; with, i. e. against; with, i. e. for, on the side\\nof; among.\\nWith the Accusative after, i. e. following close or near to, in re-\\nspect to space or time next to, next after, to, towards, for, or after, with\\na view to bring between, in, among.\\nWith the Dative b j the poets only, in, with, among.\\nIn Composition; participation, change, reciprocity.\\n12. the Genitive, Dative or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification, by the side of; it denotes motion from, close\\nto, or towards an object, according to the case with which it is joined.\\nWith the Genitive from, i. e. from beside of, proceeding from\\nby, with, near, from among, above, or in comparison with.\\nWith the Dative at, with, near, among, with the idea of continu-\\nance.\\nWith the Accusative; to, beyond, beside, towards, i. e. to the side of;\\nthrough along, against, in comparison with.\\nIn Composition it retains its general meaning also defect.\\n13. the Genitive, Dative or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification; round, round about, nearly the same with\\nbut in a sense less close: means on both sides; ntqi, on all\\nWith the Genitive round, round about, with the idea of origin\\nor cause about, i. e. of, or concerning with, for, viz. in defence of\\nabove or before, denoting pre-eminence or superiority.\\nWith the Dative round, round about, with rest or continuance\\nfor, i. e. concerning, on account of; from.\\nWith the Accusative round, or about, with tendency or approach\\nto concerning or towards, about, i. e. near to, advancing towards about,\\ni. e. with regard to in, of against.\\nIn Composition round about, also denoting increase, abundance.\\n14. the Genitive.\\nPrimary Signification before, in respect of place or time, but with-\\nout the idea of opposition or comparison which belongs to\\nWith the Genitive before, in the presence of at the command of\\nthrough, denoting cause or origin; for, in defence of; for, for the ad-\\nvantage of before, denoting preference.\\nTn Composition before with verbs of motion, forth, forward.\\n15. the Genitive, Dative or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification transition or passage, the relative direction\\nbeing indicated by the case.\\nWith the Genitive from, i. e. transition from from, by, denoting\\nthe agent; belonging or the property of; of, proceeding from; on\\nthe side of by, in oaths and supplications before, to, so as to be pro-\\ntected by.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0212.jp2"}, "213": {"fulltext": "124 prepositions. 195\\nWrm the Dative close to, near, and continuing besides, in addition\\nto, before, occupied or busy with.\\nW rru the Accusative to or towards, against, according to, in conse-\\noucnee of, on account of, with, in comparison of\\nIn Composition motion to, addition, against, close to.\\n16. the Dative.\\nPrimary Signification with, closely connected with another, eo as\\nin some sense to form one with it see\\nWith the Dative with, together with, according to, besides, with the\\nassistance of, at, during, to, on the side of.\\nIn Composition concurrence in action, association, combination, col-\\nlection, completion or fulfilment, collision, intensity.\\n17. the Genitive or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification over or above, viz. in respect of place, and\\nhence figuratively, over, in respect of power, authority, protection.\\nWith the Genitive above, in a state of rest over, in a state of mo-\\ntion; for, i. e. in defence of; for, viz. in the place of; for, on account\\nof by, for the sake of, of, concerning, in order to.\\nWith the Accusative over beyond, above or beyond, above, i. e. more\\nthan against.\\nIn Composition it retains its primary signification, also sometimes\\nit augments.\\n18. *\u00ce\u00a4\u00cf\u00806, the Genitive, Dative or Accusative.\\nPrimary Signification; under, modified by its case.\\nWith the Genitive place from below, from under, out of; fig.\\nunder, generally with the idea of protection, subjection, or the object of\\ninfluence proceeding from also, by, with, i. e. under the direction of;\\nby means of, for, i. e. under the influence of.\\nWith the Dative; simply under, completely under and continuing;\\nby.\\nWith the Accusative under, viz. moving and proceeding under or\\ncoming up to the under part of a thing to, behind, about, on the eve of.\\nIn Composition it retains its primary signification. Sometimes it\\ndenotes diminution, privacy, beginning.\\n330. OBSERVATIONS.\\n1. The preposition, as its name imports, usually stands before the\\nword which it governs. When it comes after it, as it sometimes does,\\nthis is indicated by the change of the accent from the last syllable to\\nthe first.\\n2. In composition, with a word beginning with a vowel, and gen-\\nerally when standing before such a word, the final vowel of the prepo-\\nsition is dropped, and, if the next preceding letter be a consonant, it is\\nsubject to the changes required by the laws of euphony; thus,\\nmust be written JJtQi, however, never drops its\\nfinal vowel, and never changes its final letter except before a vowel,\\nwhen it is changed into e\u00c2\u00a3.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0213.jp2"}, "214": {"fulltext": "196 conjunctions. 125.\\n3. The preposition alone, with the accent thrown back to the first\\nsyllable, is sometimes used for certain compounds, of which it forms a\\npart; thus, is used for it is lawful; ntqt, for ntQUarv, it is\\nsuperfluous ava, for arise for naqtan, he is present.\\n\u00c2\u00a7125. THE CONJUNCTIONS.\\n331. A Conjunction is a word which con-\\nnects words or sentences.\\n332. Conjunctions, according to their different meanings,\\nare divided into different classes, of which the following may b(,\\nnoticed; viz.\\n1. Connective as, and in poetry, and\\nalso, c.\\n2. Disjunctive as, in poetry, and sometimes\\nor.\\n3. Concessive as, although.\\n4. Adversative as, but at least\\nbut, truly, indeed yet, c.\\n5. Causal, which assign a reason for something previously\\nsaid; as, for; that\\nthat, so that; (in poetry), because;\\nsince indeed since, after that.\\n6. Conclusive, or such as are used in drawing a conclusion, or\\ninferencp from something previously said as,\\novv, therefore wherefore\\nthen, truly toivvv, vv or therefore\\n(emphatic), wherefore not there-\\nfore.\\nV. Conditional as, in poetry, or\\nif if indeed.\\n8. Expletive as, c.\\nADVERBIAL AND CONJUNCTIVE PARTICLES.\\nThe following remarks on the signification and use of certain\\nadverbial and conjunctive particles, will be useful for reference.\\nFor more ample information on this subject, the advanced stu-\\ndent is referred to the work of Hoogeveen on the Greek Par-\\nticles, an abridged translation of which has been published by\\nthe Rev. John Seager, B. A.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0214.jp2"}, "215": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7125. conjunctions. 197\\n333.\\n1. is adversative, and commonly answers to the English but.\\nIt is sometimes used elliptically, to indicate confidence or readiness, and\\nmay be rendered well, then; therefore. Thus, alt tv\\nWell, then, know that this will be so, i. e. ovx b\\nc. I will not be unwilling, but, on the contrary, knoiu that this will be so.\\n2. Thus combined introduces a reason for the op-\\nposition expressed by as,\\nI will stop the present discourse, for I see Creon\\ncoming. Sometimes, however, the reference is more latent, and a clause\\nis to be supplied from what precedes thus, Plato,\\nwhere there must be supplied from the preceding sen-\\ntence, But we shall not escape unpunished, for\\nwe shall render satisfaction in Hades. Sometimes the reference is to a\\nsucceeding clause, and sometimes to some general remark which the\\nconnection and sense of the passage will readily suggest, such as, But\\nthis is not surprising, for But this is not impossible, for c.\\n3. restricts with emphasis that which is general to some-\\nthing more special as,\\nBut at least they would not, I think, revile us in a rude wanner.\\n4. ovv When these particles are combined, they usually\\nintimate that along with the opposition expressed by conse-\\nquence of what lias preceded is also expressed; thus, ovv\\nyt Yet will for this reason now at\\nleast be less disagreeable.\\njoined with strengthens the negative as,\\nNay, I will not even try. In such sentences may\\nbe supplied, equivalent to, will not only not do it, but I will not even\\ntry.\\n6. is strengthened by adding rot; as,\\nWhy, that is a pleasant thing enough, if, fec.\\n334.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 (Poet. KE or KEN).\\nv Av (Poetice ne or xtv) according to Professor Dunbar, is derived from\\naw, the same as to give, grant, or allow and that the primary\\nmeaning of the particle thus derived is granted or allowed, which can be\\nreadily traced in all the variety of expression in which it is employed.\\nThis particle is used\\n1. In the sense of if, of which, in this sense, it is probably only\\nan abbreviated form. Thus used, it expresses a condition, and may be-\\ngin a sentence as, tbq if (granted) God will. In all its other\\napplications can stand only after other words in its clause.\\n2. It is used with indefinites, adding to them the force of the Latin\\ncunque, -soever as, whoever, or whosoever.\\nS. It is used most generally to limit the verb to which it belongs,\\nand partly or entirely takes from that verb its direct affirmative power.\\nWith the indicative imperfect, pluperfect, and aorists, it is rendered\\nby should, would; should have, would have, c. \u00c2\u00a71*70, 4, and Obs. 1;\\nand also to express ability, and rendered by could or could have. It is\\nsometimes joined to the future, and seems to soften the decisiveness of", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0215.jp2"}, "216": {"fulltext": "198 conjunctions. 125.\\nthe statement as, 6 and he will per-\\nhaps be angry to whom I go. It is but very seldom found with the in-\\ndicative present a few instances, however, have been produced from\\nAristophanes and Plutus.\\nWith the subjunctive it is never joined, unless accompanied with cer-\\ntain other words, such as Q.\\nc. except when used in the sense of as above, 334-1.\\nIt is used with the optative of all the tenses except the future, as in\\n172, Obs. 6, II. 2d, 3d, 4th, 5th, 6th.\\nWith the infinitive and participles it gives a contingent significa-\\ntion (commonly in the future), which may be resolved by changing the\\nverb or participle into the optative with av as,\\nthey think that they could retrieve themselves\\nI omit the rest, though I have much to say.\\n4. It is used in positive statements with different moods, to give an\\nexpression of hesitation and modesty to the assertion as,\\nas it seems (would seem) to me I (should) hardly\\nknow.\\n5. is frequently repeated, either on account of its standing at a\\ngreat distance from the verb, or, to give emphasis to the condition sug-\\ngested by it; having stationed myself\\nwould say how can you, how\\ncan you say, c.\\n6. It is sometimes used, to intimate that the verb in the preceding\\nclause is to be repeated; as,\\n(sc. if I thought ta be more wise in any thing,\\nWOULD BE IN THIS.\\n335.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 7\\n1. denoting inference or conclusion, always stands after some\\nword in its clause; its proper signification is of course, in the na-\\nture of things, and is commonly rendered therefore, consequently it is\\nused in the successive steps of a train of reasoning as, If there are\\naltars there are also gods;\\nBut there certainly are altars therefore there are gods too. It is used\\nin making a transition to what follows in the order of time or events, or\\nin the progress of thought. With or it expresses conjecture; as,\\nft if indeed (i. e. in the course of things) they can. Some-\\ntimes it serves for an emphatic asseveration as if founded on an infer-\\nence.\\n2. The adverb is different from this, and is always placed first\\nin a clause or sentence. It is merely an interrogative particle like the\\nLatin num or utrum as, Is, then,\\nwhat I wish to say evident When a negative answer is expected it\\nhas ^generally the particle \u00ce\u00bc\u00ce\u00ae_ annexed. The Latin nonne is expressed\\nby ov, and sometimes by alone.\\n336.\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\n1. Tao,for, always follows other words like the Latin enim, which\\nit resembles in signification, and for vhich at the beginning of a sen-\\ntence like the Latin etenim, is often used. Its use is to assign\\na reason for what is said. Very often, however, that of which it assigne", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0216.jp2"}, "217": {"fulltext": "125. conjunctions. 199\\nthe cause is merely implied or hinted at, and must be supplied, to show\\nthe force of It will frequently be found to refer to such expres-\\nsions understood; as, Vex. jVo, no wonder, I believe, I cannot, fec., as,\\nfor example, in the answer so common in Plato, tart oikto, Yes, or\\ncertainly, for so it is. Thus, Homer, Od. 10. 501, 3 Jl\\nOh Circe, (I cannot go thither,) kor who will\\nquid\u00e2\u0080\u00a2: me on this way From this interrogative use it came sometimes\\nto be used, merely to strengthen a question, like the Latin nam in quis-\\niia/n.\\n2. In such expressions as y.al the former particle in\\ndicates the omission of something of which assigns a cause thus,\\nxai strictly translated means, and (no wonder,) for and (it is na-\\ntural,) for and the like. For the rendering of see\\n333-2.\\n337.\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\n(enclitic) is a particle of limitation, and signifies at least, certainly,\\nhowever, indeed, and is used to single out an individual object from a\\nnumber as, ft if not the whole at least a part\\nI indeed, I at least. In most combinations it can be rendered into\\nEnglish only by giving greater emphasis to the word with which it is\\nconnected.\\n338.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 AE\\nThe particle but, is used both to distinguish and oppose, and\\nalways stands after one or more words in a clause. It often serves,\\nhowever, merely to mark transition from one proposition to another\\nand, in general, every proposition which has no other conjunction at\\nits commencement, takes this whether really opposed to the prece-\\nding or not. When so used, it may be rendered by and, for, or any\\nother word which the nature of the connection may require or it may\\noften remain untranslated. Its principal use, however, is in connection\\nwith which see.\\n339.\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\na particle of affirmation, signifies tndy, really, without doubt.\\nIt is used in affirmative answers as, it is certainly manifest.\\nIt is used ironically, especially after and after relative and compar-\\native words it is usually emphatical. With joined to it it\\nsignifies certainly, viz., and sometimes, perhaps. It differs from and\\nalso affirmative words, in this, that strongly asserts a thing as\\nalready established: goes on to press the assertion without relax-\\ning as to what has preceded while asserts with limitation, yielding\\nas to the past, or other things, but insisting upon this.\\n2. from as an adverb, signifies now joined with vvv, this\\nvery moment as, we must fight this very moment.\\nWith verbs in the preterite, it denotes just now. As a conjunction, it is\\nused, 1. In exhorting; as, come now, read; 2. In questions, it\\nindicates the earnestness of the speaker, and his desire of an immediate\\nanswer; as, what now are these? 3. In expressing\\nadmiration when joined with as, why now", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0217.jp2"}, "218": {"fulltext": "200 conjunctions. 125.\\nthese 4. In commencing a subject; as, now let\\nus consider it in this way 5. In marking the successive stages of thought\\nas they rise one above another. In each of these, it signifies now truly,\\nuntil at the last it signifies finally.\\n3\u00c2\u00b10.\u00e2\u0080\u0094\u00ce\u009a\u00ce\u009b\u00ce\u00aa and TE\\nand have the same significations in reference to each other\\nas the Latin et and que. Both connect single ideas, and the entire parts\\nof a sentence. With the older poets, is more common than in the\\nAttic prose writers, and it is commonly put not merely once between\\nthe connected parts, but joined to each of them; as,\\nthe father of both gods and men. When precedes in sep-\\narate clauses, the former signifies not only the latter, but also\\nand also, connect more closely than simple both and;\\nas well as; especially, i. e. (both in other respects) and\\nalso, particularly also.\\n341.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 MA and NH\\\\\\nMa and are particles of obtestation, and always govern the ac-\\ncusative of the object; is always affirmative; when alone, is\\nnegative, but is nevertheless attached both to affirmative and negative\\nobtestations; as, vac J and J\\n342.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ME! and AE\\nMiv and are two particles referring to each other they are used\\nto distinguish, and at the same time to connect, the different clauses of\\na sentence together. Thus used, is generally placed in the first\\nclause of a sentence, and in each of the succeeding ones. Hence,\\nwhenever we find in the first member of a sentence, the thought\\nnecessarily turns to an opposite member with Sometimes, however,\\nafter the expected does not actually follow i. e. when the op-\\nposition is so clear that is not necessary to point it out, or when\\nsome other word, such as c, supplies its place. In like\\nmanner is often used without being preceded by referring to\\nsomething conceived in the mind but not expressed or, without such\\nreference, it is used, simply to connect the parts of a sentence less\\nclosely than by or other conjunctions. In opposition they are\\ncommonly rendered indeed but. See\\nThe distributive use of and with the article, relative pronoun,\\nAc. will be noticed 133, 3, 134, 19.\\n343.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 0\u00c2\u00b1N and OTKOTN.\\n1. Ovv, wherefore, is used, 1. In drawing an ultimate conclusion\\nin the view of all that has been said before in this it differs from\\nwhich is used in successive steps in the process of reasoning. 2. It com-\\nmences a chapter or paragraph, with some reference to what has pre-\\nceded. 3. It continues or resumes a subject, after a digression. 4. It\\nintroduces a transition to some new subject; and lastly,,it has an affirm-\\native force, particularly in replies; as, ovv it is certainly\\nso hence the compounds,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0218.jp2"}, "219": {"fulltext": "125. conjunctions. 201\\n2. Ov/.oTv and for ovv. The former is properly a negative\\ninference; as, it is not therefore though sometimes it loses its nega-\\ntive character, and denotes therefore; is used interrogatively,\\nis it not therefore\\n344.\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nTltq (enclitic) is nearly allied to yi, and is used to express the idea\\nwith more emphasis than it would have without it. This is indicated\\nin English merely by a greater emphasis of the word, or by the words\\nvery, eeer, and the like. Joined with a participle, it is commonly ren-\\ndered although, how much so ever; with a relative, it adds the force of\\nthe Latin cunque, or the English ever thus, qzicecunque, whatever,\\nquicunque, whoever, (fee as, whatever he does say\\nton\u00e2\u0080\u00a2, excellent though thou art fatQ ii/iv,just as he was.\\n345.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 T.\\n1. is a particle interrogative, of place, and signifies 1. where?\\n2. whither? As an enclitic it signifies motion to a place; as,\\nI am hastening to some place, somewhither, and also indicates place\\nindefinitely, anywhere; hence it is joined with adverbs of place as,\\nno somewhere there-abouts.\\n2. From the indefiniteness of its signification arises its conjectural\\nuse, to express a thing with a degree of uncertainty and caution, ex-\\npressed in English by probably, perhaps, if I mistake not, (fee, and hence\\nis used in eliciting and asking consent as, y.ai\\n(fee You yourself, as xoell as I, know, if I mistake not, or doubtless, that,\\netc., where an affirmative reply is evidently expected. Hence also its\\nuse as a diminutive, to qualify what might otherwise seem too positive\\nor peremptory. Thus used it may be rendered by pretty nearly, in my\\nopinion, perhaps, (fee. This particle, though often used, is never redun-\\ndant; for example, is, no indeed, as I think not truly, in my\\nopinion.\\n346.\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\n1. This particle with the circumflex is interrogative and signifies\\nhow as, ovx how can he but be worthy of this\\nJoined with they constitute an emphatic negative,\\nfor how shall I do it i. e. will not do it at all. So also y.al\\nI cannot be silent literally, and how am I to be silent?\\n2. As an enclitic signifies some how, in some degree, (fee. as,\\nin some other way somehow thus (fee.\\n347.\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nThis particle is extensively employed, and with a great variety of\\nusage; as, 1. It is used for to denote a purpose as, oh;\\nin order that we may shew 2. for with the meaning of that; as,\\n(fee, saying that he, (fee 3. More commonly it signi\\nfies as, expressing similitude; as, as a slave; He taught\\nthem as one having authority. 4. With the acute\\naccent, and not before an enclitic, nor after a word on which it depends,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0219.jp2"}, "220": {"fulltext": "202 conjunctions. 125.\\nit has the sense of thus as, having spoken thus. 5. In\\nexclamations it has the sense of how as, how happy\\nwe deem you hence its use with the optative in the sense of the Latin\\nulinam as, Ey.tmq Would that Hector had slain\\nme literally, how Hector ought to have slain me 6. Before superlative\\nadjectives and adverbs, like it strengthens the meaning as,\\nas quickly as possible. Allied to this, is its power as a strength-\\nening particle, with the positive degree, in such expressions as,\\ntruly, really. It is used for the purpose of limiting proposi-\\ntions with the infinitive as, so to speak as far\\nas one may conjecture and also in the same sense it is used before\\nwhole clauses and propositions as, for the most part\\nin proportion to the size of the city^ 8.\\nAs a particle of time, it signifies when, sometimes while as,\\nbut when he came. 9. With numerals it signifies about as,\\nabout three or four stadia. 10. With particles in the\\ngenitive absolute, and also in the dative or accusative, it is rendered as,\\nsince, because, inasmuch as, as if; and the participle is then rendered by\\nthe indicative as, because this\\nplace was the most secure. 11. It is often put by the Attics for the pre-\\nposition or as, towards me to\\nthe king.\\nUgf* For the negative particles ov and with their combinations\\nand compounds, see 166.\\n348. Obs. Though it is, in many cases, difficult to give a distinct\\ntranslation of some of the Greek particles, or even always to feel their\\nforce, yet they ought never to be regarded as mere expletives. In all\\nlanguages there are particles which are often employed chiefly for the\\nsake of completeness, or in order to produce a well-sounding fulness,\\nyet never without their own peculiar sense and though it is often dif-\\nficult to define what that sense is, yet every one feels that the expres-\\nsion is incomplete without them. So it is also in the Greek language.\\nThe full and original meaning of many of those particles has become\\npartially lost, and they now give to the discourse only a slight colour-\\ning which we cannot properly feel except after long acquaintance and\\npractice. For a more full elucidation of the force and use of these par-\\nticles, we refer the reader to the elaborate work of Hoogeveen on the\\nGreek Particles.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0220.jp2"}, "221": {"fulltext": "126. syntax. 203\\nPAET III.\\n\u00c2\u00a7126. SYNTAX.\\n349. Syotax is that part of grammar which\\ntreats of the proper arrangement and connection\\nof words in a sentence.\\n350. A Sentence is such an assemblage of words as makes\\ncomplete sense as, Man is mortal.\\n351. A Phrase is two or more words rightly put together,\\nbut not making complete sense as, In truth, in a word.\\n352. Sentences are of two kinds, Simple and Compound.\\n353. A Simple sentence contains only a single affirmation\\nas, Life is short.\\n354. A Compound sentence contains two or more simple\\nsentences connected together as, Life, which is short, should\\nbe well employed.\\n355. Every simple sentence consists of two parts, the subject\\nand the predicate.\\n356. The subject is that of which something is affirmed. It\\nis either in the nominative case before a finite verb, or in the\\nnominative or accusative before the infinitive.\\n357. The predicate is that which is affirmed of the subject.\\nIt consists of two parts, the attribute and copula. A verb which\\nincludes both, is called an attributive verb as, John reads. A\\nverb which only connects the attribute expressed by another word,\\nwith the subject, is called a copulative verb as, John is reading.\\n358. Both subject and predicate may be attended by other\\nwords called adjuncts, which serve to restrict or modhy their\\nmeaning as, Too eager a pursuit of wealth often ends in pov-\\nerty and misery\\n359. When a compound sentence is so framed that the mean\\ning is suspended till the whole is finished, it is called a period.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0221.jp2"}, "222": {"fulltext": "20-1 \u00c2\u00b1\u00c2\u00bbarts of syntax. 127, 128.\\n360.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7127. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SYNTAX.\\n1. In every sentence there must be a verb and a nominative,\\nor subject expressed or understood.\\n2. Every article, adjective, adjective pronoun, or participle,\\nmust have a substantive expressed or understood with which it\\nagrees.\\n3. Every relative must have an antecedent, or word to which\\nit refers, and with which it agrees.\\n4. Every subject nominative has its own verb expressed or\\nunderstood.\\n5. Every verb (except in the infinitive and participles) has its\\nown subject or nominative expressed or understood.\\n6. Every oblique case is governed by some word expressed\\nior understood in the sentence of which it forms a part or it is\\nused, without government, to express certain circumstances as\\nfollows\\n1) The genitive is governed by a noun, a verb, a, preposition,\\noi an adverb or it is placed as the case absolute with the parti-\\nciple.\\n2) The dative is governed by adjectives, verbs, and preposi-\\ntions. It also expresses the cause, manner, or instrument.\\n3) The accusative is governed by a transitive active verb or\\npreposition.\\n4) The vocative either stands alone, or is governed by an\\ninterjection.\\n5) The infinitive mood is governed by a verb, an adjective, or\\nadverbial particle.\\n128.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 PARTS OF SYNTAX.\\n361. The parts of Syntax are commonly reck-\\noned two, Concoed and Government.\\n362. Concord is the agreement of one word\\nwith another in gender, number, case, or person.\\n363. Government is that power which one\\nword has in determining the mood, tense, or case\\nof another word.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0222.jp2"}, "223": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7129. SUBSTANTIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVE. 205\\nI. CONCOKD.\\n364. Concord is fourfold, viz.\\n1. Of a substantive with a substantive.\\n2. Of an adjective with a substantive.\\n3. Of a relative with its antecedent.\\n4. Of a verb with its nominative, or subject.\\n\u00c2\u00a7129. A SUBSTANTIVE WITH A SUBSTANTIVE.\\n365. Rule I. Substantives denoting the same\\nperson or thing agree in case as,\\nPaid, an apostle.\\n6 Socrates, the philosopher.\\nTo God, the judge.\\n366 Substantives thus used are said to be in apposition. The\\nsecond substantive is added to express some attribute, description, or\\nappellative belonging to the first, and must always be in the same\\nmember of the sentence i. e. they must be both in the subject, or\\nboth in the predicate. A substantive predicated of another, though\\ndenoting the same thing, is not in apposition with it. See 436.\\n367. Obs. 1. One of the substantives is sometimes under-\\nstood as, 6 (sup. Astyages, the son\\nof Cyaxares.\\n368. Obs. 2. The possessive pronoun in any case being equi-\\nvalent in signification to the genitive of the substantive pronoun\\nfrom which it is derived, requires a substantive in apposition\\nwith it to be put in the genitive as,\\nHe was the brother-in-law of me, a shameless woman.\\nSee 399-17.\\n369. Obs. 3. On the same principle, possessive adjectives\\nformed from proper names, being equivalent to the genitive of\\ntheir primitives, have a noun in apposition in the genitive as,\\nNear the ship\\nof Nestor a king bom at Pylos Xd\\nBeing a citizen of Athens, a very large city. See\\n399-18. 10", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0223.jp2"}, "224": {"fulltext": "206 CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. 130, 131.\\n370. Obs. 4. Sometimes the latter of two substantives sig-\\nnifying the same thing, is put in the genitive as,\\n(for The city of Athens.\\n130. AN ADJECTIVE WITH A SUBSTANTIVE.\\n371. Rule II. An adjective agrees with its\\nsubstantive in gender, number, and case as,\\na good man.\\na beautiful woman.\\na good thing.\\n372 This Eule applies to the article, adjective, adjective pro-\\nnouns, and participles.\\n373. Obs. 1. Other words are sometimes used as adjectives,\\nand consequently fall under this rule viz.\\n1st. A substantive which limits the signification of a more\\ngeneral term as, the Greek language.\\n2d. Adverbs placed between the article and its substantive\\nas, 6 the intervening space.\\n374. Obs. 2. The place of the adjective is sometimes sup-\\nplied by a substantive with a preposition as,\\n(for exalted pleasure sometimes, by a substantive gov-\\nerning the other in the genitive as, depth of earth,\\ni. e. deep earth abundance of grace,\\ni. e. abundant grace. For the adverbial adjective, see 662.\\n131. OBSERVATIONS ON THE CONCORD OF THE\\nADJECTIVE.\\n375. Obs. 1. Two or more substantives singular, unless taken\\nseparately, have an adjective plural. If all the substantives be\\nof the same gender, the adjective will be of that gender. If of\\ndifferent genders, the adjective takes the masculine rather than\\nthe feminine, and the feminine rather than the neuter. But if\\nthe substantives signify things without life, the adjective is com-\\nmonly put in the neuter gender. Not unfrequently, however, the\\nadjective agrees with one of the substantives and is understood", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0224.jp2"}, "225": {"fulltext": "131. CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. 207\\nto the rest; as, atu\\ncontention to thee is always delightful, and wars and battles.\\n376. Obs. 2. When the substantive to which the adjective\\nbelongs may be easily supplied, it is frequently omitted, and the\\nadjective, assuming\u00e2\u0080\u00a2 its gender, number, and case, is used as a\\nsubstantive; as, the Athenian oi the right-\\neous.\\n377. Obs. 3. Adjectives in are used in the neuter gen-\\nder with the article, and without a substantive in two different\\nsenses. 1. In the singular they express generally a whole as,\\nthe cavalry the citizens. 2. In the\\nplural they signify any circumstance which can be determined\\nby the context; as, the Trojan war\\nthe Grecian history.\\n378. Obs. 4. The adjective, especially when used as a predi-\\ncate, without a substantive, is often put in the neuter gender,\\nc. being understood; as,\\n(scil. their country is (a thing) very\\ndear to men to do is hard.\\n379. Obs. 5. Two adjectives are frequently joined together,\\none of which, by expressing negatively the sense of the other,\\nrenders it more emphatic as, literally,\\nknown and not unknown (i. e. well known), to me.\\n380. Obs. 6. Adjectives are very often put in the neuter\\nsingular or plural, with or without an article, for adverbs as,\\nin the first place at first\\nchiefly secretly, c.\\n381. Obs. 7. In any gender or number, adjectives are some-\\ntimes used in the sense of adverbs, to express a circumstance of\\ntime, place, order, manner; as, they fell\\nnear each other; he came\\non the second third day, 662. So in Latin, qui creatur an-\\nnuus. Cses.\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n382. Exc. 1. An adjective is often put in a different gender\\nor number from the substantive with which it is connected, tacitly\\nreferring to its meaning rather than to its form, or to some other\\nword synonymous with it, or implied in it as,\\na most beautiful girl.\\nbrave soul.\\na band of thieves bringing fire.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0225.jp2"}, "226": {"fulltext": "208 CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. 131.\\n383. Exc. 2. A collective noun in th3 singular may nave an\\nadjective in the plural, and in the gender of the individuals which\\nform the collection; as,\\nthe council kept peaceable not being ignorant.\\nSo in Latin, maxima pars in flumen acti sunt. Lat. Gr. 279.\\n384. Exc. 3. In the dual, number, the Attic writers some-\\ntimes join a masculine adjective with a feminine noun; as,\\nthese two days.\\n385. Exc. 4. An adjective masculine, in the superlative de-\\ngree, is sometimes joined to a feminine noun, to increase the force\\nof the superlative as, ai very black pu-\\npils. Also, a masculine adjective is joined with a feminine noun,\\nwhen the plural is used for the singular, and when a chorus of\\nwomen speak of themselves thus, Medea says of herself,\\nthough in-\\njured I will be silent, yielding to superior powers.\\n386. Exc. 5. An adjective in the masculine gender may be\\njoined with a noun denoting a female, if the attention is drawn\\nto the idea of a person without regard to the sex.\\n387. Exc. 6. A substantive dual may have an adjective plu-\\nral and vice versa, a substantive plural, when two is denoted,\\nmay have an adjective dual as, let\\nus embrace; two successive\\nchasms lit. two chasms Adjoining each other.\\n388. Exc. 7. The adjectives in the singular,\\nare put with nouns in the plural, to intimate that the objects ex-\\npressed by them are spoken of individually and distributively as,\\nthey each received ten.\\nthey asked some one thing\\nand some another.\\nSo in Latin, Quisque pro se queruntur. Liv. Lat. Gr. 281.\\n389. Exc. 8. Plural adjectives sometimes agree with their\\nsubstantives in gender and number, and govern them in the gen-\\nitive case as,\\nthe ancient poets.\\nSo also among the Attic writers in the singular as,\\nspending much time.\\n390. Exc. 9. Instead of agreeing with its substantive, the\\nadjective is sometimes put in the neuter gender, and the substan-\\ntive following it in the genitive (461) as,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0226.jp2"}, "227": {"fulltext": "132. COMPARATIVES AXD SUPERLATIVES. 209\\n(for to such a pitch of boldness. The abstract\\nnoun is sometimes used instead of the adjective as,\\ndepth of earth, instead oi deep earth. 374.\\n391. Exc. 10. Proper names in the singular, are sometimes\\naccompanied by the adjectives and others in the\\nneuter plural, as predicates or in apposition as,\\na the chief of the JEginetoz\\nZoptrus was indeed\\nevery thing to the Babylonians.\\n392. Exc. 11. Demonstrative pronouns in the neuter singu-\\nlar, may refer to nouns of any gender which do not express a\\nperson and in the neuter plural, to persons as well as things,\\nand to the singular as well as to the plural as,\\nconcerning\\nmanly fortitude, for how much would you consent to be de-\\nprived of it who offend against\\nthese, scil. wives and children.\\nSo also with the adjectives (fee; as,\\nhe will bring not less\\nthan twenty thousand horse lit. he will bring horsemen not\\nfewer than twenty thousand.\\n393.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 132. COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.\\n1. The comparative is used when two objects or classes of\\nobjects are compared the superlative, when more than two are\\ncompared.\\n2. The positive is sometimes used in a comparative sense, and\\nis followed by the infinitive as, too few to\\nfight.\\n3. When one quality is compared with another in the same\\nsubject, the adjectives expressing these qualities are both put in\\nthe comparative degree connected by as,\\nmore rich than wise. So in Latin, decentior quam\\nsublimior fuit. Tacit. Lat. Gr. 474.\\n4. The comparative is sometimes made by joining\\nwith the positive and, for the sake of emphasis, sometimes with\\nthe comparative as, more happy.\\n5. The superlative is often used to express a very high degree\\nof a quality in an object, but without comparing it with any", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0227.jp2"}, "228": {"fulltext": "210 ADJECTIVE PEONOUNS. 133.\\nother as, a very ambitious man\\na very foolish thing. 168.\\n6. The superlative is often strengthened in signification by\\nadding certain adverbial words and particles; such as,\\ny, c. as,\\nmuch the weakest eminently\\nthe best as quickly as possible\\nvov, as long time as possible. Also by the numeral as,\\na man of all others the best.\\nFor the construction of the comparative and superlative de-\\ngrees, as it respects government, see 472 and 482.\\n\u00c2\u00a7133. ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.\\n394. Special Kule. Adjective pronouns agree\\nwith their substantives in gender, number, and\\ncase.\\n395. The Definite,\\nFor the import and use of the Definite pronoun see\\n62. In construction it is often similar to the demonstratives,\\n396-5.\\n1. When used as a personal pronoun, takes the gender\\nand number of the noun for which it stands, and the case which\\nthe noun would have in its place. Sometimes, however, like the\\nadjective (382), it takes the gender and number of a synony-\\nmous substantive, or of one that expresses the meaning of that for\\nwhich it stands; as,\\nteach all nations baptizing them, where is\\nput for which expresses the meaning of\\nNote. This observation applies to all adjective pronouns used with-\\nout, and instead of, the substantives, to which they refer.\\n3 9 6 Demonstratives.\\n2. The Demonstratives are used without a substantive, only\\nwhen they refer to a noun, or pronoun, or substantive clause in\\nthe proposition going before, or in that coming immediately after.\\n3. When two persons or things are spoken of, this, re-\\nfers to the latter; that, to the former. In the same", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0228.jp2"}, "229": {"fulltext": "g 133. ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 211\\nmanner are sometimes used 6 referring to the for-\\nmer, and Se, referring to the latter sometimes vice verm.\\n4. The demonstratives and are generally distin-\\nguished thus; refers to what immediately precedes, to\\nwhat immediately follows as, having heard\\nthese things he announced as follows.\\n5. The demonstrative words are frequently used in a kind of\\napposition with a noun, or pronoun, or part of a sentence in the\\nsame proposition. This is done, 1. for the sake of emphasis, or,\\nat the beginning of a sentence, to call the attention more particu-\\nlarly to what is to be said; as,\\nwhat shall I say as to these things question\\nand interrogation Long, what\\nis virtue In such cases the pronoun is commonly in the neu-\\nter gender. 2. If the parts of a sentence immediately related,\\nare separated by intervening clauses, the pronoun, being intro-\\nduced in the last part, in apposition with the distant word in the\\nfirst, brings them as it were together; as,\\nbut the gods who are eternal, and whose power and\\ninspection extend over all things, and who preserve the harmony\\nand order of the universe free from decay or defect, the great-\\nness and beauty of which is inexplicable fearing these, do\\nnothing wicked.\\n6. When that with which the demonstrative stands in appo-\\nsition is a sentence, or part of a sentence, it is put in the neuter\\ngender, and is often connected with it by or as, 3\\nbut he knows this well, that all these places are openly be-\\nfore them.\\nThe sentence is sometimes so arranged that the clause with\\nstands first as, but we knew\\nthis, that he had wings. This construction, so common in Greek,\\nis seldom if ever used in Latin.\\n7. with before it, is used in the latter clause of a\\nsentence, in an adverbial or conjunctive sense, to call the atten-\\ntion more particularly to the circumstance which it introduces,\\nand may be rendered and that and truly indeed, al-\\nthouqh fcc., as the sense may require as, yao\\nfor these alone of the lonians do not celebrate the Apa-\\ntouria, and that under pretext of a certain murder lit. and\\nthese {do so) under pretext, c.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0229.jp2"}, "230": {"fulltext": "212 ADJECTIVE PKONOUNS. \u00c2\u00a7133.\\nTig if any one mentions the name of a\\nwoman, although (i. e. and that woman being) dead, he shud-\\nders.\\nBut when the pronoun is less definite, not referring to any\\nparticular substantive in the preceding clause, but to something\\nexpressed in it, it is put in the neuter plural, and may generally\\nbe rendered especially although c. as,\\nbut you do\\nnot seem to me to give your attention to these things, although\\nbeing wise. Expressions of this kind are doubtless elliptical,\\nor some such word being understood, and may be ren-\\ndered and these things you do Indeed, it is sometimes ex-\\npressed thus, in Dem. pro Phor., after reproaching Apollodorus\\nwith his dissolute conduct, he adds,\\nand these things you do, having a wife which, with-\\nout might be rendered though having a wife.\\nYet sometimes these words seem to have no dependence on\\nany part of the sentence, but are thrown in to call the attention\\nto a special circumstance.\\n8. The demonstrative pronoun is often joined with adverbs of\\ntime and place, to define these circumstances with greater empha-\\nsis or precision as, just now at that\\nvery time.\\n9. The demonstrative pronouns are sometimes used instead of\\nthe personal pronouns and and, in speaking, when thus\\nused, were probably accompanied with action, so as clearly to\\npoint out the person intended. When used instead of the 2d\\nperson, they most commonly express contempt. The expression\\nis equivalent to the Latin en adsum, Lo here am I.\\n397. The Indefinite\\n10. The indefinite 188, added to a substantive, commonly\\nanswers to the English words a, an, ascertain one, any one, c.\\nas, a man, any man, some man. Sometimes with a\\nnoun it is used collectively as,\\nmany a fish bounding through the wave. Sometimes\\ndistributively as, and let every\\none build his own house.\\n11. With adjectives of quality, quantity, and magnitude, es-\\npecially when they stand without a substantive expressed, or in\\nthe predicate, it serves to temper the expression by asserting the\\nexistence of the quality in a less positive and unlimited manner,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0230.jp2"}, "231": {"fulltext": "133. ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 213\\nsuch may be expressed by the English words somewhat, in\\ndegree, rather; as, somewhat difficult to be\\npassed rather hard to learn. With numerals\\nit means nearly, about, Are. as, dt y.u about ten. So also\\nwith adverbs as, nearly pretty nearly\\nmuch considerably nothing\\nscarcely any thing.\\n12. Without an additional adjective, has the sense of emi-\\nnent, distinguished as, he boasts himself to\\nbe SOME GREAT ONE.\\n13. In the neuter gender, it is also sometimes nearly redun-\\ndant, being introduced apparently for the sake of sound. In such\\ncases it is to be considered in the accusative governed by\\nand seems to strengthen the expression as,\\nnot being at all a prophet\\na work of art evidently great and divine.\\n398. The Interrogative rig.\\n14. The interrogative is used in asking a direct ques-\\ntion as, who did it? Though sometimes used in\\nthe mdirect interrogation, is more common as,\\n(or more frequently I wonder who did it.\\nSometimes it is accompanied by the article who\\nwhat. is always used interrogatively when a person to\\nwhom an interrogation is put, repeats it before answering it as,\\nwho are you who\\nam I? Me ton.\\n15. In the predicate, with following it, is sometimes ac-\\ncompanied by the subject of in the plural as,\\nI wonder what these things are.\\n16. The interrogative is often used independently of other\\nwords in the sentence, being governed by or some such\\nword understood, and may be rendered in what as to what\\nc. as, in what sort of wisdom\\nare they expert Sometimes it is used for or\\nwhat why f on what account for what purpose\\nhow So, but what\\n399 Possessive Pronouns.\\n17. The possessive pronoun is in signification equivalent to\\nthe genitive of the pronoun from which it is derived, and while,\\nlike the adjective, it agrees with its substantive in gender, num-\\n10*", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0231.jp2"}, "232": {"fulltext": "214 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. \u00c2\u00a7134.\\nber, and case, yet other words at the sam i time often regard it as\\nthe genitive of the personal pronoun. Hence the following modes\\nof expression, equivalent to\\nc, the gift of thee alone.\\nwhere agrees with in the accusative,\\nand yet, as if it were the genitive of the substantive pronoun, it\\nis coupled with in the genitive, and followed by\\nSo also our own bed\\nyour own property (scil. their own\\ncountry.\\nThe same construction is common in Latin as, mea ipsius\\nculpa. Cum mea nemo scripta legat, vulgo recitare timentis.\\nBeneficio meo etpopuli Romania Lat. Gr. 256 and 283.\\n18. The same observation extends to possessive adjectives\\nas, fit\\nIf 1 must also say something concerning the vir-\\ntue of those women, who are from this time to live in widow-\\nhood where is equivalent to the genitive\\nto which refers.\\n19. The possessive pronouns are employed only when an em-\\nphasis is required in all other cases the personal pronouns are\\nused in their stead as, our father, literally, the\\nfather of us. But means our own father.\\n20. The possessive pronoun is sometimes used objectively;\\nas, not thy regret but regret for thee\\nnot the lessons which I give but the lessons\\nwhich thou givest me This use of the possessive corresponds to\\nthe passive sense of the genitive, 452.\\n21. The possessive pronoun is sometimes put in the neuter\\ngender with the article, for the personal as, for\\nfor for Also without the article\\nafter a preposition as, (scil. for in\\nour house.\\n134. CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE.\\n400. Special Rule. The article agrees with its\\nsubstantive in gender, number, and case.\\n401. Exc. 1. In gender. The masculine article is often put\\nwith a feminine noun in the dual number (384) as, yvraotd,\\nthe two women.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0232.jp2"}, "233": {"fulltext": "g 134 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 215\\n402. Exc. 2. In number. The article may be put in the\\nplural when it refers to two or more nouns in the singular (3*75)\\nas, ai Minerva and Juno.\\n403. OBSERVATIONS.\\n1. Nouns used indefinitely are commonly without the article.\\nTn general, the article is prefixed to all nouns not used indefinitely.\\nNouns are made definite by a limiting word, phrase, or clause\\nby previous mention, by general notoriety or distinction, by pecu-\\nliarity of state or relation, or by emphasis or contrast.\\n2. The article is prefixed to nouns when they designate a\\nclass or species as, b man is mortal.\\n3. It is prefixed to abstract nouns when personified, or with\\na reference to something expressed or understood as, H\\nsine, Vice interrupting said\\nthe truth concerning these things.\\n4. When one noun is predicated of another, the subject of the\\nproposition is generally found with the article, and the predicate\\nwithout it; as, the maiden became a\\nwine-skin.\\n5. The article is prefixed to nouns to mark emphasis or dis-\\ntinction; as, 6\\nwar is not without dangers, but peace is free from danger\\n(here the opposition between and renders both\\nwords emphatic, which is marked by the article prefixed\\nthe Poet, scil. Homer,\\n6. Proper names, when first mentioned, are without the arti-\\ncle on renewed mention, they generally have it. But the arti-\\ncle is never prefixed to a proper name followed by an appellative\\nwith the article as, Cyrus the king.\\n7. The article is generally placed before appellatives, and all\\nwords and phrases which are placed after a substantive for the\\npurpose of definition or description such as a substantive in ap-\\nposition, an adjective, a participle, an adverb, a preposition with\\nits case as, Socrates, the philosopher\\noi the ancient laws, c.\\n8. Before a participle, the article is to be translated as the re-\\nlative, and the participle as the indicative mood of its own tense\\nas, there are (those) who say. But,\\n9. A participle between the article and its noun is to be re-\\ngarded as an adjective, and rendered accordingly as, oi\\nthe existing laws. So also, other words and phrases\\nbetween the article and its noun, like an adjective, qualify the", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0233.jp2"}, "234": {"fulltext": "216 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 134.\\nnoun, and frequently have a participle understood as,\\nsoil, the battle against the Gauls.\\n10. An adverb with the article prefixed is used sometimes as\\na noun, -sometimes as an adjective as, those near, i. e.\\nthe neighbours the upper city, 378.\\n11. Adjectives, participles, adverbs, adverbial particles and\\nphrases, used in the sense of nouns, have the article prefixed as,\\nol mortals oi flatterers (scil.\\nthe morrow the substance the quality\\nthe quantity the manner in which, c.\\n12. The article without a substantive, before with\\ntheir case, denotes something peculiar to, or distinguishing the\\nperson, place, or thing expressed by the noun as, oi\\nthose devoted to the chase, i. e. hunters\\nthe affair at Lampsacus what belongs to war\\nsometimes it is a mere circumlocution for the noun itself; as,\\nfor\\n13. Ol and with a proper name, have the fol-\\nlowing peculiarities of meaning; viz. 1. the person himself as,\\nol Priam and Panthous 2. the\\nfollowers of the person named as, ol the com-\\npanions of Archidamus 3. the person named, and his compan-\\nions and followers as, Pisistratus and\\nhis troops.\\n14. The neuter article in any case prefixed to the infinitive\\nmood 173, I.), gives it the sense and construction of the Latin\\ngerund, or a verbal noun as, inquir-\\ning is the business of philosophy the speaking\\nwell.\\n15. In the neuter gender, and in any case which the con-\\nstruction requires, the article is placed, 1. Before entire propo-\\nsitions or quotations in a sentence construed as nouns as,\\nMoreover there is in these a third difference, viz. the manner\\nin which one should imitate each of these objects\\n1 but according to\\nthese views, the sentiment labour is no dishonour would be\\ncorrect. 2. Before single words quoted or designated in a sen-\\ntence; as, when 1 say\\nyou, I mean the state the word But in nouns,\\nthe article is commonly in the gender of the noun as,\\nthe name Hades.\\n16. The article is often prefixed to possessive, demonstrative,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0234.jp2"}, "235": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7134.\\nCONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE.\\n217\\nothers,\\n1\\nother,\\nmany,\\nmore,\\nhimself,\\nall,\\nfew,\\nthe others, the rest.\\nthe rest of Greece.\\nthe multitude.\\nthe most.\\nthe same.\\n(after numerals) in all.\\nthe few, the Oligarchs.\\ndistributive, and other pronouns, for the sake of greater emphasis\\nor more precise definition thus, is merely a son of\\nmine but 6 is my son. The following change of sig-\\nnification effected by the article may be noticed\\n6\\n17. When the article is used with or the pro-\\nnoun must stand before the article, or after the substantive as,\\n6 or 6 this sa?ne man.\\n18. The article is frequently used alone, having its substantive\\nunderstood. This is the case when the substantive to which the\\narticle refers, being apparent from the connection or sense of the\\npassage, can be easily supplied. The neuter article is often thus\\nused with the genitive of another noun, fec,\\nbeing understood 1. In the singular, to intimate what a person\\nhas done, is wont to do, or has befallen him as,\\nand I seem to be in the\\nsame situation with the horse of Ibycus. 2. In the plural, to\\ndenote every thing that concerns, arises from, or belongs to, that\\nwhich the substantive expresses as, ft the as-\\nsistance of friends is nothing; we\\nmust bear the visitation of the gods. In the singular or plural,\\nit is often merely a periphrasis for the substantive as, or\\nfor and an adjective, c. put with such a\\nperiphrasis takes the gender and number of the substantive, and\\nthe case of the article; as, the\\nmessengers considering.\\n19. The article combined with and has in some de-\\ngree the force of a pronoun, and is used in a distributive sense,\\nthe article with standing in the first member of the sentence,\\nand with in the parts that follow; as,\\nthis one, he honoured, that one not\\n5 some played at dice, some drank,\\nsome exercised themselves. When governed by a preposition,\\nand are placed immediately after the preposition thus,\\n20. In the Ionic and some other writers, especially Homer", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0235.jp2"}, "236": {"fulltext": "218 RELATIVE PKONOUN. 185.\\nand Herodotus, the article b, is very frequently used as a\\nrelative, and sometimes as a personal pronoun as,\\nI flee from Achilles whom am\\nashamed to see it (tlie child) was buried.\\n1 86-2.\\n\u00c2\u00a7135. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN.\\n404. Rule III. The relative agrees with its\\nantecedent in gender, number, and person as,\\niAe woman whom w saw.\\nthe man who came.\\nthe things which he had.\\n405. 1. The antecedent is the substantive, or something\\nequivalent to a substantive (421), in a preceding clause to which\\nthe relative refers. Sometimes, however, as in Latin, the relative\\nand its clause is placed before the antecedent and its clause.\\n406. 2. Strictly speaking, the relative does not agree with\\nthe antecedent, but with the same word expressed or understood\\nafter the relative, and with which, like the adjective, it agrees in\\ngender, number, and case, as well as person thus, 6 ov\\nthe horse which [horse) he had. Hence, in connect-\\ning the antecedent and relative clauses, the following variety of\\nusage occurs viz.,\\n1st. The word to which the relative refers is commonly ex-\\npressed in the antecedent clause, and not with the rela-\\ntive as, 6 this is the man\\nwhom you saw.\\n2d. It is often not expressed in the antecedent clause, and\\nexpressed with the relative as,\\n3d. Sometimes, when greater precision is required, it is ex-\\npressed in both as, 6\\n4th. When the reference is of a general nature, and there is\\nno danger of obscurity, the word to which the relative\\nrefers is understood in both clauses as, ov\\nov whom he would he slew, whom he ivould\\nhe saved alive. All this variety is common in Latin as\\nwell as in Greek. (Lai Gr. 286.)", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0236.jp2"}, "237": {"fulltext": "135. RELATIVE PRONOUN. 219\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2107. 3. The antecedent is sometimes implied in a preceding\\nAvoid as, to fec, your house who\\nAc, where ol refers to the personal pronoun implied in\\n9\u00ce\u0092\u00cf\u0081\u00ce\u00b1 (399-17).\\n4 OS. 4. When the relative comes after two words of differ-\\nent persons, it agrees with the first or second person rather than\\nthe third as,\\n409. When the relative is placed between two substan-\\ntives of different genders, it sometimes agrees in gender with the\\nlatter; as, the constellation\\nwhich they call the Goat.\\n410. 6. Exc. The relative sometimes takes the\\ngender and number, not of the antecedent noun,\\nbut of some one synonymous with it, or implied\\nin it as,\\n1st. J their children\\nhaving died, whom Adrastus led. In this sentence, ovg\\nrefers to as synonymous with\\n2d. of every\\nman, who shall come against you where og in the sin-\\ngular, referring to a plural antecedent, shows that the\\nmen are spoken of in the relative clause individually.\\n3d. for all\\nGreece, whose fathers she slew where refers to the\\nmeaning of in this sentence i. e. the men of\\nGreece.\\n4 th.\\nmax increasing in wealth, whom even the multitude ap-\\nplaud. Here, though the antecedent is singular,\\nthe relative is plural, because it refers not to an indi-\\nvidual man, but to the class or kind of men spoken of.\\n411. 7. Instead of og the compound pronoun is used\\nas a relative after or any word in the singular ex-\\npressing an indefinite number, and after the same words in\\nthe plural as, every one who all vjho\\nand if the indefinite is not expressed in the antecedent clause,\\nthe use of the relative shows that it is understood, and is to be\\nexpressed in the translation as, all the cities\\nwhich. Sometimes it is used simply for og.\\n412. 8. If no nominative come between the relative and\\nthe verb, the relative will be the nominative to the verb.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0237.jp2"}, "238": {"fulltext": "220 RELATIVE PRONOUN 185.\\nIf a nominative come between the relative and the verb, the\\nrelative will be of that case which the verb or noun following,\\nor the preposition going before, usually governs. But,\\nAttraction of the Relative.\\n413. 9. JExc. I. The relative is often attracted\\ninto the case of its antecedent as,\\nExamples. 1. (for ag) with the\\nships which he had. 2. j)g (for\\nlet him share the pleasure which I gave you. 3.\\n(for 406-4th),\\nbeing mindful of what he did. 4.\\nI enjoy what goods I have (406-2d).\\nNote 1. The rule of attraction seems to have its foundation alto-\\ngether in euphony and hence, generally, attractions will be found only\\nwhere they improve the euphony of a sentence.\\nNote 2. This construction is sometimes, though very seldom, imi-\\ntated in Latin as, Circiter sexcentas ejus generis cujus supra demonstra-\\nvimus, naves invenit. CLes. See Lat. Gr. 298.\\n414. 10. JExc. II. The antecedent is sometimes\\nattracted into the case of the relative as,\\nI know not\\nany other person whose renowned armour I could put on. Here\\nis attracted by the relative (for 142, used for ov,\\n186-2), from the accusative into the genitive. Lat. Gr. 299.\\nOn this principle are to be construed such sentences as the\\nfollowing: for\\nthere was no danger which they did not\\nundergo;\\nfor c. there was\\nno one who, they said, did not return weeping\\nfor who are\\nthese strangers whom I see\\n415.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 11. The relative plural, and in all its cases with\\nbefore it, is used for, or rather is the original form of, the adjec-\\ntive -a, some being sometimes written as,\\n(i.e. and some hit\\nbreastplates; (i.e. from\\nsome cities.\\nIn this construction is found with both singular\\nand plural as, some one some.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0238.jp2"}, "239": {"fulltext": "13b\\\\ EELATED ADJECTIVE WORDS. 221\\n416. 12. In certain cases, it is used adverbially, some other\\nword being understood; thus, ov, where; ij, where, as far as,\\nhow, in what manner and sometimes thus used, it is preceded\\nby tan the two words being used as an adverb as, ov or\\nsometimes, in some places, in many places.\\n417.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7136. THE RELATED ADJECTIVE WORDS\\noiog, c.\\n1. The relative adjectives like the relative\\npronoun, always refer to a kindred word before them expressed\\nor understood, implying a comparison of equality similar to talis\\nqualis, tantus quantus, in Latin (Lat. Gr. 300) as,\\nor such as.\\nor so many as.\\nof such an age or size as.\\n2. The antecedent and relative adjectives both refer to the\\nsame substantive, with which they agree in gender and number,\\nwhile each takes the case required by the construction of the\\nclause in which it stands thus, Dem. Olynth. I, As for the\\nrest they are thieves and flatterers, and\\nsuch men as, when intoxicated, to dance such\\ndances as dare not name.\\n3. The antecedent word is most commonly understood, and\\nthe relative is translated with some variety according to the con-\\nnection in which it stands. The most of the cases in which, e. g.\\nis used for may be reduced to three viz. 1st,\\nwhen it stands before a substantive 2d, before an adjectiife 3d,\\nbefore a verb.\\n4. First. Before a substantive, elegantly takes the case\\nin which its antecedent would be, if expressed, and\\nchanges the substantive before which it stands into the same\\ncase by attraction; thus,\\nto lie is not befitting such a man as Socrates is, for\\nAgain,\\ngratifying such a man as thou\\nart, for\\nIn some instances the noun after is not attracted into the", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0239.jp2"}, "240": {"fulltext": "222 RELATED ADJECTIVE WORDS. 186.\\nsame case with it as, tog\\ntltey being such as he.\\nWhen the substantive to which refers is obvious from\\nthe connection, it is frequently omitted, as in the preceding ex-\\nample.\\n5. Sometimes with the clause in which it occurs, is ap-\\nparently unconnected with the sentence. In such cases the con-\\nnection is to be formed by supplying or on as,\\n(on) they blessed the mother\\n(because) she gave birth to (lit. became possessed of) such children.\\nOf a similar nature are the Homeric expressions\\ni. e. oi\\\\ c. because you say because you\\ndo such things.\\n6. The construction is the same when or the substantive\\nto which it belongs, is in the nominative, or is governed by a\\npreposition as,\\nbeing truly grieved because such a\\nthunny fish as this escaped them, Lucian\\ni. e.\\nexpecting total destruction since they were come into such cala-\\nmities as these. In this way that difficult sentence in Thucy-\\ndides is explained, (scil.\\ni. e.\\nand we are now the only state\\nwhich does not excite indignation in an invading enemy, because\\n(or since) they suffer from such a brave people as we are.\\nIn all constructions of this kind, the idea will be readily per-\\nceived by considering as put for or See\\nnumerous examples in L. Bos. Ellipses, Gr. 271. Vigerus, Ch. 3.\\n\u00c2\u00a78, 9.\\nSecond. Before an adjective, it may be resolved by supply-\\ning the infinitive as,\\nif any one among them is skilful in\\nwar, Dem. O. 2. for is such as to be\\nskilful, c. the best, for\\nsuch as to be the best, c.\\n8. is frequently, however, joined with an adjective in the\\nform of an exclamation or interrogation, apparently without re-\\nference to the usual antecedent as,\\nhow great how difficult Thus Lysias,\\nhow great and terrible danger was risked\\n(scil. for the liberty of Greece). If this and similar sentences,\\nhowever, are thrown into the assertive form, they readily admit", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0240.jp2"}, "241": {"fulltext": "137. CONSTRUCTION OF NOMINATIVE CASE. 223\\nof the same resolution as the others thus, danger such as to be\\ngreat and terrible was risked.\\n9. Third. Joined with the verb expressed or understood,\\nand followed by an infinitive, it signifies I am of such a kind\\nas, or such as and, according to the connection in which it\\nstands, may mean I am able am wont am ready, or\\nwilling being always understood as an antecedent\\nword thus, (i. e.\\nfor he was not (such) as to make gain from every\\nthing i. e. he was not willing (or inclined) to do every thing for\\nthe sake of gain.\\n10. The abbreviated expressions and are\\nvery common, and usually, but not always, observe this distinc-\\ntion viz., that the former signifies am wont, the latter,\\nam able, I can, and is equivalent to as,\\nI can do this. In the neuter, it is used imperson-\\nally as, it is possible.\\n11. Sometimes the verb is also omitted; as,\\nor whether he could hear\\nFROM NOT BEING ABLE TO HEAR FORMERLY.\\n12. In the same manner or stands related to\\nfollowing it, expressed or understood as,\\n(scil. I would have no intercourse ivith\\nsuch a man (scil. as he is).\\n13. The neuters and ola, either alone or combined with\\nvarious particles, and used in a conjunctive or adverbial sense,\\nare, no doubt, elliptical expressions similar to those noticed above,\\nthough it may be difficult to resolve many of them in a satisfac-\\ntory manner. The ordinary meaning of these words will be\\nfound in the Lexicons.\\n418 Note. The observations which have been made on the con-\\nstruction of the related adjectives or are applica-\\nble, almost without exception, to or observing\\nthat the former relates to the quality of objects, the latter to their\\nnumber or quantity. The same also may be said of 1 of\\nsuch an age or size.\\n\u00c2\u00a7137. CONSTRUCTION OF THE NOMINATIVE CASE.\\n419. The nominative case is used\\n1st. To express the subject of a proposition.\\n2d. In apposition with another substantive in the nomina-\\ntive (365), or predicated of it (436, 438).", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0241.jp2"}, "242": {"fulltext": "224 VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. \u00c2\u00a7138.\\n3d. In exclamations as, wretched\\nme\\n4th. Absolutely, or without dependence on any word in the\\nsentence 772); as,\\nfor the army\\nbeing\u00e2\u0080\u00a2 numerous, it will not be in the power of the whole\\nstate to accommodate them. Or without a participle, by\\npleonasm before an affirmation as, 6\\nthis Moses, we know not what\\nhas become of him.\\n138. A VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE.\\n420. Rule IV. A verb agrees with its nomi-\\nnative in number and person as,\\nI write,\\nye strike,\\nhis eyes shine.\\n421 Rem. The subject of a finite verb, if a noun or pronoun, or\\nadjective used as a noun, is put in the nominative. The subject may\\nalso be an infinitive mood (719), or part of a sentence and to all these\\nthis rule applies.\\n422. Obs. 1. The nominative of the first and of the second\\nperson is generally omitted, being obvious from the termination\\nof the verb also of the third person, when it may be readily\\nsupplied from the context as, they say.\\n423. Obs. 2. The subject is also omitted, when the verb ex-\\npresses an action usually performed by that subject as,\\nthe trumpeter sounds the herald proclaimed or\\nwhen it expresses an operation of nature as, it rains\\nit thunders.\\n424. Obs. 3. Impersonal verbs are usually considered as\\nwithout a nominative still they will generally be found to bear\\na relation to some circumstance, sentence, clause of a sentence,\\nor infinitive mood, similar to that between a verb and its nomi-\\nnative as, it is lawful for me to depart, i. e.\\nto depart is lawful for me it behoves you to do\\nit, i.e. to do it behoves you. Lat. Gr. 307.\\nNote. On the other hand, the subject or nominative is some-\\ntimes expressed, and the verb usually some part of the verb\\nshai is omitted as, I {am) a Greek.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0242.jp2"}, "243": {"fulltext": "139. VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. 225\\n139. SPECIAL RULES AND OBSERVATIONS.\\nI. Agreement in number.\\n425. Rule 1. A neuter plural commonly has\\nverb in the singular as,\\nanimals run.\\n426. Obs. 1. This construction is more common with the\\nAttic than with the Ionic and Doric writers. But with all, there\\nare many exceptions, especially when the neuter plural signifies\\npersons or animals as, so many na-\\ntions went to war. Homer joins a singular and a plural verb\\nwith the same nominative. Odyss. 43. So Xen. Mem.\\nthe stars shone forth, which shew to us the hours of the\\nnight.\\n427. Obs. 2. Sometimes, also, masculine and feminine nouns\\nin the dual and plural have a verb in the singular as,\\nthere are none who abstain\\nthe voice of melody sounds.\\n428. Rule 2. Two or more substantives sin\\ngular, taken together, have a verb in the plural\\ntaken separately, the verb must be in the singu-\\nlar as,\\nTogether, Shame and fear are na-\\ntural to man.\\nSeparately, For Jupiter and Apollo\\ngave you the victory.\\n429. Obs. 3. To both parts of this rule, however, and espe-\\ncially to the first, there are not a few exceptions for it often\\nhappens that when two or more nouns have a common verb, it\\nagrees with one of them, and most commonly the one next it.\\nAlso, if the two nouns are of similar signification, they are in\\nconstruction considered as one, and the verb follows in the sin-\\ngular as, 3 let your\\nheart and soul dare.\\n430. Obs. 4. A substantive in the singular, connected with\\nother words as the subject of a verb, conveying the idea of plu-\\nrality, has the verb in the plural as,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0243.jp2"}, "244": {"fulltext": "22 VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. 139.\\nRhea, having taken with her also\\nthe Corybantes, wandered about. So in Latin as, Juba cum\\nLabieno capti in potestatem Ccesaris venissent. Lat. Gr. 314.\\n431. E,ule 3. A noun of multitude expressing\\nmany as one whole has a verb in the singular as,\\nthe people sat down.\\n432. But when it expresses many as individu-\\nals, the verb must be plural; as,\\nthe multitude asked him.\\n433. Obs. 5. To both parts of this rule there are also ex-\\nceptions, and in some cases it seems indifferent whether the verb\\nbe in the singular or plural sometimes both are joined with the\\nsame nominative as,\\nthe people sat down and kept their seats.\\n434. Rule 4. A dual nominative may have a\\nplural verb as,\\nboth spake and a plural nominative, limited to\\ntwo, may have a verb in the dual.\\nII. Agreement in Person.\\n435. Rule 5. When two or more nominatives are of differ-\\nent persons, the verb takes the first person rather than the sec-\\nond, and the second rather than the third as,\\nyou and I spoke.\\nTo this rule there are many exceptions.\\nIII. The Nominative after the Verb.\\n436. Rule 6. Any verb may have the same\\ncase after it as before it when both words refer to\\nthe same thing as,\\nYe are the light of the world\\n437 Rem. The nominative before is the subject, the nominative after\\nthe predicate the verb is the copula, and is either a substantive or intran-\\nsitive verb, or a passive verb of naming from its use called copulative.\\n438. Obs. 6. This rule applies to the infinitive whatever be\\nthe case of its subject also to participles, 738 and 152.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0244.jp2"}, "245": {"fulltext": "140. GOVERNMENT. 227\\n439. Obs. 7. When the predicate is an adjective or a parti-\\nciple, without a substantive, it agrees with the subject before the\\nverb, by H. II Except as uoticed, 378.\\n440. Obs. 8. In this construction, the verb usually agrees\\nwith the subject sometimes, however, it agrees with the predi-\\ncate as, the space\\nbetween them teas eight stadia. So also when the copula is a\\nparticiple as, fie usually let go,\\n(for the greatest\\noffenders being (or who are) the greatest injury to the state.\\n\u00c2\u00a7140. GOVERNMENT.\\n441. Government is the power which one word has over\\nanother depending upon it, requiring it to be put in a certain\\ncase, mood, or tense.\\nTHE GOVERNMENT OF CASES.\\n442. The construction of the oblique cases depends in gen-\\neral upon the following principles viz.\\n1. The Genitive expresses that from which any thing pro-\\nceeds, originates, or begins or to which it belongs, as expressed\\nby the English words of, from, in regard of, in respect of, c.\\nviz. as cause or origin.\\n2. The Dative is the case of acquisition, and denotes that to\\nwhich any thing is added, or to or for which it is done hence\\nthe end or remote object to which any action tends. It is also\\nused to express the cause, instrument, or means, by which a thing\\nis done, in which sense it usually depends on a preposition ex-\\npressed or understood.\\n3. The Accusative expresses the immediate object on which the\\naction or influence of a transitive active verb terminates or ot\\nmotion or tendency to, expressed by a preposition.\\n4. The action of a verb may be considered in reference either,\\n1. to its immediate object, i.e. to that on which its action is im-\\nmediately exerted, and which is always governed in the accusa-\\ntive as, to give myself or, 2. to a remote ob-\\nject (i. e. to one which is not acted upon by the verb, but is\\nmerely that to which the action is related in the manner ex-\\npressed by the case), and is put in the ganitive, or dative, or ac-\\ncusative, either after the accusative with a transitive active verb,\\nor without an accusative after an intransitive verb as,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0245.jp2"}, "246": {"fulltext": "228 THE GENITIVE. 141.\\nto free one from disease zrj\\nto give myself to the state; to spare\\nthe kids; to aid (i.e. to render assistance to)\\nmy country.\\n\u00c2\u00a7141. THE GENITIVE.\\n443. The Genitive is in extensive use in the Greek lan-\\nguage, being used in many cases in which the ablative is used\\nin Latin. Its primary, as well as its general and leading idea, is\\nthat of separation or abstraction, going forth from, or out of ori-\\ngin, cause. So that the meaning of the words of out of from,\\nis implied in the case itself.\\nThe numerous and diversified uses of this case are reduced by Mat-\\nthise to the following heads\\n444 I. In Greek, words of all kinds may be followed by other\\nwords in the genitive, when the latter class limits, and shews in what\\nrespect the meaning of the former is to be taken. When used for this\\npurpose, they may usually be rendered by such phrases as with re-\\nspect to, in respect of; thus,\\n1. With verbs; as, ri/ov, as fast as they could run, lit.\\nas they had themselves with respect to their feet i /euv\\nto have one s self well with respect to intoxication;\\nto be deceived with respect to hope I am\\nbroken with respect to my head, i. e. have broken my head.\\n2. With adjectives otv q\\nforgiving with respect to human errors;\\nnear with respect to the city vs. aland full of (i.e.\\nwith respect evils; greater than (i.e. with re-\\nspect to) his father.\\n3. With all words which represent a situation or operation of the\\nmind, which is directed to an object, but without affecting it such as\\nverbs signifying to remember, to forget, to neglect, c. and adjectives sig-\\nnifying experienced, ignorant, desirous, o.\\n4. With all words which indicate fulness, defect, emptiness, and the\\nlike. Under this head fall adjectives signifying full, rich, empty, de-\\nprived of, c. and adverbs denoting abundance, want, sufficiency, e,-\\n5. To this principle must be referred the construction of the geni-\\ntive with the comparative degree, 482 with all words denoting superi-\\nority, inferiority, and where a comparison is made with respect to the\\nvalue of a thing as, worthy of this, i. e. equal in value\\nwith respect this or where the idea of difference is involved\\n6. When that with respect to which a thing is done may also be con-\\nsidered the cause of its being done, the word expressing it is often put\\nin the genitive, and may be rendered on account of; as,\\nto envy one on account of wisdom. Hence it is used with\\nverbs signifying to accuse, or criminate, to pray, to begin, fec and also,\\nwithout another word, in exclamations.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0246.jp2"}, "247": {"fulltext": "142. GENITIVE GOVERNED BY SUBSTANTIVES. 229\\n445 II. The genitive in Greek is used to express the relation of\\na whole to its parts i. e. it is put partitively. Hence it is put with\\nverbs of all kinds, even with those that govern the accusative, when the\\naction does not refer to the whole, but to a part as,\\nto roast some of the flesh know\\nsome of those of my age. Hence, also, it is put with verbs which sig-\\nnify to share, to participate, (fee.\\nOn this principle is founded, the construction of the genitive of the\\npart affected, after verbs signifying to take, to seize, to touch, (fee. Hence,\\nalso, it is put with the superlative degree, to express the class of which\\nthat one, or those marked by the superlative, form a part.\\n446 III. The genitive is used to mark the origin, or cause from\\nwhich any thing proceeds and hence, the person or thing to which\\nany tiling belongs, whether it be a property, or quality, habit, duty, (fee.\\nHence, also, verbs govern the genitive, which express feelings and op-\\nerations of the mind, which are the result of external impressions, or\\nwhen they denote motions and actions in bodies which are the effects of\\nthe operation of other bodies. Thus, verbs which express the sensa-\\ntions of hearing, tasting, touching, (fee. as well as those which signify to\\nadmire, to care for, to desire, (fee. are followed by the genitive of the ob-\\nject heard, tasted, touched, admired, or cared for, because it is viewed\\nas the source, origin, or cause, of these sensations and operations.\\nHence, also, the common rules, that verbs denoting possession, prop-\\nerty, or duty, (fee. govern the genitive that the material of which\\nany thing is made is put in the genitive; and that one substantive\\ngoverns another in the genitive.\\n447. IV. The genitive is also governed by certain prepositions,\\nand by verbs compounded with prepositions that is to say, when the\\nprepositions may be separated from the verb and placed before the\\ngenitive without altering the sense.\\n448. V. The genitive is used to determine place and time in an-\\nswer to the question where? when? (fee. Hence the adverbs\\nwhere, which are, in fact, old genitives, and refer to part of\\nplace or time in general.\\nTo the general principles contained in these five heads, may be re-\\nferred all the cases which occur under all the following rules for the\\ngenitive.\\n142. I. THE GENITIVE GOVEKJiED BY SUBSTAN\\nTIYES.\\n449. Rule V. One substantive governs an-\\nother in the genitive, when the latter substantive\\nlimits the signification of the former as,\\nthe father of gods,\\nking of men.\\n11", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0247.jp2"}, "248": {"fulltext": "230 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY SUBSTANTIVES. 1 12.\\n450 This rule is founded on the general principle mentioned 444\\nand 446. In the examples above, the general term is restricted\\nby the word imv governed by it. It is not any father, nor the father\\nof men, but of gods so aval, not any king, but, the king of men.\\nWhen a noun is restricted by another of the same signification, it is\\nput in the same case by Rule I. (365).\\n451. Obs. 1. The noun governing, the genitive is frequently\\nunderstood (367); viz. 1. after the article such words as\\nc. as, 6 (sup.\\nMiltiades, the son of Cimon (sup.\\nthe gifts of fortune. 2. or after a preposition; as,\\n(sup. to the house of her father\\nto Hades in Hades. 3. After the\\nverbs c. See 491 and 446.\\n452. Obs. 2. When the noun in the genitive signifies a per-\\nson, it may often be taken in an active or passive sense thus,\\nthe knowledge of God. In this sentence, God\\nmay be either the subject or the object of the knowledge spoken\\nof, i. e. the phrase may denote our knowledge of God, or his\\nknowledge of us generally (not the regret of thy\\nson, viz. which he has, but) regret for thy son\\ngood ivill towards such a man. Lat. Gr. 334.\\n453. This passive sense of the genitive is more common\\nwhen the governing noun is derived from a verb which usually\\ngoverns the dative, and when the one substantive is in one sense\\nthe cause, and in another the object, of that which is expressed\\nby the other substantive; as, offerings\\n(not of but) the dead; prayers\\nPallas; the march against\\nthe Plat^eans.\\n454. Nouns thus derived, however, are more frequently fol-\\nlowed by the dative as, the\\ngift of the Muses men sometimes by the preposition with\\nthe accusative as, 518.\\n455. Obs. 3. Many substantives derived from words which\\ngovern the genitive, are often followed by a genitive governed by\\nthe force of the primitive contained in the derivative thus,\\n(466), free from labour hence,\\nfreedom from labour; (511), to be superior to\\npleasures mastery over or moderation in\\npleasures subjection to or want of moderation\\nm pleasures protection against the snow.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0248.jp2"}, "249": {"fulltext": "142. GENITIVE GOVERNED BY SUBSTANTIVES. 231\\n456. Obs. 4. Sometimes the genitive after a substantive is\\ngoverned not so properly by the substantive as by a preposition\\nunderstood. These generally express the material of which a\\nthing is made, or the author or source from lohich it proceeds\\n(617) as, a crown of flowers\\n(soil, a helmet of brass\\ngrief sent from the gods wanderings caused\\nby Juno.\\nNote. In this way, perhaps, the examples, Obs. 3 (455), may be re-\\nsolved as,\\n457. Obs. 5. A noun in the genitive, after another of the\\nsame kind, denotes either the highest pre-eminence, or the lowest\\ninferiority as, to the king of Icings\\na slave of slaves.\\n458. Obs. 6. A number of substantives followed by the gen-\\nitive of a noun, or by a possessive adjective formed from it, are\\noften put, by a kind of circumlocution, for the noun itself. The\\nchief of these are, strength the heart\\nfear the end a body\\nthe head, c. as, for\\nCastor for Hercules\\nfor death for\\n459. Obs. Sometimes one substantive governs two differ-\\nent genitives in different relations as,\\nhe assumed the leading\\nof the Ionians ix the war against Darius\\ninsults of relations to old age.\\n460. Obs. 8. The Attics use a noun in the genitive, preceded\\nby a neuter article, for the noun itself as, for\\nfortune (for\\nthe barbarians are not to be trusted.\\n461. Rule VI. An adjective or article in the\\nneuter gender, without a substantive, governs the\\ngenitive as,\\nthe greatest part of the army,\\nthe gifts of fortune.\\n462. Obs. 9. The adjective in the neuter gender is either it-\\nself considered as a substantive (390), or as having a substantive\\nunderstood, which is properly the governing word.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0249.jp2"}, "250": {"fulltext": "232 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 143.\\n463. Eule VII. A substantive added to ano-\\nther, to express a quality or circumstance belong-\\ning to it, is put in the genitive as,\\na man of great virtue.\\n464. Obs. 10. The substantive in the genitive has commonly\\nan adjective with it, as in the example above, but sometimes not\\nas, a war, not of wea-\\npons, but OF MONEY. But,\\n465. Obs. 11. The substantive expressing the quality or cir-\\ncumstance of another, is more commonly put in the accusative\\ngoverned by or expressed or understood as,\\na man of ingenuous disposition.\\n\u00c2\u00a7143. THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES.\\n466. Rule VIII. Verbal adjectives, and such\\nas signify an affection or operation of the mind,\\ngovern the genitive as,\\nhurtful to men.\\nskilled in music.\\n467 Rem. The principle on which this rule is founded is con-\\ntained in 444-1. 1, 2. But others suppose that the foundation of the\\nprinciple, as well as of the rule, is to be sought in the ellipsis of a pre-\\nposition, such as 2Tf(H, which is sometimes expressed as,\\nskilled in the arts. However plausible this supposi-\\ntion may be, it militates strongly against it that we have the same\\nrule in Latin in which there is no preposition that governs the geni-\\ntive. The stronger probability is, that the rule in both languages is\\nto be referred to the same general principle already mentioned.\\n468. Under this rule are comprehended,\\n1. Adjectives denoting action or capacity, which are derived\\nfrom verbs, or corresponding to them, especially those in\\nand\\n2. Many adjectives compounded with a privative (327-1, 1st)\\nas, without seeing or hearing of\\nany thing.\\n3. Participles used in an adjective sense, especially among", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0250.jp2"}, "251": {"fulltext": "143. GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 233\\nthe poets as, free from troubles\\nskilled in augury.\\nNote. These, however, are often followed by the accusative as,\\na tfuaria, skilled in wickedness.\\n4. Adjectives expressing a state or operation of mind as, de-\\nsire, aversion, care, knoioledge, ignorance, memory, forgetfulness,\\nprofusion, parsimony, and the like.\\n5. Adjectives derived from, or of a similar signification with\\nverbs which govern the genitive as,\\nserviceable against cold, darkness, c.\\n469. Rule IX. Adjectives signifying plenty\\nor want, c, govern the genitive (444-4) as,\\nfull of confusion,\\ndestitute of men.\\n470. Under this rule are comprehended,\\n1. Adjectives of fulness, plenty, and want value, dignity,\\nworth, and the contrary.\\n2. Adjectives expressive of power, eminence, superiority, and\\ntheir opposites also, of participation, diversity, separation, pecu-\\nliarity, or property, and the like.\\n3. Adjectives followed by the genitive of the cause as,\\nmiserable on account of fortune.\\n471. Note. Adjectives of plenty and want sometimes govern the\\ndative as, abounding in fruits.\\n472. Rule X. Partitives, and words placed\\npartitively, comparatives, superlatives, interroga-\\ntives, indefinites, and some numerals, govern the\\ngenitive plural as,\\n1. of the men some were wise,\\nov, others not.\\n2. the ancient poets.\\n3. one of the ships.\\n4. Ad the first of the Athenians.\\n5. 6 the younger of the brothers,\\n6. most hated of kings.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0251.jp2"}, "252": {"fulltext": "234: GENITIVE GOVEKNED BY ADJECTIVES. \u00c2\u00a7143.\\n473. Rem. For the principle of this rule, see 445. It has also\\nbeen supposed that the genitive under this rule is properly governed\\nby or The same remark made 467 is also applicable here, and\\nfor the same reason viz. that the same rule holds in Latin, which has\\nno preposition governing the genitive.\\n474. Obs. 1. All words are denominated partitives which\\nexpress a part of any number or class of objects, the whole being\\nexpressed by the noun following it in the genitive.\\n475. Obs. 2. The genitive after the partitive is sometimes\\ngoverned by the preposition or as,\\nthe most beautiful of all and sometimes, instead of the geni-\\ntive, there is found a preposition with another case as,\\nfairest among women so in Latin, justissimus\\nin Teucris. Lat. Gr. 360.\\n476. Obs. 3. Instead of the genitive, the case of the partitive\\nis sometimes used as,\\nSOME OF HIS FRIENDS he slew.\\n477. Obs. 4. The partitives and are sometimes\\nomitted; as, (sc. 1\\nbring you a very excellent robe;\\n(sc. he desired to be one of those who remained. On this\\nprinciple is explained such phrases as (sc.\\nfor he is base (literally one of the base\\n478. Obs. 5. Partitives agree in gender with the substantives\\nwhich follow in the genitive. When two substantives follow in\\nthe genitive, the partitives, c. commonly agree with the former,\\nbut sometimes with the latter.\\n479. Obs. 6. Collective nouns are governed by partitives in\\nthe genitive singular.\\n480. Obs. Adjectives in the positive form, but conveying\\na superlative sense, on the principle of this rule govern the geni-\\ntive plural as, the most excellent of all\\ngoddess of goddesses (i. e. supreme goddess)\\nmost excellent of women, Good sir. Also\\nnouns compounded with in a privative sense as,\\nunarmed with brazen shields.\\n481. Obs. 8. On a similar principle an adjective in the geni-\\ntive plural sometimes accompanies substantives of all kinds, in\\norder to mark the class to which the person or thing mentioned\\nbelongs; as, a wheel of the class\\nof the earthen, i. e. an earthen wheel\\nan axe of those belonging\u00e2\u0080\u00a2 to ship-builders, i.e. a\\nbuilder s axe.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0252.jp2"}, "253": {"fulltext": "113. GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 235\\n482. Rule XL The comparative degree, with-\\nout a conjunction, governs the genitive as,\\nsweeter than honey,\\nenvy is stronger than pity.\\n483. Rem. The principle of this rule is stated 444-5. There is\\nnot the same objection to the usual explanation of this rule, by supply-\\ning the preposition nqo or that is stated 467. Yet the analogy of\\nthe cases already referred to are opposed to this explanation, and seem\\nto render it more proper to refer to the general principle above stated.\\nAt the same time it must be noticed, that after the comparative degree\\nthe genitive is sometimes governed by one of these prepositions ex-\\npressed; as, nqb fjv\\nqov, to whom tyranny was more agreeable than liberty but this will\\nnot decide in favour of explaining the construction under this rule by\\nsupplying the preposition, any more than it did in the other, 475.\\n484. Obs. 9. The conjunction than, after the comparative\\nis usually followed by the same case that precedes it as,\\nagainst men much braver\\nthan the Scythians. Sometimes, however, it is followed by the\\nnominative, if or another word, can be supplied as,\\nto those younger than I am.\\n485. Obs. 10. After the comparative, is sometimes followed\\nby an infinitive \\\\vith or without or as,\\nevils too great to excite my tears\\naffliction too great to bear.\\n486. -Obs. 11. The comparative without (than) is followed\\nby the genitive according to the rule as,\\na voice sweeter than honey-comb.\\n487. 005. 12. The genitives and ov, governed by a\\ncomparative, are often followed by an explanation with as,\\nthere is no greater honour to children than this (viz.\\nthan), to be descended from a brave and virtuous father.\\n488. Obs. 13. The infinitive mood or part of a sentence\\nbeing equivalent to a noun (714), is sometimes governed in the\\ngenitive by a comparative; as,\\nto preserve property is\\nMORE DIFFICULT THAN TO GAIN IT.\\n489. Obs. 14. Words which imply a comparison, govern the\\ngenitive on the same principle; these are\\n1st. Such words as express difference as,\\nalso,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0253.jp2"}, "254": {"fulltext": "236 GENITIVE GOVEENED BY VEEBS. 144.\\n2d. Multiplicative numbers as, as,\\none should hear\\nTWICE AS MUCH AS HE SPEAKS.\\n490. 05s. 15. The superlative is sometimes used for the com-\\nparative, and is then subject to the same rules; as, (with the con-\\njunction) better than the plain of\\nPhlegra (without the conjunction)\\nno man is happier than you.\\n144. THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS.\\n491. Rule XII. The person or thing to which\\nany thing belongs, is put in the genitive after\\nas,\\nit belongs to the Icing,\\nto be his own (master),\\nalacrity is necessary to fight\\nwell i. e. belongs to it.\\n492 Rem. For the principle of this rule, see 446. Consistently\\nwith this, in constructions of this kind, a substantive may be considered\\nas understood, which is the governing word. Lat. Gr. 365.\\n493. Obs. 1. Yet here also we have the genitive governed\\ndirectly by a preposition expressed, indicating that from which\\nthe quality, c. proceeds as, it is not\\nproper for the state lit. it is not a thing proceeding from the\\nstate. On this principle are to be explained such sentences as\\nthe following I do not\\napprove this in a prince; i. e. c. from a prince\\nAy I commend this in Agesilaus\\nthis they blame chiefly in us.\\n494. Ktjle XIII. Verbs expressing the opera-\\ntion of the senses, govern the genitive as,\\nhear me.\\ntouch me not.\\n495. Exc. 1. Verbs of seeing govern the accusative; as,\\nthey shall see God.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0254.jp2"}, "255": {"fulltext": "144. GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 237\\n496. Exc. 2. In the Attic dialect, all verbs of sense govern\\nthe accusative and sometimes, though very rarely, in the other\\ndialects as, I heard a voice\\nthey tasted the entrails.\\n497. Obs. 2. The principle on which verbs under this rule,\\nand some of those that follow, govern the genitive, is, that the\\nword in the genitive, following the verb, expresses that which is\\nviewed as the origin or cause, in some way or other, of the sensa-\\ntion, or of the act or state expressed by the verb, 446.\\n498 Rem. If, after verbs which usually govern the genitive, the\\ngenitive is governed by a preposition interposed, the preposition gener-\\nally corresponds to the idea of origin or cause, fec. expressed by the\\ngenitive (as, and the like); and thus, instead of militating\\nagainst the principles stated above, it adds its own force to that of the\\ngenitive, giving emphasis and distinction to the sentence. But to sup-\\npose from this, that when the genitive follows a verb, it is always gov-\\nerned by a substantive or preposition understood, besides being wholly\\nunnecessary on the principles already stated, serves only to destroy\\nthe original and characteristic simplicity of the language, and to render\\nits construction perplexed and intricate.\\n499. Rule XIV. Verbs signifying an opera-\\ntion of the mind, govern the genitive as,\\nI admire you.\\nyou neglect your friends.\\n500. Rem. Verbs which come under this rule govern the genitive\\non the principles stated, 1 1 1-3 and 446. Examples occur also in Latin\\nsee Lat. Gr. 369. It applies generally to verbs which signify\\n1. To pity, to spare, to cara for, or neglect as,\\n2. To remember or forget; as,\\nc. with their compounds. But these frequently\\ngovern the accusative.\\n3. To consider, to reflect, to perceive, or understand these\\nalso govern the accusative.\\n4. To admire, to aim at, to desire or to loathe, to revere or to\\ndespise.\\n501. Obs. 3. Many of these verbs used transitively (i.e.\\nsignifying to cause the operation of mind they express), govern\\nthe accusative of the person with the genitive of the object as,\\nhe put him in mind of his father\\nyou have caused me to taste of happiness. Verbs", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0255.jp2"}, "256": {"fulltext": "288 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VEEES. 144.\\nthus used are sometimes denominated causative or incentive verbs,\\nand hence the\\n502. Rule. Causative verbs govern the accu-\\nsative of the person with the genitive of the thing.\\n503. Rule XV. Transitive verbs govern the\\ngenitive when they refer to a part only, and not\\nto the whole of the object as,\\nhe drank of the water.\\n504 This construction depends on the principle stated, 445, or we\\nmay consider the expression elliptical, and supply some such word as\\na part, or some, as the direct object of the verb, and that which\\ngoverns the genitive according to Rules V. and VI.\\n505. To this rule belong more especially such verbs as sig-\\nnify,\\n1 To share, participate, or impart, which, with the genitive\\nof the thing, frequently govern the dative of the person to\\nwhom it is imparted as,\\nI share the property with my brother.\\n2. To receive, obtain, or enjoy as, he gained\\nhonour lav if we get leisure.\\n3. Verbs signifying to take, to seize, and their contraries to\\ntouch, or to carry, especially in the middle voice, with the\\naccusative of the whole, govern the genitive of the part af-\\nfected they seized\\nOrontes by the girdle.\\n506. Exc. Some verbs, such as\\nsometimes govern the accusative of\\nthe thing with the accusative of the thing, governs\\nalso the genitive of the person from whom it is received as,\\nhe inherited his posses-\\nses from his father sometimes it governs the genitive of both.\\n507. Rule XVI. Verbs oi plenty or want, fill-\\ning or depriving, separation or distance, govern\\nthe genitive (444-4) as,\\nhe abounds in riches.\\nlet him fill his ship with gold.\\nto be in want of money.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0256.jp2"}, "257": {"fulltext": "144. GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 239\\n508. Under this rule there may be comprehended verbs\\nwhich express the general idea of separation, or which signify\\n1. To beg or entreat as, I beg of you.\\n2. To bereave or deprive as,\\n3. To deliver, loose, or set free as,\\n4. To escape as,\\n5. To keep off, to hinder, or prevent, to desist as,\\n(scil. c.\\n6. To differ from, to be distant, to abstain as,\\nBut some verbs\\nof differing govern also the dative as, I\\ndiffer from you.\\n1. To separate, repel, or drive away; as,\\nc.\\n8. To make way for, or retire from, to resign as,\\n9. To err, to cause to err\\n10. To cease, to cause to cease as, o.\\n11. To deceive, frustrate, or disappoint as,\\nc.\\n509. Obs. 5. Many of these are transitive; and with the\\ngenitive of the remote object, govern the accusative of the direct\\nobject thus, under No. 3, I clear you\\nof this murder to deprive, sometimes governs the\\naccusative and genitive, sometimes two accusatives, and some-\\ntimes the accusative and dative.\\n510. Obs. 6. The genitive after these verbs, whether transi-\\ntive or intransitive, is sometimes governed by a preposition inter-\\nvening, the effect of which is, to give emphasis to\u00e2\u0080\u00a2 the expression\\nas, having liberated Greece\\nfrom the Medes, 498.\\n511. Rule XVII. Verbs of ruling, presiding\\nover, excelling, and the contrary, govern the geni-\\ntive (444-5) as,\\nto rule over many nations.\\nto luive the superintendence of affairs.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0257.jp2"}, "258": {"fulltext": "240 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 144.\\n512. The verbs which come under this rule are those which\\nsignify,\\n1. To rule; as,\\n2. To reign as,\\n3. To lead as,\\n4. To preside over as,\\n5. To survive, or to be over as,\\n6. To surpass, or excel as,\\n7. To begin, i. e. to be first, to lead the way as, so\\n8. The contrary are such as signify to be ruled, led, presided\\nover, c. to obey, to be inferior to, to be overcome.\\n513. Obs. V. Some verbs govern the genitive by the force\\nof a noun implied in them thus, is equivalent to\\nand hence he was king of\\nCorinth, is equivalent to\\n514. Obs. 8. Many verbs under this rule sometimes govern\\nthe dative as,\\nand sometimes the accusative.\\n515. Eule XVIII. Verbs of buying, selling,\\nestimating, and the like, govern the genitive of\\nthe price (648) as,\\nI bought this for five\\nDRACHMAE.\\nthe\\ngods sell every good thing to us for labour.\\nhe is thought worthy of double\\nhonour.\\n516. Bern. The genitive in this construction is properly\\ngoverned by understood, sometimes expressed. The price\\nis sometimes put in the dative with the preposition and some-\\ntimes in the accusative with the preposition 649.\\nFor the construction of the genitive with the accusa-\\ntive, see \u00c2\u00a7151; also, for the genitive governed by adverbs, see\\n\u00c2\u00a7164, 165; by prepositions, 168, and as used to express cer-\\ntain circumstances, 156, 15*7, and from 160 to 163.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0258.jp2"}, "259": {"fulltext": "145, 146. DATIVE AFTER SUBSTANTIVES. 241\\n\u00c2\u00a7145. CONSTRUCTION OF THE DATIVE.\\n517. The dative has, in general, two significations\\n1. It is used to express the remote object to which any quality or\\naction, or any state or condition of things tends, or to which it refers.\\nThis tendency is usually expressed in English by the words to or for.\\nAs thus used, it corresponds to the dative in Latin, and is subject to\\nnearly the same rules.\\nRem, To this general character of the dative may be referred a use\\nof this case common in the best Greek writers, when the dative of the\\nperson to whom the thing spoken of may, in some way or other, be in-\\nteresting, is thrown in, without any dependence for its construction\\non any word in the sentence, and when the sentence as regards syntax\\nis complete without it. In such cases the dative is said to be redundant.\\nBut though it is so in respect of construction, it is not so in respect of\\neffect, as it imparts a touch of feeling and sentiment easily felt, but not\\nso easy to express in a translation. Thus, noitlv\\n(Plat. Lys.), thy mother permits thee to do\\nwhatever thou pleasest, in order that thou may est be happy her). The\\naiVrrj is added with reference to the feelings of the mother. The datives\\nand are very often iised in this way. Thus, Oedip. Tyr. 2.\\n#octufTf; where intimates the mournful in-\\nterest the good king felt in the scene before him. In Xen. Cyr. Cyrus\\naddressing his mother, says, o^ttai c. I have no\\ndoubt that I will easily surpass these; where intimates the delight-\\nful interest an affectionate mother might be supposed to feel in the\\nevent anticipated. So in Latin, Quo tantum dexter abis, Virg.\\n^Eneid V. 162. Lat. Gr. 377-3.\\n2. It is used to express that with which any thing is connected as an\\naccompaniment, cause, instrument, manner, means, or end. This connec-\\ntion is usually expressed in English by such words as with, by, from, in,\\nfor, or on account of. Used in this way, it corresponds to the ablative\\nin Latin, both in meaning and construction.\\n146. THE DATIVE AFTER SUBSTANTIVES.\\n518. Rule XIX. Substantives derived from\\nverbs which govern the dative, sometimes govern\\nthe dative also as,\\nthe gift of God to you,\\nthe assistance of (i. e. rendered\\nto) friends in war.\\nfor the contradiction of your\\nallies\\nBecause and govern the dative.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0259.jp2"}, "260": {"fulltext": "242 DATIVE GOVEKNED BY ADJECTIVES. 147.\\n519. Obs. 1. The dative often follows a substantive in the\\nsense of the genitive, for which construction, with examples, see\\n533.\\n520. Obs. 2. The dative sometimes depends on an adjective\\nand substantive joined together, but chiefly on account of the\\nadjective as, illustrious offspring to tJw\\nfather.\\n521. Obs. 3. The dative sometimes follows a substantive,\\nnot, however, as implying possession, but where the idea of adap-\\ntation or design is implied as, labour for the\\nhands i. e. adapted for, designed for, suited to.\\n522. Obs. 4. The dative is also put with substantives to ex-\\npress the idea of companionship, being governed probably by\\novv or understood as,\\nyou are responsible, as well as (or equally with) the rest.\\n14V. THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES.\\n523. Rule XX. Adjectives signifying profit\\nor disproflt, likeness or unlikeness, govern the da-\\ntive as,\\nrrj profitable to the state,\\nlike his father.\\n524. The dative after such adjectives, expresses the object to\\nwhich the quality expressed by the adjective refers and hence,\\nall adjectives in which such a reference is involved, are followed\\nby the dative of the object to which they relate. In this class,\\nbesides those mentioned in the rule, may be reckoned,\\n1st. Adjectives signifying usefulness, friendliness, equality, suita-\\nbleness, resemblance, ease, fitness, agreement, and the like,\\nwith theii contraries. Hence, the same, and some-\\ntimes one, and such, are followed by the da-\\ntive as, I suffer the same\\nthings with you (so in Latin, Invitum qui servat, idem\\nfacit occidenti. Hor. He who preserves a man against his\\nwill, acts the same part with the man who kills him)\\ni who was of the\\nsame (or one) mother with me\\nto speak such words as he would.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0260.jp2"}, "261": {"fulltext": "147* DATIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 243\\nExc. Adjectives signifying likeness, equality, fcc. are sometimes fol-\\nlowed by the object of comparison, not in the dative, but in the same\\ncase with the adjective, and connected with it by_ the conjunction\\njis, jo\\n(instead of this argument would seem to me at least\\nbe like the former. So also the nominative is used after the adverbs\\nas,\\nthey have not done like Homer;\\nhe sounded just as a harp. These constructions are probably to be\\nresolved thus ot v.ai fcc.\\nC.\\n2d. Adjectives compounded with and signifying\\nwith as, c. yet\\nsometimes these govern the genitive.\\n3d. Some adjectives derived from verbs which govern the da-\\ntive, govern the dative also as,\\n525. Obs. 1. There are many adjectives which govern either\\nthe genitive or dative as, like equal\\nof the same name of the same father\\nof the same mother educated together\\nfamiliar of the same force common\\nrich abundant poor\\nexposed, obnoxious familiar\\nto be sold a slave free as,\\nor like his father\\nor of the same name with his father.\\n526.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Obs. 2. It has been observed (202, Obs. 1), that the ver-\\nbal adjectives in and have a passive signification corres-\\nponding nearly to the Latin verbals in bilis and dus. Their con-\\nstruction, when thus used, is also similar and hence the following\\n52 7. Special Rule I. Verbals in and\\nrSog, signiiying passively, govern the dative of the\\ndoer as,\\nthis is not ft be spoken by me.\\nthe city ought to be served by thee.\\n528. Bern. The dative, however, in this construction, when\\nit is general in its nature, is commonly omitted as,\\nvirtue must be honoured (viz. by us).\\n529. Obs. 3. Verbals in not signifying passively, govern\\nthe case of their own verbs as,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0261.jp2"}, "262": {"fulltext": "2-1-4 DATIVE GOVEKNED BY VERBS. 148.\\nif I blame my husband. Soph. Trach. not\\nhaving touched the sword. 202, Obs. 1.\\n530. Special Rule II. The neuter verbal in\\n9 in the sense of the Latin gerund, with the\\ndative of the doer, governs also the case of the\\nverb from which it is derived as,\\nall these things must I do.\\nwe should use the present laws, and not rashly enact\\nNEW ONES.\\n531. Obs. 4. The doer is sometimes put in the accusative, in\\nwhich case the necessity involved in the verbal is much weaker\\nthan in the ordinary construction as, ov\\nthe prudent ought not to obey\\nthe unwise (for\\nsome things are to be looked to by him, some by\\nhis wife. Both are united by Plato, Rep. 5,\\n148. THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS.\\n532. Rule XXI. The verbs\\nand signifying to he, or to belong to, are\\nfollowed by the dative of the possessor as,\\npossessions are (belong) to me, i. e. I have pos-\\nsessions.\\ngood children were to Tellus,\\ni. e. Tellus had good children.\\n533. Obs. 1. On the principle of this rule may be explained\\nthe numerous instances, both in Greek and Latin, in which the\\ndative signifying possession is used with another substantive appa-\\nrently for the genitive. Thus, is equivalent to\\nthe children of Tellus but the principle of\\nconstruction is different. In the latter expression, the genitive is\\nimmediately governed by the other substantive, by\\nRule V., and signifies the children proceeding from, and belong-", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0262.jp2"}, "263": {"fulltext": "148. DATIVE GOVERNED *BY VERBS. 243\\ning to, Tellus. In the former, the dative is not governed by the\\nsubstantive, but depends on some part of the substantive-verb\\nunderstood thus, Tello filii (qui\\nsunt), the children which are to (belonging, or added to) Tellus\\nor, without a periphrasis, the children of Tellus. In this man-\\nner may be resolved all sueh expressions as his two\\neyes oi, her daughter 6 the\\nsepulchre of Andrcemon, c. Lat. Gr. 380, 381.\\n534. Rem. 1. This mode of expression with the dative is so nearly\\nsynonymous with the more common construction with the genitive,\\nthat it appears often to have been a matter of indifference which of\\nthem was used so much so, that a sentence sometimes begins with\\nthe one construction and ends with the other; thus,\\nliterally, the heart\\nus dreading his growling voice was broken down. In this sentence \u00c2\u00a7ti-\\nrefers to as if it were in the genitive. In the follow-\\ning sentence the order is reversed:\\nher heart was moved when she recognized the to-\\nkens. Here in the dative, refers to in the genitive, as\\nif it had been\\n535 Rem. 2. In other instances in which the dative follows a sub-\\nstantive apparently for the genitive, the idea of tendency towards or of\\nacquisition or addition, expressed in English by the preposition to or\\nfor, is generally apparent as, an avenger of\\nyour father s murder; plainly an avenger of murder to or for your fa-\\nther. Indeed, the idea of possession, one of the meanings of the geni-\\ntive, and of acquisition, the proper idea expressed by the dative, are\\nso nearly allied as to render the use of the one case for the other not\\nunnatural.\\n536. Obs. 2. When of two nouns in the dative, the one ex-\\npresses a part of, or something belonging to, the other, the latter\\nmay be rendered as the genitive, and the construction explained\\nas in Obs. 1 (533) yet it may be often better to consider them\\nin apposition, both depending on the same governing word the\\none term being added to limit or define more precisely the more\\ngeneral idea contained in the other thus, in the sentence,\\nthe dative may be\\nconsidered as regularly governed by (548-1), and\\nadded in apposition, more particularly defining the part affected\\nas, he did not please Agamemnon viz. his mind (his feelings).\\nThis construction is imitated in Latin (Lat. Gr. 371). So also\\nthe following examples\\nov an ornament which Jupi-\\nter gave them, viz. their race.\\nzrj yvcown, (the oracle) bears witness for me,\\ni. e. for my opinion.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0263.jp2"}, "264": {"fulltext": "246 DATIVE GOVERNED BY VEEBS. 148.\\n537. In the following sentence, instead of the second dative,\\nwe have the accusative with viz.,\\nbut this counsel seemed best me in\\nrespect of my feelings e. this counsel pleased me most.\\n5oo. Rem. 8. The correctness of this view of the construction is\\nalso rendered more probable from the fact, that the same apparent tau-\\ntology is used when the word to be limited 1 defined is connected with\\nwords which govern the accusative as,\\nwhat grief has invaded your mind? Where, instead of saying that is\\nthe accusative used for the genitive according to one mode of reso-\\nlution, or that is governed b}^ understood according to\\nanother, it appears better to consider as the general direct object,\\nand as in apposition, defining more precisely the part affected\\nas in the above examples thus, what grief has come upon viz.\\nyour mind. So in other instances as,\\ntrembling came upon\\nthe Trojans, every one in their limbs.\\nthe noble soul left him; viz.\\nHIS BODY.\\nhe cut the wild fig tree, its\\nYOUNG BOUGHS.\\n539. Obs. 3. The dative of some participles and adjectives\\nis joined with the dative after the third person of or\\nfor the verb itself these are such as\\nas, si\\nfor if you are willing\\nnor was he unwilling we\\nwere pleased with your discourse. This construction lias been\\nimitated in Latin thus, Tacit. Agr. 1 8, quibus bellum volentibus\\nerat, who were inclined for war. So Sallust, Jug. 100, uti\\nmilitibus labos volentibus esset, that the labour might be agree-\\nable to the soldiers. See Lat. Gr. 396, Note.\\n540. Obs. 4. Somewhat similar to this is the construction of\\nthe dative with the participle or adjective, expressive of some\\nfeeling or emotion, after verbs signifying to come as,\\nhe came to me delighted (scil. with his\\ncoming) i. e. am delighted that he is come.\\nthou comest to me earnestly wishing it,\\ni. e. earnestly wished that thou wouldst come.\\n541. Obs. 5. To this rule also belongs the construction of\\nsuch phrases as ti (scil. what have\\nI to do with thee (literally, what common thing is there me\\nand you?) what advantage have I from\\nit what good is it to me", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0264.jp2"}, "265": {"fulltext": "US. DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 217\\nf)42. Rule XXII. All verbs govern the dative\\nof the object to which their action is directed; as,\\ntv/oiTO they prayed to the gods.\\nto look up to any one.\\nJifhjVQ they lifted up their hands to Minerva*\\n5 43. Rem. 4. This rule maybe considered as general, applying to\\nall eases in which a verb expressing action is followed by the dative,\\nthe action not being exerted upon, but simply directed to the object\\nexpressed in the dative. Hence, if the verb is transitive, it will govern\\nalso its immediate object in the accusative (584); if intransitive, it will\\nbe followed by the dative only. More particularly to this rule belong\\n544. I. Verbs expressing action, compounded with\\nc. These prepositions serve to mark more pre-\\ncisely the direction of the action, or state of action, to an object\\nas, to come to one.\\n545. Obs. 6. These verbs sometimes govern the accusative\\nby the force of the preposition with which they are compounded\\nas, he waged war against the city, 693.\\n546. Obs. V. Hence the dative in this construction generally\\nis equivalent to the preposition c. with the accu-\\nsative. Further, to this rule belong\\n547. II. Verbs which signify\\n1. To profit or hurt to please or displease to reverence or\\nto yield to shew to seem to appear.\\n2. To favour or assist and the contrary, to pray to, or en-\\ntreat.\\n3. To command, exhort, or address to obey or disobey to\\nserve or resist.\\n4. To ft or accommodate to use and resemble.\\n5. To give to, or to trust to approach, to meet or to follow.\\n6. To reproach with, to censure, to reprimand or rebuke, to be\\nangry with.\\n548. Exc. or I ask, governs the genitive\\nand always the accusative.\\n549. Obs. 8. Many of these verbs sometimes govern the da-\\ntive, and sometimes the accusative, according as their action is\\nviewed by the writer as directed to, or exerted upon, the object.\\nIn the former case they are viewed as intransitive verbs in the\\nlatter, as transitive.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0265.jp2"}, "266": {"fulltext": "248 DATIVE GOVERNED BY IMPERSONAL VERBS. 149.\\n550. Rule XXIII. Verbs implying connec-\\ntion or companionship, govern the dative as,\\ntin, to associate with any one.\\n551. In this construction, the dative is considered as corres-\\nponding to the ablative in Latin (517-2). To this rule belong\\n1. Verbs compounded with (with) as,\\nto live with any one.\\n2. Verbs after which may be supplied con-\\nsistently with the sense, such as those which signify\\n(1.) To follow (with), to converse, to mix, to be reconciled,\\nto dwell (with).\\n(2.) To contend, or strive with, or against, c.\\n552. Obs. 9. Verbs signifying to contend, c. m one\\npoint of view may come under the principle referred to 543, and\\nhence are sometimes followed by an accusative with but\\nthen they signify more properly to attack.\\n553. Obs. 10. If a dative of the manner or instrument (627)\\nfollows the verb to mix, instead of the dative of the per-\\nson associated with, the genitive is used, governed by the word\\nin the dative; as, A Co Maia\\nBEING EMBRACED BY JUPITER.\\n554. Note. To the principle of this rule may be referred the con-\\nstruction of the dative, expressing repetition or succession as,\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0Q storm upon storm you might see\\none and then another (scil. rushing to the regions of Pluto).\\nFor the dative, construed with the passive voice, see 604.\\n\u00c2\u00a7149. THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY IMPERSONAL\\nVERBS.\\n555. Rule XXIV. Impersonal verbs govern\\nthe dative as,\\nit is lawful for me.\\nit seemed proper to him (i. e. he determined).\\n556. Obs. 1. Special Rule.\\nand", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0266.jp2"}, "267": {"fulltext": "149. DATIVE GOVERNED BY IMPERSONAL VERBS 249\\nwith their compounds, govern the dative of a per-\\nson with the genitive of a thing as,\\nyou have need of much.\\nI take part in that.\\nwhat are the Corinthians to me?\\nFor the principle of this rule, as it respects the genitive, see\\n605-1.\\n557. Rem. 1. The dative of the person is frequently omitted.\\n558. Rem. 2. The nominative, agreeing with the impersonal,\\nis frequently used instead of the genitive as,\\nor how does this concern you\\n559. JSxc. I. and frequently take the\\naccusative of the person with the genitive of the\\nthing; as,\\nov for I do not want your -acles.\\nyou have no need of this folly.\\n560. Obs. 2. From analogy, the derivative substantives\\nare often construed with the accusative and geni-\\ntive as, 1 have need of it\\nwhat need have you of me\\n561. Exc. II. and it heJwveth,\\ngovern the accusative with the infinitive as,\\nwe ought to make peace,\\nIt behoves those who are\\nwiser than men to be gods.\\n562. Obs. 3. The dative is used in certain phrases in which\\nit appears to depend on an impersonal or some other verb under-\\nstood viz.,\\n1st. After to show that a proposition is affirmed, not as\\ngenerally true, but only with respect to a certain person as,\\nyou have travelled a\\nlong way for an old man scil. long,\\nas it appears to an old man.\\nbut since thou art noble in\\nappearance i. e. as a person\\nhaving seen you may suppose.\\n2d. To express the opinion or judgment of a person with or\\nwithout as, c I have", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0267.jp2"}, "268": {"fulltext": "250 construction of the accusative. 150.\\ndone honour to you according to the judgment of the wise\\ni. e. c. as it appears to those who are wise.\\nHence the common phrase, or (scil.\\naccording to my judgment.\\nFor the dative governed by adverbs, see 655 and 664.\\n150. CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE.\\n563. The accusative in Greek, as in other languages, is used\\nto express the immediate object of a transitive active verb, that\\non which its action is exerted, and which is affected by it as,\\nI take the shield. When used to ex-\\npress the remote object of a verb, or after verbs properly intran-\\nsitive, it is governed by a preposition understood.\\n564. Eule XXV. A transitive verb, in the\\nactive or middle voice, governs the accusative as,\\nknow thyself,\\nthey plundered the city,\\nthou honour est a good man.\\n565. Obs. 1. Several verbs in Creek are used in a transitive\\nsense, and have an accusative as their immediate object, which\\nin Latin are considered as intransitive, and followed by some\\nother case. They are chiefly the following viz.,\\n1st. as, to persuade any one.\\n2d. as, to insult any one sometimes\\n3d. as, to injure, or do injustice to any one\\n4th. Several verbs which signify to assist, to profit, to injure as,\\nand with these verbs the\\nadverbs more, very, are expressed by the accusative neuter\\nof the adjectives viz.\\n5th. The verbs as,\\nto remunerate any one\\n566 Note 1. Some of these verbs govern other eases, but then\\nthey generally convey a different idea thus, to assist\\nany one to be useful to any one.\\n567. Obs. 2. Many verbs are followed by an accusative, not\\nof the object on which the action is exerted, but to which it has", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0268.jp2"}, "269": {"fulltext": "150. CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 251\\nnn immediate reference. Verbs thus used are properly intransi-\\ntive, and the accusative is governed by the force of a preposition\\nin composition with the verb, or understood after it. These are\\nsuch as the following viz.,\\n1st. as, to bow the knee to any one,\\nto adore.\\n2d. as, to be a spearsman to any\\none. So also,\\n3d. to be a tutor or guardian.\\n4th. to escape the notice of, or to remain unknown to.\\n5th. to come before, prevent, or anticipate.\\n6 th. to be wanting to, or to fail.\\n7th. to run away from.\\n8th. to ward off or to\\nswear by any one.\\n9th. To these may be added, intransitive verbs expressing some\\nemotion or feeling as, to be ashamed of, or afraid of, any\\none to compassionate any one, c. c, which are followed\\nby the accusative of the object thus,\\nthey respected the rulers who\\nwould rejoice at these things f to be grieved at\\nany thing to take courage with respect to any\\nthing. The accusative in such cases may be governed by a\\npreposition understood as, or by the par-\\nticiple of a transitive active verb, to be supplied as,\\nc. seeing, hearing.\\n568 Note 2. Instead of the accusative, many of these verbs are\\noften followed by a genitive or dative, according to the rules for these\\ncases.\\n569. Obs. 3. Special Kule. The infinitive\\nmood or part of a sentence is often used as the\\nobject of a transitive verb instead of the accusa-\\ntive as,\\nI say that you should all con-\\ntribute.\\nlet him show that I do not\\nSPEAK THE TRUTH.\\n570 Note. The infinitive is also used instead of the genitive and\\ndative after verbs governing these cases. 714.\\n571. Obs. 4. In constructions of this kind, the object of the\\nverb is frequently expressed twice. First, in a noun or pronoun", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0269.jp2"}, "270": {"fulltext": "252 CONSTEUCTION OF THE ACOUS/ FIVE. 150.\\nin the case required by the verb, and Secondly, in a dependent\\nclause as, 1\\nknow men what things they have suffered from love\\nyou fear the lonians lest they revolt\\ndo you remember me what things\\nI did This construction is especially common with the demon-\\nstrative pronoun in\u00c2\u00bb a sort of apposition with the clause which is\\nthe object of the verb, 396-5, 6 it is also sometimes used in\\nLatin (see Lat. Gr. 445, Ohs. 2) but the English idiom requires\\nthese and similar sentences to be rendered as follows know\\nwhat things men have suffered from love v You fear that the\\nlonians will revolt Do you remember what things I did\\n572. Obs. 5. The accusative is often governed by a transi-\\ntive verb or participle understood as,\\n(sc. but thee, (I ask) dost thou confess thou didst\\nthese things 6 (sc. the man with (hav-\\ning) the purple robe.\\n573. Obs. 6. In this way, the words\\nand others, are frequently construed in the accusative as,\\n(sc. a race course {hav-\\ning) the breadth of a stadium.\\n574. Obs. 7. In like manner the accusative, apparently in\\napposition with an entire proposition, or placed in the beginning\\nof a sentence, to express the leading idea, may be considered as\\ndepending on some preposition or verb understood as,\\nlet us slay Helen (sc. in\\norder to or, causing) bitter grief to Menelaus\\naxp (i. e. or as to your mother\\nlet her return.\\n575. Obs. 8. Special Rule. An intransitive\\nverb used transitively, governs the accusative as,\\nto wage war.\\nThis is done\\n1st. When the accusative is a substantive of a similar significa-\\ntion with the word that governs it as, he\\nlives a very agreeable life.\\nNote. To this principle of construction may be referred such phra-\\nses as (soil, to be proud\\n(sc. think as hecometh an immortal.\\n2d. When they only signify to cause that state or feeling which\\nthey express as intransitives as, he caused the", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0270.jp2"}, "271": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7151. ACCUSATIVE AND GENITIVE. 253\\nhand move forward, i. e. lie stretched out the hand at\\ntimat to the fountains caused milk\\nand honey flow i. e. the fountains fiowed with milk and\\nhoney. So Virgil\\nEt durae quercus sudabunt roscida mella.\\n576. Obs. 9. A passive verb used in an active sense governs\\nthe accusative, 195, Obs. 5, and 612 as, they\\nrefused a passage.\\n\u00c2\u00a7151. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE AND\\nGENITIVE.\\n577. Many transitive active verbs, together with the accusa-\\ntive of the direct object, govern also another word to which the\\naction has an indirect or remote reference, in the genitive, dative,\\nor accusative, as the nature of that reference may require.\\n5 8, Rule XXVI. Verbs of accusing, con-\\ndemning, acquitting, and the like, govern the ac-\\ncusative of the person with the genitive of the\\ncrime as,\\nI accuse you of cowardice,\\nI acquit you of this blame.\\n579. The genitive after verbs of accusing, is often governed,\\nby a preposition or some other word interposed, by which the ex~\\npression is rendered more emphatic as,\\nhe accused me of these same\\nthings,\\nI accuse thee of a capital\\ncrime,\\nto be accused of murder.\\n580. Obs. 1. Verbs of accusing, c. are such as\\nto accuse or criminate\\nto be accused, or to defend to gain one s suit to\\nlose one s suit to judge to commence a suit\\nand to blame, c.\\nc. to acquit.\\n581. Obs. 2. Verbs of this signification compounded with\\ntake the person in the genitive, and the crime or punish-\\n12", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0271.jp2"}, "272": {"fulltext": "25-i ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE. 152.\\nment in the accusative; as, they charge\\nsedition against you. Sometimes the crime or punishment is\\nalso in the genitive as, or\\nbut the punishment, seldom, except the word and the\\ncrime, only after as,\\n582. Obs. 3. Verbs of accusing sometimes govern the dative\\nas, I accuse thee of treason.\\n583. Rule XXVII. Verbs of hearing, enquir-\\ning, learning, fcc. govern the genitive of the per-\\nson with the accusative of the thing as,\\nhe heard these things from the\\nmessenger.\\nto hear any thing from any one.\\nThe genitive here is probably governed by or\\n152. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE AND\\nDATIVE.\\n584. A transitive active verb governs the accusative and\\ndative when, together with the immediate object of the action, it\\nis followed by the person or thing in relation to which it was ex-\\nerted. The more common constructions of this kind are com-\\nprehended under the following rule viz.,\\n585. Rule XXVIII. Verbs of comparing,\\ngiving, declaring, promising, and taking away,\\ngovern the accusative and dative as,\\n/promise you ten talents,\\nto avert the plague from others.\\n586. Obs. 1. After verbs of promising, declaring, and the\\nlike, the promise or declaration, forming part of a sentence, and\\nsometimes a number of sentences, often stands as the accusative\\nwith the dative of the person as,\\nAlexander ordered the Cheeks vote him a god.\\niaoi ti tell me what you would do\\nwith HIM.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0272.jp2"}, "273": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7153. VERBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVES. 255\\n587. Obs. 2. Instead of the dative of the person, the accusa-\\ntive with is often used, and sometimes without it.\\n588. Obs. 3. In all constructions under this rule, both in Latin\\nand Greek, the verb, together with the accusative after it, is to be re-\\ngarded aa expressing the amount of what is done to the remote object\\nin the dative. Thus in the expression narras fabulam surdo, the words\\nnarras fabulam express the whole amount of what is done (surdo) the\\ndeaf man. With verbs of taking away, the English idiom requires the\\ndative to be rendered by from; as, eripuit mihi gladium, he forced the\\nsword away from me. On this account, some have supposed that the\\ndative in such expressions in Latin is governed by some such word as\\nexisientem understood and others, to obviate the difficulty, have given\\nthe Greek an ablative. All this perplexity arises evidently from over-\\nlooking the principle of the construction. While the English idiom ex-\\npresses that from which a thing is taken away, the Latin and Greek,\\nwith no less elegance, on the general principle of the rule, express in\\nthe dative, that which the act of taking away is done. Thus in the\\nabove expression, the words eripuit gladium together, express what 13\\ndone (mihi) me. So also Terence Seni animam extinguerem ipsi\\nadolescenti oculos eriperem, the old man, I would put out the\\nbreath the young man, I would put out the eyes. In Greek,\\nThemistis, he took away the cup i. e. taking away\\nthe cup was what he did Themistis according to the English idiom,\\nhe took away the cup from Themistis. [See Hunter s Notes on Liv. B. I.\\nChap. I. line 2. JEnese Antenorique, fec]\\n589. Obs. 4. Verbs of giving, govern the genitive and da-\\ntive when their direct object is in the genitive, according to Rule\\nXV. as, I share the property\\nwith you.\\n153. VERBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVES.\\n590. Many verbs are followed by the accusative not only of\\nthe immediate, but also of the remote object hence,\\n591. Rule XXIX. Verbs of asking and teach-\\ning, clothing, concealing, depriving speaking or\\ndoing well or ill to, and some others, govern two\\naccusatives, the one of a person, the other of a\\nthing; as,\\nthey sought money from the\\nThebans.\\nthey teach their youths pro-\\nbity.\\nwhat shall I do to him", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0273.jp2"}, "274": {"fulltext": "256 VEEBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVES. \u00c2\u00a7153.\\n592. Obs. 1. The immediate object of verbs which signify\\nto do or to speak is the action done or the word spoken\\nthe remote object is the person or thing to which it is done or\\nspoken; thus,\\n(scil. to do good to any one.\\n(sc. to speak evil of any one.\\n593. Instead of these adjectives with verbs of this significa-\\ntion, the adverbs and are frequently joined thus,\\nto do a person evil to speak well\\nof a person. Sometimes these words are in composition with the\\nverb; as, in which\\nthe accusative becomes the direct object, and is governed by the\\ncompound transitive verb; as, to maltreat a\\nperson. This corresponds to the English mode of expression, to\\nmaltreat a person, to eulogize a person.\\n594. On the same principle several verbs, such as\\nc. which are usually followed by a dative, fre-\\nquently take an accusative; as,\\nto abuse the whole city.\\n595. Obs. 2. When a verb admits of either of the words\\nthat follow it, as its immediate object, they are both put in the\\naccusative thus, to clothe a person with\\na tunic, and, to put a tunic on a person, convey the same idea.\\n596. Obs. 3. A transitive verb, besides the accusative of the\\nimmediate object, may be followed by the accusative of a noun\\nof similar signification with itself; as, ov\\nwhom Jupiter loves with great affection\\nhe conquered the barbarians\\nin the battle of Marathon\\nthey bound all the soldiers with the\\ngreatest oaths.\\n597. Obs. 4. When with a noun derived from a\\ntransitive verb, is used as a circumlocution for the verb itself, it\\nwill of course be followed by two accusatives thus,\\nfor for\\nfor as,\\nplundering the furniture and slaves sc.\\nmaking plunder of c.\\n598. 06s. 5. Verbs which signify to call, or name, choose,\\nreckon, make, constitute, and the like, besides the accusative of the\\nobject, take also the accusative of the name, office, character, g", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0274.jp2"}, "275": {"fulltext": "154. CASES CONSTRUCTED WITH PASSIVE VOICE. 257\\nascribed to it; as, he appointed\\nBin general. In this construction the verb is frequently\\ninterposed thus, or\\nthai, they call the man a philosopher, 743-2d.\\n599. Obs. 6. The accusative neuter of pronouns and adjec-\\ntives is often admitted in this construction, as well as with verbs\\nwhich govern the genitive or dative, when the accusative of the\\nsubstantive could not be used as,\\nhe injured me in this,\\nfor what may I use it\\n600. Obs. 7. Instead of the second accusative, many verbs\\nunder this rule frequently take the genitive or dative and, on\\nthe other hand, some verbs which are usually followed by an ac-\\ncusative with the genitive or dative, sometimes take the double\\naccusative thus, og (for\\nwho verily inflicted many evils on men\\nand to deprive a person of his goods.\\n601. Obs. 8. The second accusative is often to be explained\\nby a preposition after such verbs as\\nand verbs which signify to divide, as,\\nc. as, to invite a person to\\na treaty\\nCyrus divided the army into twelve parts.\\n602. Note. With verbs of dividing, the whole which is divided is\\nsometimes put in the genitive, and the word referred\\nto the verb as, the tribes of the Per-\\nsians were divided into twelve, for, the Persians were divided into twelve\\ntribes elkfv f xai innkwv -/.at literally, he divided\\nthe parts of cavalry and infantry into six i. e. he divided the cavalry\\nand infantry into six parts. This construction is imitated in Latin, Cic.\\nde Orat. Deinde eorum generum quasi qucedam membra dispertiat, for ea\\ngenera quasi in quazdam membra, o.\\n154. CONSTRUCTION OF CASES WITH THE PASSIVE\\nVOICE.\\n603. The passive voice is usually followed by a genitive of\\nthe doer, governed by the prepositions and\\nconsequently, the government of the case falls under the rules for\\nprepositions as, be not overcome of evil.\\nSometimes, though very seldom, it follows the preposition in the\\ndative as, to be governed by viceroys.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0275.jp2"}, "276": {"fulltext": "258 CASES CONSTRUCTED WITH PASSIVE VOICE. 154\\nBut instead of this, and equivalent to it, the dative without a pre-\\nposition is common hence the two following rules viz.,\\n604. Rule XXX. Passive verbs frequently\\ngovern the dative of the doer as,\\nthe affairs of the city were con-\\nducted by them,\\nit has been done by me.\\n605. Note. This construction most commonly takes place with the\\nperfect passive, and the dative is equivalent to the genitive with\\nwhich is in common use as also and sometimes in or\\nand On the same principle, the verbal adjectives in and\\nhaving a passive signification, govern the dative of the doer, 528.\\n606. Rule XXXI. When a verb in the active\\nvoice governs two cases, in the passive it retains\\nthe latter case as,\\nI am accused of theft\\nall power is given to me.\\nbeing taught music by Lam-\\nprus.\\n607. Obs. 1. Any passive verb may be followed by an ac-\\ncusative of similar signification with itself, on the principle laid\\ndown 596 as, he is struck with many\\nblows.\\n608. Obs. 2. When a verb in the active voice governs the\\naccusative with the dative of a person, the passive frequently re-\\ntains the former case, the latter being used as the subject of the\\nverb. Thus, the same idea may be expressed in three different\\nways; viz.,\\n1st. With the active voice as,\\nthe people committed the care of the\\ncity to Lycurgus.\\n2d. By the passive voice with the latter case as,\\nthe man-\\nagement of the city was entrusted to Lycurgus.\\n3d. By the passive voice with the former case, according to the\\nObs. as,\\nLycurgus was entrusted with the manage\\nof the city by the people.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0276.jp2"}, "277": {"fulltext": "155. COXSTR JCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 259\\nThe following are examples of this construction 01\\nftp those entrusted with the watch for cpv-\\nXcua she is torn from\\nmy hands for\\n609. Hence, also, such phrases as the following\\nthe Ethiopians girded until panthers skins\\nhe leaves a tablet inscri-\\nbed with writings because in the active voice it would have\\nbeen\\nThe accusative, in almost all such cases, may be explained\\nby supplying This construction is not used in Latin, ex-\\ncept in a few instances, which are manifest Grsecisms e. g., in-\\nscripti nomina rcgum fores, flowers inscribed with the names\\nof kings. Lat. Gr. 525.\\n6 1 0. Note. This construction, used in Latin only as a Grsecism, is\\ncommon in English with such verbs as, to ask, teach, offer, promise,\\npay, tell, allow, deny, and the like as, He allowed me great liberty\\npassively, great liberty was allowed me, or, I was allowed great liberty.\\nSo, They were offered (to) me, or, I was offered them. See Ana-\\nlytical and Practical English Grammar, 812, 813. Crombie s Etymolo-\\ngy, P\u00e2\u0080\u00a2 2?0.\\n611. Obs. 3. On the same principle the part affected (505-3),\\nis often put in the accusative after the passive voice thus, instead\\nof my wound is bound up, the genitive\\nis changed into the nominative to the verb, and the nominative\\nor part affected into the accusative thus,\\nI am bound up as to my wound\\nliterally, Prometheus was torn out as to his\\nliver i. e. his liver was torn out. See also 622.\\n612. Obs. 4. When the passive is used in a middle sense\\n(195, Obs. 5). it becomes deponent, and may be followed by an\\naccusative in the same manner as the active voice as,\\nhaving provided every thing, they sailed\\nthey refused a passage, 5*76.\\n\u00c2\u00a7155. CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES.\\n613. Words and phrases are often thrown in between the\\nparts of a sentence in an adverbial manner, to express some cir-\\ncumstance connected with the idea of the simple sentence, and\\nwhich do not depend for their case on any word in the sentence", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0277.jp2"}, "278": {"fulltext": "260 EEMOTE CAUSE OR ORIGIN. 156.\\nto which they belong, but on a preposition, or adverb, or other\\nword understood as,\\nhe advanced two days journey to Issus, and\\nremained there three days.\\nevery thing was done with\\nGREAT HASTE.\\nUnder the general name of circumstances may be included\\nwords which indicate, 1. The remote cause or origin, 156 2\\nA particular qualification or direction of a general expression,\\n157 3. Cause, manner, or instrument, 158 4. Place, 159\\n5. Time, 160 6. Measure, 161 1. Price, 162 8. Excla-\\nmation, 163.\\n156. I. THE EEMOTE CAUSE OR ORIGIN.\\n614. Exile XXXII. The cause, source, or ori-\\ngin, and trie part affected, are put in the genitive\\nas,\\nhappy from his fortune.\\nhe loves him on account of his virtue.\\nto take a wolf by the ears.\\n615. Obs. 1. Instead of the genitive, the accusative is often\\nused, governed by c. understood.\\n616. Obs. 2. The circumstance of cause expressed by the\\ngenitive, differs from that expressed by the dative the genitive\\nexpresses the remote or moving cause the dative, the immediate\\nor effective cause.\\n617. Obs. 3. The material of which a thing is made is ex-\\npressed in the genitive as, rafts made of\\nskins. See 456.\\n618 Note. The genitive of the material is considered by some\\ngrammarians as depending on or understood and an argument\\nin favour of this ellipsis is drawn from the circumstance of or\\nbeing sometimes expressed. In all such passages, the preposition seems\\nto contain a more direct reference to the material than could be done\\nby the common construction, especially if a passive participle be like-\\nwise used as, l\u00c2\u00a3 a seat made of adamant.\\nSometimes the dative is used for the genitive, when the material of", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0278.jp2"}, "279": {"fulltext": "157. CIRCUMSTANCES OF LIMITATION. 261\\nwhich any thing is made may be considered also as the means by which\\nit is made; a*, at at d\\nsome were made of hor t some of ivory.\\n\u00c2\u00a7157. CIRCUMSTANCES OF LIMITATION.\\n619. A particular qualification of a general expression, made\\nin English by the phrase in respect of with regard to is\\nexpressed by the genitive and dative or, more briefly, as fol-\\nlows\\n620. Kule XXXIII. Respect wherein is ex-\\npressed in the genitive, sometimes in the dative,\\n444.\\nI. In the Genitive as,\\nI ant very near him in respect of kin.\\nthick with trees.\\nnear {in respect of) each other.\\n621. The genitive is used\\n1. After gya, in the sense of to be (se habere), with such adverbs\\nas c. as,\\nhe is so in respect of learning to be\\npretty drunk is used in the same way as,\\nTellus being well advanced in (respect of) life.\\n2. After other verbs as, to be in haste with\\nrespect to the battle.\\n3. After adjectives as, childless with\\nrespect to sons i. e. without male offspring.\\n4. With adverbs as, to carry it far with\\nrespect to virtue.\\n5. AYith substantives as, the relation con-\\ncerning Chios.\\n6. With entire propositions as,\\nif he possesses any care of his\\nfather, in respect of his appearing to prosper.\\n622. Obs. 1. Respect wherein is also put in the accusative\\ngoverned by understood viz., when the idea expressed by\\na verb or adjective is to be more accurately determined by an\\nadditional circumstance as, I am pained\\n12*", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0279.jp2"}, "280": {"fulltext": "262 CIRCUMSTANCES OF LIMITATION. \u00c2\u00a7157.\\nIN my finger ov inferior nei-\\nther in body nor mind Achilles swift\\nOF FOOT.\\n623. Note 1. This is the construction so often imitated by the Latin\\npoets thus, Os humerosque deo similis. Lat. Gr. 538.\\n624. Note 2. The accusative in this construction is in signification\\nadverbial, and hence is frequently used as an adverb thus, above\\nall, originally quickly finally at first, c,\\nbeing understood. So also such expressions as on the\\ncontrary according to the proverb, c.\\nII. In the Dative.\\n625. This case is used in a sense nearly similar,\\nto express that with respect to which a thing is\\naffirmed to he or take place. This usage, in Greek,\\nmay be illustrated by the following examples\\n1. he was worthy of death, with\\nrespect the state i. e. he was guilty of a capital crime\\nagainst the state.\\n2. and now they\\nlaid aside their grievous anger against (with respect to) Tele-\\nmachus so I will\\npray him to lay aside his anger against Achilles.\\n3. the\\nsurface of the body was not very hot when one touched it\\n(lit. with respect to one touching it).\\n4.\\nEpidamnus is a city on the right hand as you enter\\n(with respect to one entering) the Ionian bay.\\n5. the twelfth day since he lay\\n(to him lying).\\n6. eg\\nthe Egyptians themselves tell how many years passed\\nfrom Hercules (or since the death of Hercules) to Amasis.\\n*7. looking for the advantage (or\\npleasure) of Menelaus.\\n8. dancing in honour gods.\\n626. Bern. Respect wherein is also sometimes expressed in\\nthe dative governed by understood as\\nswift of foot.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0280.jp2"}, "281": {"fulltext": "158. CAUSE, MANNER, AND INSTRUMENT. 263\\n158. THE CAUSE, MANNER, AND INSTRUMENT.\\n627. Rule XXXIV. The cause, manner, and\\ninstrument, are put in the dative as,\\nI did it from fear.\\nit happened in this manner.\\nto strike with a stick.\\n628. Obs. 1. The cause or motive may be considered as in-\\nterned or external. The internal cause represents the act as pro-\\nceeding from some particular state or disposition of the subject,\\nor quality residing in it, and contains the answer to the question\\nfrom what? or whence? and consequently may generally be ren-\\ndered from I speak from good-will. The\\nexternal cause represents the action as caused by something with-\\nout the agent, and may generally be rendered for, on ac-\\ncount of, sometimes according to, in consequence of; as,\\nelated with, or in consequence of riches\\nfor (i. e. in order to) the re-establishment of\\nthe Leontines, the motive being derived from the end\\n7\u00ce\u00b6\u00ce\u00bd\u00ce\u00bb\u00cf\u008e\u00ce\u00bd, I am astonished at the shutting\\nup of my gates.\\n629. Obs. 2. In this construction the dative expresses the\\nnearer or immediate cause, the more remote being usually ex-\\npressed by the genitive, or by with the accusative (615); as,\\nthey (the\\nLacedemonians) gave way, from the weakness of their bodies in-\\nduced BY WANT OF PROVISIONS.\\n630. Obs. 3. The dative of the cause is probably governed\\nby the preposition or understood. Sometimes\\nthey are expressed but whether with or without a preposition,\\nthe whole expression is adverbial in its nature and hence, disre-\\ngarding its case, a neuter adjective or pronoun is sometimes piy,\\nin the same construction with it, in the accusative as,\\nif the body of\\na person was large naturally, or by nourishment, or both\\n631. Obs. 4. The dative of the manner is governed by iv\\nor understood, and may be considered as adverbial. Hence,\\nperhaps, verbs of punishing are followed by the punishment in\\nthe dative; as, c. to punish any\\none with death, with banishment, c.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0281.jp2"}, "282": {"fulltext": "264 CIRCUMSTANCES OF PLACE. 159.\\n632. Obs. 5. The dative of the instrument or mean may be\\na person as, he built the wall by\\nMEANS OF THOSE WHO WERE PRESENT. It IS also put With Sub-\\nstantives as, motions made with the\\nBODY.\\n633. Note. Hence the construction of with the dative;\\nthat which we use being considered as an instrument. On the same\\nprinciple, the dative is put after other verbs which imply the idea of\\nusing; to infer from what was\\ngranted i. e. to use as proofs the things formerly granted.\\n634. Obs. 6. Instead of the dative, the prepositions\\nwith their cases, are sometimes used.\\n\u00c2\u00a7159. IV. CIBCUMSTANCES OF PLAGE.\\n635. The oircumstances of place respect motion to, or from,\\nor through, a place, and motion or rest in a place in all of\\nwhich the Greek writers generally use a proper name with a\\npreposition thus, from Athens to\\nBritain in Pylos through the city.\\nBut,\\n636. Rule XXX Y. The place where, without\\na preposition, is expressed in the genitive or da-\\ntive; as,\\nat Argos at Marathon.\\n637. Obs. 1. In this construction the genitive may be gov-\\nerned by or and the dative by understood. The\\npreposition is also often understood before common nouns de-\\nnoting place as, they two come to the tent.\\n638. Obs. 2. The genitive after to a place, or in a\\nplace, is governed by a substantive understood as, (sc.\\nto Hades (sc. at Argos, 451.\\n639. Obs. 3. The terminations fti and added to a noun,\\ndenote at a place as, in the country at\\nThebes and a place as, to Athens\\nto the tent and from a place as,\\nhe took a spear from the tent, 324.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0282.jp2"}, "283": {"fulltext": "160, 161. CIRCUMSTANCES OF MEASURE. 265\\n\u00c2\u00a7160. V. CIRCUMSTANCES OF TIME.\\n640. Kule XXXVI. Time when is put in the\\ndative time how long, in the accusative thus,\\nwhen as, tgi ty, on the third day.\\nhow long as, he remained\\nthree whole months.\\n641. Obs. 1. When the reference is to a fixed time at which\\na thing took place, the dative is used as in the rule but if the\\nidea of duration is implied, it is put in the accusative as,\\nby day and by night sometimes in the\\ngenitive as, Her-\\ncules distressed us informer years.\\n642. Obs. 2. Time how long, may respect the time during\\nwhich, since which, or after which, some event took place. The\\nfirst is put in the accusative, as above the second is more com-\\nmonly expressed in the genitive as,\\nxa I have not seen them for a long time; the third,\\ngenerally in the dative as, not ma-\\nny days after. But sometimes in the genitive, when protracted\\nand indefinite as, he\\ncomes not thither in ten thousand years. In this, however,\\nthere is some variety.\\n\u00c2\u00a7161. VI. CIRCUMSTANCES OF MEASURE.\\nThe circumstances of measure respect magnitude, distance,\\nand the measure of excess, as follows\\n643. Rule XXXVII. The measure of magni-\\ntude is put in the genitive as,\\na statue of twelve cubits.\\n644.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Rule XXXVIII. The measure of dis-\\ntance is put in the accusative, sometimes in the\\ndative as,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0283.jp2"}, "284": {"fulltext": "206 EXCLAMATION. 162, 163.\\nor Ephesus is distant\\nthree days 1 journey.\\nthe water rose fifteen\\nCUBITS.\\n645. Obs. When measure of magnitude or distance is found\\nin the nominative after a substantive verb, or in\u00e2\u0080\u00a2 the accusative\\nafter an infinitive, the construction is according to 436.\\n646. Rule XXXIX. The measure of excess is\\nput in the dative after the comparative degree\\nas,\\nolder by a year.\\n647. Obs. Hence the expressions fcc\\nwith the comparative. It is, however, sometimes put in the ac-\\ncusative as, much greater much\\nbetter.\\n162. VII. CIKCUMSTANCE OF PRICE.\\n648. Rule XL. The price of a thing is put in\\nthe genitive as,\\ngive this for a drachma.\\n649. Obs. The price is put sometimes in the dative, with the\\npreposition expressed or understood as,\\nfor a great reward. Sometimes in the accusative as,\\n6 the wicked man sells every thing\\nfor silver.\\n163. VIII. EXCLAMATION.\\n650. Rule XLI. Exclamations of praise, in-\\ndignation, compassion, c, are put in the geni-\\ntive, sometimes in the accusative as,\\nthe impudence I\\nAlas the man.\\nwretched me", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0284.jp2"}, "285": {"fulltext": "164, 165. ADVERBS AS PREPOSITIONS. 267\\n651. Obs. Sometimes with the genitive, there is an addition\\nof the nominative as, ah my mise-\\nries. y Ic6 t and govern the dative as, woe\\nis me.\\n164. CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS.\\n652. Adverbs are joined to adjectives, verbs, and other ad-\\nverbs, to express some circumstance, quality, or manner, of their\\nsignification.\\n653. Many adverbs in Greek have the force of prepositions\\nin Latin and English. These are often joined with substantives,\\nas will appear in the following rules. They are also sometimes\\nused as substantives or adjectives as, anb from that time\\n6 the outward man. 3*73-2d.\\n654. Rule XLII. Derivative adverbs com-\\nmonly govern the case of their primitives as,\\nin a manner worthy of us.\\nmost of all.\\nin a manner similar to the rest,\\nvija, without the ship.\\n\u00c2\u00a7165. ADVERBS AS PREPOSITIONS.\\n655. Adverbs having the force of prepositions govern the\\nsame case with the prepositions which, in meaning, they resem-\\nble thus, together, having the force of govern\\nthe dative on account of resembling governs the\\ngenitive. This general principle authorizes the two following\\nrules\\n656. Rule XLIII. Some adverbs of time,\\nplace, and quantity, likewise of number, order, and\\nexception, govern the genitive as,\\nov where am I?\\nto this day.\\n657. Obs. 1. To these may be added adverbs of cause, cow.-", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0285.jp2"}, "286": {"fulltext": "268 ADVERBS AS PREPOSITIONS. 165.\\nparison, distinction, concealment, separation, or exclamation and\\nalso nouns used adverbially, as, c. as,\\nlike rivers.\\n658. The adverbs which come under this rule are the follow-\\ning without\\nagainst, opposite to, even to\\non account of; near\\nwithout within\\nexcept, but among be-\\nhind before beyond, c.\\n659. Exc. 1. and sometimes govern the dative.\\n660. Exc. 2. except, has sometimes the nominative\\nafter it; as, ol except the\\nteachers of the boys.\\n66 1 Note. Adverbs of the final cause are frequently omitted as,\\nI wrote for this reason, sup. IWxa.\\n662. Obs. 2. Adverbs of time, place, c. are frequently\\nchanged by the poets into adjectives; as,\\nthey propitiated the god with song the\\nwhole DAT. 381.\\n663. Certain adverbs are joined sometimes with one case,\\nand sometimes with another as follows\\n1st.\\nare put with the gen-\\nitive or DATIVE.\\n2d. oftener with\\nthe GENITIVE.\\n3d. oftener with the dative.\\n4th. or with the genitive\\naccusative.\\n5th. with the dative or accusative.\\n6th. with the genitive, dative, or ac-\\ncusative.\\nfi64. Eule XLIV. Adverbs of accompanying\\ngovern the dative as,\\nat day-break.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0286.jp2"}, "287": {"fulltext": "1\\n166. NEGATIVES. 269\\n06 5. Rule XL V. Adverbs of swearing govern\\nthe accusative as,\\nby Jupiter by this sceptre.\\n666. Obs. 3. In sentences of this kind, commonly denies,\\nunless joined with and affirms, unless joined with a nega-\\ntive.\\n667. Obs. 4. Adverbs of showing are put with the nomina-\\ntive as, 6 behold the man\\nbehold my mother and my brethren.\\n\u00c2\u00a7166. NEGATIVES.\\n668. The Greek language has two simple negatives, ov and\\nfrom which all the compound negative terms are formed, and to\\nwhich, in their use and manner of construction, they are similar.\\nBetween these two negatives and their respective compounds there\\nis a total diiference of use, the foundation of which is as follows\\n669. 1. Ov is the direct and independent negative, which\\nexpresses a positive denial without reference to any thing else\\nas, ovx I will not it is not good ov-\\nno one was present. A direct negation of this kind\\ncan never be expressed by or its compounds.\\n670. 2. on the other hand, is uniformly a dependent\\nnegative. It is therefore used in all propositions in which the\\nnegative is represented, not as a fact, but as something dependent\\non the conception, as a condition, supposition, c. and hence\\nit is used in the manner following\\n1st. After the conditional conjunctions or\\nand those which intimate an end, design, motive, as,\\nas, if I do not\\nspeak correctly he\\n(Solon) went away that he might not be compelled, c.\\n2d. Without any such particle, is always put with the im-\\nperative mood in all the tenses with the subjunctive, in the\\naorists used imperatively and with the optative, when it ex-\\npresses a wish as, or do not\\nstrike me may it not be.\\n3d. is used after relatives, and with participles when they\\nexpress a condition or supposition as,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0287.jp2"}, "288": {"fulltext": "270 DOUBLE NEGATIVES. \u00c2\u00a7167.\\nwho can give a thing to another,\\nif he has it not himself? would mean,\\nthat which he has not himself. So also, if a\\nperson does not believe. But is, one who\\ndoes not believe.\\n4th. is used with infinitives whether they are dependent upon\\nanother verb, or used with the article as a verbal noun (714)\\nas, it is necessary not to do this\\nthe not doing.\\n5 th. With verbs which signify to fear, to warn, and the like,\\nis used, like ne in Latin, where a positive expression is used\\nin English as, vereor ne quid acci-\\ndat, am afraid that something mag happen. Sometimes\\nthe preceding verb is understood as,\\n(scil. I fear lest this be otherwise.\\nSo also, after verbs which signify to forbid, deny, prevent,\\nrefrain, disbelieve, to be cautious, and the like, it is frequently\\nput with the infinitive, where the negative is not used in\\nEnglish as, I forbid this man\\nto enter.\\n6th. is sometimes merely an interrogative particle like num\\nin Latin, giving, however, greater emphasis to the question\\nas, wilt thou kill me\\n671. 3. A negative placed between the article and its noun,\\nconverts it into a sort of compound negative term as,\\nthe not destroying of the bridges\\nthe inexperience.\\n672. Rem. In the same manner, it is used with certain verbs,\\nnot as a negative, but to reverse their meaning; thus, I say,\\nI deny, contradict I allow, I forbid\\nI promise, 1 refuse thus,\\ndoes not signify, they did not say that this\\nwas, but, they denied that this was, or, they said this was not.\\n16V. DOUBLE NEGATIVES.\\n673. When to a proposition already negative, and also to\\nverbs which signify to deny, to contradict, to hinder or oppose,\\nand the like, other qualifications of a general nature are to be\\nattached such as ever, any body, any where, c. it is usual to", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0288.jp2"}, "289": {"fulltext": "167. DOUBLE NEGATIVES. 271\\ndo this by compounds of the same negative. Hence the follow-\\ning rules\\n674. Rule XL VI. Two or more negatives,\\njoined to the same verb, strengthen the negation\\nas,\\nno one any wl^re did this.\\n675. Obs. 1. To the negation of the whole, is joined, in the\\nsame sentence, the negation of the parts as,\\nhe can neither speak nor act.\\nNote. Consequently, in translating such propositions into English,\\nonly one negative can be used.\\n676. Rule XLYII. Two or more negatives\\njoined to different verbs, destroy the negation,\\nand are equivalent to an affirmative as,\\nwe cannot but speak,\\nthere is nobody who will not laugh, i. e.\\nevery body will laugh being understood with\\n677. Obs. 2. Indeed, so common is the ellipsis of in\\nthis expression, that it is lost sight of, and the antecedent\\nwhich should be its nominative, is often attracted into the case\\nof the relative which follows as, there\\nis nobody whom it does not please, for c.\\nhe caused every one to weep, for\\nc. there is no one whom he did not cause to\\nweep.\\n678. 05s. 3. It is also proper to observe the use of the nega-\\ntive in such sentences as the following\\n6 Philip does not write these\\nthings and not perform them i. e. think not that Philip writes\\nthese things and does not execute them where the first does\\nnot affect the verb but the two propositions together. It\\ndenies an assertion which might be thus expressed\\nhe writes but does not execute. So also\\nuh\\nit cannot be that there is some object in the la-\\nbours of the artist, but none in the life of man.\\n679. Note. Id phrases of tins kind, the two propositions, as here,\\nare usually distinguished by and and the second is negative.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0289.jp2"}, "290": {"fulltext": "272 peepositions. 168.\\n680. Obs. 4. some phrases ov and are united as, ov\\nand ov. Ov is a stronger and more emphatic negation\\nthan ov, and is used in the same way, 669. ov, in general,\\nis only a stronger expression of and is used in the same man-\\nner, subject, however, to the following modifications\\n1st. In dependent propositions, when the verb of the principal\\nproposition is either accompanied by a negation, or contains\\na negative idea in itself, ov destroy each other, and may\\ngenerally be rendered that; as, ova\\nI do not deny that it has taken place\\nov for I am\\npersuaded that there will nothing happen to me so bad but\\nthat shall die nobly.\\n2d. ov, after verbs signifying to fear, to warn, c, as above,\\n670-5th, render the sentence negative, which, with alone,\\nwould be positive as, I am afraid\\nlest something may not happen r[,\\nvereor ne non honestum sit, fear that this may not be\\nproper.\\n3d. In independent propositions with the subjunctive mood,\\njoined with ov makes the negative expression less positive\\nas, y but virtue may per-\\nhaps be a thing not to be taught. The sentence may be ex-\\nplained by supplying an omitted verb, as or the like,\\nand be rendered literally but see whether virtue may not\\nbe, q.\\n\u00c2\u00a7168. PREPOSITIONS.\\n681. Prepositions are used to express the relation in which\\none thing stands to another. For the primary and various de-\\nrived meanings of prepositions in different constructions, see 124.\\nThe influence they exert over the words with which they are\\njoined, as far as it respects their case, is regulated by the follow-\\ning rules\\n682.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Eule XLVIII. or and\\ngovern the genitive only as,\\nan eye for an eye.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0290.jp2"}, "291": {"fulltext": "168. prepositions. 273\\n683. Rule XLIX. 3 Ev and govern tne da-\\ntive.\\n684. Rule L. (or and govern the\\naccusative.\\nObs. 1. among the poets, also governs the dative.\\n685. Rule LI. Aia, govern\\nthe genitive or accusative.\\n686. Obs. 2. among the poets, also governs the da-\\ntive of a plural noun, or a noun of multitude as,\\n687. Rule LII.\\nand govern tne genitive, dative, or accusa-\\ntive.\\nNote. For the meaning of the prepositions, as modified by the case\\nwith which they are joined, see 124.\\n688. Obs. 3. Prepositions are often used as adverbs, their\\ncase being understood. This is the case especially with in the\\nIonic and in the Attic. Hence, in the Ionic writers, they\\nare often put twice, once adverbially without a case, and again\\nwith a case or in composition with a verb as,\\nin Memphis also.\\n689. Obs. 4. Prepositions are sometimes separated from\\ntheir case as, as r-j/ In Attic,\\nthis takes place, according* to the rule, with the coni unctions\\nas,\\nand with with the genitive when it signifies per.\\n690. Obs. 5. Prepositions are often put after their case, par-\\nticularly by the Ionic and Doric writers, and the Attic poets as,\\nIn the Attic prose writers, it takes place\\nonly in with the genitive. When so placed, the accent is\\nalways thrown back to the first syllable thus, fcc.\\n691. Obs. 6. When a preposition should stand twice with\\ntwo different nouns, it is often put only once by the poets, and\\nthat too with the second noun as, Horn, by\\nsea or land.\\n692. Obs. 7. A preposition is frequently understood.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0291.jp2"}, "292": {"fulltext": "274 THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 169, 170.\\n\u00c2\u00a7169. PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION.\\n693. Rule LIII. A preposition in composition\\nsometimes governs the same case as when it stands\\nby itself; as,\\nrijg he went out from the house.\\n694. Obs. 1. This is done when the preposition can be sepa-\\nrated from the verb, and joined with the substantive, without\\naltering the sense.\\n695. Obs 2. In Homer, Herodotus, and other old writers,\\nthe preposition is frequently found separated by one or more\\nwords from that with which it may be considered in composition\\nas, (II. 1. 67), for\\n(Herod. 3. 36), for\\nHence, when the verb is to be repeated several times, after\\nthe first time, the proposition only is often used as,\\nGrammarians, however, consider the prepo-\\nsition in such cases as used adverbially, and not properly in com-\\nposition. Instances of the proper tmesis are very rare, especially\\nin the Attic prose writers.\\nSYNTAX OF THE VERB.\\n\u00c2\u00a7170. THE INDICATIVE MOOD.\\n696. The indicative mood is used, in Greek, when any thing\\nis to be represented as actually existing or happening, and as a\\nthing independent of the thought and ideas of the speaker. Hence\\nit is often used where the subjunctive, and sometimes the accusa-\\ntive with the infinitive, would be used in Latin as,\\n1. It is used after negative propositions with the relative as,\\nthere is no one who does this.\\nLat. nemo est qui hoc faciat. Lat. Gr. 636.\\n2. It is used in indirect interrogations, where the Latin re-\\nquires the subjunctive as, you see what\\nwe are doing. Lat. vides quid faciamus. Lat. Gr. 627.\\n3. It is used in quoting the language of another, stating what\\nis actual and fact, after c, where the Latin uses the", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0292.jp2"}, "293": {"fulltext": "170. THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 275\\naccusative with the infinitive, or the subjunctive with quod as,\\nhe announced that the enemy ivere\\nfleeing. Lat nunciavit hostes fugere, or hoc nunciavit, quod hos-\\ntes fugerent.\\nTHE INDICATIVE T N CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS.\\n697. The indicative, m Greek, is used in conditional propo-\\nsitions in various ways, as follows\\n1 When the thing supposed in the condition is regarded as\\na fact, and neither contingent nor uncertain, the indicative in any\\ntense is used with et in the condition, followed by the indicative\\nor imperative, and sometimes by the subjunctive used impera-\\ntively (709), without av in the conclusion as,\\nfttoi, if there are altars, there are also gods el\\nif it thundered [as it did), it also lightened;\\nif it shall thunder, it will also lighten.\\nThis accords with the Latin construction. Lat. Gr. 624-2.\\n2. When the thing supposed in the condition is not a fact, or\\nwhen a denial of it is implied, the indicative in the past tenses is\\nused with in the condition, and with av in the conclusion\\nand here there are three cases viz.,\\n1st. WTien the reference is to present time, or to past and pres-\\nent time, the imperfect tense is used in both parts as,\\nif he had any thing (now), he would give it.\\nLat. si quid haberet, daret.\\n2d. When the reference in both clauses is to past time, the aorist\\nmust be used instead of the imperfect in both, or, at least,\\nin one of them as, if I had had any\\nthing, I would have given it. Lat. si quid habuissem, dedis-\\nsem he\\nwould not have foretold it, unless he Iwd believed he would\\nspeak the truth.\\n3d. When the condition refers to past time, and the conclusion\\nto present, the indicative aorist with is used in the former,\\nand the imperfect with av in the latter as,\\nif I had learned (then), should know (now).\\n698. Obs. The indicative without or av is sometimes used\\nin suppositions, where, in other languages, the subjunctive would\\nbe put as, cij suppose\\nthat 1 had been slain by thy daughter, and that she had madb\\nend of me.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0293.jp2"}, "294": {"fulltext": "276 SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 171, 172.\\n\u00c2\u00a7171. IMPERATIVE MOOD.\\n699. The imperative in Greek is used as in other languages,\\nin addresses, entreaties, commands, c. The pronouns (being\\nthe nominative) are omitted, except where emphasis or distinc-\\ntion is required. In the use of this mood the following peculi-\\narities of construction may be observed viz.,\\n1. The second person sometimes stands for the third as,\\nbut let each one watch,\\nlet some neighbour go.\\n2. As in English, the plural is sometimes used for the singu-\\nlar as, come, my child, to thy fa-\\nther. Also, sometimes the singular, when more than one person\\nis mentioned as,\\n3. In prohibitions with the present imperative is most\\ncommonly used. If the aorist is used, must be put with the\\nsubjunctive. The few exceptions to this rule belong to Homeric\\nusage.\\n4. The imperative after ohtf on, ofatf o, ohtf seems to\\nbe used elliptical ly, and to have arisen from a transposition of\\nthe imperative as, oictf knowest thou in what\\nway thou must act (i. e. act, knowest thou in what way 3\\novv knowest thou what to do (i. e. do, knowest thou\\nwhat?)\\n5. Sometimes the imperative is used for the future; as,\\novv what then shall a law exist i. e. What\\nthen {do you say,) let a law exist On the other hand, the\\nfuture is still more frequently used for the imperative as,\\n(for recollect Agamemnon,\\nAtreus 1 son. Especially is this the case with a negative inter-\\nrogatively as, 3 will you not leave me alone\\ni. e. leave me alone.\\n172. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS.\\n700. The subjunctive and optative moods represent an ac-\\ntion, not as actually existing, but rather as dependent upon, and\\nconnected with, the ideas and feelings of the speaker. The sup-\\njunctive represents this dependence as present the optative rep-\\nresents it as past (197-2). Hence the following general rule", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0294.jp2"}, "295": {"fulltext": "172. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 277\\nI. The Subjunctive and Optative in Dependent Propositions.\\n701. Rule LIV. In dependent clauses, the\\nsubjunctive mood is used in connection witl^. the\\ndti ii tenses; the optative, with the second-\\nary (199-3); as,,\\nha I am present that I may see.\\nha I was present that I might see.\\nOn this general principle the whole construction of these\\nmoods depends, as may be illustrated by the following observa-\\ntions\\n702. Obs. 1. These moods are used after conjunctions whose\\nuse is to introduce a subordinate or dependent clause, in which\\nactual existence is not definitely expressed as, ha,\\nthus, 6 do you wish that\\nyou yourself may have a reward\\nprovoke me not, that you may return the safer. This\\nsentence, which contains the direct address (oratio directa) of Aga-\\nmemnon to Chryses, has the subjunctive after in connection\\nwith the present When this is afterwards related as a\\npast event, in the style of the indirect address (oratio obliqua), the\\nsubjunctive is changed into the optative; thus,\\nor he commanded him to\\ndepart and not provoke him, that he might return safe.\\n703. In like manner when a person, without quoting the di-\\nrect language of another, relates what was said by him, not as\\nactual and fact, but as a supposition or the opinion of that pev-\\nson, as the reference must be to what is past, the optative is\\nused with or prefixed as,\\n(fee. he told me, that the road would lead me in t\\nthe city, (fee. See also 696-3.\\nWhen has been already expressed, it is often omitted before\\nsucceeding clauses in the same construction.\\nNote. that, is also used, in Greek, when the words of another\\nare quoted -without change in direct discourse. It is then equivalent\\nto quotation marks only, and is to be omitted in translation; as, ant-\\ny.q \u00c2\u00abto, oTt ovv, he answered: I will not re-\\neeive the kingdom; SI\\nperhaps they (the laws) might say, 0 Socrates, wonder not\\nat the saying (lit, things said).\\n704. Obs. 2. When a past event is related in the present\\ntime (198, Obs. 1), the verb in the dependent clause may still be\\n13", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0295.jp2"}, "296": {"fulltext": "278 SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 172.\\nin the optative and in like manner, after the historical tenses,\\nthe subjunctive is used when the event, though past, yet continues\\nin its effects and operation, to, and through, the present time.\\nThus, in the address of Minerva to Diomede, I removed the\\nmist from your eyes that you mat distinguish a\\ndeity from a man in the field of battle. Here, however, there\\nmay be a change of reference, i. e. the subjunctive may\\nrefer, not to the time of the removal, but to the time of the ad-\\ndress, as if she had said, I removed the mist from your eyes\\nthat you may from this time forward distinguish fec. Such\\nchanges of reference are not uncommon in all languages.\\n705. Obs. 3. It was noticed, 197, Obs. 3, that the future in-\\ndicative is used in a subjunctive sense. Accordingly it is often\\nfound in a dependent clause, especially after in the same\\nconstruction as the subjunctive as, Cyrus deliberates\\nWi how he may no longer be subject to his brother\\nbut, if possible, may reign in his stead.\\n(subj.),\\n(fut.), We ought to consider how we may get away most\\nsafely, and obtain the necessary supplies.\\n706. Obs. 4. After adverbs of time, when the precise point\\nof time is not determined but left indefinite, the subjunctive and\\noptative are used. These are refer-\\nring indefinitely to the present, and so followed by the subjunc-\\ntive referring indefinitely to the past, and\\nfollowed by the optative as, Menelaus entertained him when\\n(from time to time) he came from Crete\\nHere would mean, when he actu-\\nally came from Crete. The primary part of the sentence, then,\\nmay be considered as understood, when it happened, that he\\ncame from Crete.\\n707. Obs. 5. When the relatives c.\\nrefer to definite persons or things, and to what actually took\\nplace, they are followed by the indicative mood. But if the per-\\nson or thing to which they refer is indefinite, and the whole pro-\\nposition affirms of past time, then the verb is in the optative\\nwithout av as, whatever monarch he\\nfound slaying all whomsoever\\nthey might meet. On the other hand, if the proposition affirms\\nsomething of present or future time, the verb is in the subjunctive\\nwith av as, f 3 c, in which-\\nsoever of the tribes there may be the greatest number, c.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0296.jp2"}, "297": {"fulltext": "172. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 279\\nfollow where (it is possible that) any one may\\nlead the ivay. In such sentences the primary part may be under-\\nstood, such as it is possible that, it happened that, c.\\nII. The Subjunctive and Optative in Independent Propositions.\\n708. Obs. 6. Both the subjunctive and optative are used\\nwithout being preceded by another verb, and so apparently in\\nindependent clauses. In all such instances, however, there is an\\nellipsis of the verb on which they depend.\\n709. I. The subjunctive is thus used,\\n1st. To command in the first person as, let us go, e.\\nit is necessary that we go and so of others.\\n2d. In forbidding, with or its compounds in the aorist, not in\\nthe present as, swear not.\\n3d. In deliberating with one s self; as, not whither\\nshall I turn shall we speak or be silent.\\n710. II. The optative is thus used,\\n1st. To express a wish or prayer as, that\\nthis might not be. In this case are\\noften used with the optative.\\nRem. A wish relating to what is past, or that cannot be realized, 18\\nexpressed by the indicative of the histoi ical tenses, with ii e, tifir ft\\nprefixed as, fttf-f vjould that it were possible. Or,\\nby the 2 aorist indicative of -f, 200-8.) with the\\ninfinitive; as, would that I had never done it I ti\\navtlv, that he had died!\\n2d. In connection with av, to express doubt, conjecture, bare pos-\\nsibility as, they were perhaps (or, it is\\nprobable that they were) shepherds and in volitions, to ex-\\npress, not a fixed resolution, but only an inclination to a\\nthing as, I would gladly see them.\\n3d. To express a definite assertion with politeness or modesty\\nas, he has not come, and\\nwill not come back i. e. I rather think it was his purpose\\nthat he would not come back.\\n4th. Sometimes it is used for the imperative, to convey a com-\\nmand or request in milder terms as, you\\nmay go in, i. e. go in.\\n5th. It is sometimes used for the indicative, to give an air of in-\\ndeterminateness to the circumstances of an action which is\\ndeterminate in itself as, the ships\\nwhich they may (or might) have sunk i. e. which *hey have\\nsunk.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0297.jp2"}, "298": {"fulltext": "280 CONSTRUCTION OF THE INFINITIVE. \u00c2\u00a7172.\\n6th. It is also used in a potential sense, to denote power or vo-\\nlition as, av could you not with-\\nstand him would he be willing\\nIII. The Subjunctive and Optative in Conditional Propositions.\\n711. Obs. 7. The use of the indicative in conditional propo-\\nsitions has been noticed, 697. The subjunctive and optative are\\nalso used in conditional propositions, as follows\\n1st. Uncertainty in the condition, with an actual result, is ex-\\npressed by with the subjunctive in the condition, ana\\nthe indicative future or imperative in the conclusion as,\\nif we have any thing we will give\\nit if you have any thing, give it.\\n2d. A mere hypothetical supposition with a determinate result,\\nputs the condition in the optative with and the result in\\nthe indicative as, nav-\\nwho\\nwere to come in the night with the whole army, if success\\nshould not attend those who had entered. On the contra-\\nry, an actual case supposed in the condition with a hypo-\\nthetical result, would require the first in the indicative with\\nh, and the last in the optative as,\\nif 1 did not know\\nthese things, I should be more worthless than the slaves.\\n3d. When the case is altogether hypothetical, the condition is\\nexpressed by the optative with and the result by the op-\\ntative with av as,\\nif any one should do this he would greatly\\nassist me.\\nSometimes the subjunctive with or av, instead of the\\noptative, is put in the condition.\\n712. Obs. 8. All conditional propositions in Greek may be\\ntm.-ied into the infinitive or participle with av as,\\nthey think they might\\nretrieve their fortune in war if they should obtain\\nCONSTRUCTION OF THE INFINITIVE.\\n713. The infinitive mood expresses the meaning of the verb\\nin a general and unlimited manner, without the distinctions of\\nnumber or person, 197-4. In construction it may be considered", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0298.jp2"}, "299": {"fulltext": "173, 174. INFINITIVE WITHOUT SUBJECT. 28J\\nunder the four following divisions viz., as a verbal noun with-\\nout a subject, as the subject of a verb, or the object of a verb oi\\nadjective with a subject absolutely after certain particles.\\n\u00c2\u00a7173. I. THE INFINITIVE AS A VERBAL NOUN.\\n714. The infinitive, with the neuter article prefixed, 403-14,\\nis used as a verbal noun, in all the cases except the vocative\\nand, as such, is subject to the same rules of construction as the\\nnoun, being used in the nominative as the subject of a verb, and\\ngoverned, in the oblique cases, by verbs or prepositions.\\n715. Obs. 1. When the infinitive, with, or without, a clause,\\nis used as the nominative to a verb, or the accusative governed\\nby it, it is frequently without the article very rarely so after a\\npreposition as, dying is due to\\nall of us.\\n716. Obs. 2. Not only the simple infinitive, but the infini-\\ntive with the whole clause to which it belongs, may often be re-\\ngarded as a substantive, and stand in almost every variety of\\nconstruction in which a substantive can be placed as, Nom.\\nthat men\\nshould err is nothing wonderful Gen.\\nthat no one might perish Dat.\\nthat they may disbelieve my having\\nbeen honoured by the gods Ace.\\ndetermined not to come again.\\n717. Obs. 3. With the article alone, the infinitive is gener-\\nally equivalent to the Latin gerund as, causa\\ndicendi dicendo ad dicendum.\\n718. Obs. 4. Without the article, it has often the force of\\nthe Latin supine as, venit quwsitum\\nSuave auditu turpissimus visu.\\n174. THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT A SUBJECT.\\n19. Rule LV. One verb, being the subject\\nof another, is put in the infinitive as,\\nto fly is safer for them.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0299.jp2"}, "300": {"fulltext": "282 INFINITIVE WITHOUT SUBJECT. \u00c2\u00a7174.\\n720. Rule LVI. One verb governs another\\nas its object, in the infinitive as,\\nhe began to say.\\nMem. Both these rules apply to the infinitive with a subject, 175.\\n721. Rule LVII. The infinitive mood is gov-\\nerned by adjectives denoting fitness, ability, capa-\\ncity, and the contrary as,\\npowerful in speaking,\\nworthy to be admired.\\nNote. It is also used after substantives as,\\npower to become.\\n722. Obs. 1. The infinitive under these rules is in the same\\nclause with, and expresses the cause, end, or object, of the action,\\nstate, or quality expressed by, the verb or adjective that governs\\nit. The verbs that govern the infinitive directly in this way are\\nsuch as denote desire, ability, intention, endeavour, and the like\\nas, he wishes to write I beg\\nof you to come.\\n723. Obs. 2. The infinitive is sometimes placed after verbs,\\nto express the design or consequence of that which they affirm.\\nThus used it is governed, not by the verb, but by some such word\\nas understood as, e.\\nlam here (so as) to furnish all things\\nwe have come (in order) to learn.\\n724. Obs. 8. After a verb or adjective, a verb denoting an\\nincidental object not directly in view, is put in the infinitive\\nwith as, lie was\\nvery ambitious, so as to endure all things, c. This construction\\nta*kes place especially after such words as\\nand the like.\\n725. Obs. 4. The infinitive is sometimes put after verbs or\\nadjectives which indicate some state or quality, in order to ex-\\npress the respect in which that state or quality obtains, and would\\nbe expressed in Latin by the supine, or gerund in do, and in En-\\nglish, by the substantive as,\\nas it appeared the sight.\\niv like the winds in running.\\nnor did he appear the sight.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0300.jp2"}, "301": {"fulltext": "175. INFINITIVE WITH SUBJECT. 2S3\\n726. Obs. 5. The infinitive active is used often in Greek in\\nthe sense of the latter supine, or infinitive passive in Latin as,\\na man is more easy to be guarded against,\\nthings easy to be done.\\n\u00c2\u00a7175. III. THE INFINITIVE WITH A SUBJECT.\\n727. 1. A subordinate or dependent clause containing a verb\\nand its subject, is connected with the leading or primary clause, in\\ntwo ways. First, by a conjunctive particle, such as on, and\\nthe like as, b they say that our com-\\npanion is dead. Here the verb is finite, and its subject in the nom-\\ninative. Second, without a conjunction as,\\nthey say that our companion is dead. In this case, the\\nverb is in the infinitive, and its subject, usually in the accusative.\\n728. 2. Sometimes both modes of expression are united in\\nthe same sentence; as,\\nSometimes a sentence begins with the one form and ends with\\nthe other as, ft they say\\nthat we live a life free from danger as if it had been intended\\nto say, 13\\nThe construction of the subordinate clause connected by the\\nfirst method mentioned above, is subject to the rules 138, 139\\nconnected by the second, it comes under the rules that follow\\n729. Rule LVIII. The infinitive mood in a\\ndependent clause, has its subject in the accusative\\nas,\\nhe said that the gods knew all\\nthings.\\n730. Exc. When the subject of the infinitive\\nis the same with the subject of the preceding verb,\\nit is put by attraction in the same case as,\\nhe said that he was a general.\\n731. 3. In this construction, the subject of the infinitive is\\ngenerally omitted, except when emphasis is required as,\\nhe said that he was a gene-", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0301.jp2"}, "302": {"fulltext": "284: INFINITIVE WITH SUBJECT. 175.\\nral, that they were not generals. This construction has been\\nfrequently imitated in Latin thus, Sensit medios delapsus in\\nhostes. Virg. Uxor invicti Jovis esse nescis. Hor.\\n732. 006 1. In a few instances, constructions vary both\\nfrom the rule and the exception. Occasionally, the subject of\\nthe infinitive is in the nominative, when it signifies a different\\nthing from the subject of the preceding verb, and in the accusa-\\ntive, when it signifies the same.\\n733. Obs. 2. If the subject of the infinitive be the same with\\nthe object of the preceding verb, it may either be in the accusa-\\ntive according to the rule, or stand before the infinitive, in the\\ncase governed by the preceding verb thus,\\nor 7 7\\nf 1 command you to do this,\\nj\\n734. In either case there is an ellipsis in the first form, of\\nthe immediate subject of the infinitive and in the second, of\\nthe remote object of the preceding verb. Both these modes\\nof construction are common, and sometimes they are intermixed\\nin the same sentence thus, Lysias,\\nI beg of you to deter-\\nmine, justly considering that, c. Here stands before\\nthe infinitive governed in the genitive by and yet iv v-\\nfollows in the accusative, evidently agreeing with\\nthe subject of the infinitive understood. With equal propriety, it\\nmight have been put in the genitive.\\n735 Rem. Constructions of this kind, in which the end of a sen-\\ntence does not grammatically correspond to the beginning, are called\\nanacolutha. For other examples of this, see 535 and 728. The most\\ncommon form of anacoluthon appears to be, when the speaker commen-\\nces a period in the manner required by the preceding discourse, but\\nafterwards, especially after a parenthetic clause, passes over into ano-\\nther construction. This method of construction, however, is never\\nadopted by Greek writers unless something is thereby gained in con-\\nciseness, perspicuity, smoothness, or emphasis.\\n736. Obs. 3. When used in the passive voice, the subject of\\nthe infinitive is changed into the subject of the preceding verb,\\nor it remains unchanged in the accusative, the passive verb being\\nused impersonally as,\\nKvqov, rr\\nCyrus is said to have been \u00c2\u00b11\\nrf n y the son of Camay ses.\\nIt is said that Cyrus was J J", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0302.jp2"}, "303": {"fulltext": "176. INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE. 285\\n737. Obs. 4. The same observation is true of the verb\\nthus, thai, he seems to be or it\\nseems that he is. The following sentence unites the two\\na l, and indeed it was said that the battle was obsti-\\nnate, and that many died. In like manner, the adjectives\\n(fee, with the verb are used for the neuter\\ngender with as impersonals thus, for\\ntfec, it is just that c. for\\nit is manifest that he 755.\\n738. Obs. 5. The case after the infinitive of a copulative verb\\n(437), must be the same with the case before it, if the word re-\\nfers to the same thing (438) as, Nom.\\nhe said that he was a general Gen.\\nhaving learned that they are no longer\\nsuperior; Dat. it depends\\nupon ourselves be reasonable. And this observation holds\\ngood whether the word before the infinitive be its proper subject,\\nor (that being omitted, 731), the subject or the object of the pre-\\nceding verb.\\n739. Obs. 6. Whatever case is required before the infinitive\\nby the preceding rules, it continues the same though preceded\\nby or or a preposition, because the preposition affects\\nnot the subject of the infinitive, but belongs to the infinitive it-\\nself, or to the whole clause thus,\\nlet no one\\nbe so great among you, that, breaking the laws, he can go unpun-\\nished they erred be-\\ncause they were not wise.\\n\u00c2\u00a7176. IV. THE INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE.\\n\u00ce\u00ab40. Rule LIX. The infliLitive is often put\\nabsolutely with the particles\\nc, before it as,\\nwhen the man saw.\\nbefore the child died.\\nto compare small with great.\\n741. Obs. 1. with the infinitive, is frequently used to\\nlimit a proposition in the sense of as far as thus,\\n13*", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0303.jp2"}, "304": {"fulltext": "28\u00ce\u00b2 THE PARTICIPLE. 177.\\nas far as 1 recollect distinctly as\\nit seems to me. But is frequently omitted hence such ex-\\npressions as, ov in few words\\nlittle is wanting, almost much is wanting.\\n742. Obs. 2. The infinitive is often .used for the imperative\\nmood, c. being understood; as,\\nrejoice with them\\nthat do rejoice, and weep with them that weep. Sometimes, also,\\nfor the optative, or being understood as,\\nJupiter may\\nit be granted to me to punish the Athenians sometimes ex-\\npressed as,\\n743. Obs. 3. The infinitive is sometimes absolute and\\nredundant, both with and without the article viz.,\\n1st. After adjectives, adverbs, and prepositions thus,\\nfor willing as, 1\\nwould willingly do this. So the phrases,\\ngenerally with respect to you\\nto-day at least with respect to this\\nvvv now as far as depends\\non them.\\n2d. After verbs of calling, choosing, making, c. as,\\nthey call the man a philoso-\\npher they chose him as\\nan ally (598).\\n177. THE PARTICIPLE, 201.\\n744. Rule LX. Participles, like adjectives,\\nagree with their substantives in gender, number,\\nand case, 372.\\n745. Rule LXI. Participles govern the case\\nof their own verbs as,\\nthe enemies knowing the oracle,\\nI being in want of these things.\\n745, The Greek language, having a participle in every tense\\nof every voice, uses it much more extensively than the Latin.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0304.jp2"}, "305": {"fulltext": "177. THE PARTICIPLE. 2S7\\nThe principal purposes for which it is employed are the follow-\\n7 17. I. A participle is joined with another verb agreeing\\nwith its. subject, for the following purposes; viz.,\\n1st. Simply to connect an accompanying with the main action\\nin the same subject. Thus used, the participle and verb\\nare to be rendered as two verbs with a conjunction as,\\nmxQetehw let any one come forward and shew.\\n2d. To combine the accompanying with the main action as the\\ncause, manner, or means of accomplishing it in which use\\nit is equivalent to the ablative gerund in Latin, as in the\\nfollowing examples.\\nCause; as. for having\\ndone what [quid faciendo) icas he condemned to die f\\nMeans: as, I gained them by\\nkindness (benr faciendo) they live by\\nplunder (pop u land\\nManner: as, he escapes by flight (fugien-\\ndo)\\\\ he went in boldly {audendo).\\nThis construction is found also in Latin writers thus. Hoc\\nfaciens vivam melius^ Hor. by doing this I shall live bet-\\nter as if, hoc faciendo. C,\\nNote. The participle thus used agrees with the asent in any ease\\ne. g. in the dative: as, ol ioi u\\ndia/.oirttr, which the god\u00c2\u00bb have put it in the power of mex to find out by\\nstudy; the accusative; as. ufTot-aavrcu\\ntidtrcu, which we may know by counting, by measuring, or by\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0weighing.\\n3d. It is used, to limit a general expression, by intimating the\\naction in respect of which the assertion is made; as,\\nye do wrong in beginning the war.\\n748. Obs. 1. In this way, the participle is used with verbs\\nthat signify any emotion of the mind, to show the cause of the\\nemotion: as, I am rejoiced at seeing\\nyou; you will never\\nrepent of having done a kindness.\\n749. II. The participle is used for the purpose of further de-\\nscribing a person or thing mentioned in a sentence, and may be\\nrendered by the relative and the verb or for connecting with a\\nstatement some relation of time, cause, or condition, expressed in\\nEnglish by such words as when, while, after that because,\\nsince, as if, although, are. the relation intended, and of", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0305.jp2"}, "306": {"fulltext": "288 THE PARTICIPLE. 177\\ncourse the proper rendering of the participle, will generally have\\nto be ascertained from the nature of the sentence itself, or from\\nthe connection in which it stands thus,\\nmay signify, according to the context, I visited\\nmy comrade who was sick or when, or because, he was sick\\ntrees, though lopped\\n(which have been lopped, after they have been lopped,\\nwhen lopped, as to their branches), quickly grow again.\\n750. Obs. 2. When the article precedes the participle refer-\\nring to a word already expressed or easy to be supplied, the two\\nmay be rendered by the relative and the indicative; as, 6\\nhe that cometh, 402-8.\\n751. Note. The participle, with the article before it, is frequently\\nequivalent to a noun designating the doer of the action expressed by\\nthe verb; as, oi the accusers of Socrates. There\\nis, however, this difference the participle expresses the doer in a state\\nof action, the substantive does not thus, is a man in the con-\\ndition of a slave 6 is one, at the time referred to, performing\\nthe part of a slave.\\nThe Participle as the Infinitive.\\n752. III. The participle, in Greek, is often used as the in-\\nfinitive, and has for its subject, according to the sense, either the\\nsubject or the object of the preceding verb, with which it always\\nagrees in gender, number, and case.\\n753. In the construction of the participle with its subject,\\nthere occur the following varieties; viz.,\\n1st. The participle takes as its subject, the subject of the pre-\\nceding verb, and agrees with it in the nominative or accusa-\\ntive as, Nominative, I will not cease\\nto write \u00ce\u00bd\u00ce\u00b7\u00cf\u00846\u00cf\u0082 I know that I am a mortal.\\nAccusative, as they\\nsay that he remembers having done it, or, that he did it.\\n2d. The participle agrees with the immediate object of the pre-\\nceding verb as its subject, in the accusative as,\\nI plainly perceived\\nthat he had infused poison for you.\\n3d. The participle agrees with the remote object of the verb as\\nits subject, in the genitive or dative. Genitive, as,\\nI perceived that they\\nfancied themselves to be very wise Dative,\\nI never repented of having been silent,\\nor, that I was silent.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0306.jp2"}, "307": {"fulltext": "177. THE PARTICIPLE. 289\\n4th. When the verb is followed by a reflexive pronoun, the par-\\nticiple may agree either with the pronoun or the nominative\\nto the verb as, or\\nI am conscious that I am doing wrong\\nor, nobody confesses\\nthat he himself is wicked.\\n754. Obs. 3. The verbs after which the participle is thus\\nused, are 1st. Verbs of sense as, to see, hear, c. 2. Verbs de-\\nnoting any act or feeling of the mind as, to know, perceive, dis-\\ncern, consider, observe, experience, shew, recollect. 3. Verbs sig-\\nnifying to overlook, to permit, to happen, to persevere, bear, en-\\ndure, to be pleased or contented with, to cease, and to cause to\\n755. It is used, also, with adjectives signifying clearness; as,\\nit is clear that you are a sycophant. Some-\\ntimes with the indicative is used as,\\nby its being manifest that he loved, 737.\\n756. Obs. 4. Instead of the participle with the verbs men-\\ntioned above, the infinitive is sometimes used but in that case,\\nthe idea expressed is usually different e. g., 1.\\nI am ashamed to have done it I am\\nashamed to do it, and therefore will not. 2. 6\\nthe winter was come on, had actually commenced\\nthe tvinter was beginning to come on,\\nbut had not yet arrived. 3. I\\nheard Demosthenes speak I\\nheard (i. e. I am told), that Demosthenes says. 4.\\nhe evidently wept he seemed to weep.\\n5. With verbs to declare, to announce, the participle represents\\nthe thing announced as a fact, the infinitive, as matter of report,\\nbut not asserted as a fact. With many verbs, however, it is in-\\ndifferent which construction is used; as,\\nor it is unfortunate\\nthat these things were done.\\n757. Obs. 5. After verbs of motion, the future participle is\\nused to point out the design or object of the motion expressed by\\nthe verb, and is rendered by the English phrase in order to\\nas, I have hastened forward in order\\nTO TEACH THEE.\\n758. In this construction is often interposed before the\\nparticiple as, they prepared\\nto make war.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0307.jp2"}, "308": {"fulltext": "290 THE PAETICIPLE. 177,\\n759. Sometimes the present participle is used in this way\\nas, he sent me to carry. The future partici-\\nple after is only a circumlocution for the future tense\\nas, for I will speak\\nI shall die, or, am about to die.\\n760. IV. Joined with\\nc, the participle is used to express the main action or state, and\\nrendered in the indicative, while the verb with which it is joined,\\nexpressing a subordinate circumstance, is often rendered as an\\nadverb thus, he escaped unperceived\\nhe unconsciously feeds his murderer\\nI took it away just before he went\\naway accidentally they were accidentally pres-\\nent he is continually present.\\n76 1 Note. The participle is wanting with adjectives, and some-\\ntimes without them as, (sc. she happens to be\\nbeautiful. With a negative, may be rendered scarcely, no soon-\\ner as, they no sooner heard. Sometimes it is\\nfollowed by the infinitive instead of the participle as,\\na wretched man would sooner die than,\\nc.\\n762. Obs. 6. In the same sense, these verbs stand sometimes\\nin the participle with other finite verbs as,\\nhe sprung unobserved from the wall\\nwhich I happened to promise.\\n763. V. A participle with the verbs\\nand is often used as a circumlocution for the verb to\\nwhich it belongs, and these verbs take the place of auxiliaries\\nthus, for they had gone for-\\nward for you have married\\nfor 1 have admired, c.\\n764. Obs. 7. Instead of a simple verb signifying to go\\naway, the verb is frequently joined with a participle\\nthe former, to express the idea of departure the latter, to con-\\nnect with it the idea of the manner, both of which may generally\\nbe rendered by a simple verb thus, he de-\\nparted flying, i. e. he flew away he departed\\nfleeing, he escaped they ran away\\nhe is dead. Homer uses in the same manner.\\n765. VI. The participle, in definitions of time, is often joined\\nwith the adverbs the last, with the\\ndative as, as soon as he was born", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0308.jp2"}, "309": {"fulltext": "178. THE CASE ABSOLUTE. 2 J1\\nduring the digging ?jqi on\\nthe first commencement of spring.\\n766. VII. The participles of some verbs, when joined with\\nother verbs, appear to be used in an adverbial sense, or at least,\\nto denote a circumstance which, in our language, is better ex-\\npressed by an adverb as, I said in the begin-\\nning especially lastly\\nafter some time. and with verbs which\\nsignify to give, to place, and the like, are redundant as,\\nhe gave with verbs of motion expresses zeal,\\nquickness, c. with their cases, they are equivalent to the Latin\\ncum, with. A participle joined to its own verb, or to one of sim-\\nilar signification, appears to be redundant as, they\\nwent he said he says.\\njtST For the dative of the participle with a personal pronoun\\nafter the verb see 540.\\n\u00c2\u00a7178. THE CASE ABSOLUTE.\\n767. Rule LXII. A substantive with a par-\\nticiple whose case depends on no other word, is\\nput in the genitive absolute as,\\nwhen god gives, envy\\navails nothing.\\n768 Hem. The genitive is said to be absolute, in this construction,\\nbecause it is neither governed by, nor is dependent on, any word ex-\\npressed or understood, in the sentence with which it is connected, and\\nmight be separated from it without affecting its construction. Yet,\\nstrictly speaking, it is not really absolute in such a sense as to be with-\\nout government, or that there is no more reason for its being in the\\ngenitive than in any other case for the absolute clause will generally\\nbe found to express a circumstance of time, and so may come under 642\\nas,\\nKvqov in the reign of Cyrus (sc.\\nTheagnes is safe from the gods\\nWILLING\\n769. Obs. 1. The participles of and some\\nothers, are frequently omitted as, sc. I being\\nalone.\\n770. Obs. 2. The infinitive mood or part of a sentence, as if\\nit were a noun, is used absolutely with the participle as,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0309.jp2"}, "310": {"fulltext": "292 CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 179.\\nthat bulls breathe fire, being\\ncirculated as a story.\\n771. Obs. 3. The dative absolute is used to express the\\nfixed time (see 641) as, after the year\\nhad elapsed and also when the subject of the participle may be\\nconsidered as that in reference to which the action of the verb\\ntakes place.\\n772. Obs. 4. The nominative and accusative are some-\\ntimes used absolutely. These instances, however, probably arise\\nfrom an omission of some words, which, being supplied, complete\\nthe construction as,\\nwhen they have opened the pores of the body, there\\nis again fire i. e. c.\\nthese things being done i. e. c.\\n773. Obs. 5. The participles of impersonal verbs, and other\\nverbs used impersonally, are put absolutely in the nominative or\\naccusative neuter as, it being permitted it being\\nnecessary since it seems proper thus,\\nivhy dost thou remain, it being in thy power to\\ndepart\\n774. Obs. G. The construction with the participle is often\\npreceded by the particles when a\\nreason of something done by another is expressed as,\\nor he held his peace be-\\ncause ALL KNEW.\\n\u00c2\u00a7179. CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS.\\n775. Conjunctions serve to connect words or sentences to-\\ngether this connection is of two kinds\\n776. I. Of the parts of a sentence which are complete of\\nthemselves and independent of each other. These are connected\\nby conjunctions, simply connective or disjunctive, 332-1, 2 and\\nthe parts thus connected have a similar construction hence,\\n1 7. Rule LXIII. Conjunctions couple the\\nsame moods and tenses of verbs, and cases of nouns\\nand pronouns as,\\nthey came and saw.\\nhonour thy father and thy", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0310.jp2"}, "311": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7179. CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 293\\n778. Obs. 1. To this rule there are many exceptions as it\\nrespects the tenses of verbs see an example, 198, Obs. 3.\\n779. II. But the parts of a compound sentence are often\\nvariously related, and have a certain dependence upon each other,\\nthe nature of which is indicated by the conjunction employed,\\nand the mood of the verb with which it is joined. The general\\nprinciples of this connection are expressed in the following rules\\n80. Kule LXIV. Conjunctions which do not\\nimply doubt or contingency, are for the most part\\njoined with the indicative mood (696, 697) as,\\nnor\\nif these had been good men, they would never have suf-\\nthese things.\\n781. Rule LXV. Conjunctions which imply\\ndoubt or contingency, or which do not regard a\\nthing as actually existing, are for the most part\\njoined with the subjunctive and optative moods\\n(\u00c2\u00a7172); as,\\nif any one should give me the\\nchoice.\\n782. Obs, 2. As the meaning of a conjunction varies in dif-\\nferent connections, the same conjunction is often found with dif-\\nferent moods. On this subject no very definite or satisfactory\\nrules can be given.\\n783. The particles\\nare often used not so much to connect, as to give strength to a\\nquestion, like the English then, but, yet.\\n784. The Greeks do not distinguish direct and indirect ques-\\ntions, like the Latins, by different moods (Lat. Gr. 627-5). In\\nGreek, the direct question is usually made by the definite inter-\\nrogative particles c.\\nthe indirect by\\nc. But here there are many exceptions.\\nFor further remarks on conjunctive and adverbial particles,\\nsee \u00c2\u00a7125.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0311.jp2"}, "312": {"fulltext": "294: ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 179\\n785.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES.\\nA sentence is such an assemblage of words as makes complete sense\\nas, man is mortal.\\nAll sentences are either simple or compound.\\nA simple sentence contains only a single affirmation as,\\nlife is short.\\nA compound sentence consists of two or more simple sentences con-\\nnected together as,\\n786. SIMPLE SENTENCES.\\nA simple sentence or proposition consists of two parts the subject\\nand the predicate.\\nThe subject is that of which something is affirmed.\\nThe predicate is that which is affirmed of the subject.\\nThe subject is commonly a noun or pronoun, but may be any thing,\\nhowever expressed, about which we can speak or think.\\nThe predicate properly consists of two parts the attribute affirmed\\nof the subject, and the copula, by which the affirmation is made thus,\\nin the sentence, the subject is the predi-\\ncate is of which is the attribute, and the\\ncopula. In most cases, the attribute and copula are expressed by one\\nword as, the horse runs. 357.\\nThe name of a person or thing addressed forms no part of a sen-\\ntence.\\nThe predicate may be a noun, a pronoun, an adjective, a preposi-\\ntion with its case, an adverb, a participle, an infinitive mood, or clause\\nof a sentence, as an attribute, connected with, and affirmed of, the sub-\\nject by a copulative verb (437) or, it may be a verb which includes in\\nitself both attribute and copula, and is therefore called an attributive\\nverb.\\n787. THE SUBJECT.\\nThe subject of a proposition is either grammatical or logical.\\nI. The grammatical subject is the person or thing spoken of, unlim-\\nited by other words.\\nThe logical subject is the person or thing spoken of, together with\\nall the words or phrases by which it is limited or defined thus, in the\\nsentence, the grammatical subject is\\nthe logical, Again\\nII. The subject of a proposition may be either simple or compound\\nA simple subject consists of one subject of thought, either unlimited,\\nas the grammatical, or limited, as the logical subject.\\nA compound subject consists of two or more simple subjects, to\\nwhich belongs but one predicate as, 2\u00cf\u008c\u00ce\u00bb\u00ce\u00bf)\u00ce\u00bd", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0312.jp2"}, "313": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7179. ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 295\\n788. MODIFICATIONS OF THE SUBJECT.\\nA grammatical subject may be modified, limited, or described in va-\\nrious ways viz., 1. By a noun in apposition. 2. By a noun in the\\ngenitive or dative. 3. By an adjunct, i. e. a preposition and its case.\\n4. By an adjective word,*L e. an article, adjective, adjective pronoun,\\nor participle, 5, By a relative and its clause.\\nEach grammatical subject may have several modifications and if\\nhas none, the grammatical and logical subject are the same.\\n789. MODIFICATION OF MODIFYING\u00e2\u0080\u00a2 WORDS.\\nModifying, or limiting words, may themselves be modified.\\n1. A noun modifying another may itself be modified in all the ways\\nin which a noun, as a grammatical subject, is modified.\\n2. An adjective qualifying a noun may itself be modified 1. By an\\nadjunct. 2. By a noun. 3. By an infinitive mood or clause of\\na sentence. 4. By an adverb.\\n3. An adverb may be modified-:\u00e2\u0080\u0094 1. By another adverb. 2. By a\\nsubstantive in an oblique case.\\n790. THE PREDICATE.\\nI. The predicate, like the subject, is either grammatical or logical.\\nThe grammatical predicate consists of the attribute and copula, not\\nmodified by other words.\\nThe logical predicate is the grammatical, with all the words or\\nphrases that modify it thus, the gramma-\\ntical predicate is the logical,\\nWhen the grammatical predicate has no modifying terms, the logi-\\ncal and grammatical are the same.\\nII. The predicate, like the subject, is either simple or compound.\\nA simple predicate affirms but one thing of its subject as, 6\\nA compotcnd predicate consists of two or more simple predicates\\naffirmed of one subject as, xat\\n791. MODIFICATIONS OF THE PREDICATE.\\nThe grammatical predicate may be modified or limited in different\\nways.\\nI. When the attribute in the predicate is a noun, it is modified 1.\\nBy a noun or pronoun limiting or describing the attribute. 2. By an\\nadjective or participle limiting the attribute.\\nII. When the grammatical predicate is an attributive verb, it is mod-\\nified 1. By a noun or pronoun as its object. 2. By an adverb. 3\\nB} 7 an adjunct. 4. By an infinitive. 5. By a dependent clause.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0313.jp2"}, "314": {"fulltext": "296 EXAMPLES OF ANALYSIS. \u00c2\u00a7179.\\n792 Nouns, pronouns, adjectives, and other -words modifying the\\npredicate, may themselves be modified, as similar words are when\\nmodifying the subject.\\nInfinitives and participles modifying the predicate, may themselves\\nbe modified in all respects, as the attributive* verb is modified.\\nCOMPOUND SENTENCES.\\n793 A compound sentence consists of two or more simple senten-\\nces or propositions connected together. The propositions which make\\nup a compound sentence, are called members, or clauses.\\n794 The propositions or clauses of a compound sentence, are ei-\\nther independent or dependent in other words, coordinate, or subor\\ndinate.\\nAn independent clause is one that makes complete sense by itself.\\nA dependent clause is one that makes complete sense only in con-\\nnection with another clause.\\nThe clause on which another depends, is called the leading clause\\nits subject is the leading subject; and its predicate, the leading predi-\\ncate.\\n795. Clauses of the same kind, whether independent or dependent,\\nare connected by such conjunctions as c.\\n796 Dependent clauses having finite verbs, are connected with\\ntheir leading clauses in three different ways as, 1. By a relative. 2.\\nBy a conjunction. 3. By an adverb.\\n797 A subordinate clause, consisting of an infinitive with its sub\\nject, is joined to a leading clause without a connecting word.\\nABEIDOED PKOPOSITIONS.\\n798 A compound sentence is sometimes converted into a simple\\none, by rejecting the connective, and changing the verb of the depend-\\nent clause into a participle. A simple sentence thus formed is called\\nan abridged proposition as, hav-\\ning gone through Thrace, he came to Thebes\\n799.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 EXAMPLES OF ANALYSIS.\\n1. the fear of the\\nLord is the beginning of wisdom.\\nThis is a simple sentence, of which\\nThe logical subject is\\nThe logical predicate is\\nThe grammatical subject is shown to be definite by the article\\n6, and restricted by\\nThe grammatical predicate is of which is the copula\\nand the attribute, restricted by", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0314.jp2"}, "315": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7179.\\nSYNTACTICAL PARSING. 297\\n2.\\nHercules himself cut, from the forest of JVemea, the club which\\nhe ivas accustomed to carry.\\nThis is a compound sentence, consisting of one leading, and one depend\\nent chaise connected by the relative o.\\nThe leading clause, is a\\nsimple sentence, of which\\nThe logical subject is 6\\nThe logical predicate is\\nThe grammatical subject is shown to be definite by the arti-\\ncle and rendered emphatic by the definite pronoun\\nThe grammatical predicate is modified by its object\\nand by the adjunct TV\\nThe dependent clause is of which\\nThe logical subject is understood, a substitute\\nThe logical predicate is\\nThe grammatical subject is the same as the logical.\\nThe grammatical predicate is modified by its object o, standing\\ninstead of and, being a relative, it is the object of the\\nverb, and also connects its clause with the leading clause.\\n800.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 SYNTACTICAL PARSING.\\nThese two sentences, thus analyzed, may be parsed syntactically in\\nthe following manner\\nFirst Example.\\nthe, the definite article, in the nominative singular, masculine, agree-\\ning with and showing it to be definite. Rule, The\\narticle agrees, (fee. 400, declined thus, o, rj, c\\nfear, is a noun, masculine, second declension, It is\\nfound in the nominative singular, the subject of The\\nsubject of a finite verb is put in the nominative, 421.\\nof the, the definite article, genitive singular, masculine, agreeing\\nwith and showing it to be definite. Rule, as before,\\n400.\\nLord, is a noun, masculine, second declension,\\nIt is in the genitive singular, governed by which it\\nlimits. Rule V. (449), One substantive governs another, \u00c2\u00abfee.\\nis, is a verb intransitive irregular, Root It is\\nfound in the present indicative, third person singular, and\\nagrees with its subject Rule IV. (420), A verb\\nagrees, fec.\\nthe beginning, is a noun, feminine, first declension, (fee.\\nIt is found in the nominative singular, the predicate after\\nits copula, and is therefore without the article, 403-4.\\nRule VI. (436), Any verb, c.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0315.jp2"}, "316": {"fulltext": "298 SYNTACTICAL PAUSING\u00e2\u0080\u00a2. 179.\\n(not translated), the definite article, in the genitive singular, femi-\\nnine, agreeing with an abstract noun, _j3-3. Rule,\\nThe article agrees, fec. 400.\\nof wisdom, a noun feminine, first declension, It is\\nfound in the genitive singular, governed by which it\\nlimits. Rule V. (449), One substantive governs another, (fee.\\nSecond Example.\\nconstrued thus\\n(not translated), the definite article, in the nominative singular, mas-\\nculine, agreeing with definite, 403-1. Rule, The\\narticle, (fee. (400), declined 6, (fee. 139.\\nHercules, contracted for (133), a proper noun, mas-\\nculine, third declension, contr. It is found\\nin the nominative singular, the subject of The sub-\\nject of a finite verb is put in the nominative, 421.\\nhimself, a definite adjective pronoun, 182. It is\\nfound in the nominative singular, masculine, and agrees with\\nrendering it emphatic. Rule II., An adjective\\nagrees, (fee. 371 and 394.\\ncut, is a verb transitive, first conjugation, liquid, to cut,\\n1 Root 2 3 It is found in the 2 aorist indicative\\nactive, third person singular, and agrees with Rule\\nIV., A verb agrees, (fee. An irregular form for See\\nthe word, 117. Give the tenses from the first root from the\\nsecond from the third.\\nfrom, is a preposition atonic before a vowel), of, out of from, and\\ngoverns\\nthe forest of Nemea (without the article, being the first mention-\\ned), a proper noun, feminine, first declension, It is\\nfound in the genitive singular, governed by Rule XL VIII.\\nor (fee. (652).\\nthe, the definite article, It is found in the accusative sin-\\ngular, neuter, agrees with and shows it to be definite.\\nRule, The article agrees, (fee. (400).\\nclub, is a noun, neuter, third declension, It\\nis found in the accusative singular, the object of, and governed\\nby, Rule XXV., A transitive verb, c. (564). It is\\nlimited by the relative clause following it.\\no, which, the relative pronoun, It is found in the accusative\\nsingular, neuter, agreeing with its antecedent Rule\\nIII., The relative agrees, (fee. 404. It is governed in the ac-\\ncusative by Rule XXV., A transitive verb, (fee. 564;\\nit connects its clause with and limits it.\\nwas accustomed to carry (198, Obs. 2), is a verb, transitive, first\\nconjugation, pure, to carry, kindred to to bear.\\nRoot (216). It is found in the imperfect indicative active,\\nthird person singular, contracted for and agrees with\\nits nominative understood, referring to Rule\\nIV., A verb agrees, fec. (420).", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0316.jp2"}, "317": {"fulltext": "180, 181. prosody. 299\\nPART IV.\\nPROSODY.\\n801. Prosody, in its common acceptation, treats of the\\nquantity of syllables and the construction of verses in other\\nwords, of Quantity and Metre. In the ancient grammarians,\\napplies to accents.\\n\u00c2\u00a7180. QUANTITY.\\n802. Quantity means the relative length of time taken up in\\npronouncing a syllable.\\n1. In respect of quantity, every syllable is either long or short.\\nWhen a syllable is sometimes long, and sometimes short, it is\\nsaid to be common, or doubtful.\\n2. The quantity of syllables is determined by certain estab-\\nlished rules or, when no rule applies, by the authority of the\\npoets.\\n3. In Greek, the quantity of certain vowels is determined as\\nfollows\\n1. The vowels 8, o, are naturally short as,\\n2. are naturally long as,\\n3. a, v, are doubtful as,\\n4. Diphthongs and contracted syllables are long as,\\ncontracted\\n\u00c2\u00a7181. I. POSITION.\\nSPECIAL RULES.\\n803. Rule I. A short or doubtful vowel, before two conso-\\nnants or a double letter, is almost always long as,\\nIn the Prosody the accents are omitted, as they often interfere\\nwith the mark for the quantity.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0317.jp2"}, "318": {"fulltext": "SOO peosody. \u00c2\u00a7182.\\nTin s rule holds good in Epic poetry, except in proper names, and in\\nwords which could not be used in any other situation in the verse. In\\ndramatic writers, observe the following exceptions\\nExc. A short or doubtful vowel before a mute and a liquid,\\nis common as, or\\nObs. 1. A short vowel before a mute and a liquid is generally short.\\nBut before a middle mute followed by in tragedy, it is mostly\\nlong; and followed by almost always long, both in tragedy and\\ncomedy.\\nObs. 2, A short vowel before two liquids is always long, and some-\\ntimes before a single liquid, which in this case should be pronounced as\\nif double thus, pronounced\\nNote 1. A short vowel in the end of a word, before q in the begin-\\nning of the word following, is long in the dramatic poets; as,\\nNote. 2. We sometimes find a short syllable before two consonants\\n(both mutes), but this is rare and should not be imitated.\\n\u00c2\u00a7182. II. ONE VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER.\\n804. Rule II. A vowel before another vowel is short, unless\\nlengthened by poetic license as,\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n1. a is long in the penult of nouns in do)v, as,\\nvoq. And sometimes when the genitive ends in owoq; as,\\nin feminine proper names in thus,\\n2. is long in the penult of nouns in t,ovoq, and sometimes\\nas, \u00ce\u00991\u00cf\u0081\u00ce\u00af\u00ce\u00bf)\u00ce\u00bd, or SLgiowoq; except yloiv.\\nin the penult of verbs in ma as, but the Attic\\ntragic writers have\\n3. is common in the penult of nouns in ia and as, and\\n4. is common in the penult of verbs in vo) as, or\\n805. Rule III. Long vowels and diphthongs are mostly\\nshort at the end of words, when the next word begins with a\\nvowel as,\\n6\\nObs. 1. A vowel in the end of a word, before a word beginning with\\na vowel, does not suffer elision, as in Latin, unless an apostrophe is\\nsubstituted (35).\\nObs. 2. Two vowels, forming two syllables, frequently in poetry\\ncoalesce into one; as, 15, where form a short syllable.\\nThis frequently takes place though the vowels be in different words;\\nas, II. i. 349. 828-2.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0318.jp2"}, "319": {"fulltext": "183, 184. prosody. 301\\n\u00c2\u00a7183. III. THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN FIRST AND\\nMIDDLE SYLLABLES.\\n806. Rule IV. A doubtful vowel before a simple consonant\\nis short as,\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n1. is long in nouns in as,\\nin mimerals in as,\\nin derivatives from verbs in ao) pure, and thus,\\nfrom from from\\nand from\\nfrom from for)\\n2. is long in the penult of nouns in thus,\\n3\\nin the penult of verbs in ivw thus,\\nso also c.\\n3. is long in verbals in as,\\nin pronouns as,\\nin the penult of verbs in vfU as,\\nin adverbs in as,\\n184. IV. THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN FINAL SYL-\\nLABLES.\\n807. Rule V. a, v, in the end of a word, are short as,\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n1. A in the end of a word is long, viz\\nIn nouns in ea, a; as, ta, exc.\\nIn the dual number as,\\nIn polysyllables in aia; as,\\nin na, derived from verbs in evo) as,\\nfrom But a queen,\\nhas the final a short.\\nIn as, valid, except verbals in as, and\\nIn the vocative of nouns in of the 1st declension as, Alvtia\\nfrom\\nIn feminines from adjectives in as,\\nIn nouns in not preceded by a diphthong as,\\nExcept\\nand compounds of as,\\nIn poetic vocatives as, for\\n14", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0319.jp2"}, "320": {"fulltext": "02 prosody. 184.\\n2. final is long in the names of letters as,\\n3. final is long in the names of letters as,\\nin verbs in as\\nin and\\n808. Rule VI. A doubtful vowel in the final syllable, fol-\\nlowed by a simple consonant, is short as,\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n1. is long in masculines; as, Tntiv; and when not in com-\\nposition.\\nin accusatives when their nominatives are long; as,\\nAlvziav from\\nin adverbs as,\\n2. in and is long in it is either long or short.\\n3. is long in nouns of the first declension as,\\nin words having in the genitive as,\\nalso in\\n4. w is long in nouns in w which have in the genitive as,\\nin nouns which have two terminations in the nomina-\\ntive as, or\\nalso in\\nis long in monosyllables as, but the indefinite is\\ncommon.\\nin nouns which have two terminations in the nomina-\\ntive as,\\nin feminine dissyllables in or as,\\nexcept and a\\nfew others.\\nin polysyllables preceded by two short syllables as,\\n6. is long in nouns which have in the genitive as,\\nin nouns which have two terminations in the nomina-\\ntive as, or\\nin accusatives from in the nominative as,\\nfrom\\nin the ultimate of verbs in as, from\\nnow but in enclitic, it is short.\\nV. in the end of a word is always long as,\\n8. vq is long in monosyllables as,\\nin nouns which have two terminations in the nomina-\\ntive as,\\nin nominatives which have or pure in the gen-\\nitive; as,\\nin and\\nin the last syllable of verbs in as,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0320.jp2"}, "321": {"fulltext": "185, 186. prosody. 303\\n\u00c2\u00a7185. V. DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE INCREMENT\\nOF NOUNS.\\n809. Rule VII. The quantity of the nominative remains in\\nthe oblique cases thus, Tixavog\\nEXCEPTIONS.\\n1. in the nominative shortens the crement as,\\n2. A vowel, long by position, in the nominative, shortens the cre-\\nment in the oblique eases as, But nouns in after\\na vowel have the crement long as, vtai-,\\nLikewise\\nwith many words in and ti, or to which add\\nyony, and generally tool;,\\n3. pure in the genitive, from a long syllable in the nominative,\\nvaries the crement; as, or\\n4. The dative plural, after a syncope, has the penult short; as,\\n186. VI. DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE INFLECTION\\nOF VERBS.\\nThe doubtful vowels, are short in verbs, unless it be other-\\nwise specified in the Rules.\\n810. Rule VIII. a and before in participles, and al-\\nways before in verbs, are long;\u00e2\u0080\u00a2 as,\\n6, 18).\\nFUTURE.\\n811. Rule IX. The future in from after\\na vowel, or from lengthen the penult as,\\nBut the future in from shorter\\nthe penult as,\\n812. Rule Liquid verbs shorten the penult in the future\\nas,\\n813. Rule XL The second future, in the passive voice,\\nshortens the root-syllable as,", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0321.jp2"}, "322": {"fulltext": "304 peosody. 187.\\nTHE OTHER TENSES.\\n814. Rule XII. The doubtful vowels have the same quan-\\ntity in the tenses as in their roots thus,\\n1 Root,\\n2 Root.\\nY.f\\n2 Root,\\n8 Root,\\nExc. 1. Liquid verbs in the future active and middle, as in Rule X.\\nExc. 2. The initial u and in the augmented tenses and moods, are\\nlong as,\\nThe quantity of a doubtful vowel in the root is ascertained as fol-\\nlows:\\n815. I. Verbs in pure, or in too, and have\\nthe final vowel of the first root long, unless followed by a vowel\\nif followed by a vowel, it comes under Rule II. All others are\\nusually short.\\n8 1 6. II. The final syllable of the second root is always short,\\nunless made long by position.\\n8 1 7. III. The first root of liquid verbs is shortened in the\\nfuture, 244-1.\\nSPECIAL RULES FOR VERBS IN\\n8 1 8. Rule XIII. The proper reduplication is short, unless\\nmade long by position as, The improper reduplication\\nis common as, c or\\n819. Rule XIV. not before or is every where\\nshort as,\\n820. Rule XV. is long in polysyllables, only in the sin-\\ngular of the indicative active every where else it is short as,\\nc.\\n821. In dissyllables, it is every where long; .as,\\n\u00c2\u00a7187. VII. DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION.\\n822. Rule XVI. Derivatives follow the quantity of their\\nprimitives and compounds, that of the simple words of which\\nthey are composed as,\\nor", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0322.jp2"}, "323": {"fulltext": "188, 189. prosody. 305\\n823. Rule XVII. a privative before two short syllables, ia\\nfrequently long as,\\n824 Also in composition is sometimes long as,\\n\u00c2\u00a7188. VIE. DIALECTS.\\nATTIC.\\n825. \u00e2\u0080\u0094Rule XVIII. The Attics lengthen a in the accusative\\nof nouns in as, ace. contrary to Rule V.\\nAlso, t instead of a, as, for for 6\u00ce\u00b4\u00ce\u00b5.\\nThe Paragogic in pronouns (the dative plural excepted), and in\\nadverbs, is long as, Dat. pi.\\n826. IONIC.\\n1. The Comparative in shortens the neuter the Attics lengthen\\nit; as, A.\\n2. In adjectives of time, is long; as, 6\u00cf\u0080\u00ce\u00bf)\u00cf\u0081\u00ce\u0090\u00ce\u00bd\u00ce\u00bf\u00cf\u0082.\\n3. In verbs, the Ionic not following it, is short as, for\\n827. DORIC AND ^EOLIC.\\n1. The Doric is long the iEolic is short as, Doric for\\niEolic for e.\\n828.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 \u00c2\u00a7189. IX. POETIC LICENSE.\\n1. The last syllable of a verse is common, except in Iambic, Trochaic,\\nAnapaestic, and Greater Ionic.\\n2. The unites two syllables into one as,\\n-J J l\\nara A/atovq,\\n3. The Arsis makes a short syllable in the end of a word long as,\\nr\\n1 J I J\\nJ. r\\nNate 1. The Arsis means the elevation of the voice, which, in Hexa-\\nmeter verse, is always on the first syllable of a foot.", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0323.jp2"}, "324": {"fulltext": "306 prosody. 190\\nNote 2. A short syllable is sometimes, and but very rarely, length-\\nened at the end of a foot thus,\\nTt\\\\ tTto \u00ce\u00b2\u00ce\u00bb\u00ce\u00bf\u00cf\u0083\u00cf\u0085\u00cf\u0081\u00ce\u00bf)7\u00ce\u00a4\u00cf\u008a\u00cf\u0082\\n829 Besides these deviations from the usual rules of quantity,\\nthe Poets sometimes varied the quantities of syllables, as follows\\nI. They lengthened a syllable, 1. By doubling or inserting a conso-\\nnant as, for for 2. By changing a\\nvowel into a diphthong as, for 3. By Metathesis as,\\nfor\\nII. They shortened a syllable, By rejecting one vowel of a diph-\\nthong as, for\\nIII. They increased the number of syllables, 1. By resolving a diph-\\nthong as, for 2. By inserting or adding a letter or sylla-\\nble; as, for for for\\nIV. They lessened the number of syllables, 1. By aphseresis as,\\nfor 2. By syncope; as, for 3. By apocope\\nand apostrophe as, for for\\nOther varieties will be learned by practice. Many conjectures have\\nbeen made with regard to the ancient orthography, and the principles\\nof versification as depending upon it. But the best of them deserve\\nthe credit of ingenuity alone for, as they rest on no unquestionable\\nauthority, they are of little or no use.\\n190. FEET.\\n830 A foot, in metre, is composed of two or more syllables\\nstrictly regulated by time and is either simple or compound. Of the\\nsimple feet, four are of two, and eight are of three syllables. There\\nare sixteen compound feet, each of four syllables. These varieties are\\nas follows:\\n831. Simple feet of two Syllables.\\nPyrriehius w w\\nSpondeus\\nIambus\\nTroehseus w\\nS\\n832. Simple feet of three Syllables.\\nTribrachys w w w\\nMolossus\\nDactylus\\nAnapsestus w\\nBachius\\nAntibachius w\\nAmphibrachys\\nAmphimacer w", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0324.jp2"}, "325": {"fulltext": "191, 192. prosody. 307\\n833. Compound feet of four Syllables.\\nChoriambus a trochee and an iambus.\\nAntispastus an iambus and a trochee.\\nIonic a majore s a spondee and a pyrrich.\\nIonic a minore w a pyrrich and a spondee.\\nFirst Paeon v_ s^ a trochee and a pyrrich.\\nSecond ww an iambus and a pyrrieh.\\nThird w v_. w a pyrrich and a trochee.\\nFourth w v_^ w^ a pyrrich and an iambus.\\nFirst Epitrite an iambus and a spondee.\\nSecond a trochee and a spondee.\\nThird a spondee and an iambus.\\nFourth a spondee and a trochee.\\nProceleusmaticus w two pyrrichs.\\nDispondeus two spondees.\\nDiiambus two iambi.\\nDitrochseus two trochees.\\n191. OF METRE.\\n834 Metre, in its general sense, means an arrangement of syllable*\\nand feet in verse, according to certain rules and in this sense applies,\\nnot only to an entire verse, but to a part of a verse, or to any number\\nof verses. metre, in a specific sense, means a combination of two feet\\n(sometimes called a syzygy), and sometimes one foot only.\\n835 Note. The distinction between rhythm and metre is this:\\nthe former refers to the time only, in regard to which, two short sylla-\\nbles are equivalent to one long the latter refers both to the time and\\nthe order of the syllables. The rhythm of an anapaest and dactyl is the\\nsame the metre different. The term rhythm, however, is also under-\\nstood in a more comprehensive sense, and is applied to the harmonious\\nconstruction and enunciation of feet and words in connection thus, a\\nline has rhythm when it contains any number of metres of equal time,\\nwithout regard to their order. Metre requires, certain number of\\nmetres, and these arranged in a certain order. Thus, in this line,\\nthere is both rhythm, as it contains six metres of equal value in respect\\nof time and metre, as these metres are arranged according to the canon\\nfor Hexameter heroic verse, which requires a dactyl in the 5th, and a\\nspondee in the 6th place. Change the order thus,\\nand the rhythm remains as perfect as before, but the metre is de-\\nstroyed it is no longer a Hexameter heroic line.\\n192. THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF METRE.\\n836. 1. Metre, in the general sense, is divided into nine species:\\n1. Iambic. 4. Dactylic. 1. Ionic a majore.\\n2. Trochaic. 5. Choriambic. 8. Ionic a minore.\\n3. Anapaestic. 6. Antispastic 9. Paeonic or Cretia", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0325.jp2"}, "326": {"fulltext": "308 pkosody. \u00c2\u00a7192.\\nThese names are derived from the feet which prevail in them.\\nEach species was originally composed of those feet only, from which it\\nis named but others, equal in time, were afterwards admitted under\\ncertain restrictions.\\nIt often happens that two species, totally dissimilar, are united in the\\nsame verse, which is then termed Asynartetes. When the irregularity\\nis great, and it cannot be reduced to any regular form, it is called Poly-\\nschematistic or anomalous.\\n837. Note. The invention or frequent use of any species of metre\\nby a particular poet, or its being used in some particular civil or reli-\\ngious ceremony, or appropriated to some particular subject or sentiment,\\nhas been the occasion of certain kinds of verse receiving other names\\nthan those specified above. Thus, we have the Asclepiadean, Glyco\\nnian, Alcaic, Sapphic, and others named from the poets, Asclepiades,\\nGlycon, Alcceus, Sappho, Phalcecus, Sotades, Archilochus, Alcman,\\nPherecrates, Anacreon, Aristophanes, cfec. So also the Prosodiacus\\n(from so called from being used in the approach to the altars\\non solemn festivals and the Parcemiacus, a kind of verse much used in\\nthe writing of proverbs\\n838 In the iambic, trochaic, and anapaestic verse, a metre con-\\nsists of two feet in the others, of one only.\\n839 2. A verse or metre is farther characterized by the number\\nof metres (in the specific meaning of the term) which it contains, as\\nfollows\\nA verse containing one Metre is called Monometer.\\ntwo Metres Dimeter.\\nthree Metres Trimeter\\nfour Metres Tetrameter.\\nfive Metres Pentameter.\\nsix Metres Hexameter.\\nseven Metres Heptameter.\\n840 3. A verse may be complete, having precisely the number\\nof metres which the canon requires or it may be deficient in the last\\nmetre or it may be redundant. To express this, a verse is further\\ncharacterized as follows viz.\\n1. Acataleotic, when complete.\\nCatalectic, if wanting one syllable.\\nBrachycatalectic, if wanting two syllables or one whole foot.\\n3. Hypercatalectic, when there is one or two syllables at the end,\\nmore than the verse requires thus,\\nJEsch. Lept. Theb.\\nis denominated trochaic dimeter catalectic the first term referring\\nto the species, the second to the number of metres, and the third to the\\napothesis or ending.\\n841. Note. The two last terms, viz. that designating the number\\nof metres, and that which refers to the ending, are sometimes reduced\\nto one thus, when a verse of a given species consists of two feet and\\na half, it is called Penthemimer of three and a half, Hephthemimer (five\\nhalf feet, seven half feet) and when it consists of one metre and a\\nhalf, it is called Hemiholius.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0326.jp2"}, "327": {"fulltext": "193, 101, 195. pkosody. 309\\n842 The respective situation of each foot in a verse is called ita\\nplace (scdes).\\nThe rules or canons of the different kinds of metre are briefly aa\\nfollows.\\n193. I. IAMBIC METRE. Scheme, 204, 1.\\n843 A pure iambic verse consists only of iambuses.\\nA mixed iambic verse admits in the first, third, and fifth place, an\\niambus or a spondee.\\nIn the second, fourth, and sixth, an iambus only.\\nVariation 1. The iambus in the odd places may be resolved into a\\ntribrach the spondee, into a dactyl or an anapaest.\\nVariation 2. The iambus in the even places (except the last), may\\nbe resolved into a tribrach. An anapaest is substituted for it in the\\ncase of a proper name only.\\nObserve, however, 1st. that a dactyl should be avoided in the fifth\\nplace and, 2d. that resolved feet should not concur.\\nOf this verse there are all varieties of length, monometers, dimeters,\\ntrimeters (called also senarian, each line having six feet), and tetra-\\nmeters.\\n194. II. TROCHAIC METRE. Scheme, 204,\\n844. A pure trochaic verse consists of trochees only.\\nA mixed trochaic verse admits in the odd places, a trochee only in\\nthe even places, a trochee or a spondee.\\nThe trochee may, in any place, be resolved into a tribrach, and the\\nspondee into a dactyl or anapcest.\\nA dactyl, in the odd places, occurs only in the case of a proper name.\\nTrochaic verses are mostly catalectic. A system of them generally\\nconsists of catalectic tetrameters sometimes of dimeters, catalectic and\\nacatalectic intermixed.\\nIn tetrameters, the second metre should always end a word.\\n\u00c2\u00a7195.111. ANAPAESTIC METRE. Scheme, 204, III.\\n845. An anapaestic verse, without any restriction of places, admits\\neither an anapaest, spondee, or dactyl.\\nExc. 1. The dimeter catalectic, called paraemiacus, requires an ana-\\npaest in the last place but one and is incorrect when a spondee is found\\nthere.\\nExc. 2. In some instances the proper foot is resolved into the proce-\\nleusmatic.\\nAnapaestic verses are sometimes intermixed with other species, but\\nare oftener in a detached system by themselves.\\n846. A system is chiefly composed of dimeters under the following\\ncircumstances\\n1. When each foot, or at least each metre (syzygy), ends a word.\\n14*", "height": "3469", "width": "2117", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0327.jp2"}, "328": {"fulltext": "810 prosody. 196, 197.\\n2. When the last verse but one of the system is monometer acata-\\nlectic, and the last, dimeter catalectic, with an anapaest in the second\\nmetre.\\nIn a system, this peculiar property is to be observed, that the last\\nsyllable of each verse is not common (as in other species), but has its\\nquantity subject to the same restrictions as if the foot to which it be-\\nlongs occurred in any other place of the verse.\\n847 A series, therefore, of anapaestic verses, consisting of one or\\nmore sentences, is to be constructed as if each sentence was only a single\\nverse.\\n848. Note. The monometer acatalectic is called an anapcestic base.\\nThis is sometimes dispensed with in a system in the parcemiacus, rarely\\n849. To this metre belong the Aristophanic, being catalectic tetra-\\nmeters and the proceleusmatic, consisting of feet isochronal to an ana-\\npaest, and, for the most part, ending with it.\\n196. IV. DACTYLIC METRE. Scheme, 204, IV.\\n850. A dactylic verse is composed solely of dactyls and spondees.\\nIn this species one foot constitutes a metre.\\nThe common heroic is hexameter acatalectic, having a dactyl in the\\nfifth place and a spondee in the sixth.\\nSometimes in a solemn, majestic, or mournful description, a spondee\\ntakes the place of the dactyl in the fifth foot; from which circumstance\\nsuch lines are called spondaic.\\n85 1 The elegiac pentameter consists of five feet. The first and\\nsecond may be either a dactyl or a spondee at pleasure the third must\\nalways be a spondee the fourth and fifth anapaests.\\n852. Though a heroic verse is confined to a smaller number of ad-\\nmissible feet than an iambic verse, several licenses are allowed which\\nare not used in the latter.\\nThe most considerable of these are\\n1. The lengthening of a short final syllable in certain cases, viz. at\\nthe caesural pause, and where its emphasis is increased by its beginning\\na foot.\\n2. The hiatus, or the concurrence of two vowels, in contiguous words.\\n853. That irregular sort of dactylics which Hephsestion calls\\nJEolics, admits, in the first metre, any foot of two syllables the rest\\nmust be all dactyls, except where the verse is catalectic, and then the\\ncatalectic part must be part of a dactyl.\\n854. A second sort of dactylics, called by the same author Zogace-\\ndics, requires a trochaic syzygy at the end, all the other feet being dactyls.\\n197. V. CHORIAMBIC METRE. Scheme, 204, V.\\n855 The construction of an ordinary choriambic verse is very\\nsimple. Each metre, except the last, is a choriambus, and the last may\\nbe an iambic syzygy, entire or catalectic.\\n856 The iambic syzygy (two iambie feet) is sometimes found at", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0328.jp2"}, "329": {"fulltext": "198, 199. prosody. 311\\nthe beginning, and, in long verses, in other places but this happens\\nless frequently.\\n857 If any other foot of four syllables is joined with a choriambus,\\nthe verse is then more properly called epichoriambic. Of this there is\\na very great variety, and they sometimes end with an amphibrach,\\nsometimes with a bachius.\\n\u00c2\u00a7198. VI. ANTISPASTIC METRE. Scheme, \u00c2\u00a7204, VI.\\n858 An antispastic verse, in its most usual and correct form, is\\nconstructed as follows\\nIn the first place, beside the proper foot, is admitted any foot of four\\nsyllables ending like an antispastus in the last two syllables i. e. either\\nIn the intermediate places, only an antispastus.\\nIn the last, an iambic syzygy, complete or catalectic, or an incom-\\nplete antispastus.\\nThere is scarcely any limit to the varieties in this species.\\n859 The following are the must usual:\\n1. Id short verses, the proper foot frequently vanishes, and the verse\\nconsists of one of the above-mentioned feet and an iambic syzygy.\\n2. All the epitrites, except the second, are occasionally substituted\\nin the several places in the verse, particularly the fourth epitrite in the\\nsecond.\\n3. If an antispastus begins the verse, and three syllables remain,\\nwhatever those syllables are, the verse is antispastic; because they\\nmay be considered as a portion of some of the admissible feet, or of\\nsome of them resolved.\\n4. In long verses, an iambic syzygy sometimes occurs in the second\\nplace, and then the third place admits the same varieties as the first.\\nAn antispastus, with an additional syllable, is called Dochmiac.\\nAn antispastus, followed by an iambic syzygy, is called Glyconian.\\nTwo antispasti, with an iambic syzygy, is called Asclepiadean.\\nAntispastic dimeter catalectic, is called Pherecratian.\\n199. VR IONIC METRE A MAJOHE. Scheme, 204, VIL\\n860. An Ionic verse admits a trochaic syzygy promiscuously with\\nits proper foot. The verse never ends with the proper foot complete,\\nbut either with the trochaic syzygy or the proper foot incomplete. The\\nvarieties of this metre are numerous, among which observe the follow-\\ning:\\nVar. 1. The second pceon is sometimes found in the^rsi place.\\nVar. 2. A molossus in an even intermediate place, with a\\ntrochaic syzygy following.\\nVar. 3. The second is occasionally joined to a second or third\\nepitrite, so that the two feet together are equal in time to two Ionic\\nfeet. This is called an the defect in time of the preceding\\nfoot being, in this case, supplied by the redundant time of the subse-\\nquent and the verse so disposed is called", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0329.jp2"}, "330": {"fulltext": "812 prosody. 200, 201, 202.\\nVar. 4. Resolutions of the long syllable into two short ones, are\\nallowed in all possible varieties.\\n86 1 If the three remaining paeons, or the second paeon in any place\\nbut the first, without an or,\\nIf an iambic syzygy or third epitrite a choriambus, or any of the\\ndiscordant feet of four syllables, be found in the same verse with an\\nIonic foot, the verse is then termed JEpi-ionic.\\n200. VIII. IONIC METRE A MINORE. Scheme, 204,\\nVIII.\\n862 An Ionic verse a minore is often entirely composed of its own\\nproper feet. It admits, however, an iambic syzygy promiscuously, and\\nbegins sometimes with the third pceon followed by one of the epitrites\\nfor an\\n863 A molossus sometimes occurs in the beginning of the verse,\\nand also in the odd places, with an iambic syzygy preceding.\\n864 In the intermediate places a second or third pseon is prefixed\\nto a second epitrite and this construction is called as before.\\nResolutions of the long syllables are allowed in this, as in the other\\nIonic metre.\\n865. An Epionic verse a minore is constructed by intermixing with\\nthe Ionic foot a double trochee, second epitrite, or pseon without an\\nPROSODIAC VERSE.\\n866. When a choriambus precedes or follows an Ionic foot of either\\nkind, the name Epionic is suppressed, and the verse called Prosodiacus.\\nud, in general,\\nThis name is applied to a verse consisting of an alternate mixture\\nof choriambic and Ionic feet, or of their respective representatives.\\nB. The two species of Ionic are not to be intermixed in the same\\nverse.\\n\u00c2\u00a7201. IX. P^EONIC METRE. Scheme, 204, IX.\\n867 A pseonic verse requires all the admissible feet to have the\\nsame rhythm with its proper foot i. e. to consist of five times, or be\\nequal to five short syllables.\\nThe first and fourth pseons are mostly used, but not in the same verse.\\nThe construction of this verse is most perfect when each metre enda\\nwith the several words of the verse, as was before remarked of the ana-\\npaestic metre.\\nTo this head may be referred those verses which are called by some\\nauthors Bacchiac and Cretic verses.\\n202. THE (LESURAL PAUSE.\\n868. Besides the division of the verse into metres and feet, there\\nis another division, into two parts only, owing to the natural intermis-", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0330.jp2"}, "331": {"fulltext": "20\u00ce\u00bf, 204. prosody. 313\\nof the voice in reading it, and relevant to the rhythmical effect.\\nThis is called the -ause, which necessarily ends with word and its\\ndistance from the beginning is generally, though not invariably, deter-\\nmined by the length of the verse.\\n869 Heroic verses and trimeter iambics are esteemed most har-\\nmonious when the pause falls upon the first syllable of the third foot.\\nThis is the pent hem imeral caesura. When it falls upon the first syllable\\nof the fourth, it is called the hephthemimeral. In iambic and trochaic\\ntetrameters, its place is at the end of the second metre. These rules are\\nmore observed by the Roman than by the Greek poets. In anapaestic\\nverse, and paeonic, no place is assigned to the pause because, since the\\nmetres (if rightly constructed) end with a word, the effect of a pause\\nwill be produced at the end of each metre. The same may be observed\\nof the Ionic a minore.\\n203. COMPOUND METRES.\\n870 Besides the preceding nine species of meti-e, the compositions\\nand modifications of these are very numerous. Of these, observe the\\nfollowing\\n1. A long syllable is sometimes inserted between the parts of a verse\\nconsisting of similar metres.\\n2. In some species, the portions of an admissible foot of four sylla-\\nbles are separated by the intermediate metres.\\n3. It happens not unfrequently that two species, totally dissimilar,\\nare united in the same verse which is then denominated Asynartetes\\n1. Dactylic Tetram. -f- Troch. Hemiholius.\\n2. Iambic Penth. -j- Troch. Hemiholius.\\n3. Dactylic Dim. -f- Troch. Monom. or Logasedic.\\n4. Iambic syzygy -j- Troch. Syzygy, and vice versa.\\nThis last is called Periodicus.\\n4. When a verse is so irregular as to contain in it some glaring vio-\\nlation of the preceding rules, it is called Polyschematistic or anomalous\\nthus,\\n871 To this title may be referred,\\n1. A verse otherwise iambic, having a spondee in the second or\\nfourth place.\\n2. An iambus in a trochaic verse, ike. c.\\nThese rules are exemplified in the following tables.\\n204. METRICAL TABLES.\\n872 The following tables exhibit a scheme of the different feet\\nallowed in each kind of metre, and the place which they occupy. In\\nthe tables the following abbreviations occur viz., A. C. for Acatalec-\\ntic C. for Catalectic B. C. for Brachycatalectic H. C. for Hypercata-\\nlectic and P. N. for Proper Name. 840. In Iambic, Trochaic, and\\nAnapaestic verse, each metre consists of two feet, and is followed by a\\ndouble line.", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0331.jp2"}, "332": {"fulltext": "314\\nPROSODY.\\n\u00c2\u00a7204\\n873.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 I. IAMBIC METRE. \u00c2\u00a7193.\\n1. Monometer Base. 2. Dimeter Acatalectic.\\n1.\\n2.\\n1\\ni.\\n2.\\n3.\\n4\\ns-x\\nv\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nw\\nw\\nV^ V\u00c2\u00bb\u00c2\u00bb\\nw w\\nV\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\n1\\nw\\nw s_/\\n3. Trimeter Acatalectic.\\n1. 2. 3. 4 5. \u00ce\u009b_\\nP.N\\n874.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 II. TROCHAIC METRE. \u00c2\u00a7194.\\nExplanation of the Scheme.\\nIn this verse, each metre is alike. If from the trimeter scheme\\nexhibited below, the first and the second metre be taken away, the\\nremainder will be a scheme of the Monometer, which is always hyper-\\ncatalectic or acatalectic. If the first be taken away, the remainder\\nwill be a scheme of the dimeter and if a metre be prefixed, it will be a\\nscheme of the tetrameter, which is always catalectic.\\nTrimeter Acatalectic.\\n1. 2. 3. j 4 5. 6.\\n875.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 III. ANAPAESTIC METRE. \u00c2\u00a7195.\\nExplanation of the Scheme.\\nThis scheme is dimeter. The removal of the first motre leaves it\\nMonometer (which is called an anapaestic base) by prefixing one\\nmetre, it becomes trimeter and by prefixing two it becomes tetra-\\nmeter, which is always catalectic. A catalectic dimeter is also called\\nParmniac.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0332.jp2"}, "333": {"fulltext": "204. prosody. 315\\n1. Dimeter Acatalectic. 2. Parcemaic or Dim. Cat.\\ni-\\n2.\\n3.\\n4.\\nj\\n1.\\n2.\\n3.\\n4.\\n33\\nz 33\\nZww\\nWW\\n876.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 IV. DACTYLIC METRE. \u00c2\u00a7196.\\n1. Dimeter. 2. Trimeter.\\n1.\\n2.\\nWW\\n1\\n_ w w\\nH.C.\\nAdonic.\\n1. 2.\\n3.\\n_ ww w w\\nrr~}\\nI\\nC,\\nTetrameter.\\nI i\u00e2\u0080\u00a2\\n2. 3.\\n4\\nIII\\n-WW WW\\n-WW\\nJSOLIC.\\n4. Pentameter.\\n1.\\n2.\\n3. 4.\\n5.\\n1 1 1\\n1 1)1)\\n1\\nWW\\n_^ w\\nw w _\\nA. C.\\nJLolic.\\nELEGIAa\\n5. Hexameter.\\n1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.\\npure.\\nimpure.\\nHeroic.", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0333.jp2"}, "334": {"fulltext": "316\\nPKOSODY.\\n\u00c2\u00a7204\\nLogacedics.\\ncalled also Choriambic Dimeter Catalectic.\\nI Alcaic (the most common).\\nw w |-v^ V |-v-v j-Logasedics only\\n877.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 V. CHORIAMBIC METRE. 8197.\\nM. I.\\nII.\\nTrimeter.\\nIII.\\n:i\\nCat.\\npure acatalectic seldom occurs.\\nimpure do. in which also other\\nfeet are intermixed, as the\\nPseons and Epitrites.\\nMonometer is the same as Dact. Dim. Dimeter removes the first\\nMetre. Tetrameter prefixes a metre, and is always Catalectic.\\n878.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 VI. ANTISPASTIC METRE. \u00c2\u00a7198.\\nAn Antispastic Metre.\\nIambus. Trochee.\\nIn the varieties of this verse, any of the simple\\nwww feet under the Iambus may precede any of those\\nunder the Trochee. Dimeters, Trimeters, and\\n_, w Tetrameters, are formed as directed 198, and\\nare catalectic, acatalectic, and hypercatalectic.\\nThe Dochmiac dimeter and trimeter is formed\\nby repeating the Dochmiac monometer. The\\nDochmiac also sometimes precedes, and some\\nww times follows, the Antispastus.\\npure\\nMetres. I.\\nII.\\nA.ny form of\\nan Antispas\\ntic metre,\\nxof)\\n)as-\\nAntispastic Varieties.\\nCat. is called Pherecratic\\nA. C. is called Grlyconic.\\nH. C. is called Sapphic.\\nA. C. is called Grlyconic Polyschematistic.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0334.jp2"}, "335": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7204\\nPROSODY.\\n317\\n879.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 VII. IONIC METRE, a majore, 199.\\nTrimeter.\\nMetres I. II. III.\\n1 ~l Cat\\npure-! -^Jj^ I w\\nas above and\\nas above.\\nA. C.\\nall the pseons.\\nPimeter may be formed by joining L and\\nVARIETIES OF THE IONIC A MAJORE.\\n\u00ce\u00aa3^\u00ce\u0099 3-^w( w w Aloaio.\\nIonic a majore tetrameter B. C. is called Sotadic.\\nPkosodiacus.\\n880.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Vin. IONIC METRE, a minore, \u00c2\u00a7200.\\nDimeter. Tetrameter.\\nMetres I. is formed by joining a Dim. Cat. to\\nC.\\na Dim. A. C. A Molossus\\nin the odd places must always be\\npreceded by an iambic syzygy.\\nThe Ionic a minore, preceded or followed by a choriambus, is an-\\nother form of Prosodiacus. For the Epi -Ionic, see 199.\\n881.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 IX. PHONIC OR.CRETIC METRE, \u00c2\u00a7201.\\nA Pceonic metre. Dimeter, Trimeter, and Tetrameter,\\nw \u00c2\u00ab_/ w are formed by a repetition of the metre a reso-\\nw or lution of into w is common.\\n205. SCANNING.\\n882. To those who are accustomed to the scanning of the Latin\\npoets, the ordinary hexameter and regular systems of the Greek poets\\nwill present no difficulty. After a little exercise in these, the best\\npraxis is furnished by the Choruses in the Dramatic writers, and the\\nodes of Pindar as almost every line furnishes a different kind of verse.", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0335.jp2"}, "336": {"fulltext": "818 accents. 206.\\nand the student is compelled to make himself thoroughly acquainted\\nboth with the rules of quantity and of metre in order to discover it.\\n883 In scanning, for example, the Proodus in the Medea of Euri-\\npides, beginning at the 181st line, after ascertaining the quantity of\\neach syllable, and comparing the whole line with the preceding tables,\\nthey will be as follows\\n131\\nAnapaestic\\nDim.\\nAc.\\n132\\nDactylic\\nTrim.\\na\\n133\\nAnapaestic\\nDim.\\n134\\nDactylic\\nTrim.\\nH. C.\\n135\\nPaeonic\\nDim.\\nAc.\\n136\\nAntispastie\\n137\\nDactylic\\npu\\n138\\nAntispastie\\nc\\n884 Proceeding in the same way with the second Olympic ode of\\nPindar, it will be as follows\\n1. Periodicus, or circulating dimeter.\\n2. Ionic Dimeter Catalectic.\\n3. Paeonic Dimeter Hypercatalectic.\\n4. Choriambic Dimeter Catalectic.\\n5. Iambic Dimeter Brachycatalectic.\\n6. Dochmiac and so on of the others.\\n885 Note. In the choruses of the dramatic writers, and the odes\\nof Pindar, each line of the antistrophe is the same kind of verse, and\\noften, though not always, the order of syllables is the same, with the\\ncorresponding line of the preceding strophe.\\n206. ACCENTS.\\n886 In the proper modulation of speech, it is necessary that one\\nsyllable in every word should be distinguished by a tone or elevation\\nof the voice. On this syllable, the accent is marked in the Greek lan-\\nguage. The elevation of voice does not lengthen the time of the sylla-\\nble so that accent and quantity are considered by the best critics as\\nperfectly distinct, but by no means inconsistent with each other. These\\ncan be of no use to us now, as far as regards the pronunciation of the\\nlanguage, however useful in this respect tht y may have been to those\\nby whom it was spoken. Still, however, the study of these is useful,\\nas they serve to distinguish between words which are spelled alike, but\\nhave different significations. This difference was doubtless marked in\\nthe language as originally spoken by a different intonation, which, by\\nthe different marks called accents, it was intended to convey to the eye.\\nThus, in English, the words des ert, and desert though spelled with\\nthe same letters, differ both in sound and meaning and this is marked\\nby the accent. So in Greek, and spelled with the same let-\\nters, differ in meaning and the difference of the accent would doubt-\\nless lead the Greek to express this by a difference of tone which is now\\nlost. Scapula has given a list of more than four hundred words which", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0336.jp2"}, "337": {"fulltext": "\u00c2\u00a7206. accents. 319\\nare thus distinguished. The accents also indicate, in many cases, the\\nquantity of one or more syllables of a word.\\n887. The accents in form are three the acute grave x and\\ncircumflex lBtrictly speaking, however, there is in reality but one V\\naccent, the acutcj-which. is placed over a vowel to mark the emphatic\\nsyllable. When the accent is marked on a diphthong, it is placed, over\\ntne subjunctive vowel; as,\\n888. The accent is placed over one of he last three syllables\\nonly, and words are denominated accordingly,\\nOxytons, when accented on the final syllable as,\\nPar oxytons, when accented on the penult as,\\nProparoxytons, when accented on the antepenult; as,\\n889 -The two last are called barytons, because the final syllable l/\\nis not accented, for every syllable not accented is called grave\\nbut the grave accent is never marked, as such, upon a syllable.\\n890 In the structure of a sentence, when any oxyton is followed\\nby another word in continued discourse, the grave is used instead of\\nthe acute as, e but the word is still considered an oxyton.\\n891 When two syllables, the first of which is accented, are con-\\ntracted into one, the circumflex is used to denote that an acute or ac-\\ncented syllable, and a grave or unaccented, are united thus, as\\nif, as if Hence, if there be no\\naccent on the first of the syllables to be contracted, there will be no\\ncircumflex on the contraction thus, But w con-\\ntracted for in the accusative singular of nouns in has not the\\ncircumflex.\\n892. It is evident, also, that as the accent must be upon one\\nof the last three syllables, the circumflex must be upon one of the\\nlast two and words are denominated accordingly,\\nPenspomenons, when the last syllable is circumflexed as,\\nfor\\nProperispomenons, when the penult is circumflexed as, cpdov-\\nfor\\n#93 Of many words, both the uncontracted and contracted\\nforms are in use but of others, the contracted form only remains, and\\nwe must conjecture from analogy what the uncontracted was; as,\\nThis reasoning from analogy, however, pro-\\nceeds on the assumption that all syllables having the circumflex, were\\noriginally two, now united by contraction. Whether this was so oi\\nnot, cannot be satisfactorily ascertained; nor, if it could, would the\\nknowledge be of much value, as the rules for the accentuation of words\\nwould still continue the same.\\ny", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0337.jp2"}, "338": {"fulltext": "320 accents. 207\\n201. PLACE OF THE ACCENT IN THE NOMINATIVE.\\n894. No rule can be given for ascertaining the proper place\\nof the accent in the nominative of nouns and adjectives this\\nis best learned from practice, and the use of a good Lexicon.\\nThe following observations, however, may be of use\\n1. The articles, pronouns, and prepositions, have the place of\\nthe accent marked in their inflexions in the grammar.\\n2. In ver hs, it is thrown as far back as possible, except\\nand\\n3. The following have the accent on the last syllable, and are\\ntherefore oxytons viz.,\\nI All monosyllables which are not contracted; as, When\\nthey have differed contraction, they take the circumflex as, yrj,\\n(j/ect), So also at,\\nmost or all of which are contractions. 2. All nouns in\\nfi as, 3. All verbals in as, 4. Ver-\\nbals in as, but those from verbs in on the\\npenult as, 5. Verbals in. and (from the perfect\\npassive); as 6. Verbals iu from the 3d\\nsingular perfect passive as, except some compounds as,\\n1. Verbals in and a from the 2 perf. active; as,\\n8. Diminutives, patronymics, and other deriva-\\ntive nouns in tq\\\\ as, 9. Compounds of\\nas, 6\u00ce\u00bc\u00ce\u00b2\u00cf\u0081\u00ce\u00b9\\n(but and throw back the accent as,\\n10. Adjectives in not contracted; as, _ 11. Compound\\nadjectives in as, except compounds of and\\nas, 12. Adjectives in as,\\n13. Adjectives in as, 14. Adjectives in\\nfrom verbals in as, from 15. The\\nadverbial terminations and as,\\n895. Accent on the Penult.\\n4. The following have the accent on the penult viz.,\\n1. Diminutives in as,\\n2. Nouns in fto^ denoting a place as, c.\\n3. Nouns in as, 4. Nouns in ta, if derived from\\nadjectives iu as, If derived from substantives, the\\naccent varies as, from 5. Nouns in derived\\nfrom verbs in evo) as, from 6. Almost all\\nnouns denoting national relation as, 7. Verbals in\\nas, 8. Adjectives in as,\\n9. Adjectives in as, 10. Verbal adjectives\\nas, 11. Comparatives in as, 12.\\nAdverbs of quantity in as, 13. Adverbs\\nin as,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0338.jp2"}, "339": {"fulltext": "208, 209. accents. 821\\n896. Composition.\\n5. Compound words in many instances, especially in adverbs,\\nretain the accent on the syllable where it stood in the simple\\nas, In the following cases, however, the ac-\\ncent is drawn back to the antepenult viz.,\\n1. Words compounded of particles,\\nc. as, from\\nfrom\\n2. Words compounded of two adjectives as, cpiloaocpog of\\ntwo substantives as, of adjectives and substantives\\nas,\\n208. GENERAL RULES.\\n897. I. If the final syllable is long, the accent on the penult\\nis the acute thus, (dual),\\nObs. The Attic terminations and in the second and\\nthird declensions, and the Ionic in the first, are considered as\\nforming one syllable as,\\n898. II. If the final syllable be short, then\\n1. In dissyllables, the accent on the penult, if short, is the\\nacute as, if long, with the final syllable short, the accent\\nis the circumflex as, (sing.).\\n2. In polysyllables, the accent on the antepenult is the acute\\nthus,\\nObs. 1. The diphthongs and final, and syllables long by\\nposition only, are considered short in accentuation thus,\\nObs. 2. These rules apply to the inflections of nouns, and to\\nall the parts of verbs except as in the following\\n209. SPECIAL RULES.\\n899. 1. IN THE DECLENSION OF NOUNS.\\n1. The flrst declension has the circumflex on the ultimate of\\nthe genitive plural thus, from\\nExc. The feminine of baryton adjectives in follows the\\nfirst general rule; from (not from\\nalso,", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0339.jp2"}, "340": {"fulltext": "322 accents. \u00c2\u00a7209,\\n2. Oxytons of the first and second declensions, circum fleet the\\nlast syllable in the genitive and dative thus,\\n3. In the third declension, the acute accent on the last sylla-\\nble of the nominative is transferred to the penult in the oblique\\ncases thus, (Rule I.)\\nExc. 1. The final syllable of vocatives in and change the\\nacute into the circumflex as,\\nExc. 2. and though barytons, accent the pe-\\nnult as,\\nExc. 3. Genitives and datives of t vo syllables, have the cir-\\ncumflex on the final syllable long, and the acute on the final syl-\\nlable short as, But\\nand participles follow the general rule as,\\nalso,\\n(of lights),\\nAlso syncopated nouns and except the dative plural\\nas,\\nAlso, a short vowel of the genitive from a long vowel in the\\nnominative, throws back the accent in the vocative thus,\\nExcept when\\nthe penult is long not by position as,\\n900. II. IN VERBS.\\nMonosyllables, being long, are circumflected; as,\\n(prjg, for\\n2. A long syllable after the characteristic is circumflected,\\n1st. In the active and middle voices, both in the future of liquid\\nverbs and in the Attic future of all verbs.\\n2d. In the passive voice, in the subjunctive of the aorists, and in\\nthe subjunctive of the present of verbs in thus,\\nExc. Except when the last syllable ends in as,\\n(see 1st General Rule).\\n3. The third person of the optative in and ai has the acute\\naccent on the penult as,\\nExcept in the futures mentioned in rule 2d.\\n4. The imperatives have the acute\\naccent on the final syllable.\\nBut the imperative circumflects the last syllable in the second", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0340.jp2"}, "341": {"fulltext": "210, 211. accents. 323\\nperson singular in the second aorist middle thus, Ex-\\ncept ytvov,\\n5. The infinitive of the second aorist active circumflects the\\nfinal syllable thus, viz. as if contracted from\\nThe infinitive of the first aorist active of the second aorist\\nmiddle of both aorists passive of all the perfects and of the\\nactive voice of verbs in has the accent on the penult viz.,\\nthe circumflex on the long penult, and the acute on the short\\nthus,\\n6. The participles of the second aorist active, and of the pres-\\nent active of verbs in and all ending in or have the\\nacute accent on the final syllable thus,\\nThe participles of the perfect passive have the acute accent\\non the penult as,\\nExcept when abbreviated; as, for\\nV. I am, and I say, have the acute accent on the\\nfinal syllable of the indicative (except the second singular) thus,\\nObs. When is emphatical, or forms the copula between\\nthe subject and its predicate, it throws back the accent thus,\\nman is an animal\\nThis is commonly, though improperly, classed under\\nenclitics.\\n\u00c2\u00a7210. IN CONSTRUCTION.\\n901. Words accented on the last syllable, when that is lost\\nby apostrophe, throw the accent back as,\\nExc. 1. and the prepositions are excepted, which lose\\ntheir accent.\\nExc. 2. Prepositions placed after their cases and ex-\\ncepted), throw back the accent thus,\\n\u00c2\u00a7211. PROCLITICS OR ATONICS.\\n902. The following ten words, when written by themselves or be-\\nfore another word, have no accent, but seem to rest upon and form, as\\nit were, part of the word following; viz. the articles 6, at; the\\nprepositions iv, tiq ex. the conjunctions ft, and the nega\\ntive adverb ov", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0341.jp2"}, "342": {"fulltext": "824 accents. 212.\\nBut these words have the accent when it is thrown back upon them\\nfrom an enclitic following; as, in the end of a sentence; as,\\nwhy not after the word on which they rest as, like\\na god hi consequence of evils. Also the article, used as a\\npersonal pronoun, often has the accent as,\\n\u00c2\u00a7212. ENCLITICS.\\n903. Enclitics (from are so denominated, because, like the\\nLatin que, they lean or rest their accent upon the preceding word as\\nforming a part of it, and have no emphasis on themselves. They are,\\n1.\\nand the indefinite in all cases and\\ndialects.\\n2. and in the indicative present, except in the second per-\\nson singular.\\n3. 11\u00ce\u00b7, not interrogative\\n4.\\n904. RULES.\\nI. Enclitics throw back their accent on the last syllable of the pre-\\nceding word when its antepenult has the acute accent, or its penult,\\nthe circumflex as,\\nNote 1. In this case the acute accent is always used, though the\\nenclitic may have a circumflex.\\nNote 2. When the preceding word ends in a double consonant, and\\nwill not easily coalesce with the enclitic following, the accent remains\\nunchanged as,\\nII. Monosyllabic enclitics lose their accent when the preceding word\\nhas any accent on the final syllable, or the acute on the penult as,\\nDissyllabic enclitics lose their accent when the preceding word has\\nan acute, or a circumflex (in this instance regarded as an acute) on the\\nfinal syllable as, for\\nBut they retain their accent when the penult has the acute as,\\nObs. The principle of these rules is, that two successive syllables in\\nthe same word cannot be accented, and that a circum fleeted syllable is\\nequivalent to one acuted followed by another unaccented.\\nIII. If several enclitics follow each other, the last only is without\\nthe accent, the accent of each being thrown back on the word which\\nprecedes it as, ft\\nIV. The enclitic pronouns retain their accent after prepositions, and\\nafter and as,\\nV. All the enclitics retain their accent when they are emphatic, and\\nwhen they begin a clause.\\nVI. accents its first syllable when it begins a sentence or is em-\\nphatical, or follows or as,", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0342.jp2"}, "343": {"fulltext": "CATALOGUE OF TEXT-BOOKS\\nSCHOOLS AND COLLEGES;\\nINCLUDING- THE PRIMARY, ENGLISH, AND CLASSICAL Di.\\nPARTMENT, NATURAL SCIENCE, GEOGRAPHY,\\nMATHEMATICS, BOOKKEEPING, Ac.\\nIt will be noticed that most of these works were written by\\nTEACHERS OF THE HIGHEST EMINENCE.\\nDr. Bullions Series of Works comprise:\\nEetail price.\\nPractical Lessons in English Grammar and Composition, $0 25\\nPrinciples of English Grammar, 50\\nProgressive Exercises in Analysis and Parsing, 15\\nIntroduction to Analytical Grammar, 30\\nNew, or Analytical and Practical English Grammar, 63\\nLatin Lessons, with Exercises in Parsing. By George\\nSpencer, A. M., Half cloth, enlarged, 63\\nBullions Principles of Latin Grammar, 1 00\\nBullions Latin Reader. With an Introduction on the Idioms\\nof the Latin Language. An improved Vocabulary, 1 00\\nBullions Caesar s Commentaries, 1 00\\nBullions Cicero s Orations. With reference both to Bullions\\nand Andrews and Stoddard s Latin Grammar, 113\\nBullions Sallust, 1 00\\nBullions Greek Lessons for Beginners, 5\\nBullions Principles of Greek Grammar, .118\\nBullions Greek Reader. With Introduction on the Idioms of\\nthe Greek Language, and Improved Lexicon, 1 7 5\\nBullions Latin Exercises, 1 25", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0343.jp2"}, "344": {"fulltext": "Dr. Bullions Series of Works.\\nDESCRIPTION OF THE SERIES.\\nI.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Practical Lessons in English Grammar.\\nThis little book contains a brief synopsis of the leading prin-\\nciples of English Grammar, every part of which is illustrated by\\na great variety of exercises, of the simplest character, adapted to\\nthe capacity of pupils at an early age. New edition, revised and\\nimproved.\\nII.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 The Principles of English Grammar.\\nThis work is intended as a School Grammar, for the use of\\nclasses pursuing this branch of study in the common schools, or,\\nof the junior classes in academies. It embraces all that is important\\non the subject, expressed with accuracy, brevity and simplicity,\\nand is peculiarly adapted to the purposes of instruction in public\\nschools.\\nIII.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Introduction to the Analytical and Practical Grammar.\\nThis edition has been prepared expressly to serve as an intro-\\nduction to the Analytical and Practical Grammar of the English\\nLanguage. The definitions and rules are the same throughout as\\nin that work, and are arranged in the same order.\\nIV.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 The Analytical and Practical English Grammar.\\nThis work, designed for the more advanced classes in schook\\nand academies, is prepared on a more extended plan than the pre-\\nceding, though not essentially different from it. The arrangement\\n(except in syntax), the definitions and rules, are the same, but with\\nmuch greater fulness in the illustrations and exercises, intended to\\nlead the student into a thorough and critical acquaintance with the\\nstructure and use of the English language.\\nV.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Exercises in Analysis and Parsing.\\nThis little work consists of selections in prose and poetry from\\nstandard writers, so arranged as to furnish a convenient and pro-\\ngressive course of exercises in Analysis and Parsing, in every\\nvariety of style, with such occasional references to the grammars\\nas are deemed necessary to explain peculiar or difficult construc-\\ntions. To this is prefixed directions for the analysis of sentences,\\nand models both of analysis and parsing.\\nVI.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 The Principles of Latin Grammar.\\nThis work is upon the foundation of Adams Latin Grammar,\\neo long and favorably known as a text-book, and combines with all", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0344.jp2"}, "345": {"fulltext": "Di\\\\ Bullions Scries of Works.\\nthat is excellent in that work many important corrections and im-\\nprovements, suggested by subsequent writers, or the result of the\\nauthor s own reflection and observation, during many years, as a\\nclassical teacher.\\nVII.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Jacob s Latin Header, with Latin Idioms.\\nThis work forms a sequel to the Grammar, and an introduction\\nto the study of Latin classic authors. It begins with a series of\\nsimple and plain sentences, mostly selected from classic writers, to\\nexemplify and illustrate the leading construction of the language,\\nfollowed by Reading Lessons, of pure and simple Latin, chiefly\\nnarrative, by which the pupil, while he becomes familiar with the\\nconstruction of the language, is also made acquainted with many\\nof the most prominent characters and mythological fables of an-\\ntiquity, as well as with the leading events of Eoman history.\\nThroughout the work, references are constantly made, at the foot\\nof the page, to the Grammar and Introduction, when necessary to\\nexplain the construction, or assist the pupil in his preparations.\\nVIII.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 First Lessons in Greek.\\nThis work is intended chiefly for those who begin the study of\\nGreek at an early age and for this reason contains only the out-\\nlines of Grammar, expressed in as clear and simple a manner as\\npossible. It is complete in itself, being a Grammar, Exercises,\\nReading Book, and Lexicon, all in one so that the pupil, while\\nstudying this, needs no other book on the subject. The knowledge\\nacquired by the study of this work will be an important prepara-\\ntion to the young student for commencing the study of Greek\\nGrammar with ease and advantage.\\nIX.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 The Principles of Greek Grammar.\\nThis work is intended to be a comprehensive manual of Greek\\nGrammar, adapted to the use of the younger, as well as of the\\nmore advanced students in schools and colleges. Both in Ety-\\nmology and Syntax, the leading principles of Greek Grammar are\\nexhibited in definitions and rules, as few and as brief as possible,\\nin order to be easily committed to memory, and so comprehensive\\nas to be of general and easy application. This work is now more\\nextensively used than any other of the kind in the country.\\nX.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Greek Header, with Greek Idioms.\\nThis work, like the Latin Reader, is properly a sequel to the\\nGreek Grammar, and an introduction to the study of the Greek\\nclassic authors. It seeks to accomplish its object in the same way\\nas the Latin Reader. (See above, No. VII.) With these are con-\\nnected", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0345.jp2"}, "346": {"fulltext": "Dr. Bullions Series of WorMs.\\nSPENCER S LATIN LESSONS, with exercises in parsing, intro-\\nductory to Bullions Latin Grammar.\\nIn this series of books, the three Grammars, English, Latin,\\nand Greek, are all on the same plan. The general arrangement,\\ndefinitions, rules, c, are the same, and expressed in the same\\nlanguage, as nearly as the nature of the case would admit. To\\nthose who study Latin and Greek, much time and labor, it is be-\\nlieved, will be saved by this method, both to teacher and pupil.\\nTue analogy and peculiarities of the different languages being kept\\nin view, will show what is common to all, or\u00e2\u0080\u00a2 peculiar to each the\\nconfusion and difficulty unnecessarily occasioned by the use of\\nelementary works differing widely from each other in language and\\nstructure, will be avoided, and the progress of the student rendered\\nmuch more rapid, easy, and satisfactory.\\nNo series of Grammars, having this object in view, has here-\\ntofore been prepared, and the advantages which they offer cannot\\nbe obtained in an equal degree by the study of any other Grammars\\nnow in use. They form a complete course of elementary books, in\\nwhich the substance of the latest and dest Grammars in each lan-\\nguage has been compressed into a volume of convenient size,\\nbeautifully printed on superior paper, neatly and strongly bound,\\nand are put at the lowest prices at which they can be afforded.\\nThe elementary works intended to follow the Grammars\\nnamely, the Latin Reader and the Gi;eek Reader\u00e2\u0080\u0094 are also on the\\nsame plan are prepared with special references to these works,\\nand contain a course of elementary instruction so unique and\\nsimple, as to furnish great facilities to the student in these lan-\\nguages.\\nXI.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Csesar s Commentaries on the Gallic War.\\nIn this work the plan of the Latin Reader is carried on through-\\nout. The same introduction on the Latin idioms is prefixed for\\nconvenience of reference, and the same mode of reference to the\\nGrammar and introduction is continued. The Notes are neither\\ntoo meagre nor too voluminous. They are intended not to do the\\nwork of the student for him, but to direct and assist him in doing\\nit for himself. It is embellished with a beautiful Map of Gaul and\\nseveral wood-cuts, representing the engines of war used by the\\nRomans.\\nXII.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Cicero s Select Orations.\\nWith Notes critical and explanatory; adapted to Bullions\\nLatin Grammar, and also to the Grammar of Andrews and Stod-\\ndard. This selection contains the four orations against Catiline,\\nthe oration for the poet Archias, for Marcellus, for Q. Ligarius, for\\nking Diotarus, for the Manilian law, and for Milo. The Notes are", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0346.jp2"}, "347": {"fulltext": "Dr. Bui/ions Scries of Works.\\nmore extended than those in Caesar s Commentaries, especially in\\nhistorical and archaeological notices, necessary to explain the allu-\\nsions to persons and events in which the orations abound a know-\\nledge of which is indispensable to a proper understanding of the\\nsubject, and to enable the student to keep in view the train of ar-\\ngument pursued. In other respects, the proper medium between\\ntoo much and too little assistance has been studied, and constant\\nreference made to the Grammar, for the explanation of common or\\ndifficult constructions.\\nXIII.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Sallust s Catiline and Jugnrtha.\\nOn the same plan. The text of this edition of Sallust is that\\nof C. G. Zumpt, as given in Chambers Educational Course.\\nThis series will be continued.\\nXIV.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 Latin Exercises.\\nAdapted to Bullions Latin Grammar.\\nThe publishers refer with great satisfaction to the distinguished\\nnames of some of the best instructors and educators of the present\\nage, whose names are appended, who have long used some or all of\\nDr. Bullions books, and who have recommended them either in\\nwhole or in part.\\nNOTICES.\\nBullions books, by their superior arrangement and accuracy,\\ntheir completeness as a series, and the references from one to the\\nother, supply a want more perfectly than any other books have\\ndone. They bear the marks of the instructor as well as the\\nscholar. It requires more than learning to make a good school-\\nbook. Professor C. S. Pennel,\\nAntioch College, Ohio.\\nDr. Hott, LL D, Lackey, Pa.\\nRev. Dr. Potter, LL D, Pa. Pro\u00c2\u00a3 P. M. Moore, El.\\nDr. Beck, LL. D., J. Lattimer,\\nDr. Proudfit, LL. D., P. Aydelott, Ohio.\\nJoseph Mckerson, H. W. G. Finney, Ohio.\\nR. M. Brown, S. McCorniick, Ohio.\\nW. E. Pierce, Ohio. Benjamin Smith, JS Y.\\nH. E. Whipple, Mich. M. Clanchy, Pa.\\nA. McDougall, D. G. Frazer,\\nP. Covert, W. S. Boyart, Florida.\\nJ. F. Cady, R. I. P. McMurray, Ohio.\\nM. G. McKoon, Rev. S. Barstow,\\nJ. W. Allen, Carpenter,\\nWilcox, Thomas Leonard, Tenn.\\nSalem Town, LL. D. John Kelley, Pa.\\nW. W. Benjamin, A. Holmes,", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0347.jp2"}, "348": {"fulltext": "Dr. Bullions 1 Series of Works.\\nJas. E. Lattimer, N. H. E. J. Avery, Mass,\\nJohn Trembly, Ohio. p ro f. H. Wheeler, Ind.\\nF. Crafts, Mass. p r0 J. Towler, Y.\\nC. Walker, Mass. W. L. Nicholas, Ohio.\\nA. Smyth, Ohio. Rev. George Loomis, Del\\nW. B. Bunnell, J. R e id, R. I.\\nR. D. Van Kleck, R. I. W. E. Todd, ]ST. H.\\nJas. J. Helm, J. R. W. Finley, Mo.\\nJos. J. Fravelli, Pa. Robert Thomson,\\nR. Bishop, Ohio. David Parsons, Ohio.\\nB. C. Ward, Pa. Isaac Booth, Pa.\\nO. H. Drummond, Ohio. J. A. Goodwin, Y.\\nRev. J. McCanley, Va. 0. L\u00e2\u0080\u00a2 Leonard, Ky.\\nWm. M. Russell, Mass. E. C. Boyle, Ohio.\\nD. Harris, N. J. H. Patten, Mo.\\nJ. P. W. Jenks, Mass. A. G Roe, Conn.\\nA. M ong, Pa. Lewis Bradley, Pa.\\nJoel Whitney, Charles A. Lord, Mo.\\nLewis Vail, Pa. Rev. A. A. Livermore,\\nL. Hazeltine, D. D., S. C, Pliny Fisk,\\nD. McMaster, Ohio. Lyman Harding, Ohio.\\nL. Strong, 1ST. Y. Wm. Jones, Oregon.\\nAnd others from all parts of the Union.\\nFrom the Southern Repertory and College Review.\\nBullions Series of Grammars and Elementary Classics, through the\\nkindness of the publishers, have been placed upon our table. Although\\nwe have been familiar with some of Bullions books for years, we have\\nnot had until now the opportunity of examining the entire series of\\ngrammars. This examination we have made with much pleasure, which\\nincreased as we progressed. We think that these booka ought to be in-\\ntroduced into our primary schools, academies, and colleges forthwith,\\neven to the exclusion of others, which were good in their day/ but\\nwhich have got behind the times. Every teacher has experienced the\\ninconvenience, and every student has felt the embarrassment, arising\\nfrom a change of text-books from one author to another, on the same\\nsubject. True, principles may be ever the same; but each author has\\nhis own mode of expression and illustration each has his plan.\\nIn the series one uniform plan is pursued through the grammars\\nof the English, Latin, and Greek languages. The young beginner who*\\nmasters the Practical Lessons in English Grammar, is not only prepared\\nfor the Analytical and Practical Grammar, and the still higher Exercises\\nin Analysis and Parsing, but can take hold of the Latin and Greek\\nGrammars, with a good knowledge beforehand of the plan to be pur-\\nsued. We are for Bullions books, as well as for some others, which we\\nhope hereafter to notice, issued from the press of those excellent book-\\nmakers, Farmer, Brace fc Co., late Pratt, Woodford Co.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0348.jp2"}, "349": {"fulltext": "Cooper s Virgil. 9\\nI use Bullions works all of them and consider them the best\\nof the kind that have been issued in this or any other language.\\nIf they were universally used we would not have so many super-\\nficial scholars, and the study of the classics would be more likely\\nto serve the end for which it was designed the strengthening and\\nadorning of the mind. J. B. Thompson, A. M.,\\nlate Rector of the Somerville Classical Institute, N. J.\\nDr Bullions English Grammars are introduced into the Public and\\nmany of the Private Schools, the Latin School, the English High School,\\nthe City Normal School, of the city of Boston Normal Schools 01\\nBridge-water and Westfield Marlborough Academy; cities of Salem\\nNewburyport, c Mass. Portsmouth, and several academies in New\\nHampshire and re-adopted in Albany and Trey, New York. They are\\nused in over seventy academies in New York, and in many of the most\\nflourishing institutions in every State of rhe Union.\\nCooper s Virgil, with English Notes.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 (2 00.)\\nHaving examined the Bev. J. G. Cooper s edition of the works\\nof Virgil, I have no hesitation of giving my opinion, that the plan\\nwhich he has pursued is excellent, and the execution highly credit-\\nable to his talents and scholarship. Such a work will greatly\\nfacilitate the study of the poet, on the part of the youthful learner.\\nIt will give him a correct idea of the meaning of the author in the\\nmore difficult passages, and by its copious notes upon ancient his-\\ntory and mythology, will enable him to relish beauties that are\\nnow rarely perceived in the early course of classical instruction. I\\nhave no doubt but that its appearance will be welcomed by the in-\\ntelligent and discerning, as a publication admirably adapted to en-\\nlist the feelings and stimulate the application of youth, in the\\nelementary schools of our country.\\nGeokge P. Chapman, D. D.,\\nformerly of Pennsylvania\\nSimilar opinions have been expressed by the following literary\\nand scientific gentlemen\\nJames Koss, LL. D., John T. Kirkland, D. D.,\\nJames Renwick, LL. D., Henry Ware, D. L\\\\,\\nW. C. Wyatt, D. D., John S. J. Gardner, D. D.,\\nWilliam Harris, D. D., Wm. Rafferty, D. D.,\\nJohn Bowden, D. D., Edward Sparks, M. L\\\\,\\nJames Kemp, D. D., E. D. Barrv, D. D.,\\nGideon Blackburn, D. D., Prof. J. S. Kingsley, Yale Col\\nAnd many others.\\n1*", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0349.jp2"}, "350": {"fulltext": "10 Prof. Peissnerh English- German Grammar.\\nA Comparative English-German Grammar.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ($1 oo.)\\nBased on the affinity of the two languages, by Peof. Elias Peissnee,\\nlate of the University of Munich, now of Union College,\\nSchenectady.\\nFrom the New York Churchman.\\nOf all the German Grammars we l^ave ever examined, this is\\nthe most modest and unpretending and yet it contains a system\\nand a principle which is the life of it, as clear, as practical, as effec-\\ntive for learning Grammar as any thing we have ever seen put\\nforth, with so much more pretence of originality and show of phi-\\nlosophy. In travelling from England to Germany, a man might\\ncommence his journey in England he must first pass through\\nthose parts which lie most contiguous to the land to which he is\\ngoing he should cross the separating line at the point or points\\nwhere the two adjacent countries have most features in common,\\nand his first explorations in the new land will he in those quarters\\nwhich remind him most of the scenes and associations from which\\nhe is departing. This is the pervading principle of the Grammar\\nbefore us, and, truism as it may appear, it contains the secret of\\nthe easy acquisition of a foreign language, especially one that has\\nmany affinities both in words and idioms to our own.\\nThe principle on which this book is grounded gives it a strong\\nclaim to every teacher through examination. It will be found,\\ntoo, we think, that the author has not only presented a new idea\\nof much interest in itself, but has admirably carried it out in the\\npractical lessons and exercises of his work.\\nFrom Professor J. Foster, of Schenectady.\\nI have examined Prof. Peissner s German Grammar with some\\nattention have marked with interest the rapid advancement of\\nstudents here using it as a text-book, and have myself carefully\\ntested it in the instruction of a daughter eleven years of age. The\\nresult is a conviction that it is most admirably adapted to secure\\neasy, pleasant and real progress, and that from no other work\\nwhich has come under my notice can so satisfactory a knowledge\\nof the language be obtained in a given time.\\nFrom the Albany Morning Express.\\nThis is one of the very best treatises of its kind now extant.\\nThose who are acquainted with the science and practice of lan-\\nguage will need but a simple statement of some of its points, in\\norder to appreciate its superior merit.\\nFrom the Schenectady Reflector.\\nIt seems to us to meet more successfully than any other Gram\\nmar, the case of those who desire an accurate knowledge and prac-\\ntice of the German language, through a method at once easy, rapid,\\nand scientific.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0350.jp2"}, "351": {"fulltext": "Prof. J. Dodd s Series. II\\nPROF. J. B. DODD S MATHEMATICAL SERIES\\nCOMPRISES\\nAn Elementary and Practical Arithmetic, $0 45\\nHigh School Arithmetic, 84\\nElements of Algebra, 84\\nHigher Algebra, 1 50\\nKey to Algebra, 84\\nElements of Geometry, 1 00\\nAND KEYS TO THE ABOVE.\\nThese Arithmetics Lire believed to be unrivalled in the follow-\\ning particulars\\n1. The philosophical accurateness with which their topics are\\narranged so as to show the mutual dependence and relationship oi\\ntheir subjects.\\n2. The scientific correctness and practical convenience of their\\ngreatly improved nomenclature.\\n3. The clear and concise manner in which principles are stated\\nand explanations are given.\\n4. Brevity and completeness of rules.\\n5. The distinctness with which the true connection between\\nArithmetic and its cognate branches is developed.\\n6. The excellent and thorough intellectual discipline super\\ninduced.\\nRECOMMENDATIONS.\\nFrom E. T. P. Allen, Superintendent of Kentucky Military\\nInstitute.\\nUpon a careful examination of a manuscript Treatise on\\nArithmetic by Prof. Dodd, I find it greatly superior to all others\\nwhich have come under my notice, in system, completeness and\\nnomenclature. The arrangement is natural, the system complete,\\nand the nomenclature greatly improved. These improvements are\\nnot slight; they are fundamental eminently worthy the attention\\nof the Mathematical Teacher, and give a character of unity to the\\nwork, which at once distinguishes it from all others on this subject.\\nI believe it admirably adapted to the purposes of instruction\\nin fact, by far the most convenient and usable booh for teacher and\\npupil I have yet met with; and will, with great pleasure, adopt it\\nin the Institute, and recommend its adoption by all.\\nFrom John BrocHesby, A. M., Prof, of Mathematics and Natural\\nPhilosophy, in Trinity College, Conn.\\nFrom a careful examination of the Arithmetic of Prof. Dodd,\\nI have been led to entertain a favorable opinion of the work. It is", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0351.jp2"}, "352": {"fulltext": "12 Prof. J. Dodd s Series.\\nphilosophical in its arrangement, and exact and clear in its r. ja\\nand explanations. The examples are such as to bring the mini of\\nthe pupil into active exercise. I should select this hook to plaice\\nin the hands of a child in preference to others upon the same sub-\\nject which have obtained a wide-spread circulation.\\nFrom Jennette L. Douglass, Newburgh, Y.\\nI have examined with great care, and -much, interest, Dodo High\\nSchool Arithmetic, and am fully convinced that it is a book uf rare\\nmerit, and is not surpassed by any in use. Furthermore, alter year s\\ncareful study of Dodd s High School Algebra, and after haviag thor-\\noughly tested the application of its rules, and the precision, clearness and\\nforce of the same, hesitate not to say that it has no superior, if any equal,\\nin the range of Algebraic Science.\\nFrom the Associate Principal of Mount Palatine Academy.\\nI have examined Dodd s Arithmetic, and am fully persuaded\\nthat it is superior to any other with which I am acquainted. I\\ncould speak in detail were it necessary but all that is required\\nto establish its reputation and introduction, is to have it known dy\\nTeachers. 0. M. Weight, Inst.\\nFrom the Faculty of Pock River\\nUpon an examination of Prof. Dodd s Arithmetic, we have\\ncome to the conclusion that its superior arrangement, the clearness\\nof its rules and explanations, and its improved nomenclature, entitle\\nit to the careful consideration of the Mathematical Teacher that\\nthese improvements distinguish it from all others that have come\\nunder our notice. We therefore give it our cordial approbation,\\nand shall introduce it immediately into our Seminary.\\nD. J. Pinoknet, Principal.\\nS. M. Fellows, Prof, of Mathematics.\\nSilas Seaele, Prof. Of Languages.\\nDodd s High School Arithmetic is better adapted to supply the\\nwants of High Schools and Academies than any other Arithmetic\\nwhich I have ever met. His rules are plain, concise, definitely\\nstated, and fully illustrated with examples.\\nG. M. Baekee,\\nBaldwin Institute, Ohio.\\nI have Dodd s Higher Arithmetic, and unhesitatingly pro-\\nnounce it the best work for advanced classes I have ever seen.\\nM. S. LlTTLEFIELD,\\nGrand Rapids, Mich.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0352.jp2"}, "353": {"fulltext": "Prof. J. Dodd s Series. 13\\nSimilar testimonials have been received from the following\\ngentlemen whose names are attached, in favor of one or both these\\nArithmetics\\nH. A. Wilson, Jonesville. L. Dickerman, N. H.\\nR. S. Thurmer, lad. J. G. Hoyt, do.\\nA. P. Chute, Mass. M. L. Brown, Y.\\nRev. J. A. McCanley, Va. W. E. Pierce, Ohio.\\nW. Spindler, Ohio. T. Allen, Mass.\\nJ. W. P. Jenks, Mass. H McDougall,\\nRev. W. L. Harris, Wesleyan A. Wood, Maine.\\nUniversity, Ohio. J. R. Art, Indiana.\\nA. K. Slade, Mass. A. Morse, Nantucket.\\nW. P. Clark, Mich. G. C. Merrifield, Ind.\\nJames Campbell, Ohio. T. A. Benton, Ohio.\\nW. W. Howard, Ky. Isaiah Dole, Maine.\\nW. B. Slaughter, Pa. J. Estabrook, Mich.\\nW. A. Bacon, Mich. J. Towler,\\nRev. George Loonais, Delaware. M. F. Cowdery, Sandusky, Ohio.\\nB. Crump, Y.\\nProf. Dodd s Algebras have received the most flattering enco-\\nmiums from teachers who have used them in the school-room.\\nThey are, probably, the most clear and comprehensive works on\\nAlgebra in print.\\nTESTIMONIALS.\\nWe have introduced Dodd s Algebra into the Genesee Wes-\\nleyan Seminary, as a permanent text-book.\\nProf. W. H. De Put.\\nDodd s Algebra possesses excellencies pertaining to no other\\nwork. R. H. Mooee, 111.\\nI am much pleased with Dodd s Algebra, and will introduce it.\\nRev. J. A. MoOanley, Va.\\nI use Professor Dodd s Algebra, and shall continue it as our\\nregular text-book. Osoae Haeeis, N J.\\nFrom Peof. A. L. Hamilton, Brest, of Andrew College.\\nI have examined with some care Prof. Dodd s Elements of Geo-\\nmetry, and, so far as I am capable of judging, I conceive it to be\\nin many respects decidedly the best work of the kind extant. For\\nsimplicity, exactness, and completeness, it can have no superior.\\nLike his Arithmetic and Algebra, in many important particulars,\\nhis Geometry stands pre-eminent, and alone.", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0353.jp2"}, "354": {"fulltext": "14 Enos^s Intellectual and Practical Arithmetic.\\nSchell s Introductory Lessons in Arithmetic,\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ($1 oo.)\\nDesigned as an introduction to the study of any mental or written\\nArithmetic. It contains a large amount of mental questions, toge-\\nther with a large number of questions to be performed on the\\nslate thus combining mental and written exercises for young be-\\nginners. This is a very attractive little book, superior to any of\\nits class. It leads the pupil on by the easiest steps possible, and\\nyet insures constant progress.\\nKECOMMENDATIONS.\\nI have carefully examined the manuscript of Schell s Intro-\\nductory Lessons in Arithmetic, and am convinced that it is alto-\\ngether superior to any text-book of the kind with which I am ac-\\nquainted. It is peculiarly adapted to the wants of beginners, the\\nlanguage being simple, the definitions clear, the examples easy, and\\nthe transition from one subject to another gradual and natural.\\nI cannot too much commend the system which the author has\\nadopted throughout, of fully illustrating every principle as he ad-\\nvances, by numerous mental and written exercises, rendering\\nthereby one rule perfectly familiar before he passes to the next.\\nIt is unnecessary to do more than to ask the attention of teachers\\nto this work they cannot examine it impartially without being\\nconvinced of its superior merits. It will, no doubt, become one\\nof the most popular of school-books.\\nGeo. Payne Quaokenbos,\\nRector of Henry st. Grammar School, T.\\nI wish to introduce Schell s little Arithmetic. It is just the\\nthing for beginners. Send six dozen. J. Maekham, Ohio.\\nI am highly pleased with Schell s little book, and shall use it.\\nG. 0. Meebifield, Ind.\\nSchell s little book for children is a deau-ideal of my own, and\\nof course it suits. D. F. Dewolf, Ohio.\\nThe School Committee have adopted Schell s Arithmetic for\\nour public schools. Send us three hundred.\\nG. Heffeon, Supt. Schools, Utica.\\nAn Intellectual and Practical Arithmetic\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ($o 25)\\nOr, First Lessons in Arithmetical Analysis. By J. L. Enos,\\nGraduate of the N. Y. Slate Normal Schools.\\nThe same clearness and conciseness characterize this admirable\\nDook that belong to the works of Prof. Dodd. The natural ar-\\nrangements of the text, and the logical mode of solving the ques", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0354.jp2"}, "355": {"fulltext": "Whitlockts Geometry and Surveying. 15\\ntions, is a peculiar and important feature belonging to this book\\nalone.\\nKECOMMEKDATIONS.\\nI have examined with care and interest, Enos s Mental Arith-\\nmetic, and shall introduce it at once into the Academy.\\nProf. M. Weight.\\nWe have examined an intellectual Arithmetic, by J. L. Enos,\\nand like it much. We shall immediately use it in our school.\\nProf. D. I. Pixoknet,\\nS. M. Fellows,\\nS. Searle,\\nRock River Seminary.\\nHaving used Enos s Mental Arithmetic in my school, I believe\\nit to be superior to all other works of the kind.\\nW. Bailey, Y.\\nWhitlock s Geometry and Surveying\u00e2\u0080\u00a2,\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ($1 50.)\\nIs a work for advanced students possessing the highest claims upon\\nthe attention of Mathematical Teachers. In comparison with other\\nworks of the kind, it presents the following advantages\\n1. A better connected, and more progressive methed of geo-\\nmetrizing, calculated to enable the student to go alone.\\n2. A fuller, more varied and available practice, by the intro-\\nduction of more than four hundred exercises, arithmetical, demon-\\nstrative and algebraical, so chosen as to be serviceable rather than\\namusing, and so arranged as greatly to aid in the acquisition of the\\ntheory.\\n3. The bringing together of such a body of geometrical know-\\nledge, theoretical and practical, as every individual on entering into\\nactive life demands.\\n4. A system of surveying wMch saves two thirds the labor re-\\nquired by the ordinary process.\\nThis work is well spoken of universally, and is already in use in\\nsome of the best institutions of this country. It is recommended\\nby Prof. Pierce, of Cambridge Prof. Smith, of Middletown Prof.\\nDodd, of Lexington, and many other eminent mathematicians.\\nFrom E. M. Moese, Esq I consider that I have obtained more\\nmathematical knowledge from Whitlock s Geometry, than from all\\nother text-books combined. Unlike too many treatises of a similar\\nnature, it is eminently calculated to make mathematicians.", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0355.jp2"}, "356": {"fulltext": "16\\nDr. Comstoc s Series.\\nProf. Palmer s Bookkeeping,\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ($o 61.)\\nKEY AND BLANKS.\\nThis excellent book is superior to the books generally used\\nbecause\\n1. It contains a large number of business blanks to be filled by\\nthe learner, such as deeds, mortgages, agreements, assignment,\\nc. c.\\n2. Explanations from page to page, from Article to Article, and\\nto settle principles of law in relation to deeds, mortgages, c, c.\\n3. The exercises are to be written out, after ~being calculated.\\nIn other works the pupil is expected to copy, merely.\\nBECOMMENDATIONS.\\nJoseph H. Palmee, Esq.\\nSm, It has afforded me pleasure to read your excellent\\nTreatise on Bookkeeping. The Perspicuity of its style is admirable,\\nand with v its peculiar arrangement, with references and laconic defi-\\nnitions, makes it at once invaluable to the young accountant, as a\\nprimary and practical work on the most approved method of keeping\\naccounts. Hieam Dixon,\\nAccountant at Adams Co., 16, 18, 19, Wall st.\\nSimilar testimonials have been received from the teachers of the\\nFree Academy, and others, N. Y.\\nHorace Webster, LL. D.\\nJ. J. Owen, D. D.\\nG. B. Docharty, LL. D.\\nJ. T. Bentdice, A. M.\\nJ. Graef Barton, A. M.\\nD. Cartledge.\\nA. H. Wheeler.\\n\u00c2\u00a5m. Palmer.\\nD. K. Bull.\\nS. Kendall.\\nJoseph Keen, Super nt Com.\\nSchools, Y. City.\\nJ. J. Doane, Principal Ward\\nSchool No. 20,\\nThos. Faulke, Principal Ward\\nNo. 30,\\nW. Starr, Principal Ward\\nSchool No. 29, IS Y.\\nJ. E. Whitehead, Principal\\nWard School No. 23, Y.\\nJ. J. Anderson, Principal Ward\\nSchool No. 16, Y.\\nL. Hazeltine, Principal Ward\\nSchool No. 14, Y.\\nS. Reynold, Principal Wil-\\nliamsburgh Grammar School,\\nY.\\nA. Marceihis, Principal Wil-\\nliamsburgh Academy.\\nH. D. Woodworth, Principal\\nWard School No. 2, Y.\\nDr. Comstock s Series of Books on the Sciences, viz.\\nIntroduction to Natural Philosophy. For Children. $0 42\\nSystem of Natural Philosophy, Newly revised and enlarged,\\nincluding late discoveries, 1 00", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0356.jp2"}, "357": {"fulltext": "Dr. Comstoctts Series. 17\\nElements of Chemistry. Adapted to the present state of the\\nScience, 1 00\\nThe Young Botanist. New edition, 50\\nElements of Botany. Including Vegetable Physiology, and a\\nDescription of Common Plants. With Cuts, 1 20\\nOutlines of Physiology, both Comparative and Human. To\\nwhich is added OUTLINES OF ANATOMY, excellent for\\nthe general scholar and ladies schools, SO\\nNew Elements of Geology, Highly Illustrated, 1 25\\nElements of Mineralogy. Illustrated with numerous Cuts, 75\\nNatural History of Birds. Showing their Comparative Size.\\nA new and valuable feature, 50\\nNatural History of Beasts. Ditto. 50\\nNatural History of Birds and Beasts. Ditto. Cloth, 1\\nQuestions and Illustrations to the Philosophy, 30\\nAll the above works are fully illustrated by elegant cuts.\\nThe Philosophy has been republished in Scotland, and trans-\\nlated for the use of schools in Prussia. The many valuable addi-\\ntions to the work by its transatlantic Editors, Prof. Lees, of\\nEdinburgh, and Prof. Hoblyn, of Oxford, have been embraced by\\nthe author in his last revision. The Chemistry has been entirely\\nrevised, and contains all the late discoveries, together with methods\\nof analyzing minerals and metals. Portions of the series are in\\ncourse of publication in London. Such testimony, in addition to\\nthe general good testimony of teachers in this country, is sufficient\\nto warrant us in saying that no works on similar subjects can equal\\nthem, or have ever been so extensively used. It is a remarkable\\nfact, that when interested persons have attacked these works, and\\nsucceeded in getting in their own, a little time has dissipated the\\nmist, and they have found their way back again. A new edition\\nof the Botany, with an enlarged Flora, is just ready.\\nThe Phylosophy has just been thoroughly revised, andfor the sixth time\\nnewly stereotyped. There is no book of its size in the world (we believe^\\nthat has ever had a circulation equal to it.\\nRECOMMENDATIONS.\\nJohn Griscom, LL. D., N. Y. A. C. Wright, D. C.\\nW. H. Seward. A. McDougald, Y.\\nW. T. Bonte, Canada. Gr. C. Merrifield, Ind.\\nK. M. Brown, N. Y. Rev. J. P. Cowles, Mass.\\nA, Wood, N. J. M. E. Dunham, Y.\\nM. P. Covert, N. J. J. M. Stone, H.\\nB. Hallowell, Ya. W. R. White, Ya.\\nA. L. Smith, Ya. A. F. Ross, Y.\\nA. H. Drummond, Ohio. T. Yalentine, Albany.\\nThe sale of 800,000 copies of the Philosophy would seem io\\nrender notices superfluous.", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0357.jp2"}, "358": {"fulltext": "18 Prof. Hooker s Physiology.\\nHuman Physiology and Hygeine ($l 25.) First look in do\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ($0 66)\\nDesigned for Colleges and the Higher Classes in Schools, and for\\nGeneral Reading BtWorthingtoin t Hookek, M. D., Professor\\nof the Theory and Practice of Medicine in Yale College.\\nIllustrated with nearly 200 Engravings.\\nThis is an original work and not a compilation. It presents the\\nsubject in a new light, and at the same time embraces all that is\\nvaluable for its purpose, that could be drawn from the most emi-\\nnent sources. The highest encomiums are received from all quar-\\nters a few are subjoined.\\nWe can truly say that we believe this volume is of great value,\\nand we hope that the rare merits of the diligent author will be\\nboth appreciated and patronized.\\nBoston Medical and Surgical Journal.\\nDr. Hooker writes with perspicuity, explains difficult points\\nwith simplicity, and adapts the subject well to school instruction\\nand general reading. American Journal of Science and Arts.\\nHere is the remedy for a want which is so evidently a want,\\nand that now we have it supplied, it seems an absurdity to have\\nlived on wanting it. The present work is a popular treatise, at-\\ntractive enough to be read, and with compass enough to allow the\\nauthor s fertility of illustrative anecdote to come into play. There\\nis no need of commending the work to the attention of a com-\\nmunity where Dr. Hooker is so well knows, as he is among us.\\nNorwich Courier.\\nI am ready to pronounce it unqualifiedly the most admirable\\nbook or work on the human system that has fallen under my\\nnotice, and they have not been few. If any one desires a complete\\nand thorough elucidation of the great science discussed, they can\\nnowhere be better satisfied than in the perusal of Dr. Hooker s\\nmost excellent work. B. F. Tewkbbuky, Lenoxville, Pa.\\nI have thoroughly examined Hooker s Physiology. The hints con-\\ntained in the Preface are of more value to a practical teacher than many\\nentire works upon the same subject. In my opinion the book needs only\\nto be known to be appreciated, it will speak for itself.\\nE. F. Stronu, Principal Public High School, West Meriden, Ct.\\nElements of Meteorology.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ($0 75.)\\nDesigned for Schools and Academies. By John Brooe^lsby, A.M.,\\nProfessor of Mathematics and Natural Philosophy in Trinity\\nCollege, Hartford.\\nThe subject of Meteorology is of the deepest interest to all. Its\\nphenomena every where surround us, and ought to be as familiarly", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0358.jp2"}, "359": {"fulltext": "Prof. Brocklesby s Series. 19\\nknown by the scholar as his arithmetic or philosophy. This work\\ntreats on Winds in General, Hurricanes, Tornadoes, Water Spouts,\\nRain, Fogs, Clouds, Dew, Snow, Hail, Thunder-storms, Rainbow,\\nHaloes, Meteorites, Northern Lights, c.\\nTESTIMONIALS.\\nFrom Denison Olmsted, LL. President of Yale College.\\nI have perused your work on Meteorology, which you were\\nso kind as to send me, and am much pleased with the manner in\\nwhich you have treated these subjects the selection of topics being\\nin my view judicious, and the style luminous, and well adapted to\\nreaders of every age, whether learned or unlearned.\\nu I should rejoice to see such a school-book introduced into all\\nour schools and academies. No natural science is more instructive,\\nmore attractive, and more practically useful, than Meteorology,\\ntreated as you have treated it, where the philosophical expla-\\nnations of the various phenomena of the atmosphere are founded\\nupon an extensive induction of facts. This science is more par-\\nticularly interesting to the young, because it explains so many\\nthings, that are daily occurring around them, and it thus inspires a\\ntaste for philosophical reasoning. I think the work cannot\\nfail to be well received as a valuable addition to our list of text-\\nbooks.\\nFrom J. L. Comstock, 3f. D., Author of Natural Philosophy,\\nChemistry, Botany, Geology, Mineralogy, and Physiology.\\nProfessor Brocklesby, of Trinity College, has submitted to my\\nperusal a Treatise on Meteorology, written by himself, and with\\nthe arrangement and science of which I am much pleased. The\\nProfessor wishes to have his treatise published as a school-book,\\nand, considering the interest which the several subjects it em-\\nbraces excites in the minds of all, both old and young, rich and\\npoor, I see not why such a book, when once introduced, should not\\nhave a large circulation. I see no reason why Meteorology, in\\nmany respects, has not as many claims as a school-book as Chem-\\nistry or Natural Philosophy. Indeed, I should like to see Pro\u00c2\u00bb\\nfessor B. s book introduced into schools as a companion of my\\nPhilosophy.\\nRecommended also by\\nBenj. Sillihan\u00e2\u0080\u00a2, LL. D.\\nRev. H. Gallaudet,\\nRev. Hoeace Hookee,\\nRev. Chas. A. Goodeich.\\nThis work has proved highly satisfactory in the school-room\\nand is now the established text-book in a very large number of our\\nbest high schools and academies, where the natural sciences are\\ntaught", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0359.jp2"}, "360": {"fulltext": "20 Prof. Brocklesby s Series.\\nYIEWS OF THE MICROSCOPIC WORLD.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ($1 12.)\\nDesigned for General Reading, and as a Hand-boolc for Glasses in\\nNatural Sciences. By Prof. Bbooexesby.\\nBy the aid of a powerful microscope, the author has given us\\nhighly instructive accounts of Infusorial Animalcules, Fossil la\\nfusoria, Minute Aquatic Animals, Structure of Wood and Herls^\\nCrystallization, parts of Insects, c, c.\\nTo those who are necessarily deprived of the aid of a micro-\\nscope, and even to those who have it, this is a most valuable work.\\nIt is clearly and pleasantly written. The sections on the Animal-\\ncules, Infusoria, and Crystallizations, are very beautifully illustrated\\nwith large and expensive plates. The decriptions of the different\\nkinds of these wonderful little animals, many of which multiply by\\nmillions in a few hours, are really very instructive. There is no\\nbetter school library book in the world. It should be read by\\nevery man, woman, and child.\\nPROF. BROCKLESBY S ASTRONOMY.\u00e2\u0080\u0094 ($1 25.)\\nThis work is printed in the first style of the art, being amply\\nillustrated and the approval bestowed upon it by the most com-\\npetent judges is such as to entitle it to the careful examination of\\nteachers.\\nRECOMMENDATIONS.\\nI have examined it with great care, compared it with other authors\\nwithin my reach, for the purpose of selecting a suitable manual for my\\nclasses pursuing the ordinary college course of mathematics. The ar-\\nrangement of topics seem to be natural and scientific, and the develop-\\nment of the subject progressive. It is comprehensive and sufficient in\\nscope and matter, and yet avoids the sad and frequent fault of being bare-\\nly topical and superficial, from attempting to teach too much. A special\\nmerit of the book is the truthfulness of its illustrations, in which are\\nrepresented the phenomena of the heavens as they are, not as they seem,\\nAs a teacher I thank you for such a text book as many have been seek-\\ning in vain.\\nT. W. T. Cuktis, Principal High School, Hartford, Ct.\\nMiss Jennette L. Douglass, of Newburgh, Y., who is so exten-\\nsively known by the friends of education, says of Brocklesby s Astron-\\nomy It must find its way into our best schools, as the ideas it contains\\nare so clear and comprehensive, and its plate and print so plain and ele-\\ngant, it contains all that is necessary for a young learner.\\nElementary works are too often mere compilations made from mate-\\nrials furnished by others. This is in no sense the case in Brocklesby s\\nAstronomy. The reader will at once perceive that the author not only\\nthoroughly understands his subject, but possesses the happy faculty of\\nsimplyfying it, and adapting it to the ordinary intelligence of the reader", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0360.jp2"}, "361": {"fulltext": "J. Olney s Geographical Series. 21\\nHis descriptions, aided by well drawn diagrams, make every point plain,\\nand we may safely say, we have not met with any other manual which\\nso happily unfolds the elements of one of the most charming sciences\\nto which human study can be directed.\\nThe Philadelphia Presbyterian.\\nThose who know the author will readily understand that this work is\\none of no small value. He stands among the comparatively few scientific\\nmen who possess strong practical characteristics, and that degree of in-\\nsight and industry that enables them to comprehend and execute a text-\\nbook, adapted to the wants of any class of mind. The book is thoroughly\\nand attractively illustrated, clear and comprehensive in the text, and di-\\nrect and thorough in its system of questions.\\nSpringfield (Mass.) Republican.\\nI think Brocklesby s Astronomy the best of any with which I am ac-\\nquainted. U. S. Abbott, Teacher High School, Brattleboro, Vt.\\nTo Professor Brocklesby, of Trinity College, Hartford, who has already\\nwritten well upon Meteorology and Views of the Microscopic World, we\\nare indebted for the Elements of Astronomy. This volume is beautifully\\nand intelligibly illustrated. It brings Astronomical knowledge down to\\nthe present date. It is full without being diffuse, and terse without ob-\\nscurity. Every scientific term is explained. The rules for determining\\nthe distances and magnitudes of the heavenly bodies are wholly ampli-\\nfied. In all respects we can recommend the work as a very complete and\\npractical elementary treatise. Y. Daily Times\\nJ. Olney s Geographical Series,\\nComprises the following WorTcs\\nPrimary Geography. With Colored Maps. $0 25\\nQuarto Geography. With several ISTew Maps. 0*75\\nGeography and Atlas. Do. do. 1 12\\nOutline Maps. And Key 6 00\\nIt is believed these works excel all others, for the following\\nreasons\\n1. The clearness and correctness of definitions.\\n2. The gradual arrangement of subjects.\\n3. Unity of design marks the series.\\n4. The use of initial letters only.\\n5. The fact that children delight in them.\\n6. Their cheapness.\\nThe attention of teachers, whose range of subjects includes\\ngeography, is respectfully and particularly called to Mr. Olney s\\nGeographical Works. These works, more especially the School\\nGeography and Atlas, have been in use for several years, and so far\\nas the publishers have been able to ascertain, it is the general testi-", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0361.jp2"}, "362": {"fulltext": "22 J- Olney s Geographical Series.\\nmony of teachers that the Practical System of Modern Geo-\\ngraphy V is the best work for practical use that has ever appeared.\\nBut recent works have been put forth, claiming to be made upon\\nsuperior principles, and modestly intimating that all previous stand-\\nard works are so inferior in construction as to render them de-\\nservedly obsolete. Indeed it is claimed that there has been no ad-\\nvance in geographical text-books for many years, until suddenly a\\nnew Daniel has come to judgment. In looking carefully over the\\nrecent inprovements so boastfully claimed, we are unable to dis-\\ncover any which have not been substantially drawn from Olney s\\nGeographies.\\nMr. Olney commenced the plan of simplifying the first lesson\\nand teaching a child by what is familiar to the exclusion of astron-\\nomy. He commenced the plan of having only those things repre-\\nsented on the maps which the pupil was required to learn. He\\noriginated the system of classification, and of showing the govern-\\nment, religion, c, by symbols. He first adopted the system of\\ncarrying the pupil over the earth by means of the Atlas. His\\nworks first contained cuts in which the dress, architecture, animals,\\ninternal improvements, c, of each country are grouped, so as to\\nbe seen at one view. His works first contained the world as\\nknown to the ancients, as an aid to Ancient History, and a synopsis\\nof Physical Geography with maps. In short, we have seen no\\nvaluable feature in any geography which has not originally ap-\\npeared in these works and we think it not too much to claim\\nthat in many respects most other works are copies of these. We\\nthink that a fair and candid examination will show that Olney s\\nAtlas is the largest, most systematic, and complete of any yet pub-\\nlished, and that the Quarto and Modern School Geographies con-\\ntain more matter, and that better arranged, than any similar works.\\nThe attention of teachers is again called to these works, and they\\nare desired to test the claims here asserted.\\nTESTIMONIALS.\\nFrom President Humpheeys, D. D., Amherst College.\\nMr. J. Olney. Dear .Sir, I have examined both your improved\\nSchool Atlas and Modern System of Geography with more than\\nordinary satisfaction. Your arrangement of topics appears to me\\nbetter adapted to the comprehension of the child, and to follow\\nmore closely the order of nature, than any other elementary sys-\\ntem of the kind with which I am acquainted. Instead of having\\nto encounter the diagrams, problems, and definitions of Astromony\\nas soon as he opens his Geography, the young learner is first pre-\\nsented with the elements of the science in their simplest and most\\nattractive forms. His curiosity is of course awakened. That\\nwhich would otherwise be regarded as an irksome task, is eonteni-", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0362.jp2"}, "363": {"fulltext": "Olneyh Geographical Series.\\nplated with pleasure. The opening mind exults in the exercise of\\nits faculties, and in the ease with which it every day gathers new\\nintellectual treasures. The constant use which you oblige the\\nchild to make of his Atlas, I consider of a great advantage, and\\nthe substitution of initials for the names of countries, mountains,\\nrivers, c., a valuable improvement. There is, moreover, a con-\\ndensation of matter throughout, combined with a clearness and\\nsimplicity which cannot fail, I think, of being highly appreciated\\nby all enlightened and judicious teachers. Your method of desig-\\nnating the length of the principal rivers is extremely simple and\\nconvenient.\\nFrom Rev. Anson W. Cummings, D. D., President of Holson Conference\\nCollege, and Ex-President of McKendree College.\\nOlney s Geography and Atlas, Revised Edition, are so beautifully\\nprinted, so clear and gradual in arrangement of the subjects, so correct in\\nfacts, so comprehensive in topics, and so cheap, that they are entitled to\\na place in every American School house and Academy.\\nI have long thought Olney s Geography and Atlas a first-rate\\nschool-book, and the publishers of it have certainly given to it an\\nattractive appearance to the teacher and pupil. I have used it, I\\nthink, nearly ten years of my teaching, and always found the suc-\\ncessive editions reliable for accuracy, and well up to the times.\\nM. F. Cowdeey,\\nSupt. Schools, Sandusky.\\nSimilar memorials have been received from the following gen\\ntlemen\\nSalem Town, LL. D.\\nPres. Lord, H.\\nPres. Bates, Vt.\\nRobert Vaux, Penn.\\nM. L. Brown, T.\\nM. S. Hawley, Mich.\\nJ. S. Dickson, Mich.\\nN. Brittan, Y.\\nJ. N. Smith, Iowa.\\nT. S. Bradley, Ohio.\\nA, D. Wright,\\nN. S. Scott, Y.\\ntsaae Clufton, 111.\\nAnd\\nF. A. Brigham, 111.\\nE, P. Barrows,\\nP. Hardy, H.\\nR. S. Howard, Mass.\\nE. Kingsbury,\\nE. Hall, Vt.\\nSlade, R. I.\\nJ. Alwood, Y.\\nJ. Estabrook, Mich.\\nA. D. Sturtevant, 111.\\nA. G. Wilder,\\nR. C. Corey, Ark.\\nC. B. Crumb,\\nover 500 others.", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0363.jp2"}, "364": {"fulltext": "24 The Students* Series.\\nThe Students Primer,\\nU\\nSpelling-book,\\nct ct\\nFirst Reader,\\nit u\\nSecond\\nu u\\nThird\\nU It\\nFourth\\nCC\\nFifth\\n(C\\nSpeaker,\\nThe Students Series.\\nBy J. S. Denmait, A. M.\\n7\\n13\\n13\\n25\\n40\\n75\\n94\\n31\\nThis series of books excels all others in the following particu-\\nlars\\n1. In the manner of teaching the alphabet and first principles\\nof Reading, as shown in the Primer, Speller, and First Reader.\\n2. In the beautiful classification and arrangement of the Speller,\\nby which pupils are easily taught to spell and pronounce words\\ncorrectly. By the aid of suffixes and prefixes, they learn to form\\nderivative words, and may obtain at the same time a correct\\nknowledge of their signification.\\n3. The child is taught to read by beginning with words of one\\nand two letters, and advancing gradually to longer words.\\n4. The Primer is so arranged that each word is used in spelling\\nbefore used in the Reading Lessons.\\n5. The First Reader contains lessons of one syllable, composed\\nof natural objects, such as birds, flowers, shrubs, c, that greatly\\ninterest children.\\n6. The same class of lessons in all the readers.\\n7. The lessons are peculiarly interesting and instructive.\\n8. The relation of one book to the other is very regular and\\nsystematic.\\n9. The judicious use of plates to embellish the books and illus-\\ntrate the text.\\n10. A judicious use of Questions, not so profuse as to embar-\\nrass the pupil, nor so few as to prevent the teacher from asking\\nthem.\\n11. The Print is very distinct and clear, from the large type in\\nthe Primer gradually diminishing to the common, ordinary type in\\ngeneral use.\\n12. The variety of style, and the variety of subjects.", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0364.jp2"}, "365": {"fulltext": "The Students 1 Series. 25\\n13. The adoption of Webster s Royal Quarto Dictionary as a\\nstandard in spelling.\\n14. In the sound moral tone pervading the whole series. No\\nextracts from novels no low and vulgar language has been al-\\nlowed to blacken their pages.\\nThe Author was lor a time the Editor of The Student, and\\nin that first produced the system on which these Readers is founded.\\nIt received such high encomiums that the Author thought best to\\nreproduce it in book form for schools. Hence the series of Stu-\\ndents Readers. Prof. Page, late Principal of the New York State\\nNormal School, said of this system, It is the ~best I ever saw for\\nteaching the first principles of Reading. Such testimony is of the\\nhighest value, and none need be afraid to use the books on such a\\nrecommendation.\\nWe present a very few names of the great number which have\\nbeen received.\\nRECOMMENDATIONS.\\nThe Students Series is, in my opinion, the best in use. I believe\\na class of young students will learn twice as much, with the same\\nlabor, as they would from any other system. The books of this\\nSeries excel in the purity and attraction of their style. I have in-\\ntroduced them. 0. B. Cbttmb, Y.\\nI am so well pleased with them, and find them so well adapted\\nto the wants of children, that I am determined to have them.\\nH. Sentee, III.\\nThe Students Series I think to be far superior to any extant.\\nS. O. Simonds, III.\\nYour Students Speller has been adopted by the School Board\\nof this city. J. R. Webb, Indianapolis.\\nI like your Students books well, and shall introduce them.\\nRev. M. S. Hawley, Mich.\\nI shall introduce the Students Speller. Send me several dozen.\\nO. A. Aeohee, Albany.\\nI think more of the Students Reading Books than any others\\nwith which I am acquainted. Iba Satles.\\nI will do all I can to introduce the Students Series of Books,\\nbelieving them to be the best for schools of any before the public.\\nJ. L. Enos, Wis.", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0365.jp2"}, "366": {"fulltext": "26 Kirkhain s Elocution.\\nI am highly pleased with the Students Series, and shall use my\\nexertions to introduce it as fast as possible.\\nJ. Meeeifield, r\\nConcurred in by Geo. 0. Meeeifield,\\nWe use the Students Books, and shall use no others.\\nE, Lane, iV.\\nI use the Speller. It is just the book.\\nW. M. James, Ga.\\nI am using the Students Readers, and like them so well that I\\nurged their introduction at Monroeville, where they are now used.\\nD. F. Dewolf, NOrwalk.\\nI have used the Students Speller, and am greatly pleased with\\nit. The Readers are excellent. N. B. Babkeb.\\nWe are using the Students Series, and like it better than any\\nother. A. Poetee, JV. Y.\\nWe use, and admire the Students Series.\\nJ. PoOLEB, T.\\nI have examined the Students Readers, and shall introduce\\nthem. P. J. Faeeington.\\nWe like the Students Books much. The Board has adopted\\nthem. B. Coon, Covington, Ky.\\nI have adopted the Students Speller.\\nOsoae Haeeis, N J.\\nWe have adopted the Students Series because we like it better\\nthan any other. A. L^ Bingham, Mich.\\nYour Students Books are introduced here, and are well liked.\\nProf. H. Wheelee, Greencastle, Ind.\\nWe have adopted the Students Speller.\\nDr. J. Nicholas, Kirtland.\\nThe Board of Education has adopted the Students Speller.\\nSend us five hundred. E. A. Saeldon, Syracuse.\\nKirkham s Elocution.\\nThis is one of the best Elocutions ever printed. It contains a\\nvaried and interesting selection of very useful matter, carefully ar-\\nranged. It is a standard work, and now used in some of the best\\nschools in the country; among which are the Normal School,\\nPhiladelphia Lower Canada College Toronto Academy, c.\\nLR8 C V", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0366.jp2"}, "367": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0367.jp2"}, "368": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0368.jp2"}, "369": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3541", "width": "2141", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0369.jp2"}, "370": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3518", "width": "2125", "jp2-path": "principlesofgree00bu_0370.jp2"}}